Samsung Camera & Camcorder Compact ES90 14.2MP Digital CameraFIND A PRODUCT SAMSUNG ES90 English Anglais - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM  - Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung

- Revenir à l'accueil

 

 

 

Description

Release Date descending

Language

Filedescending

User Manual 24 Jul, 2012 ENGLISH 18.83 MB
fileDown

http://www.samsung.com/uk/support/model/EC-ES90ZZBPRGB-downloads

COMMANDER un produit SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM 

 

Liste des manuels APPLEListe des produits Sony Liste des produits Dell Liste des Manuels Samsung Listes des Manuels Konica Minolta

Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X1B-NP900X1B-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0CFR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT50QMSW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46EH6030W-Manuels

Samsung-Home-Appliance-Side-by-Side-RSA1STMG-Arabe-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS59D6900DS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7C-NP700Z7C-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-Side-By-Side-RS6178UGDSR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-S730-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E590-Manuels

20ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6220FX-Samsung-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5100P-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Francais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT0BFR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-francais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-francais-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF5FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C520-Hello-Kitty-Open-marketS-GH-C520-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-Player-mini-2GT-C3310-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A06FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5C-NP700Z5C-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-Z360-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A856-LE46A856S1M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B620T2WXXC-LE40B620R3W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A568-LE40A568P3M-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ18FAN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22D450G1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D6200TS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-NL22B-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0BFR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A568-LE46A568P3M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE65ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-65-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE65ES8000S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-C6625-gris-Open-market-GT-C6625-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B8000WW-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Corby-Pro-rouge-Open-market-GT-B5310-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-SBS-A-507-L-Blanc-RSA1TWP-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D430DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A626-LE40A626A3M-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-GT-C3310-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C3520-GT-C3520-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrig%C3%A9rateur-SBS-A-510-L-Inox-RSH5TERS-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-mono-23L-SILVER-ME82V-Manuels*

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D503F7W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-RSA1DTMG-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-6900-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-C5530-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B300BL-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-D4200-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730C-NP-R730-JB03FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-R-mix-YP-R1JCP-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-P2470HD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J770-Open-market-SGH-J770-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Home-cinema-DVD-5.1-HT-D350WXZF-serie-3HT-D350-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-6200FX-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-Smart-Camera-WB850F-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP305V5AD-NP305V5A-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A456-PS50A456P2D-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6570WS-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-22-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T22A300-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-S2-YP-S2QB-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-24ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-2580N-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-3710ND-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5003BW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P2500-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Definition-Standard-5-MP-Ecran-LCD-2.7-6.86-cm-Camescope-SD-Samsung-F700-SMX-F700BP-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R710-NP-R710-ASS1FR-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL101-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A566P1M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46D550K1W-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH026FWEA-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV07PSBN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B850-PS50B850Y1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37D5000ZF-UE37D5000PW-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH300WHXES-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40ES5700S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-60-UE60D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE60D8000YS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D403E2W-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ST500-SAMSUNG-ST500-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5610-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-27-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T27A300-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1170-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40R86BD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C350-LE22C350D1W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J700-SGH-J700G-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-Gril-23L-SILVER-GS89F-1SPGS89F-1SP-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B5B-NP400B5B-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-12-5-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B2B-NP400B2B-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-RC-RC730-NP-RC730-S05FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-3405W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-RC-RC530-NP-RC530-S03FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5-ANP300E5A-S08FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-Lecteur-blu-ray-BD-D6900WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3DBD-D6900-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A568-LE37A568P3M-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-24-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T24A350-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-G600-Open-market-SGH-G600-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E650-ZF-Double-Dock-Bluetooth-3.0-USB-AUXDA-E650-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-QF20BP-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-PL90-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C550-LE32C550J1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE23R86BD-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450E1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A436T1D-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1151-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-P3YP-P3JCB-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique%20Multifonction-Monochrome-24ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4824FN-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1A-3G-XE700T1A-H01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-F250-Open-market-SGH-F250-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730-NP-R730-JA05FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26D4003BW-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-7-Gamer-700G7A-NP700G7A-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X3C-NP900X3C-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4.0-Blanc-8GoYP-G1CW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D470DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-MM-D470D-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Solid-B2100-rouge-Open-market-GT-B2100-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U3B-NP530U3B-A02FR-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Chat-335-gris-Open-market-GT-S3350-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-GT-S5690-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B530P7W-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF0702NBE-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D6750WWXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C7700-UE55C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-E8300-ZF-Enregistreur-Blu-Ray-320-Go-SMART-HUB-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-DVD-SH893-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Systeme-NX-NX100-14-6-MP-Ecran-7-6cm-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-365-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-305E5A-NP305E5A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-2-Gamme-Professionnelle-200A5B-NP200B5B-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Samsung-Q3YP-Q3CB-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-B3310bleu-Open-market-GT-B3310-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600B-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E250-Open-market-SGH-E250-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B350H-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S0BFR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES7000S-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-NP900X4D-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7CH-NP700Z7C-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z3A-NP700Z3A-S02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-SUR40-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6510WS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-300V3A-NP300V3A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-NC10-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2160-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R720E-NP-R720-JS03FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT07FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R620E-NP-R620-JS02FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32D5720RS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP550P5C-NP550P5C-T04FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D8000YS-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV515-NP-RV515-S04FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3DUE46ES6710S-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-2MP-Ecran-3-hVGA-Smart-Camera-Samsung-WB150F-SAMSUNG-WB150F-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG40EA590LS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E8200-ZF-Barre-de-son-Blu-Ray-3D-Bluetooth-HT-E8200-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-CE117PPT-Manuels

Samsung-TV-AV-3D-TV-TV-UN50ES6350F-Coree-du-Sud-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-19ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4200-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-32-32ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-770ND-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-320-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9000-RW8-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TC220W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9001-M8-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels-Mode-d-emploi

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE40C750-LE40C750R2W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-UE32ES5500W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A676-LE40A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46B651-LE46B651T3W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5010NW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi%203.6-Noir-8GoYP-GS1CB-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5000-ZF-LED-32-FULL-HD-UE32EH5000W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-blanc-SFR-GT-N7000-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7.0-Wi-FiGT-P3110-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7300-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-noir-SFRGT-N7000-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6900S-ZF-Slim-LED-50-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D6500VS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A676-LE32A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE55D6200TS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6540S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6750WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450E1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C530-LE40C530F1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6750WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B6000-UE40B6000VW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A556P1F-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6710-UE46C6710US-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C530-PS50C530C1W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U4B-NP530U4B-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-460DR-2-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME32B-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Samsung-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT41MASW-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P6800-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C24B550U-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-Lave-linge-EcoBubble-12kg-1400tours-WF1124XBC-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Ampli-Tuner-AV-HW-E551-ZF-Barre-de-son-Format-46-Convertible-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Phone-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF2FR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV24PSBN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37B6000VW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A466-LE40A466C2M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A676-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXDUH112EE-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651T3P-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-S5220GT-S5220-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59NBPN-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B750V-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME75B-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59PMSW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3Serie-9-900X3A-NP900X3A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME40B-Manuels

Samsung-SGH-D500-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels

Samsung-Table-induction-3-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN463NC01-CTN463NC01-XEF-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Refrigerateur-une-porte-Monochrome-Manuels

Samsung-UE40D6510WS-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2160-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME46B-Manuels

Samsung-LE37A466-LE37A466C2M-Manuels

Samsung-UE32EH4003W-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D460C9H-Manuels

Samsung-LE40B551A6W-Manuels

Samsung-Zephyr-AQV09YWAN-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels

Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels

Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels

SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels

Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels

Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels

Samsung-910MP-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels

Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels

Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels

Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels

Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels

Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels

Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels

Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels

Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels

Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels

Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels

Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels

Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels

Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels

Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel

Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels

Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels

Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels

Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels

Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels

Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels

Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels

Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels

Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels

Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels

Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels

Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels

Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels

17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels

40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels

CLX-3185FW Manuels

Galaxy Ace GT-S5830

Galaxy S II GT-I9100

Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16

Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16

Galaxy YGT-S5360

LE32C350 LE32C350D1W

LE40C630 LE40C630K1W

MM-C330D

MM-D330D

Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels

N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels

N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels

RSH5UEPN

SGH-F490

Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000

Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000

Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels

T23A550 T23A550

UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS

UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels

Wave 575 GT-S5750E

Wave II GT-S8530

16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung

16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung

samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels

Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels

PRODUITS SAMSUNG :
Belkin Chargeur Secteur pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Coque pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire Translucide
Belkin Etui cuir Verve Folio pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Belkin Etui Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir
Belkin Kit de Charge Secteur + Automobile pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Anti-reflets
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Transparentes
Belkin Micro-Chargeur allume-cigares pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Protection d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Confidentialité 360°
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung
Coque semi-rigide glossy noire pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Déclencheur sans Fil Hahnel combi TF pour Canon/Pentax/Samsung
Enceintes iLuv iSM524 noir pour Samsung Galaxy Tab
Etui-Brassard Belkin DualFit pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Etui Samsung CC9S70B noir
Fnac chargeur secteur POWY pour Samsung SGH-D800
G-Mobility Pack confort pour Samsung Galaxy SII i9100
Imprimante Samsung CLX-3185FN - Ethernet
Kensington Etui pliant pour Samsung Galaxy Tab
Le Tanneur Etui cuir Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S11 I9100 - Noir
Lunettes 3D actives Samsung SSG-4100GB
Modelabs 2 protections écran pour Samsung Galaxy ACE S5830
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran One Touch pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Transparentes
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Transparentes
Muvit Adaptateur Jack 3,5 mm pour Samsung (ancienne connectique)
Muvit Coque à rabat Agenda pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Noire
Muvit Coque Doodle Coeur pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque Doodle Extraterrestres pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque Doodle Rose pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy Ace
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire
Muvit Etui Clapet pour Samsung I9100 - Noir
Muvit Etui Slim Clapet pour Samsung Galaxy Note
Muvit Housse Minigel pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung nexus S - 1 Miroir/1 Secret
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung S5830
Muvit Pack Accessoires pour Samsung S5830
Muvit Sticker Carbone pour Samsung I9100
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Ibiza
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love London
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love New-York
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Paris
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Tokyo
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - United Kingdom
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - USA
QDOS Coque Cubic pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100
QDOS Coque Steel 4 pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD
Samsung B5722 Double SIM
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles
Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310
Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB
Samsung batterie IA-BP420E
Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST
Samsung batterie SLB-10A
Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS
Samsung BD-E5300
Samsung BD-E5500 3D
Samsung BD-E6100 3D
Samsung BD-E8300 3D
Samsung BD-ES5000
Samsung BD-ES6000 3D
Samsung C3050 Stratus
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100
Samsung CB20A12
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung CLP-C300A
Samsung CLP-K300A
Samsung CLP-M300A
Samsung CLP-Y300A
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Noire
Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 512 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Sennheiser RS170
Samsung DP7000A3B-A01FR 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0
Samsung DP700A3B-S02FR 23" LED Tactile
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi + Etui
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi + Etui
Samsung E1150 - Silver
Samsung ES90 Noir
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir
Samsung Etui coque pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Noir
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir
Samsung Etui rabat pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung EX1
Samsung Flash SEF15A
Samsung Flash SEF20A
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Note
Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Note - Dark Blue
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Blanc Marbre
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Bleu Galet
Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 16 Go
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi + HP Housse Mini Sleeve 10,2" pour Netbook et Tablette - Ocean Drive
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Noir Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Argent
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 7.0" LED 8 Go
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Android)
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir
Samsung Graveur Externe BluRay SE-506AB
Samsung HMX-F80 Noir
Samsung HMX-Q20 Noir
Samsung HMX-QF20 Noir
Samsung HMX-W350 Noir (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go
Samsung HMX-W350 Rouge (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung HT-D330
Samsung HT-D350
Samsung HT-D4500
Samsung HT-D5000 3D
Samsung HT-E4200 3D
Samsung HT-E4500 3D
Samsung HT-E5200 3D
Samsung HT-E5530 3D
Samsung HT-ES4200 3D
Samsung HT-ES6200 3D
Samsung HT-ES8200 3D
Samsung HW-E350
Samsung HW-E450
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm
Samsung LE32E420
Samsung LE40D503
Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500
Samsung ML-2010D3
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung MLT-D1052S
Samsung MLT-D1082S
Samsung MLT-D1092S
Samsung MM-D430D
Samsung MM-E320
Samsung MV800 Noir
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir
Samsung NP300E7A-S09FR 17,3" LED
Samsung NP700Z5C 15.6" LED
Samsung NP-RC730-S07FR 17.3"LED
Samsung NX1000 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung NX 50 - 200 mm f/4.0 - 5.6 ED OIS II i-Fonction; Dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100
Samsung Pack HMX-F800 Noir : Caméscope HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go
Samsung Pack HMX-Q200 Noir : Caméscope Full HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go
Samsung PC portable NP300E5A-S0AFR 15.6"LED
Samsung PL210 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante
Samsung PS43E450
Samsung PS43E490 3D
Samsung PS43E490 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung PS51E450
Samsung PS51E490 3D
Samsung PS51E530
Samsung Q3 noir 4 Go
Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go
Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes
Samsung S19A100N Moniteur 18,5" - Flat Panel Display
Samsung S22B150N 21,5" LED
Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED
Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D
Samsung S23B350H 23" LED
Samsung S23B550V Moniteur 23" LED
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED
Samsung S27B350H 27" LED
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi
Samsung SCX-4200A
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0
Samsung SE-218BB graveur DVD externe ultra slim USB 2.0
Samsung SLB07A pour ST50
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000
Samsung ST200F Noir - WiFi
Samsung ST200F Rouge - WiFi
Samsung ST200F Violet - WiFi
Samsung ST65 Noir
Samsung ST65 Rouge
Samsung ST66 Noir
Samsung ST77 Blanc
Samsung ST77 Noir
Samsung ST77 Rouge
Samsung ST77 Violet
Samsung ST88 Noir
Samsung station d'accueil
Samsung station d'accueil HD2
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX
Samsung T22A300 21.5" Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T22B300EW 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T24B301 24" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T27A550 27" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir
Samsung UE19ES4000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5410 LED
Samsung UE26EH4000 LED
Samsung UE26EH4500 LED
Samsung UE32EH4000 LED
Samsung UE32EH5000 LED
Samsung UE32ES5500 LED
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE37ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40D5000 LED
Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D
Samsung UE40EH5000 LED
Samsung UE40ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D
Samsung UE46EH5000 LED
Samsung UE46ES5500 LED
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE46ES8000 LED 3D
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE60ES6100 LED 3D
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" - Aluminium + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium+ Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Marron
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Rose
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10
Samsung Wave 575
Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi
Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi
Samsung WB690 Noir
Samsung WB700 Noir
Samsung WB850F Noir - WiFi - GPS
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale
Samsung XE700T1A-A02FR 11,6" 64 Go SSD
Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose
Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go
Samyang 14 mm f/2.8 Aspherical IF ED UMC; Monture Samsung NX
Samyang 35 mm f/1.4 AS UMC; Monture Samsung NX
Samyang Fish-eye 8 mm f/3.5 Aspherical IF MC; Monture Samsung Type NX
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go + Casque weSC Conga Matte noir
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 8 Go
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 5" 8 Go
T'nB Coque Clip On pour Samsung Galaxy SII - New York
Toner Samsung CLT-C4072S - Cyan
Toner Samsung CLT-C4092S Cyan
Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S - Noir
Toner Samsung CLT-K4092S Noir
Toner Samsung CLT-M4072S - Magenta
Toner Samsung CLT-M4092S Magenta
Toner Samsung CLT-P4092C - Pack de 4 Toners
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4072S - Jaune
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4092S Jaune
Toner Samsung MLT-D1042S - Noir
We Digital by Samsung - Silver We 1 To USB 2.0
We Digital by Samsung - Silver WE 2 To USB 2.0
Xqisit Coque iPlate Glossy pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Blanche
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Noire
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanc
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir

Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir

Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U

Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B

SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste

Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu

Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD

Samsung B5722 Double SIM

Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles

Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310

Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB

Samsung batterie IA-BP420E

Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST

Samsung batterie SLB-10A

Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS

Samsung BD-E5300

Samsung BD-E5500 3D

Samsung BD-E8300 3D

Samsung C3050 Stratus

Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"

Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung

Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX

Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100

Samsung CB20A12

Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir

Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB

Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir

Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung CLP-C300A

Samsung CLP-K300A

Samsung CLP-M300A

Samsung CLP-Y300A

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet

Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S

Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series

Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX

Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose

Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi

Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi

Samsung E1150 - Silver

Samsung E2550

Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur

Samsung ES30 Noir

Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go

Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir

Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir

Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir

Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Flash SEF15A

Samsung Flash SEF20A

Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)

Samsung Galaxy Note

Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G

Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67

Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung HT-D330

Samsung HT-D350

Samsung HT-D423

Samsung HT-D4500

Samsung HT-D5000 3D

Samsung HT-E4200 3D

Samsung HT-E4500 3D

Samsung HT-E5200 3D

Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi

Samsung HW-E450

Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)

Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220

Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm

Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm

Samsung LE40D550

Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir

Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB

SAMSUNG ME106V-SX

Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction

SAMSUNG ME82V-SX

SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002

Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500

Samsung ML-2010D3

Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi

Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung MLT-D1052S

Samsung MLT-D1082S

Samsung MLT-D1092S

Samsung MM-D430D

Samsung MV800 Noir

Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir

Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED

Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED

Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200

Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100

Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S

Samsung PL170 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go

Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge

Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal

Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir

Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante

Samsung PS43D450

Samsung PS43E450

Samsung PS43E490 3D

Samsung PS51E450

Samsung PS51E490 3D

Samsung PS59D530

Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go

Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED

Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED

Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes

Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT

Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED

Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D

Samsung S23B350H 23" LED

Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED

Samsung S27B350H 27" LED

Samsung SC4340 noir ébène

Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge

Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi

Samsung SCX-4200A

Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0

Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0

Samsung SLB07A pour ST50

Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000

Samsung ST65 Noir

Samsung ST65 Rouge

Samsung station d'accueil

Samsung station d'accueil HD2

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR

Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED

Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED

Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D

Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED

Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD

Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX

Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT

Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir

Samsung UE19D4010 LED

Samsung UE19ES4000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5410 LED

Samsung UE26EH4000 LED

Samsung UE26EH4500 LED

Samsung UE32D5000 LED

Samsung UE32EH4000 LED

Samsung UE32EH5000 LED

Samsung UE32ES5500 LED

Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE40D5000 LED

Samsung UE40D5710 LED

Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D

Samsung UE40EH5000 LED

Samsung UE40ES5500 LED

Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D

Samsung UE46EH5000 LED

Samsung UE46ES5500 LED

Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10

Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi

Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi

Samsung WB700 Noir

Samsung WB750 Noir

Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter

Samsung WMN250M accroche murale

Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose

Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go

http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP400B5B-S02FR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/BD-C8500/XEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201004/20100405125800515/01960B-BD-C8200_8500-XEF-FRA-0323.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/MM-D470D/ZF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120103150428464/AH68-02345F-MM-D470D-FRA-20120103.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP200B5B-A01FR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP300V3A-A01FR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-N7000ZBESFR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120809172648710/GT-N7000_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120716_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120611165201603/GT-P3110_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120608_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-N7000RWASFR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201203/20120329200748757/GT-N7000_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.1_120126_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216180827802/GT-N7000_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.1_111104_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120809173956440/GT-P7510_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120809_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111205085630494/GT-P7510_UM_Orange_Honeycomb_Fre_Rev.1.0_111202_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120713085451049/GT-P7510_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-P7510FKAXEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120802111559199/GT-I9070P_UM_Orange_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120629_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120517111406195/GT-I9070P_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.0_120510_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120802111559199/GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120424154452484/GT-P3100_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120424_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201209/20120917105131603/GT-P3100_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120801_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-P5110TSAXEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120810190309322/GT-P5110_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120808_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120614144504602/GT-P5110_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120614_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I5800DKABOG-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201008/20100809184447671/GT-I5800_UM_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_100722_cms.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201009/20100907222536765/GT-I5800_QSG_Open_Eng_Rev.1.1_100907a_cms.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110525183942011/GT-I5800_QSG_EU_Froyo_Eng_UK_Rev.1.1_110525_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110525175249448/GT-I5800_QSG_EU_Froyo_Eng_Rev.1.1_110525_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201105/20110530173657729/GT-I5800_UM_Open_Froyo_Fre_Rev.1.1_110527_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I9001HKDFTM-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111212155049797/GT-I9001_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.3_111212_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LF22TOWHBDN/EN-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201211/20121102145205481/BN68-03899A-04.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121108171138109/BN46-00315A-Fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121108171138109/BN46-00315A-Eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP550P5C-T04FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121113125618982/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121113125618982/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE32D5720RSXZF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110517143435031/[UD5700-XN]BN68-03506F-03L04-0427.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216084511364/Web_W_X6DVBEUA_Fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216084511364/Web_W_X6DVBEUA_Eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I9000RWYSFR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE55D8000YSXZF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120128101809663/02_FRA_GPDVBEUA-0106.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120128101809663/01_ENG_GPDVBEUA-0106.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201203/20120314192959318/[UD8000-XN]BN68-03442T-00L04-0804.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120405165711377/2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE46ES6710SXZF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120405165711377/2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121110095845360/02-XTDVBEUE-FRA-1109.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121110095845360/01-XTDVBEUE-ENG-1109.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120712095934377/2012_Skype_FRA-0424.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120712095934377/2012_Skype_ENG-0424.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-RV515-S04FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/CD/201104/20110408115840622/DoC160-RV515-RV415-Scala2-15-14-AMD.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026202221731/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026202221731/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP900X4D-A01FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121028112443918/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121028112443918/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP350E7C-S0BFR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121022141232121/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121022141232121/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120518170921365/EN/english.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/DR/201205/20120521130845677/FR/french.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/ML-2160/SEE-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201203/20120322160533913/BN68-03304C-00.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120622172918410/BN46-00030A-Fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120622172918410/BN46-00030A-Eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE55C7700WSXZF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120502130400267/02230C-01-BD-E8900-ZF-0413.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120502130543045/Smart_Hub-FRA-0309.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120502133933796/AllShare-FRA-0221.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201004/20100426150918218/7Series_Power_consumption_LED_TV.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201005/20100529095515140/BN68-02590B-03L04-0518.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP700G7A-S01FR http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP305E5A-A01FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026193501356/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200904/20090428183905421/YPP3J-COMMON-ENGLISH3.0.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200904/20090407081834937/YPP3J-02154C-XEF-QG1.0-NOCD.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200904/20090428183905421/YPP3J-EUROPE-FRENCH3.0.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201005/20100504091945781/GT-E1151_UM_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_100311.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201003/20100324124741578/BN68-02592F-01L04_0316.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200805/20080520175711468_BN68-01409H-01L02-0429.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200805/20080530182204609_Pearl-France-01409H-Eng-0530.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LT24A350EW/EN-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP300E5A-S08FR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE22C350D1WXZF-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE40R86BDX/XEC-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200703/20070322190622750_BN68-01169B-01L08-0313.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE40ES5700SXZF-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LT22A300EW/EN-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-U600HBAXEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200803/20080318192114953_SGH-U600_Eng.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200903/20090312154510796/SGH-U600_French_090311_Rev1.3.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200904/20090410095951906/SGH-U600_UG_090311_Rev1.3.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP305V5A-S02FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120420172612547/WB850F-CE_DoC_in_French.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/AQ18FAN-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200703/20070308174715062_FORTE_DB98-27531A_IB_F.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE40B620R3WXXC-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200909/20090925093818484/BN68-02098D-01Eng-0909.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-Z360ZSAFTM-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200801/20080108134949406_SGH-Z360_UG_ORA_Fre_Rev.1.1_061123.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/EK-GC100ZWAXEF-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP900X4D-A02FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP700Z7C-S02FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121028112443918/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-RC710-S02FR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-E590NSAXEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200706/20070627104827281_SGH-E590_UG_Eng_Rev.1.1_070622.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/RS6178UGDSR/EF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201203/20120316175747467/DA99-01779L.pdf https://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP300E7A-S0CFR-downloads http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/RT50QMSW1/XEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121119193716527/DA99-01906C_v0.6.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE46EH6030WXZF-downloads http://www.samsung.com/sg/support/model/GT-I9300RWDXSP-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121117090011154/GT-I9300_UM_EU_Jellybean_Eng_Rev.1.1_121113_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121122102418917/GT-I9300_UM_SEA_Jellybean_Chi_Rev.1.1_121116_Screen.pdf

ES90/ES91 This user manual includes detailed usage instructions for your camera. Please read this manual thoroughly. Click a topic Basic Troubleshooting Quick reference Contents Basic functions Extended functions Shooting options Playback/Editing Settings Appendixes Index 1 Health and safety information Always comply with the following precautions and usage tips to avoid dangerous situations and ensure peak performance of your camera. Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Do not disassemble or attempt to repair your camera. This may result in electric shock or damage to the camera. Do not use your camera near flammable or explosive gases and liquids. This may cause a fire or explosion. Do not insert flammable materials into the camera or store these materials near the camera. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not handle your camera with wet hands. This may result in electric shock. Prevent damage to subjects’ eyesight. Do not use the flash in close proximity (closer than 1 m/3 ft) to people or animals. If you use the flash too close to your subject’s eyes, this can cause temporary or permanent eyesight damage. Keep your camera away from small children and pets. Keep your camera and all accessories out of the reach of small children and animals. Small parts may cause choking or serious injury if swallowed. Moving parts and accessories may present physical dangers as well. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight or high temperatures for an extended period of time. Prolonged exposure to sunlight or extreme temperatures can cause permanent damage to your camera’s internal components. Avoid covering the camera or charger with blankets or clothes. The camera may over-heat, which may distort the camera or cause a fire. Do not handle the power supply cord or go near the charger during a thunderstorm. This may result in electric shock. If liquid or foreign objects enter your camera, immediately disconnect all power sources, such as the battery or charger, and then contact a Samsung service center. 2 Health and safety information Caution—situations that could cause damage to your camera or other equipment Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period of time. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. Do not damage or heat the battery. This may cause a fire or personal injuries. Use only Samsung-approved batteries, chargers, cables and accessories. • Unauthorized batteries, chargers, cables or accessories can cause batteries to explode, damage your camera, or cause injury. • Samsung is not responsible for damages or injuries caused by unapproved batteries, chargers, cables or accessories. Do not use batteries for unintended purposes. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not touch the flash while it fires. The flash is very hot when fired and may burn your skin. When you use AC charger, turn off the camera before you disconnect the power to the AC charger. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Disconnect chargers from power sources when not in use. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Do not use a damaged power supply cord, plug, or loose outlet when you charge batteries. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not allow the AC charger to come in contact with the +/- terminals on the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. 3 Check that the camera is operating properly before use. The manufacturer takes no responsibility for any loss of files or damage that may result from camera malfunction or improper use. You must plug the end of the cable with the arrow mark( ) into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Do not force the camera’s parts or apply pressure to the camera. This may cause your camera to malfunction. Exercise caution when you connect cables or adapters and install batteries and memory cards. If you force the connectors, improperly connect cables, or improperly install batteries and memory cards, you can damage ports, connectors, and accessories. Keep your cards with magnetic strips away from the camera case. Information stored on the card may be damaged or erased. Never use a damaged charger, battery, or memory card. This may result in electric shock or camera malfunction or cause a fire. Health and safety information 4 Copyright information • Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. • Mac is a registered trademark of the Apple Corporation. • microSD™ and microSDHC™ are registered trademarks of the SD Association. • Trademarks and trade names used in this manual are the property of their respective owners. • Camera specifications or contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of camera functions. • Use this camera responsibly and adhere to all laws and regulations concerning its use. • You are not allowed to reuse or distribute any part of this manual without prior permission. Organization of the user manual Basic functions 11 Learn about your camera’s layout, icons, and basic functions for shooting. Extended functions 26 Learn how to take a photo by selecting a mode and how to record a video or voice memo. Shooting options 37 Learn about the options you can set in shooting mode. Playback/Editing 55 Learn how to play back photos, videos, or voice memos and edit photos or videos. You will also learn how to connect your camera to your photo printer or TV. Settings 76 Refer to options to configure your camera’s settings. Appendixes 82 Refer to error messages, specifications, and maintenance tips. 5 Icons used in this manual Icon Function Additional information Safety warnings and precautions [ ] Camera buttons; for example: [Shutter] represents the shutter button. ( ) Page number of related information → The order of options or menus you must select to perform a step. For example: Select Shooting → White Balance represents select Shooting, and then select White Balance. * Annotation Abbreviations used in this manual Abbreviation Definition ACB Auto Contrast Balance AEB Auto Exposure Bracket AF Auto Focus DIS Digital Image Stabilization DPOF Digital Print Order Format EV Exposure Value ISO International Organization for Standardization WB White Balance Indications used in this manual Shooting mode Indication Smart Auto Program DIS Scene Movie Shooting mode icons These icons indicate that a function is available in the corresponding modes. The mode may not support functions for all scenes. e.g.) Available in the Program, DIS, and Movie modes 6 Pressing the shutter • Half-press [Shutter]: Press the shutter halfway down. • Press [Shutter]: Press the shutter all the way down. Half-press [Shutter] Press [Shutter] Subject, background, and composition • Subject: The main object of a scene, such as a person, animal, or still life. • Background: The objects around the subject. • Composition: The combination of a subject and background. Background Subject Composition Exposure (Brightness) The amount of light that enters your camera determines the exposure. You can alter the exposure with shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed. By altering the exposure, your photos will be darker or lighter. Normal exposure Overexposure (too bright) Expressions used in this manual 7 Basic Troubleshooting You can get answers to common questions. Solve problems easily by setting shooting options. The subject's eyes appear red. This is caused by a reflection from the camera flash. • Set the flash option to Red-eye or Red-eye Fix. (p. 41) • If the photo has already been taken, select Red-eye Fix in the edit menu. (p. 66) Photos have dust spots. Dust particles floating in the air may be captured in photos when using the flash. • Turn off the flash or avoid taking photos in a dusty place. • Set ISO speed options. (p.42) Photos are blurred. This may be caused by taking photos in low light conditions or holding the camera incorrectly. • Press [Shutter] halfway down to make sure the subject is focused. (p. 24) • Use the mode. (p. 30) Photos are blurred when shooting at night. As the camera tries to let in more light, the shutter speed slows. This can make it difficult to steady the camera and may result in camera shake. • Turn on the flash. (p. 41) • Set ISO speed options. (p. 42) • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. • Select Night in the mode. (p. 33) Subjects come out too dark because of backlighting. When the light source is behind the subject or when there is a high contrast between the light and dark areas, the subject may come out shaded. • Avoid shooting with the sun behind your subject. • Select Backlight in the mode. (p. 31) • Set the flash option to Fill in. (p. 41) • Set the Auto Contrast Balance (ACB) option. (p. 49) • Adjust the exposure. (p. 49) • Set the metering option to Spot if a bright subject is in the center of the frame. (p. 50) 8 Quick reference Taking photos of people • mode > Beauty Shot  31 • mode > Portrait  31 • Red-eye, Red-eye Fix (to prevent or correct red-eye)  41 • Face Detection  46 Taking photos at night or in the dark • mode > Night  33 • mode > Sunset, Dawn, Fireworks  31 • Flash options  41 • ISO speed (to adjust the sensitivity to light)  42 Taking action photos • Continuous, Motion Capture  52 Taking photos of text, insects, or flowers • mode > Close Up, Text  31 • Macro, Auto Macro (to take close-up photos)  43 • White Balance (to change the color tone)  50 Adjusting the exposure (brightness) • EV (to adjust exposure)  49 • ACB (to compensate for subjects against bright backgrounds)  49 • Metering  50 • AEB (to take three photos of the same scene with different exposures)  52 Applying a different effect • Photo styles (to apply tones)  53 • Image adjust (to adjust saturation, sharpness, or contrast)  54 Reducing camera shake • mode  30 • Viewing files by category in Smart Album  57 • Deleting all files on the memory card  60 • Viewing files as a slide show  61 • Viewing files on a TV  68 • Connecting your camera to a computer  69 • Adjusting sound and volume  78 • Adjusting the brightness of the display  78 • Changing the display language  79 • Setting the date and time  79 • Formatting the memory card  79 • Before contacting a service center  92 9 Contents Health and safety information Basic Troubleshooting Quick reference Contents Recording voice memos ............................................. 36 Recording a voice memo ............................................ 36 Adding a voice memo to a photo ................................. 36 Shooting options ............................................................ 37 Selecting a resolution and quality ............................... 38 Selecting a resolution .................................................. 38 Selecting image quality ............................................... 38 Using the timer ............................................................ 39 Shooting in the dark ................................................... 41 Preventing red-eye ..................................................... 41 Using the flash ........................................................... 41 Adjusting the ISO speed ............................................. 42 Changing the camera’s focus ..................................... 43 Using macro .............................................................. 43 Using auto focus ........................................................ 43 Using tracking auto focus ............................................ 44 Adjusting the focus area .............................................. 45 Using face detection ................................................... 46 Detecting faces .......................................................... 46 Taking a self-portrait shot ............................................. 47 Taking a smile shot ..................................................... 47 Detecting eye blinking ................................................. 48 Adjusting brightness and color ................................... 49 Adjusting the exposure manually (EV) ........................... 49 Compensating for backlighting (ACB) ........................... 49 Changing the metering option ...................................... 50 Selecting a White Balance Setting ............................... 50 Basic functions ............................................................... 11 Unpacking ................................................................... 12 Camera layout ............................................................. 13 Inserting the battery and memory card ....................... 15 Charging the battery and turning your camera on ...... 16 Charging the battery ................................................... 16 Turning on your camera .............................................. 16 Performing the initial setup ......................................... 17 Learning icons ............................................................. 18 Selecting options ......................................................... 19 Setting the display and sound .................................... 21 Changing the display type ........................................... 21 Setting the sound ....................................................... 21 Taking photos .............................................................. 22 Zooming .................................................................... 23 Tips for getting a clearer photo ................................... 24 Extended functions ........................................................ 26 Using the Smart Auto mode ........................................ 27 Using the Program mode ............................................ 29 Using the DIS mode .................................................... 30 Using the Scene mode ................................................ 31 Using the Beauty Shot mode ....................................... 31 Using the frame guide ................................................. 32 Using the long time shutter in the Night mode ............... 33 Recording a video ....................................................... 34 10 Contents Using burst modes ...................................................... 52 Improving your photos ................................................ 53 Applying photo styles .................................................. 53 Adjusting your photos ................................................. 54 Playback/Editing ............................................................. 55 Playing back ................................................................ 56 Starting Playback mode .............................................. 56 Viewing photos .......................................................... 60 Playing a video ........................................................... 62 Playing voice memos .................................................. 63 Editing a photo ............................................................ 64 Resizing photos ......................................................... 64 Rotating a photo ......................................................... 64 Applying photo styles .................................................. 65 Correcting exposure problems .................................... 66 Creating a print order (DPOF) ....................................... 67 Viewing files on a TV ................................................... 68 Transferring files to your Windows computer ............. 69 Transferring files using Intelli-studio ............................... 70 Transferring files by connecting the camera as a removable disk ........................................................... 72 Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) ................. 73 Transferring files to your Mac computer ..................... 74 Printing photos with a PictBridge photo printer ......... 75 Settings ........................................................................... 76 Camera settings menu ................................................ 77 Accessing the settings menu ...................................... 77 Sound ....................................................................... 78 Display ...................................................................... 78 Settings ..................................................................... 79 Appendixes ..................................................................... 82 Error messages ........................................................... 83 Camera maintenance .................................................. 84 Cleaning your camera ................................................. 84 Using or storing the camera ........................................ 85 About memory cards .................................................. 86 About the battery ........................................................ 88 Before contacting a service center ............................. 92 Camera specifications ................................................. 95 Glossary ....................................................................... 98 FCC notice ................................................................. 102 Index .......................................................................... 103Unpacking ………………………………… 12 Camera layout ……………………………… 13 Inserting the battery and memory card … 15 Charging the battery and turning your camera on …………………………………… 16 Charging the battery ……………………… 16 Turning on your camera ………………… 16 Performing the initial setup ……………… 17 Learning icons ……………………………… 18 Selecting options …………………………… 19 Setting the display and sound …………… 21 Changing the display type ………………… 21 Setting the sound ………………………… 21 Taking photos ……………………………… 22 Zooming ………………………………… 23 Tips for getting a clearer photo …………… 24 Basic functions Learn about your camera’s layout, icons, and basic functions for shooting.Basic functions 12 Unpacking Check your product box for the following items. Camera Rechargeable battery AC adapter/ USB cable Strap Quick Start Manual • The illustrations may differ slightly from the items shipped with your product. • Purchase Samsung-approved optional items that are compatible with your camera at the service center or the store where you purchased your camera. We are not responsible for any damages caused by using items from other manufacturers. Optional accessories Camera case Memory card A/V cable Battery charger Memory card/ Memory card adapterBasic functions 13 Camera layout Before you start, familiarize yourself with your camera's parts and their functions. Battery chamber cover Insert a memory card and battery Tripod mount Shutter button POWER button AF-assist light/ Flash timer lamp Speaker Lens Microphone USB and A/V port Accepts USB cable or A/V cableBasic functions 14 Camera layout Button Description Access options or menus Navigation In Shooting mode While setting Change the display option Move up Change the macro option Move down Change the flash option Move left Change the timer option Move right Confirm the highlighted option or menu Playback Enter Playback mode Function • Access options in Shooting mode • Delete files in Playback mode Status lamp • Blinking: When the camera is saving a photo or video, being read by a computer or printer, when the image is out of focus, or there is a problem charging the battery. • Green: When the camera is connecting to a computer or in focus • Red: Charging the battery Display Zoom button • Zoom in or out in Shooting mode. • Zoom in on part of a photo or view files as thumbnails in Playback mode. • Adjust volume in Playback mode. MODE button: Open the list of shooting modes Icon Mode Description Smart Auto The camera automatically selects settings based on a the type of scene (Night, Portrait, Sunset, etc.) it detects. Program Take a photo by setting options DIS The camera activates options that reduce camera shake. Scene Take a photo with options preset for a specific scene (Landscape, Portrait, Forest, etc.). Movie Record a video. 2 1Basic functions 15 Inserting the battery and memory card Learn to insert the battery and an optional memory card into the camera. Removing the battery and memory card Push the card gently until the card disengages from the camera, and then pull it out of the slot. Push the lock down to release the battery. Using the memory card adapter To use micro memory cards with this product, a PC, or a memory card reader, insert the card into an adapter. • You can use the internal memory for temporary storage if a memory card is not inserted. • Insert a memory card in the correct direction. Inserting a memory card in the wrong direction may damage your camera and memory card. Memory card Battery Insert a memory card with the gold-colored contacts facing down. Insert the battery with the Samsung logo facing down. Memory card Battery Battery lock Basic functions 16 Charging the battery and turning your camera on Charging the battery Before using the camera for the first time, you must charge the battery. Attach the USB cable to the AC adapter, and then plug the end of cable with the arrow mark ( ) into your camera. Turning on your camera Press [ ] to turn your camera on or off. • The initial setup screen appears when you turn on the camera for the first time. (p. 17) Turning on your camera in Playback mode Press [ ]. The camera turns on and accesses Playback mode immediately. When you turn on your camera by pressing and holding [ ] for about 3 seconds, the camera does not emit any camera sounds. Status Lamp • Red light on: Charging • Red light off: Fully charged • Red light blinking: ErrorBasic functions 17 Performing the initial setup The initial setup screen appears to allow you to configure the camera's basic settings. 1 Press [ ]. • The initial setup screen appears when you turn on the camera for the first time. 2 Press [ ] to select Language and press [ ] or [ ]. Back Set 3 Press [ ] or [ ] to select a language and press [ ]. 4 Press [ ] or [ ] to scroll to Time Zone and press [ ] or [ ]. 5 Press [ ] or [ ] to select a time zone and press [ ]. • To set the daylight-saving time, press [ ]. Back London DST Time Zone 6 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Date/Time Set and press [ ] or [ ]. 7 Press [ ] or [ ] to select an item. Language : Eng... Time Zone : Lon... Date/Time Set : 12/... Back Set 8 Press [ ] or [ ] to set the date and time and press [ ]. 9 Press [ ] or [ ] to select Date Type and press [ ] or [ ]. Language : Eng... Time Zone : Lon... Date/Time Set Date Type Back Set 10 Press [ ] or [ ] to select a date format and press [ ]. 11 Press [ ] to switch to the Shooting mode. YYYY/MM/DD MM/DD/YYYY DD/MM/YYYY OffBasic functions 18 C. Icons on the left Icon Description Aperture and shutter speed Long time shutter Exposure value White balance Face tone Face retouch ISO speed Photo style Image adjustment (contrast, sharpness, saturation) Voice muted (Zoom mute) Burst type Learning icons The icons displayed will change according to the mode you select or the options you set. Icon Description Auto focus frame Camera shake Zoom ratio Current date and time B. Icons on the right Icon Description Photo resolution Video resolution Frame rate Photo quality Metering option Flash option Timer option Auto focus option Face detection A. Information Icon Description Selected shooting mode Available number of photos Available recording time Memory card is not inserted Memory card inserted • : Fully charged • : Partially charged • : Charging needed Voice memo (On) A B CBasic functions 19 Selecting options You can select options by pressing [ ], and then using the navigation buttons ([ ], [ ], [ ], [ ]). You can also access shooting options by pressing [ ], but some options are not available. Going back to the previous menu Press [ ] again to go back to the previous menu. Half-press [Shutter] to return to the Shooting mode. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Use the navigation buttons to scroll to an option or menu. • To move up or down, press [ ] or [ ]. • To move left or right, press [ ] or [ ]. 3 Press [ ] to confirm the highlighted option or menu.Basic functions 20 Selecting options 5 Press [ ] or [ ] to scroll to White Balance, and then press [ ] or [ ]. Photo Size Quality EV ISO White Balance Face Detection Focus Area Exit Back 6 Press [ ] or [ ] to scroll to a White Balance option. Daylight Back Move 7 Press [ ]. Example: Selecting a White Balance option in the mode 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Press [ ] or [ ] to scroll to Program, and then press [ ]. Smart Auto Program DIS Scene Movie This mode allows you to directly set various features for shooting. 3 Press [ ]. Shooting Sound Display Settings Photo Size Quality EV ISO White Balance Face Detection Focus Area Exit Change 4 Press [ ] or [ ] to scroll to Shooting, and then press [ ] or [ ].Basic functions 21 Setting the display and sound Learn how to change the basic display and sound settings. Setting the sound Set whether your camera emits a specified sound when you operate your camera. 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Sound → Beep Sound → an option. Options Description Off The camera does not emit any sounds. 1/2/3 The camera emits one of three sounds, depending on the option you select. Changing the display type Select a display type for Shooting or Playback mode. Each type displays different shooting or playback information. Press [ ] repeatedly to change a display type. Show all photographic information. Modes Display Type Choices Shooting • Display all information about shooting • Hide information about shooting, except the available number of photos (or available recording time) and the battery icon Playback • Display all information about the current photo • Hide all information about the current file • Display information about the current file, except the shooting settings and captured dateBasic functions 22 Taking photos Learn how to take photos easily and quickly in the Smart Auto mode. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Press [ ] or [ ] to scroll to Smart Auto, and then press [ ]. Smart Auto Program DIS Scene Movie This mode recognizes the scene automatically. 3 Align your subject in the frame. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus. • A green frame means the subject in focus. • A red frame means the subject is out of focus. 5 Press [Shutter] to take a photo. See page 24 for tips to get clearer photos.Basic functions 23 Taking photos Digital zoom If the zoom indicator is in the digital range, your camera is using the digital zoom. The picture quality may deteriorate when you use the digital zoom. Digital range Optical range Zoom indicator • The digital zoom is not available when you use Face Detection options or Tracking AF option. • If you capture a photo with the Digital zoom, the photo quality may deteriorate. Zooming You can shoot close-up photos by adjusting the zoom. Your camera has a 5X optical zoom and 3X digital zoom. By using both, you can zoom in up to 15 times. Press [Zoom] right to zoom in on your subject. Press [Zoom] left to zoom out. Zoom out Zoom in Zoom ratio • Zoom is not available if the focus is set to Macro. • The zoom ratio appearing on the screen changes nonlinearly and may differ slightly from the actual zoom ratio.Basic functions 24 Tips for getting a clearer photo Holding your camera correctly Make sure nothing is blocking the lens. Half-pressing the shutter button Half-press [Shutter] and adjust the focus. The camera adjusts the focus and exposure automatically. The camera sets the aperture value and shutter speed automatically. Focus frame • Press [Shutter] to take the photo if the focus frame appears in green. • Change the composition and halfpress [Shutter] again if the focus frame appears in red. Reducing camera shake • Select the mode to reduce camera shake digitally. (p. 30) When is displayed Camera shake When shooting in the dark, avoid setting the flash option to Slow Sync or Off. The aperture remains open longer and it may be harder to hold the camera still. • Use a tripod or set the flash option to Fill in. (p. 41) • Set ISO speed options. (p. 42)Basic functions 25 Preventing your subject from being out of focus It may be difficult to get your subject in focus when: - there is little contrast between the subject and background (for example, when your subject is wearing clothing that is similar in color to the background) - the light source behind the subject is too bright - the subject is shiny or reflective - the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds - the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame Use the focus lock Half-press [Shutter] to focus. When the subject is in focus, you can reposition the frame to change the composition. When you are ready, press [Shutter] to take your photo. • When you take photos in low light Turn on the flash. (p. 41) • When subjects are moving fast Use the continuous or motion capture function. (p. 52)Using the Smart Auto mode ……………… 27 Using the Program mode ………………… 29 Using the DIS mode ……………………… 30 Using the Scene mode …………………… 31 Using the Beauty Shot mode …………… 31 Using the frame guide …………………… 32 Using the long time shutter in the Night mode ……………………………… 33 Recording a video ………………………… 34 Recording voice memos ………………… 36 Recording a voice memo ………………… 36 Adding a voice memo to a photo ………… 36 Extended functions Learn how to take a photo by selecting a mode and how to record a video or voice memo. Extended functions 27 Using the Smart Auto mode In this mode, your camera automatically chooses the appropriate camera settings based on the type of scene it defects. Smart Auto Mode is helpful if you are not familiar with the camera settings for various scenes. Icon Description Appears when taking portraits with backlighting. Appears when taking portraits. Appears when taking close-up photos of objects. Appears when taking close-up photos of text. Appears when taking photos of sunsets. Appears when taking photos of clear skies. Appears when taking photos of forested areas. Appears when taking close-up photos of colorful subjects. Appears when the camera is stable (on a tripod, for example) and the subject is motionless for a period of time. This is available only when you are shooting in the dark. Appears when taking photos of actively moving subjects. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Smart Auto. 3 Align your subject in the frame. • The camera selects a scene automatically. An appropriate scene mode icon appears at the top left of the screen. The icons are listed below. Icon Description Appears when taking photos of landscapes. Appears when taking photos with bright white backgrounds. Appears when taking photos of landscapes at night. (This is available only when the flash is off.) Appears when taking portraits at night. Appears when taking photos of landscapes with backlighting.Extended functions 28 Using the Smart Auto mode 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus. 5 Press [Shutter] to take the photo. • If the camera does not recognize a proper scene mode, appears and the camera uses default settings. • Even if it detects a face, the camera may not select a portrait mode depending on the subject's position or lighting. • The camera may not select the correct scene depending on the shooting condtions, such as camera shake, lighting, and distance to the subject. • Even if you use a tripod, the camera may not detect the mode depending on the subject's movement. • In mode, the camera consumes more battery power, because it changes settings often to select appropriate scenes.Extended functions 29 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Program. 3 Set options. (For a list of options, refer to "Shooting options" on page 37) 4 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 5 Press [Shutter] to take the photo. Using the Program mode In the Program mode, you can set various options except the shutter speed and aperture value, which the camera sets automatically.Extended functions 30 Before correction After correction 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select DIS. 3 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 4 Press [Shutter] to take the photo. • The digital zoom does not work in this mode. • If your subject is moving rapidly, the photo may be blurry. • The DIS function may not work where the lighting is brighter than that of a fluorescent lamp. Using the DIS mode Reduce camera shake and prevent blurred photos with Digital Image Stabilization functions.Extended functions 31 Using the Beauty Shot mode Take a photo of a person with options to hide facial imperfections. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Scene → Beauty Shot. 3 To make the subject's skin tone appear lighter (face only), press [ ], and then go to Step 4. To hide facial imperfections, press [ ], and then go to Step 5. 4 Select Shooting → Face Tone → an option. • Select a higher setting to make skin tone appear lighter. Level 2 Back Move 5 To hide facial imperfections, press [ ]. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Scene → a scene. Beauty Shot Frame Guide Night Portrait Children Landscape Close Up This mode is appropriate for taking pictures of faces. • To change the scene mode, press [ ], and then select Scene → a scene. • For the Beauty Shot mode, see “Using the Beauty Shot mode" on page 31. • For the Frame Guide mode, see “Using the frame guide" on page 32. • For the Night mode, see “Using the Night mode” on page 33. 3 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 4 Press [Shutter] to take the photo. Using the Scene mode Take a photo with options preset for a specific scene.Extended functions 32 Using the Scene mode Using the frame guide When you want another person to take a photo of you, you can compose the scene with the frame guide feature. The frame guide helps the other person take a photo of you by showing part of the pre-composed scene. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Scene → Frame Guide. 3 Align your subject in the frame, and then press [Shutter]. • Transparent guides appear on the left and right of the frame. Cancel Frame: OK 4 Ask another person to take a photo. • The person aligns the subject in the frame using the guides, and then presses [Shutter] to take the photo. 5 To cancel the guides, press [ ]. 6 Select Shooting → Face Retouch → an option. • Select a higher setting to hide a greater number of imperfections. Level 2 Back Move 7 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 8 Press [Shutter] to take the photo. When using the Beauty Shot mode, the focus distance will be set to Auto Macro.Extended functions 33 Using the Scene mode 3 Select the aperture value or shutter speed. Aperture value Shutter speed Aperture Auto Auto Back Move 4 Select an option. • If you select Auto, the camera adjusts the aperture value or shutter speed automatically. 5 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 6 Press [Shutter] to take the photo. Use a tripod to prevent blurry photos. Using the long time shutter in the Night mode Use the Night mode to take a photo with options for preset for shooting at night. Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Scene → Night. 3 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 4 Press [Shutter] to take the photo. Adjusting the exposure in the Night mode In Night mode, you can use a slow shutter speed to extend the time until the shutter closes. Increase the aperture value to prevent overexposure. 1 Press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → Long Time Shutter.Extended functions 34 5 Press [ ]. 6 Select Movie → Voice → a sound option. Option Description On: Record a video with sound. Off: Record a video without sound. Zoom Mute: The camera stops recording sound temporarily when you use the zoom. 7 Set other options as desired. (For a list of options, refer to "Shooting options" on page 37) 8 Press [Shutter] to start recording. 9 Press [Shutter] again to stop recording. Recording a video In Movie mode, you can customize settings to record HD videos of up to 20 minutes (SD videos of up to 2 hours) in length. The camera saves recorded videos as MJPEG files. • Some memory cards may not support high definition recording. If this case occurs, set a lower resolution for your camera setting. • Memory cards with slow writing speeds will not support highresolution videos. To record high-resolution videos, use memory cards with faster write speeds. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Movie. 3 Press [ ]. 4 Select Movie → Frame Rate → a frame rate (the number of frames per second). • As the frame rate increases, action appears more natural, but the file size also increases. The maximum recording capacity for one video file is 4GB. If a video file exceeds 4GB while recording videos, the recording stops automatically.Extended functions 35 Recording a video Stop Pause To pause recording The camera allows you to pause a video temporarily while recording. With this function, you can record several scenes as a single video. Press [ ] to pause while recording. Press it again to resume.Extended functions 36 Recording voice memos Learn how to record a voice memo that you can play back at any time. You can add a voice memo to a photo as a short reminder of shooting conditions. You will get the best sound quality when recording 16 inches (40 cm.) away from the camera. Adding a voice memo to a photo 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → Voice → Memo. 3 Align your subject in the frame, and then take a photo. • Begin recording the voice memo right after taking the photo. 4 Record a short voice memo (10 seconds maximum). • Press [Shutter] to stop recording a voice memo before the 10 seconds are up. You cannot add voice memos to photos if you set continuous options. Recording a voice memo 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → Voice → Record. 3 Press [Shutter] to record. • You can record voice memos of up to 10 hours in length. • Press [ ] to pause or resume recording. Stop Pause 4 Press [Shutter] to stop. • Press [Shutter] again to record a new voice memo. 5 Press [ ] to switch to Shooting mode.Selecting a resolution and quality ………… 38 Selecting a resolution …………………… 38 Selecting image quality …………………… 38 Using the timer ……………………………… 39 Shooting in the dark ……………………… 41 Preventing red-eye ……………………… 41 Using the flash …………………………… 41 Adjusting the ISO speed ………………… 42 Changing the camera’s focus …………… 43 Using macro ……………………………… 43 Using auto focus ………………………… 43 Using tracking auto focus ………………… 44 Adjusting the focus area ………………… 45 Using face detection ……………………… 46 Detecting faces …………………………… 46 Taking a self-portrait shot ………………… 47 Taking a smile shot ……………………… 47 Detecting eye blinking …………………… 48 Adjusting brightness and color …………… 49 Adjusting the exposure manually (EV) …… 49 Compensating for backlighting (ACB) …… 49 Changing the metering option …………… 50 Selecting a White Balance Setting ……… 50 Using burst modes ………………………… 52 Improving your photos …………………… 53 Applying photo styles …………………… 53 Adjusting your photos …………………… 54 Shooting options Learn about the options you can set in shooting mode.Shooting options 38 Selecting a resolution and quality Learn how to change the image resolution and quality settings. When recording a video 1 In the mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Movie → Movie Size → an option. Option Description 1280 X 720: HD files to play back on an HDTV. 640 X 480: SD files to play back on an analog TV. 320 X 240: Post on a web page. Selecting image quality The camera compresses and saves the photos you take in JPEG format. Higher quality images result in larger file sizes. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → Quality → an option. Option Description Super Fine: Capture photos in super high quality. Fine: Capture photos in high quality. Normal: Capture photos in normal quality. The options may differ depending on the shooting mode. Selecting a resolution As you increase the resolution, your photo or video will include more pixels, so it can be printed on larger paper or displayed on a larger screen. When you use a high resolution, the file size also increases. When taking a photo 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → Photo Size → an option. Option Description 4320 X 3240: Print on A1 paper (23.3" x 33.1") with higher quality. 4000 X 3000: Print on A1 paper (23.3" x 33.1"). 3984 X 2656: Print on A2 paper (16.5" x 23.3") in wide ratio (3:2). 3968 X 2232: Print on A2 paper (16.5" x 23.3") in panorama ratio (16:9) or play back on an HDTV. 3264 X 2448: Print on A3 paper (11.7" x 16.5"). 2592 X 1944: Print on A4 paper (8.3" x 11.7"). 2048 X 1536: Print on A5 paper (5.8" x 8.3"). 1024 X 768: Attach to email. The paper sizes in inches are approximate. Shooting options 39 Using the timer Learn how to set the timer to delay shooting. 3 Press [Shutter] to start the timer. • The AF-assist light/timer lamp blinks. The camera automatically takes a photo at the specified time. • Press [ ] or [Shutter] to cancel the timer. • Self timer options are not available if you set continuous options. • Depending on the face detection option you have selected, the timer function or some timer options may not be available. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. Off 2 Select an option. Option Description Off: The timer is not active. 10 Sec: Takes a photo in 10 seconds. 2 Sec: Takes a photo in 2 seconds. Double: Takes a photo in 10 seconds, and then takes another 2 seconds later. Motion Timer: Detects the subject's movement, and then takes a photo if the subject become idle in 6 seconds. (p. 40) The options may differ depending on the shooting mode.Shooting options 40 Using the timer 6 Pose for your photo while the AF-assist light/timer lamp is blinking. • The AF-assist light/timer lamp stops blinking just before the camera automatically takes a photo. The motion timer may not work when: • you are more than 10 ft. (3 m) away from the camera • your movements are too subtle • there is too much light or backlight Using the motion timer 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select . 3 Press [Shutter]. 4 Stand within 10 ft. (3 m) of the camera within 6 seconds after pressing [Shutter]. 5 Make a motion, such as waving your arms, to activate the timer. • The AF-assist light/timer lamp starts to blink rapidly when the camera detects you. The detection range of the motion timerShooting options 41 Shooting in the dark Learn how to take photos at night or in low light conditions. Using the flash Use the flash when taking photos in the dark or when you need more light in your photos. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. Auto 2 Select an option. Option Description Off: • The flash does not fire. • The camera displays the camera shake warning ( ) when you are shooting in low light. Auto: The camera selects a proper flash setting for the scene it detects in the mode. Preventing red-eye If the flash fires when you take a photo of a person in the dark, a red glow may appear in the person's eyes. To prevent this, select Red-eye or Red-eye Fix. Refer to flash options in "Using the flash." Shooting options 42 Shooting in the dark • Flash options are not available if you set continuous options or select Self-Portrait or Blink Detection. • Make sure that your subjects are within the recommended distance from the flash. (p. 95) • If light from the flash is relected or there is a large amount of dust in the air, tiny spots may appear in your photo. Adjusting the ISO speed The ISO speed is the measure of a film’s sensitivity to light as defined by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). The higher ISO speed you select, the more sensitive to light your camera becomes. With a higher ISO speed, you can get a better photo without using the flash. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → ISO → an option. • Select to use an appropriate ISO speed based on the brightness of the subject and lighting. • The higher ISO speed you select, the more image noise you may get. • When you select Motion Capture, the camera sets the ISO speed to Auto. Option Description Red-eye Fix*: • The flash fires twice when the subject or background is dark. • The camera corrects red-eyes through its advanced software analysis. Slow Sync: • The flash fires and the shutter stays open longer. • Select this when you want to capture more ambient light to reveal more details in the background. • Use a tripod to prevent your photos from blurring. • The camera will display the shake warning ( ) when you are shooting in low light. Fill in: • The flash always fires. • The camera adjusts light intensity automatically. Red-eye*: • The flash fires twice when the subject or background is dark. • The camera reduces red-eyes. Auto: The flash fires automatically when the subject or background is dark. The options may differ depending on the shooting mode. * There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time.Shooting options 43 Changing the camera’s focus Learn how to adjust the camera's focus. Using auto focus To take sharp photos, select the appropriate focus according to your distance from the subject. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. Normal (AF) 2 Select an option. Option Description Normal (AF): Focus on a subject farther than 31 in. (80 cm) from the camera. Farther than 39 in. (100 cm) when using the zoom. Macro: Focus on a subject 2 to 32 in. (5 - 80 cm) from the camera. Auto Macro: Automatically focus on a subject farther than 2 in. (5 cm). Farther than 39 in. (100 cm) when using the zoom. The options may differ depending on the shooting mode. Using macro Use macro to take close-up photos of subjects, such as flowers or insects. Refer to macro options in “Using auto focus.” • Try to hold the camera very still to prevent blurry photos. • Turn off the flash if the distance to the subject is less than 16 in. (40 cm.) Shooting options 44 Changing the camera’s focus Using tracking auto focus Tracking AF allows you to track and auto focus on your subject, even when you are moving. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → Focus Area → Tracking AF. 3 Focus on the subject you want to track and press [ ]. • A focus frame will appear on the subject and will follow the subject as you move the camera. • The white frame means that your camera is tracking the subject. • The green frame means that your subject is in focus when you half-press [Shutter]. • If you do not press [ ], the focus frame will be in the center of the screen. • Tracking a subject may fail when: - the subject is too small or the subject moves excessively - the subject is backlit or you are shooting in a dark place - colors or patterns on the subject and the background are the same - the camera shakes excessively • When tracking a subject fails, the focus frame will appear as a white single-line frame ( ). • If the camera fails to track the subject, you must reselect the subject to track. • If the camera fails to focus, the focus frame will change to a red singleline frame ( ). • If you use this function, you cannot set face detection, photo style and self timer options.Shooting options 45 Changing the camera’s focus Adjusting the focus area You can get clearer photos by selecting an appropriate focus area according to your subject’s location in the scene. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → Focus Area → an option. Option Description Center AF: Focus on the center. Suitable when subjects are located in the center. Multi AF: Focus on one or more of 9 possible areas. Tracking AF: Focus on and track the subject. (p.44) The options may differ depending on the shooting mode. Shooting options 46 Using face detection If you use face detection options, your camera can automatically detect a human face. When you focus on a human face, the camera adjusts the exposure automatically. Take photos quickly and easily by using Blink Detection to detect closed eyes or Smile Shot to capture a smiling face. Detecting faces Your camera automatically detects human faces (up to 10 faces in one scene). The nearest face appears in a white focus frame and the rest of the faces appear in gray focus frames. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → Face Detection → Normal. • The nearest face appears in a white focus frame and the rest of the faces appear in gray focus frames. The closer you are to the subject, the quicker your camera detects faces. • If the camera recognizes any number of faces, the focus automatically tracks the motion of those faces. • In some scene modes, face detection is unavailable. • Face detection may not be effective when: - the subject is far from the camera (The focus frame will appear orange for Smile Shot and Blink Detection.) - it is too bright or too dark - the subject is not facing the camera - the subject is wearing sunglasses or a mask - the subject is backlit or the lighting condition is unstable - the subject’s facial expression changes remarkably • Face detection is not available when using a Photo Style Selector, or image adjustment option or when used with Tracking AF. • Face detection is not available when you are using the digital zoom. • Depending on the face detection option you selected, the timer or some timer options are not available. • Depending on the face detection option you selected, some continuous options are not available. • When you set face detection options, the AF area is automatically set to Multi AF.Shooting options 47 Using face detection Taking a smile shot The camera automatically releases the shutter when it detects a smiling face. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → Face Detection → Smile Shot. • When your subject smiles broadly, your camera can detect the smile more easily. Taking a self-portrait shot Take photos of yourself. The camera automatically sets the photo distance to close-up and emits a beep when ready. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → Face Detection → Self-Portrait. 3 When you hear a beep, press [Shutter]. If you turn Volume off in the sound settings, the camera will not emit a beep. (p. 78)Shooting options 48 Using face detection Detecting eye blinking If your camera detects closed eyes, it automatically takes two photos in succession. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → Face Detection → Blink Detection. Shooting options 49 Adjusting brightness and color Learn how to adjust the brightness and color for better image quality. Compensating for backlighting (ACB) When the light source is behind your subject or there is high contrast between your subject and the background, your subject is likely to appear dark in the photo. If this occurs, turn the Auto Contrast Balance (ACB) option on. Without ACB With ACB 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → ACB → an option. Option Description Off: ACB is off. On: ACB is on. The ACB feature is not available when you set continuous options. Adjusting the exposure manually (EV) Depending on the intensity of the ambient light, your photos may be too bright or dark. In these cases, you can adjust the exposure to get a better photo. Darker (-) Neutral (0) Brighter (+) 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting or Movie → EV. 3 Select a value to adjust the exposure. • Once you adjust the exposure, the setting will remain the same. You may need to change the exposure value later to avoid overexposure or underexposure. • If you cannot decide on an appropriate exposure, select AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket). The camera takes three photos, each with a different exposure: normal, underexposed, and overexposed. (p. 52) Shooting options 50 Adjusting brightness and color Selecting a White Balance Setting The color of your photo depends on the type and quality of the light source. If you want the color of your photo to be realistic, select a white balance setting that matches the lighting conditions, such as Daylight, Cloudy, or Tungsten. (Auto WB) (Daylight) (Cloudy) (Tungsten) Changing the metering option The metering mode refers to the way in which a camera measures the quantity of light. The brightness and lighting of your photos will vary depending on the metering mode you select. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting or Movie → Metering → an option. Option Description Multi: • Your camera divides the scene into several areas, and then measures the light intensity of each area. • Suitable for general photos. Spot: • Your camera measures only the light intensity of the very center of the frame. • If a subject is not in the center of the scene, your photo may be improperly exposed. • Suitable for a subject with backlighting. Center-weighted: • Your camera averages the meter reading of the entire frame with emphasis placed on the center. • Suitable for photos with subjects in the center of the frame. Shooting options 51 Adjusting brightness and color Defining your own white balance 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting or Movie → White Balance → Custom Set. 3 Aim the lens at a piece of white paper. 4 Press [Shutter]. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting or Movie → White Balance → an option. Icon Description Auto WB: Automatically sets the white balance based on the lighting conditions. Daylight: Select when taking outdoor photos on a sunny day. Cloudy: Select when taking outdoor photos on a cloudy day or in shadows. Fluorescent_H: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent or three-way fluorescent light. Fluorescent_L: Select when shooting under white fluorescent light. Tungsten: Select when taking indoor photos under incandescent bulbs or halogen lamps. Custom Set: Use white balance settings you defined. (See procedure at right.)Shooting options 52 Using burst modes It can be difficult to take photos of fast-moving subjects or capture natural facial expressions and gestures of your subjects in photos. In these cases, select one of the burst modes to take multiple pictures rapidly. • You can use the flash, timer, and ACB only when you select Single. • When you select Motion Capture, the resolution is set to VGA and the ISO speed is set to Auto. • Depending on the face detection option you selected, some continuous options are not available. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → Drive → an option. Option Description Single: Take a single photo. Continuous: • While you are pressing [Shutter], the camera takes photos continuously. • The maximum number of photos depends on the capacity of your memory card. Motion Capture: • While you are pressing [Shutter], the camera takes photos (5 photos per second; maximum of 30 photos). AEB: • Take 3 photos with different exposures: normal, underexposed, and overexposed. • Use a tripod to prevent blurry photos. The options may differ depending on the shooting mode.Shooting options 53 Improving your photos Learn how to improve your photos by applying photo styles or colors, or by making some adjustments. Defining your own RGB tone 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting or Movie → Photo Style Selector → Custom RGB. 3 Select a color (R: Red, G: Green, B: Blue). Back Move 4 Adjust the amount of the selected color. (-: less or +: more) Applying photo styles Apply a different photo style to your photos, such as Soft, Vivid, or Forest. Soft Vivid Forest 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting or Movie → Photo Style Selector → an option. • Select Custom RGB to define your own RGB tone. If you use this function, you cannot set face detection and image adjustment options. Shooting options 54 Improving your photos Saturation option Description - Decrease the saturation. + Increase the saturation. • Select 0 if you do not want to apply any effects (suitable for printing). • If you set an Image Adjust option, Photo Style Selector function is not available. Adjusting your photos Adjust the contrast, sharpness, and saturation of your photos. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Shooting → Image Adjust. 3 Select an adjustment option. • Contrast • Sharpness • Saturation 4 Select a value to adjust the selected item. Contrast option Description - Decrease the color and brightness. + Increase the color and brightness. Sharpness option Description - Soften the edges on your photos. Suitable for editing the photos on your computer. + Sharpen the edges to improve the clarity of your photos. This may also increase the noise on your photos. Playing back ……………………………… 56 Starting Playback mode ………………… 56 Viewing photos …………………………… 60 Playing a video …………………………… 62 Playing voice memos …………………… 63 Editing a photo …………………………… 64 Resizing photos …………………………… 64 Rotating a photo ………………………… 64 Applying photo styles …………………… 65 Correcting exposure problems …………… 66 Creating a print order (DPOF) …………… 67 Viewing files on a TV ……………………… 68 Transferring files to your Windows computer …………………………………… 69 Transferring files using Intelli-studio ……… 70 Transferring files by connecting the camera as a removable disk ……………… 72 Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) ………………………… 73 Transferring files to your Mac computer … 74 Printing photos with a PictBridge photo printer ……………………………………… 75 Playback/Editing Learn how to play back photos, videos, or voice memos and edit photos or videos. Also, learn how to connect your camera to your computer, photo printer, or TV.Playback/Editing 56 Playing back Learn how to play back photos, videos, or voice memos, and manage files. Display in Playback mode Information Icon Description Photo includes a voice memo Print order has been set (DPOF) Protected file Folder name – File name To display file information on the screen, press [ ]. Starting Playback mode View photos or play videos and voice memos stored in your camera. 1 Press [ ]. • The most recent file you have taken or recorded is displayed. • If the camera is off, it will turn on and display the most recent file. 2 Press [ ] or [ ] to scroll through files. • Press and hold to scroll through files quickly. You may not be able to edit or play back files that were captured with other cameras, due to unsupported sizes (image size, etc) or codecs. Use a computer or another device to edit or play back these files.Playback/Editing 57 Playing back Viewing files by category in Smart Album View and manage files by categories, such as date, file type, or week. 1 In Playback mode, rotate [Zoom] to the left. 2 Press [ ]. 3 Select a category. Type Date Color Week Back Set Option Description Type View files by file type. Date View files by the date they were saved. Color View files by the dominant color of the image. Week View files by the weekday they were saved. Video file information Play Capture Icon Description Video file Video lengthPlayback/Editing 58 Playing back Viewing files as thumbnails Scan thumbnails of files. In Playback mode, rotate [Zoom] to the left to display 9 or 20 thumbnails (rotate [Zoom] to the right to return to the previous mode) Filter To Do this Scroll through files Press [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ]. Delete files Press [ ], and then select Yes. • When selecting Color, Etc is shown if color is not extracted. • It may take some time for the camera to open Smart Album or to change the category and recognize files. 4 Press [ ] or [ ] to scroll through files. • Press and hold to scroll through files quickly. 5 Press [ ] to return to the normal view.Playback/Editing 59 Playing back Deleting files Delete single files or all files at once. You cannot delete protected files. To delete a single file, 1 In Playback mode, select a file, and then press [ ]. 2 Select Yes to delete the file. To delete multiple files, 1 In Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Multiple Delete. 3 Select the files you want to delete, and then press [ ]. • Press [ ] again to cancel your selection. 4 Press [ ]. 5 Select Yes. Protecting files Protect your files from accidental deletion. 1 In Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select File Options → Protect → Select. 3 To protect all files, select All → Lock. 4 To protect a single file, select the file you want to protect, and then press [ ]. • Press [ ] again to cancel your selection. Select Set Protected file icon 5 Repeat Step 4 to protect additional files individually. 6 Press [ ]. You cannot delete or rotate a protected file.Playback/Editing 60 Playing back Viewing photos Zoom in on part of a photo or view photos in a slide show. Enlarging a photo In Playback mode, rotate [Zoom] to the right to enlarge a photo (rotate [Zoom] to the left to reduce a photo). The enlarged area and zoom ratio are indicated on the top of the screen. The maximum zoom ratio may vary depending on the resolution. Trim To Do this Move the enlarged area Press [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ]. Trim the enlarged photo Press [ ], and then select Yes. (The trimmed photo is saved as a new file.) To delete all files, 1 In Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select File Options → Delete → All → Yes. • All unprotected files are deleted. Copying files to the memory card You can copy files from the internal memory to a memory card. 1 In Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select File Options → Copy to Card. 3 Select Yes to copy files.Playback/Editing 61 Playing back 4 Set the slide show effect. 5 Select Start → Play. • To loop the slide show, select Repeat. • Press [ ] to pause or resume the slide show. To stop the slide show and switch to Playback mode, press [ ], and then [ ] or [ ]. Starting a slide show You can apply effects and add audio to your slide show. 1 In Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Multi Slide Show. 3 Select a slide show effect option. • Skip to step 4 to start a slide show with no effects. Option Description Start Set whether or not to repeat the slide show. (Play, Repeat) Images Select the photos you want to view as a slide show. • All: View all photos in a slide show. • Date: View photos captured on a specific date in a slide show. • Select: View selected photos in a slide show. Interval • Set the interval between photos. • This is available when you select Off in the Effect option. See below. Music Select a background audio. Effect • Select a transition effect. • Select Off for no effects.Playback/Editing 62 Playing back Trimming a video during playback 1 Press [ ] at the point where you want the new video to begin and then rotate [Zoom] to the right. 2 Press [ ] to resume playback. 3 Press [ ] at the point where you want the new video to end, and then rotate [Zoom] to the right. 4 Select Yes. • The original video must be at least 10 seconds long. • The camera saves the edited video as a new file. Capturing an image during playback 1 Press [ ] at the point where you want to save a still image. 2 Press [ ]. A captured image has the same resolution as the original video file and is saved as a new file. Playing a video You can play a video, capture an image from a video, or crop a video. 1 In Playback mode, select a video, and then press [ ]. Pause 2 Use the following buttons to control playback. Press To [ ] Scan backward. [ ] Pause or resume playback. [ ] Scan forward. [Zoom] left or right Adjust the volumePlayback/Editing 63 Playing back Playing voice memos Playing a voice memo 1 In Playback mode, select a voice memo, and then press [ ]. 2 Use the following buttons to control playback. Press To [ ] Scan backward. [ ] Pause or resume playback. [ ] Scan forward. [ ] Stop playback. [Zoom] left or right Adjust the volume Adding a voice memo to a photo 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [ ]. 2 Select File Options → Voice memo → On. 3 Press [Shutter] to record a short voice memo (10 seconds maximum). • Press [Shutter] to stop recording a voice memo. You cannot add a voice memo to protected files. Playing a voice memo added to a photo In Playback mode, select a photo that includes a voice memo, and then press [ ]. • Press [ ] to pause or resume playback.Playback/Editing 64 Editing a photo Perform photo editing tasks, such as resizing, rotating, eliminating red-eyes, and adjusting brightness, contrast, or saturation. The camera saves edited photos as new files. Rotating a photo 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [ ]. 2 Select Edit → Rotate → an option. Back Right 90˚ Move The rotated photo will be saved as the same file, not a new file. Resizing photos 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [ ]. 2 Select Edit → Resize → an option. • Select to save the photo as a start image. (p. 78) Back 2048 X 1536 Move Available options differ depending on the size of the selected photo.Playback/Editing 65 Editing a photo Defining your own RGB tone 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [ ]. 2 Select Edit → Photo Style Selector → Custom RGB. 3 Select a color (R: Red, G: Green, B: Blue). Back Move 4 Adjust the amount of the selected color. (-: less or +: more) Applying photo styles Apply a different photo style to the photo, such as Soft, Vivid, or Forest. Soft Vivid Forest 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [ ]. 2 Select Edit → Photo Style Selector → an option. • Select Custom RGB to define your own RGB tone. Back Soft MovePlayback/Editing 66 Editing a photo Correcting exposure problems Adjust ACB (Auto Contrast Balance), brightness, contrast, or saturation; remove red-eye; hide facial imperfections; or add noise to the photo. Adjusting ACB (Auto Contrast Balance) 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [ ]. 2 Select Edit → Image Adjust → ACB. Removing red-eye 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [ ]. 2 Select Edit → Image Adjust → Red-eye Fix. Hiding facial imperfections 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [ ]. 2 Select Edit → Image Adjust → Face Retouch. 3 Select a level. • As the number increases, the face becomes clearer. Adjusting brightness/contrast/saturation 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [ ]. 2 Select Edit → Image Adjust. 3 Select an adjustment option. Icon Description Brightness Contrast Saturation 4 Select a value to adjust the selected item. (-: less or +: more) Adding noise to the photo 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [ ]. 2 Select Edit → Image Adjust → Add Noise.Playback/Editing 67 Editing a photo 4 Press [ ]. 5 Select File Options → DPOF → Size → an option. Option Description Select Specify the print size for the selected photo. All Specify the print size for all photos. Reset Reset to the default settings. 6 If you select Select, scroll to a photo, and then press [Zoom] left or right to select the print size. Repeat for the photos you want to print, and then press [ ]. • If you select All, press [ ] or [ ] to select the print size, and then press [ ]. Printing photos as thumbnails 1 In Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select File Options → DPOF → Index → Yes. If you specify the print size, you can print photos only with DPOF 1.1-compatible printers. Creating a print order (DPOF) Select photos to be printed and set options, such as the number of copies or paper size. • You can take the memory card to a print shop that supports DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) or you can print photos directly through a DPOF-compatible printer at home. • Wide photos may print with the left and right edges cut off, so be aware of the dimensions of your photos. 1 In Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select File Options → DPOF → Standard → an option. Option Description Select Print the selected photos. All Print all photos. Reset Reset to the default settings. 3 If you select Select, scroll to a photo, and then rotate [Zoom] to the left or right to select the number of copies. Repeat for the photos you want to print, and then press [ ]. • If you select All, press [ ] or [ ] to select the number of copies, and then press [ ].Playback/Editing 68 Viewing files on a TV Play back photos or videos by connecting your camera to a TV using the A/V cable. • On some TVs, digital noise may occur or part of an image may not appear. • Images may not appear centered on the TV screen depending on your TV settings. • You can capture photos or videos while the camera is connected to a TV. 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Settings → Video Out. 3 Select a video signal output according to your country or region. (See "Video Out" on page 80.) 4 Turn off your camera and TV. 5 Connect your camera to your TV using the A/V cable. Video Audio 6 Turn on your TV, and then select the video output mode using the TV remote control. 7 Turn on your camera, and then press [ ]. 8 View photos or play videos using the buttons on your camera.Playback/Editing 69 Transferring files to your Windows computer Transfer files by connecting your camera to your Windows PC. • The requirements are recommendation only. It may not work properly even when the computer meets the requirements, depending on the condition of your computer. • If your computer does not meet the requirements, videos may not play correctly or it may take longer to edit videos. • Install DirectX 9.0c or above before you use the program. • Your computer must be running Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7 for you to connect the camera as a removable disk. Using a self-assembled PC or a PC and OS that are not supported may void your warranty. Requirements Item Requirements CPU Intel Pentium 4 3.2 GHz or higher/ AMD Athlon™ FX 2.6 GHz or higher RAM Minimum 512 MB RAM (1 GB and above recommended) OS Windows XP SP2/Vista/7 Hard disk capacity 250 MB or more (1 GB or more recommended) Others • 1024 X 768 pixels, 16-bit color display compatible monitor (1280 X 1024 pixels, 32-bit color display recommended) • USB 2.0 port • nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT or higher/ATI X1600 series or higher • Microsoft DirectX 9.0c or higher * The Intelli-studio is installed as 32-bit operating program on 64-bit editions of Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows 7.Playback/Editing 70 Transferring files to your Windows computer Transferring files using Intelli-studio You can download Intelli-studio from the linked webpage and install it on your computer. When you connect the camera to a computer with Intelli-studio installed, the program will launch automatically. 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Settings → PC Software → On. 3 Turn off the camera. 4 Connect your camera to your computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. The battery will be charged while the camera is connected to a computer with the USB cable. 5 Turn on the camera. • When the Intelli-studio installation pop-up appears on the computer screen, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. • Once the Intelli-studio is installed on your computer, the computer recognizes the camera and launches the Intellistudio automatically. If you set the USB option to Select Mode, select Computer in the pop-up window. 6 Select a folder on your computer to save new files to. • New files stored on the camera will automatically transfer to the selected folder. • If your camera has no new files, the pop-up window for saving new files will not appear. 7 Select Yes. • New files are transferred to the computer. For Windows Vista and Windows 7, select Run iLinker.exe from the Auto Play window to start Intelli-studio. If Run iLinker.exe does not appear on the computer, click → Computer → Intelli-studio, and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the Intelli-studio installation.Playback/Editing 71 Transferring files to your Windows computer Using Intelli-studio Intelli-studio allows you to play back and edit files. For details, select Help → Help from the program toolbar. • You cannot edit files directly on the camera. Transfer files to a folder on your computer before editing. • Intelli-studio supports the following formats: - Videos: MP4 (Video: H.264, Audio: AAC), WMV (WMV 7/8/9), AVI (MJPEG) - Photos: JPG, GIF, BMP, PNG, TIFF 7 3 4 5 6 9 14 15 11 10 1 2 13 8 12Playback/Editing 72 Transferring files to your Windows computer Transferring files by connecting the camera as a removable disk You can connect the camera to your computer as a removable disk. 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Settings → PC Software → Off. 3 Turn off the camera. 4 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Icon Description 1 Open menus 2 Display files in the selected folder 3 Change to the Photo edit mode 4 Change to the Video edit mode 5 Change to the Sharing mode (You can send files by email or upload files to websites, such as Flickr or YouTube.) 6 Enlarge or reduce the thumbnails in the list 7 Select a file type 8 View files of the selected folder on your computer 9 Show or hide files of the connected camera 10 View files of the selected folder on the camera 11 View files as thumbnails or on a map 12 Browse folders in the connected device 13 Browse folders in your computer 14 Move to the previous or next folder 15 Print files, view files on a map, store files in My Folder, or register facesPlayback/Editing 73 Transferring files to your Windows computer 5 Turn on the camera. • The computer recognizes the camera automatically. If you set the USB option to Select Mode, select Computer in the pop-up window. 6 On your computer, select My Computer → Removable Disk → DCIM → 100PHOTO. 7 Select the files you want and drag or save them to your computer. Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) The way to disconnect the USB cable for Windows Vista/7 is similar. 1 If the status lamp on your camera is blinking, wait until it stops. 2 Click on the tool bar at the bottom right of your PC screen. 3 Click the pop-up message. 4 Click the message box that indicates the camera can be removed safely. 5 Remove the USB cable. The camera may not be removed safely when Intelli-studio is running. End the program before disconnecting the camera.Playback/Editing 74 Transferring files to your Mac computer When you connect the camera to a Macintosh computer, the computer recognizes the camera automatically. You can transfer files directly from the camera to the computer without installing any programs. Mac OS 10.4 or later is supported. 3 Turn on the camera. • The computer recognizes the camera automatically and displays a removable disk icon. If you set the USB option to Select Mode, select Computer in the pop-up window. 4 Double-click the removable disk icon. 5 Transfer photos or videos to the computer. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect your camera to a Macintosh computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data.Playback/Editing 75 Printing photos with a PictBridge photo printer Print photos with a PictBridge-compatible printer by connecting your camera directly to the printer. Configuring print settings Images Size Layout Type Quality Exit Print : One Photo : Auto : Auto : Auto : Auto Option Description Images: Select whether to print the current photo or all photos. Size: Specify the size of the print. Layout: Create thumbnail prints. Type: Select the type of paper. Quality: Set the printing quality. Date: Set to print the date. File Name: Set to print the name of the file. Reset: Reset the print options. Some options are not supported by some printers. 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Settings → USB. 3 Select Printer. 4 With the printer on, connect your camera to the printer with the USB cable. 5 Turn on your camera. • The printer recognizes the camera automatically. 6 Press [ ] or [ ] to select a photo. • Press [ ] to set printing options. See “Configuring print settings.” 7 Press [ ] to print. • Printing starts. Press [ ] to cancel printing.Camera settings menu …………………… 77 Accessing the settings menu …………… 77 Sound …………………………………… 78 Display …………………………………… 78 Settings …………………………………… 79 Settings Refer to options to configure your camera’s settings.Settings 77 Camera settings menu Learn about various options to configure your camera's settings. 3 Select an option and save your settings. Volume Start Sound Shutter Sound Beep Sound AF Sound Back Set Off Low Medium High 4 Press [ ] to return to the previous screen. Accessing the settings menu 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select a menu. Shooting Sound Display Settings Exit Change Volume Start Sound Shutter Sound Beep Sound AF Sound Menu Description Sound: Set various camera sounds and the volume. (p. 78) Display: Customize the display settings, such as start image and brightness. (p. 78) Settings: Change the settings for the camera system, such as memory format, default file name, and USB mode. (p. 79)Settings 78 Camera settings menu Display * Default Item Description Function Description Display a brief description of an option or menu. (Off, On*) Start Image Set a start image to display when the camera turns on. • Off*: Display no start image. • Logo: Display a default image stored in the internal memory. • User Image: Display the image you want. (p. 64) • Only one user image will be saved in the memory. • If you select a new photo as a user image or reset your camera, the current image will be deleted. Display Brightness Adjust the brightness of the screen. (Auto*, Dark, Normal, Bright) Normal is fixed in Playback mode even if you have selected Auto. Quick View Set the duration for reviewing a captured image before returning to the Shooting mode. (Off, 0.5 sec*, 1 sec, 3 sec) Sound * Default Item Description Volume Adjust the volume of any sound. (Off, Low, Medium*, High) Start Sound Select the sound the camera emits when you turn it on. (Off*, 1, 2, 3) Shutter Sound Select the sound the camera emits when you press the shutter button. (Off, 1*, 2, 3) Beep Sound Select the sound the camera emits when you press buttons or switch modes. (Off, 1*, 2, 3) AF Sound Select the sound the camera emits when you half-press the shutter button. (Off, On*)Settings 79 Camera settings menu Settings * Default Item Description Format Format the memory card. Format deletes all files, including protected files. (Yes, No) If you use a memory card used with cameras from different manufacturers or a memory card reader, or one formatted on a computer, your camera may read the card incorrectly. Format the card before using it. Reset Reset menus and shooting options. Date and time, language, and video output settings are not reset. (Yes, No) Language Select a language for the display text. Time Zone Select a region and set the daylight-saving time (DST). Date/Time Set Set the date and time. Date Type Select a date format. (YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, Off*) Item Description Power Save If you perform no operations for 30 seconds, the camera automatically switches to Power save mode. (Off*, On) • In Power save mode, press any button other than [POWER] to resume using the camera. • If the Power save mode is deactivated, the main display will dim to save battery life when you perform no operations for about 30 seconds. * DefaultSettings 80 Camera settings menu Item Description Imprint Select whether to display the date and time on your photos when printing. (Off*, Date, Date & Time) • The date and time is displayed on the bottomright corner of the photo in yellow. • Some printer models may not print the date and time. • If you select Text in mode, the date and time will not be displayed. Auto Power Off Set the camera to turn off automatically when you are not using it. (Off, 1 min, 3 min*, 5 min, 10 min) • Your settings will not change after replacing the battery. • The camera will not automatically turn off when: - it is connected to a computer or printer - you are playing a slide show or videos - you are recording a voice memo AF Lamp Turn on an assistant light to help you focus in dark places. (Off, On*) Video Out Set the video signal output according to your region. • NTSC*: USA, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico. • PAL (supports only BDGHI): Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Denmark, England, Finland, France, Germany, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand Item Description File No. Specify how to name files. • Reset: Set the file number to start from 0001 when inserting a new memory card, formatting a memory card, or deleting all files. • Series*: Set the file number to follow the previous file number when inserting a new memory card, formatting a memory card, or deleting all files. • The default name of the first folder is 100PHOTO and the default name of the first file is SAM_0001. • The file number increases one photo at a time from SAM_0001 to SAM_9999. • The folder number increases one folder at a time from 100PHOTO to 999PHOTO. • The maximum number of files that can be stored in one folder is 9999. • The camera defines file names according to the Digital rule for Camera File system (DCF) standard. If you change the names of files intentionally, the camera may not play back the files. * Default * DefaultSettings 81 Camera settings menu * Default Item Description USB Select the function to use when you connect the camera to a computer or printer using a USB cable. • Select Mode: Manually select the USB mode when you connect your camera to a device. • Computer*: Connect your camera to a computer for transferring files. • Printer: Connect your camera to a printer for printing files. PC Software Set Intelli-studio to launch automatically when you connect your camera to your computer. (Off, On*) Open Source License Open Source License relevant information is shown.Error messages …………………………… 83 Camera maintenance ……………………… 84 Cleaning your camera …………………… 84 Using or storing the camera ……………… 85 About memory cards …………………… 86 About the battery ………………………… 88 Before contacting a service center ……… 92 Camera specifications …………………… 95 Glossary …………………………………… 98 FCC notice ……………………………… 102 Index ……………………………………… 103 Appendixes Refer to error messages, specifications, and maintenance tips.Appendixes 83 Error messages When the following error messages appear, try these remedies. Error message Suggested remedies Card Error • Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again. • Remove your memory card, and insert it again. • Format your memory card. (p. 79) Card Locked Unlock the memory card. Card not supported. The inserted memory card is not compatible with your camera. Insert an appropriate memory card. DCF Full Error File names do not match the DCF standard. Transfer the files on the memory card to your computer, and then format the card. (p. 79) File Error Delete the damaged file or contact a Samsung service center. Low Battery Insert a charged battery or recharge the battery. Memory Full Delete unnecessary files or insert a new memory card. Error message Suggested remedies No Image File Take photos or insert a memory card that has some photos. Insert Card You need a storage device for shooting. Insert the memory card.Appendixes 84 Camera maintenance Camera body Wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. • Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the device. These solutions can damage the camera or cause it to malfunction. • Do not press on the lens cover or use a blower brush on the lens cover. Cleaning your camera Camera lens and display Use a blower brush to remove dust and wipe the lens gently with a soft cloth. If any dust remains, apply lens cleaning liquid to a piece of cleaning paper and wipe gently.Appendixes 85 Camera maintenance Using or storing the camera Inappropriate places to use or store the camera • Avoid exposing the camera to very cold or very hot temperatures. • Avoid using your camera in areas with extremly high humidity, or where the humidity changes drastically. • Avoid exposing the camera to direct sunlight and storing in hot, poorly-ventilated areas, such as in a car during summertime. • Protect your camera and the display from impact, rough handling, and excessive vibration to avoid serious damage. • Avoid using or storing your camera in dusty, dirty, humid, or poorly-ventilated areas to prevent damage to moving parts and internal components. • Do not use your camera near fuels, combustibles, or flammable chemicals. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the camera or its accessories. • Do not store the camera where there are mothballs. Using on beaches or shores • Protect your camera from sand and dirt when you use it on beaches or in other similar areas. • Your camera is not waterproof. Do not handle the battery, adapter, or memory card with wet hands. Operating the camera with wet hands may cause damage to your camera. Storing for extended period of time • When you store the camera for an extended period, place it in a sealed container with an absorbent material as silica gel. • Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period of time. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. • Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use. • If you turn on the camera after the battery has been removed from the camera more than 40 hours, the date and time information will be set to the default value. Use the camera with caution in humid environments When you transfer the camera from a cold environment to a warm one, condensation can form on the lens or internal components of the camera. In this situation, turn off the camera and wait for at least 1 hour. If condensation forms on the memory card, remove the memory card from the camera and wait until all moisture has evaporated before reinserting it.Appendixes 86 Camera maintenance Other cautions • Do not swing your camera by the strap. This may cause injury to yourself or others. • Do not paint your camera, as paint can clog moving parts and prevent proper operation. • Turn off the camera while not in use. • Your camera consists of delicate parts. Avoid impacts to the camera. • Protect the display from external force by keeping it in the case when not in use. Protect the camera from scratches by keeping it away from sand, sharp implements, or loose change. • Do not use the camera if the screen is cracked or broken. Broken glass or acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the camera to a Samsung service center to have it repaired. • Never place cameras, batteries, chargers, or accessories near, on, or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. These devices may be deformed and can overheat and cause a fire or explosion. • Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight, as this may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. • Protect your lens from fingerprints and scratches. Clean your lens with a soft, clean, debris-free lens cloth. • The camera may turn off if struck or dropped. This is to protect the memory card. Turn on the camera to use it again. • While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. • When you use the camera in low temperatures, it may take some time to turn on, the color of the display may be changed temporarily, or after-images may appear. These conditions are not malfunctions and they will correct themselves when the camera is returned to milder temperatures. • Paint or metal on the outside of the camera may cause allergies, itchy skin, eczema, or swelling for people with sensitive skin. If you experience any of these symptoms, stop using the camera immediately and consult a doctor. • Do not insert foreign objects into any of your camera’s compartments, slots, or access points. Damage due to improper use may not be covered by your warranty. • Do not allow unqualified personnel to service the camera or attempt to service the camera yourself. Any damage that results from unqualified service is not covered by your warranty. About memory cards Supported memory cards This product supports SD (Secure Digital), SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity), microSD, or microSDHC memory cards. Terminal Write-protect switch Label (front) You can prevent files from being deleted by using the writeprotect switch on the SD or SDHC card. Slide the switch down to lock or slide it up to unlock. Unlock the card when shooting.Appendixes 87 Camera maintenance Videos Size 30FPS 15FPS Approx. 4’32” Approx. 9’5” Approx. 13’37” Approx. 27’15” Approx. 33’1” Approx. 65’24” * Available recording time may vary if you use the zoom. Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. Cautions when using memory cards • Avoid exposing memory cards to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). • Insert a memory card in the correct direction. Inserting a memory card in the wrong direction may damage your camera and memory card. • Do not use memory cards that have been formatted by other cameras or by a computer. Reformat the memory card with your camera. • Turn off the camera when you insert or remove the memory card. • Do not remove the memory card or turn off your camera while the lamp is blinking, as this may damage your data. • When the lifespan of a memory card has expired, you cannot store any more photos on the card. Use a new memory card. • Do not bend, drop, or subject memory cards with heavy impact or pressure. Memory card adapter Memory card To use micro memory cards with this product, a PC, or a memory card reader, insert the card into an adapter. Memory card capacity The memory capacity may differ depending on the scenes you shoot or the shooting conditions. These capacities are based on a 1 GB SD card: Photos Size Super Fine Fine Normal 157 222 350 168 238 363 195 222 408 230 306 478 244 326 516 311 490 576 490 676 754 979 1088 1224Appendixes 88 Camera maintenance About the battery Use only Samsung-approved batteries. Battery specifications Specification Description Model BP70A Type Lithium-ion battery Cell capacity 700 mAh Voltage 3.7 V Charging time (when the camera is switched off) Approx. 150 min * Charging the battery by connecting it to a computer may take longer. • Avoid using or storing memory cards near strong magnetic fields. • Avoid using or keeping memory cards in areas with high temperature, high humidity, or corrosive substances. • Prevent memory cards from making contact with liquids, dirt, or foreign substances. If dirty, wipe the memory card clean with a soft cloth before you insert the memory card in your camera. • Do not allow liquids, dirt, or foreign substances to come in contact with memory cards or the memory card slot. Doing so may cause memory cards or the camera to malfunction. • When you carry a memory card, use a case to protect the card from electrostatic. • Transfer important data to other media, such as a hard disk, CD, or DVD. • When you use the camera for an extended period, the memory card may become warm. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data.Appendixes 89 Camera maintenance Battery life Average time / Number of photos Test conditions (when the battery is fully charged) Photos Approx. 100 min/ Approx. 200 photos This is measured under the following conditions: in mode, in the darkness, at 14M resolution, on Fine quality. 1. Set the flash option to Fill in, take a single shot, and zoom in or out. 2. Set the flash option to Off, take a single shot, and zoom in or out. 3. Perform steps 1 and 2 for 30 seconds and repeat for 5 minutes. Then turn off the camera for 1 minute. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3. Videos Approx. 95 min Record videos at 1280 X 720 resolution and 30 fps. • The figures above are measured by Samsung’s standards and may differ depending on actual usage. • Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. Low battery message When the battery charge has fully discharged, the battery icon will turn red and the ‘Low Battery’ message will appear. Notes about usinging the battery • Avoid exposing batteries or memory cards to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0º C/32º F or above 40º C/104º F). Extreme temperatures can reduce the charging capacity of your batteries. • When you use the camera for an extended period, the area around the battery chamber may become warm. This does not affect the normal use of the camera. • Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet. This may cause a fire or electric shock. • In temperatures below 0 ºC, battery capacity and battery life may decrease. • Battery capacity may decrease in low temperature but will return to normal in milder temperature.Appendixes 90 Camera maintenance Cautions about using the battery Protect batteries, chargers, and memory cards from damage Prevent batteries from making contact with metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your battery and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage and may cause a fire or electric shock. Notes about charging the battery • If the indicator light is off, make sure that the battery is inserted correctly. • If the camera is on while charging, the battery may not fully charge. Turn off the camera before charging the battery. • Do not use your camera when you charge the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. • Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. • Wait to turn on the camera until after the battery has charged for at least 10 minutes. • If you connect the camera to an external power source while the battery is depleted, using some high energy-consuming functions will cause the camera to turn off. To use the camera normally, recharge the battery. • When the battery is fully charged, the status lamp blinks three times and then turns off. • If you reconnect the power cable even though the battery is fully charged, the status lamp turns on for about 5 minutes and turns off after blinking three times. • Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Charge the battery until the status lamp turns off. • If the status lamp blinks in red or does not illuminate, reconnect the cable, or remove the battery and insert it again. • If you charge the battery when the cable is overheated or the temperature is too high, the battery is on standby mode for charging. Charging will start when the battery cools down. • Overcharging batteries may shorten battery life. After charging is finished, disconnect the cable from your camera. • Do not bend or place heavy objects on the AC cable. Doing so may damage the cable. Notes about charging with a computer connected • Use only the provided USB cable. • The battery may not be charged when: - you use a USB hub - other USB devices are connected to your computer - you connect the cable to the port on the front side of your computer - the USB port of your computer does not support the power output standard (5 V, 500 mA) Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care • Never dispose of batteries in a fire. Follow all local regulations when you dispose of used batteries. • Never place batteries or cameras on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when they are overheated.Appendixes 91 Camera maintenance • Do not disassemble or puncture the battery with any sharp object. • Avoid exposing the battery to high pressure or crushing forces. • Avoid exposing the battery to major impacts, such as dropping it from high places. • Do not expose the battery to temperatures of 60 °C (140 °F) or above. • Do not allow the battery to come in contact with moisture or liquids. • Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight, fire, or any other source of excessive heat. Disposal guidelines • Dispose of the battery with care. • Do not dispose of the battery in a fire. • Disposal regulations may differ by country or region. Dispose of the battery in accordance with all local and federal regulations. Guidelines for charging the battery Charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual. The battery can ignite or explode if not charged properly. Personal injury or death can occur if the battery is handled carelessly or improperly. For your safety, follow these instructions for proper battery handling: • The battery can ignite or explode if not handled properly. If you notice any deformities, cracks, or other abnormalities in the battery, immediately discontinue use of the battery and contact a service center. • Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommend battery chargers and adapters and charge the battery only by the methods described in this user manual. • Do not place the battery near heating devices or expose it to excessively warm environments, such as the inside of an enclosed car in the summertime. • Do not place the battery in a microwave oven. • Avoid storing or using the battery in hot, humid places, such as spas or shower enclosures. • Do not rest the device on flammable surfaces, such as bedding, carpets, or electric blankets for a prolonged period. • When the device is switched on, do not leave it in any confined space for a prolonged period. • Do not allow battery terminals to come in contact with metallic objects, such as necklaces, coins, keys, or watches. • Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries.Appendixes 92 Before contacting a service center If you are having trouble with your camera, try these troubleshooting procedures before contacting a service center. If you have attempted the troubleshooting solution and are still having problems with your device, contact your local dealer or service center. When you leave your camera at a service center, be sure to also leave the other components that may have contributed to the malfunction, such as the memory card and battery. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot take photos • There is no space on the memory card. Delete unnecessary files or insert a new card. • Format the memory card. (p. 79) • The memory card is defective. Get a new memory card. • Make sure that the camera is switched on. • Charge the battery. • Make sure that the battery is inserted correctly. The camera freezes Remove the battery and insert it again. The camera heats up While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. The flash does not work • The flash option may be set to Off. (p. 41) • You cannot use the flash in the , , or some modes. The flash fires unexpectedly The flash may fire due to static electricity. This is not a malfunction. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot turn on the camera • Make sure that the battery is inserted. • Make sure that the battery is inserted correctly. • Charge the battery. The power turns off suddenly • Charge the battery. • Your camera may be in Power save mode (p.79), or turned off by Auto power off setting option. (p.80) • The camera may turn off to prevent the memory card from being damaged due to an impact. Turn on your camera again. The camera is losing battery power quickly • The battery may lose power more quickly in low temperatures (below 0° C). Keep the battery warm by putting it into your pocket. • Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Recharge if needed. • Batteries are consumable parts that must be replaced over time. Get a new battery if the battery life is diminishing quickly.Appendixes 93 Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies The colors in the photo do not match the actual scene An incorrect white balance can create unrealistic color. Select the proper white balance option to suit the light source. (p. 50) The photo is too bright • Turn off the flash. (p. 41) • Your photo is overexposed. Adjust the exposure value. (p. 49) The photo is too dark Your photo is underexposed. • Turn on the flash. (p. 41) • Adjust the ISO speed. (p. 42) • Adjust the exposure value. (p. 49) The TV does not display your photos • Make sure that the camera is correctly connected to the TV with the A/V cable. • Make sure that your memory card contains photos. Your computer does not recognize your camera • Make sure that the USB cable is connected correctly. • Make sure that your camera is switched on. • Make sure that you are using a supported operating system. Your computer disconnects the camera while transferring files The file transmission may be interrupted by static electricity. Disconnect the USB cable and connect it again. Situation Suggested remedies The date and time are incorrect Set the date and time in the display settings menu. (p. 79) The display or buttons do not work Remove the battery and insert it again. The camera display responds poorly If you use your camera at very low temperatures, it may cause the camera screen to malfunction or discolor. For better performance of your camera screen, use your camera in moderate temperatures. The memory card has an error • Turn off your camera and then turn it on again. • Remove your memory card and insert it again. • Format your memory card. See “Cautions when using memory cards” for more detail. (p. 87) Cannot play back files If you change the name of a file, your camera may not play the file. (Note: File names should meet the DCF standard.) If you encounter this situation, play back the files on your computer. The photo is blurry • Make sure that the focus option you set is suitable for close-up shots. (p. 43) • Make sure that the lens is clean. If not, clean the lens. (p. 84) • Make sure that the subject is within range of the flash. (p. 95)Appendixes 94 Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies Your computer cannot play videos • Depending on the video player programs installed on your PC, video files captured by your camera may not play. To ensure the video files play on your computer, install and use the Intelli-studio. (p. 70) • Make sure that the USB cable is connected correctly. Intelli-studio is not functioning properly • End Intelli-studio and restart the program. • You cannot use Intelli-studio on Macintosh computers. • Make sure that PC Software is set to On in the settings menu. (p. 81) • Depending on your computer's specifications and environment, the program may not launch automatically. In this case, click Start → All Programs → SAMSUNG → Intelli-studio → Intellistudio on your computer. Appendixes 95 Camera specifications Shutter speed • Smart Auto: 1/8 - 1/2,000 sec. • Program: 1 - 1/2,000 sec. • Night: 8 - 1/2,000 sec. • Fireworks: 2 sec. Exposure Control Program AE Metering Multi, Spot, Center-weighted Compensation ±2EV (1/3EV steps) ISO equivalent Auto, 80, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 Flash Mode Off, Auto, Red-eye, Fill in, Slow Sync, Red-eye Fix Range • WIDE: 0.4 m - 3.0 m (ISO Auto) • TELE: 0.5 m - 2.0 m (ISO Auto) Recharging time Approx. 4 sec. (depending on battery condition) Shake reduction Digital Image Stabilization (DIS) Image sensor Type 1/2.3" (Approx. 7.81 mm) CCD Effective pixels Approx. 14.2 mega-pixels Total pixels Approx. 14.4 mega-pixels Lens Focal length Samsung 5X Zoom Lens f = 4.9 - 24.5 mm (35 mm film equivalent: 27 - 135 mm) F-stop range F3.5 (W) - F5.9 (T) Digital zoom • Still image mode: 1.0X - 3.0X • Play mode: 1.0X - 12.5X (depending on image size) Display Type TFT LCD Feature 2.7"(6.9cm), 230K Focusing Type TTL auto focus (Multi AF, Center AF, Face Detection AF, Tracking AF) Range Wide (W) Tele (T) Normal 80 cm - infinity 100 cm - infinity Macro 5 cm - 80 cm - Auto Macro 5 cm - infinity 100 cm - infinityAppendixes 96 Camera specifications Videos • Format: MJPEG (Max recording time: 2 hours) • Recording time: 1280X720 (Max. 20 Min.) / 640X480 (Max. 2 hours) • Size: 1280x720, 640×480, 320×240 • Frame Rate: 30 FPS, 15 FPS • Voice: On, Off, Zoom Mute • Video editing (embedded): Pause during recording, Still image capture, Time trimming Playback Type Single image, Thumbnails, Multi slide show, Movie clip, Smart Album * Smart Album category: Type, Date, Color, Week Edit Resize, Rotate, Photo Style Selector, Image Adjust Effect • Photo Style Selector: Normal, Soft, Vivid, Forest, Retro, Cool, Calm, Classic, Negative, Custom RGB • Image Adjust: ACB, Red-eye Fix, Face Retouch, Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, Add Noise Voice recording • Voice Recording (Max 10 hours) • Voice Memo in a photo (Max. 10 sec.) Storage Media • Internal memory: About 37MB • External memory (Optional): - SD card (1-2 GB guaranteed) - SDHC card (up to 16 GB guaranteed) Effect Photo shooting mode • Photo Style Selector: Normal, Soft, Vivid, Forest, Retro, Cool, Calm, Classic, Negative, Custom RGB • Image Adjust (5 Levels): Sharpness, Contrast, Saturation Video shooting mode Photo Style Selector: Normal, Soft, Vivid, Forest, Retro, Cool, Calm, Classic, Negative, Custom RGB White Balance Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent_H, Fluorescent_L, Tungsten, Custom Set Date Imprinting Date & Time, Date, Off Shooting Photos • Modes: Smart Auto (White, Macro Color, Portrait, Night Portrait, Backlight Portrait, Backlight, Landscape, Action, Tripod, Night, Macro, Macro Text, Blue Sky, Sunset, Natural Green), Program, DIS, Scene (Beauty Shot, Frame Guide, Night, Portrait, Children, Landscape, Close Up, Text, Sunset, Dawn, Backlight, Fireworks, Beach & Snow) • Drive: Single, Continuous, Motion Capture, AEB • Timer: Off, 10 Sec, 2 Sec, Double, Motion TimerAppendixes 97 Camera specifications DC power input connector 5.0 V Power source Rechargeable battery Lithium-ion battery (BP70A) (740 mAh, Minimum 700 mAh) Connect Type 8 pin (USB/AV out) The power source may differ depending on your region. Dimensions (W x H x D) 96.9 x 58.0 x 20.2mm (38.14 X 22.83 X 7.95 in.) (excluding protrusions) Weight 120 g (without battery and memory card) Operating temperature 0 - 40˚ C Operating humidity 5 - 85 % Software Intelli-studio Specifications are subject to change without prior notice. File format • Photo: JPEG (DCF), EXIF 2.21, DPOF 1.1, PictBridge 1.0 • Video: AVI (MJPEG) • Audio: WAV Image size For 1GB SD Super Fine Fine Normal 4320 X 3240 157 222 350 4000 X 3000 168 238 363 3984 X 2656 195 222 408 3968 X 2232 230 306 478 3264 X 2448 244 326 516 2592 X 1944 311 490 576 2048 X 1536 490 676 754 1024 X 768 979 1088 1224 These figures are measured under Samsung’s standard conditions and may vary depending on shooting conditions and camera settings. Interface Digital output connector USB 2.0 Audio Mono (Internal speaker), Mono (Microphone) Video output NTSC, PAL (selectable) Appendixes 98 Glossary ACB (Auto Contrast Balance) This feature automatically improves the contrast of your images when the subject is backlit or when there is a high contrast between your subject and the background. AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket) This feature automatically captures several images at different exposures to help you capture a properly-exposed image. AF (Auto Focus) A system that automatically focuses the camera lens on the subject. Your camera uses the contrast to focus automatically. Aperture The aperture controls the amount of light that reaches the camera’s sensor. Camera shake (Blur) If the camera is moved while the shutter is open, the entire image may appear blurred. This occurs more often when the shutter speed is slow. Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, or using a faster shutter speed. Alternately, use a tripod, the DIS function to stabilize the camera. Composition Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) A specification to define a file format and file system for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA). Depth of field The distance between the nearest and farthest points that can be acceptably focused in a photograph. Depth of field varies with lens aperture, focal length, and distance from the camera to the subject. Selecting a smaller aperture, for example, will increase the depth of field and blur the background of a composition. Digital zoom A feature that artificially increases the amount of zoom available with zoom lens (optical zoom). When using the digital zoom, the image quality will deteriorate as the magnification increases. DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) A format for writing printing information, such as selected images and number of prints, on a memory card. DPOF-compatible printers, sometimes available at photo shops, can read the information from the card for convenient printing. EV (Exposure Value) All the combinations of the camera’s shutter speed and lens aperture that result in the same exposure.Appendixes 99 Glossary EV Compensation This feature allows you to quickly adjust the exposure value measured by the camera, in limited increments, to improve the exposure of your photos. Set the EV compensation to -1.0 EV to adjust the value one step darker and 1.0 EV to one step brighter. Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format) A specification to define an image file format for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronic Industries Development Association (JEIDA). Exposure The amount of light allowed to reach the camera’s sensor. Exposure is controlled by a combination of the shutter speed, the aperture value, and ISO sensitivity. Flash A speed light that helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters). Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. Image sensor The physical part of a digital camera that contains a photosite for each pixel in the image. Each photosite records the brightness of the light that strikes it during an exposure. Common sensor types are CCD (Charge-coupled Device) and CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor). ISO sensitivity The sensitivity of the camera to light, based on the equivalent film speed used in a film camera. At higher ISO sensitivity settings, the camera uses a higher shutter speed, which can reduce blur caused by camera shake and low light. However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to noise. JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) A lossy method of compression for digital images. JPEG images are compressed to reduce their overall file size with minimal deterioration of the image resolution. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) A visual display commonly used in consumer electronics. This display needs a separate backlight, such as CCFL or LED, to reproduce colors. Macro This feature allows you to capture close-up photos of very small objects. When using the macro feature, the camera can maintain a sharp focus on small objects at a near life-size ratio (1:1).Appendixes 100 Glossary Metering The metering refers to the way in which the camera measures the quantity of light to set the exposure. MJPEG (Motion JPEG) A video format which is compressed as a JPEG image. Noise Misinterpreted pixels in a digital image that may appear as misplaced or random, bright pixels. Noise usually occurs when photos are shot with a high sensitivity or when a sensitivity is automatically set in a dark place. Optical zoom This is a general zoom which can enlarge images with a lens and does not deteriorate quality of images. Quality An expression of the rate of compression used in a digital image. Higher quality images have a lower rate of compression, which usually results in a larger file size. Resolution The number of pixels present in a digital image. High resolution images contain more pixels and typically show more detail than low resolution images. Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it controls the amount of light which pass through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. A fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in motion. Vignetting A reduction of an image’s brightness or saturation at the periphery (outer edges) compared to the center of the image. Vignetting can draw interest to subjects positioned in the center of an image. White balance (color balance) An adjustment of the intensities of colors (typically the primary colors red, green, and blue), in an image. The goal of adjusting the white balance, or color balance, is to correctly render the colors in an image.Appendixes 101 Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems) This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. This Class [B] digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278 - 0799 PlanetFirst represents Samsung Electronics’ commitment to the sustainable development and social responsibility through eco-driven business and management activities.Appendixes 102 FCC notice • NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: - Reorientate, or relocate, the receiving antenna. - Increase the distance between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help. • CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. • Declaration of Conformity Trade Name : Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Model No. : Samsung ES90/ES91 Responsible Party : Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Address : 85 Challenger Road, Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660 Telephone No. : 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Appendixes 103 Facial imperfections 31 Flash Auto 41 Fill in 42 Off 41 Red-eye 42 Red-eye Fix 42 Slow Sync 42 Focus area Center AF 45 Multi AF 45 Tracking AF 45 Focus distance Macro 43 Normal (AF) 43 Format 79 Frame guide 32 Frame rate 34 Function button 14 Function description 78 Digital Image Stabilization(DIS) 30 Digital zoom 23 Disconnecting the camera 73 DIS mode 30 Display brightness 78 Display type 21 DPOF 67 E Editing 64 Enlarging 60 Error messages 83 Exposure 49 F Face detection Blink Detection 48 Normal 46 Self-Portrait 47 Smile Shot 47 Beauty Shot mode 31 Blink detection 48 Burst Auto Exposure Bracket (AEB) 52 Continuous 52 Motion capture 52 C Camera shake 24 Capturing an image from a video 62 Cleaning Body 84 Display 84 Lens 84 D Date/Time Set 79 Date Type 79 Deleting files 59 A ACB in Playback mode 66 in Shooting mode 49 Adjusting Brightness 66 Contrast in Playback mode 66 in Shooting mode 54 Saturation in Playback mode 66 in Shooting mode 54 Sharpness 54 AF Lamp 80 AF Sound 78 Aperture 33 Auto Contrast Balance (ACB) 49 B Battery Charging 89 Life 88 Specifications 88 IndexAppendixes 104 Q Quick View 78 R Recording Video 34 Voice memo 36 Red-eye in Playback mode 66 in Shooting mode 41 Reset 79 Resizing 64 Resolution Photo 38 Video 38 RGB tone in Playback mode 65 in Shooting mode 53 Rotating 64 N Navigation button 14 Night mode 33 O Open Source License 81 P Photo quality 38 Photo styles in Playback mode 65 in Shooting mode 53 PictBridge 75 Playback button 16 Playback mode 56 Printing photos 75 Print order 67 Program mode 29 Protecting files 59 L Light source (White balance) 50 Long time shutter 33 M Macro 43 Maintenance 84 Memory card Capacity 87 MENU button 14 Metering Center-weighted 50 Multi 50 Spot 50 MJPEG (Motion JPEG) 96 MODE button 14 Motion Timer 40 Muting Video 34 G Glossary 98 H Half-pressing 6 I Icons 18 Image adjust ACB 66 add noise 66 brightness 66 contrast 66 face retouch 66 red-eye fix 66 saturation 66 Imprint 80 Intelli-studio 71 ISO speed 42 IndexAppendixes 105 W White Balance 50 Z Zoom button 14 Zooming 23 T Timer 39 Tracking focus 45 Transferring files for Mac 74 for Windows 69 V Video Playing 62 Recording 34 Video Out 80 Viewing files as thumbnails 58 by category 57 on TV 68 Slide show 61 Voice memo Playing 63 Recording 36 Volume 78 S Scene mode 31 Self-Portrait 47 Service center 92 Settings Accessing 77 Camera 79 Display 78 Sound 78 Shooting mode DIS 30 Program 29 Scene 31 Smart Auto 27 Shutter speed 33 Slide show 61 Smart Album 57 Smart Auto mode 27 Smile shot 47 Start image 64, 78 IndexPlease refer to the warranty that came with your product or visit our website www.samsung.com for after-sales service or inquiries. GT-I9300 user manualUsing this manual 2 Using this manual Thank you for choosing this Samsung mobile device. This device will provide you with high-quality mobile communication and entertainment based on Samsung’s exceptional technology and high standards. This manual has been specially designed to guide you through the functions and features of your device. Read me first ● Before using your device, read the entire manual and all safety instructions to ensure safe and proper use. ● The descriptions in this manual are based on the default settings of your device. ● The images and screenshots used in this manual may differ from the actual product. ● The contents of this manual may differ from the product, or from software provided by service providers or carriers, and are subject to change without prior notice. Access the Samsung website (www.samsung.com) for the latest version of the manual. ● Available features and additional services may vary by device, software, or service provider. ● Formatting and delivery of this manual is based on Android operating systems and may vary depending on the user’s operating system. ● Applications on this device may perform differently from comparable computer applications and may not include all functions available in the computer version.Using this manual 3 ● Applications and their functions may vary by region or hardware specifications. Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by third-party applications. ● Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the operating system may cause your device or applications to work improperly. ● You can upgrade your device’s software by accessing the Samsung website (www.samsung.com). ● Software, audio, wallpapers, and images provided in this device are licensed for limited use between Samsung and their respective owners. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Samsung is not liable for such copyright infringement by users. ● You may incur additional charges for data services, such as messaging, uploading and downloading, auto-syncing, or using location services. To avoid additional charges, select an appropriate data tariff plan. For details, contact your service provider. ● Please keep this manual for future reference.Using this manual 4 Instructional icons Before you start, familiarise yourself with the icons used in this manual: Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Caution—situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment Note—notes, usage tips, or additional information ► Refer to—pages with related information; for example: ► p. 12 (represents “refer to page 12”) → Followed by—the order of options or menus you must select to perform a step; for example: In the application list, select Settings→ Sound→ Device ringtone (represents Settings, followed by Sound, followed by Device ringtone) Copyright Copyright © 2012 Samsung Electronics This manual is protected under international copyright laws. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics.Using this manual 5 Trademarks ● SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics. ● The Android logo, Google™, Google Maps™, Google Mail™, YouTube™, Google Play™ Store, Google Latitude™, and Google Talk™ are trademarks of Google, Inc. ● Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide. ● Windows Media Player® is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation. ● Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. ● DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under licence. ● All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.Using this manual 6 ABOUT DIVX VIDEO DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.Contents 7 Assembling ........................................................ 11 Unpack ................................................................................................. 11 Device layout ..................................................................................... 12 Keys ........................................................................................................ 14 Insert the SIM or USIM card and the battery ........................ 15 Charge the battery .......................................................................... 17 Insert a memory card (optional) ................................................ 21 Getting started .................................................. 23 Turn on or off your device ............................................................ 23 Use the touch screen ...................................................................... 24 Use motions ....................................................................................... 26 Lock or unlock the touch screen and the keys .................... 30 Get to know the Home screen ................................................... 31 Access applications ......................................................................... 36 Launch multiple applications ..................................................... 38 Customise your device .................................................................. 38 Enter text ............................................................................................. 44 Communication ................................................. 48 Calling ................................................................................................... 48 Messages ............................................................................................. 59 Google Mail ........................................................................................ 61 Email ...................................................................................................... 63 Talk ......................................................................................................... 66 ChatON ................................................................................................. 67 Messenger ........................................................................................... 67 Google+ ............................................................................................... 68 ContentsContents 8 Entertainment.................................................... 69 Camera ................................................................................................. 69 Video Player ........................................................................................ 79 Gallery ................................................................................................... 82 Music Player ........................................................................................ 85 Music Hub ........................................................................................... 89 FM Radio .............................................................................................. 89 Personal information ........................................ 93 Contacts ............................................................................................... 93 S Planner .............................................................................................. 96 S Memo ................................................................................................ 98 Voice Recorder ................................................................................ 101 Web and GPS-based services..........................103 Internet ............................................................................................... 103 Flipboard ........................................................................................... 107 Game Hub ......................................................................................... 107 Latitude .............................................................................................. 108 Maps .................................................................................................... 108 More Services .................................................................................. 110 Navigation ......................................................................................... 110 Local ..................................................................................................... 111 Play Store ........................................................................................... 111 Samsung Apps ................................................................................ 112 S Suggest ........................................................................................... 113 YouTube ............................................................................................. 113 Voice Search ..................................................................................... 115 Video Hub ......................................................................................... 115Contents 9 Connectivity.....................................................116 USB connections ............................................................................ 116 Wi-Fi ..................................................................................................... 118 Wi-Fi Direct ........................................................................................ 120 AllShare Cast .................................................................................... 122 AllShare Play ..................................................................................... 123 Mobile network sharing .............................................................. 126 Bluetooth ........................................................................................... 128 GPS ....................................................................................................... 130 VPN connections ............................................................................ 131 Tools..................................................................134 Calculator .......................................................................................... 134 Clock .................................................................................................... 134 Downloads ........................................................................................ 137 Dropbox ............................................................................................. 137 Help ...................................................................................................... 139 My Files ............................................................................................... 139 NFC ....................................................................................................... 140 Google ................................................................................................ 143 SIM Toolkit ......................................................................................... 143 S Voice ................................................................................................. 143 Settings ............................................................144 Access the setting options ......................................................... 144 Wi-Fi ..................................................................................................... 144 Bluetooth ........................................................................................... 144 Data usage ........................................................................................ 144 More settings ................................................................................... 145 Home screen mode ...................................................................... 147Contents 10 Blocking mode ................................................................................ 148 Sound .................................................................................................. 148 Display ................................................................................................ 149 Storage ............................................................................................... 150 Power saving .................................................................................... 151 Battery ................................................................................................ 151 Applications manager ................................................................. 151 Location services ............................................................................ 151 Lock screen ....................................................................................... 152 Security ............................................................................................... 153 Language and input ..................................................................... 155 Back up and reset ........................................................................... 159 Add account ..................................................................................... 159 Motion ................................................................................................ 159 Accessory ........................................................................................... 160 Date and time .................................................................................. 161 Accessibility ...................................................................................... 162 Developer options ......................................................................... 163 About device .................................................................................... 164 Troubleshooting..............................................165 Safety information ..........................................171 Index.................................................................182Assembling 11 Assembling Unpack Check your product box for the following items: ● Mobile device ● Battery ● Quick start guide Use only Samsung-approved software. Pirated or illegal software may cause damage or malfunctions that are not covered by your manufacturer's warranty. ● The items supplied with your device and available accessories may vary depending on your region or service provider. ● You can buy additional accessories from your local Samsung retailer. ● The supplied items are designed only for your device and may not be compatible with other devices. ● Other accessories may not be compatible with your device. ● Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Unapproved accessories may cause your device to malfunction.Assembling 12 Device layout › Front view 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 6 4 5 Number Function 1 Service light 2 Earpiece 3 Volume key 4 Home key 5 Option key 6 Multifunction jack 7 Front camera lens 8 Proximity/Light sensor 9 Touch screen 10 Back key 11 MicrophoneAssembling 13 › Rear view 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 12 13 Number Function 12 Microphone 1 13 GPS antenna 2 14 Flash 15 Power/Reset/Lock key 16 Rear camera lens 17 Headset jack 18 Speaker 19 Back cover 20 Main antenna 1. Active only when you use the speakerphone feature or record videos. 2. Do not touch or cover the area around the antenna with your hands or other objects while using the GPS functions.Assembling 14 Keys Key Function Power/ Reset 1 / Lock Turn on the device (press and hold); Access the device options (press and hold); Reset the device (press and hold for 8-10 seconds); Turn off and lock the touch screen or turn it on. Option Open the list of options available on the current screen; On the Home screen, launch the search application (press and hold); Open the search input window while using some applications (press and hold). Home Return to the Home screen; Open the list of recent applications (press and hold); Launch the S Voice application (press twice). Back Return to the previous screen. Volume Adjust the device’s volume. 1. If your device experiences fatal errors, hanging, or freezing, you may need to reset the device to regain functionality.Assembling 15 Insert the SIM or USIM card and the battery When you subscribe to a cellular service, you will receive a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card, with subscription details, such as your personal identification number (PIN) and optional services. To use UMTS or HSDPA services, you can purchase a Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) card. You can use microSIM cards only. 1 Remove the back cover. Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you remove the back cover. Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively. Doing so may damage the cover.Assembling 16 2 Insert the SIM or USIM card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards. Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. If the memory card becomes lodged in the SIM card slot, you must take your device to a Samsung Service Centre to have the memory card removed. 3 Insert the battery. 4 Replace the back cover.Assembling 17 Charge the battery Before using the device for the first time or when the battery has been unused for an extended period, you must charge the battery. You can charge the battery with a travel adapter or by connecting the device to a computer with a USB cable. Use only Samsung-approved chargers and cables. Unapproved chargers or cables may cause batteries to explode or damage your device. ● When your battery is low, the device will emit a warning tone and show a low battery message. Recharge your battery to continue using your device. ● If the battery is completely discharged, you cannot turn on the device, even with the travel adapter connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for a while before you try to turn on the device. ● If you use multiple applications at once, network applications, or applications that need a connection to another device, the battery will drain quickly. To avoid disconnecting from the network or losing power during a data transfer, always use these applications after fully charging the battery.Assembling 18 › Charge with a travel adapter 1 Plug the small end of the travel adapter into the multifunction jack. Connecting the travel adapter improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty. 2 Plug the large end of the travel adapter into an electrical socket. ● If the device receives an unstable power supply while charging, the touch screen may not function. If this happens, unplug the travel adapter from the device. ● The device may heat up while charging. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance. ● If your device is not charging properly, take your device and the charger to a Samsung Service Centre.Assembling 19 3 When the battery is fully charged, first unplug the travel adapter from the device, and then from the electrical socket. Do not remove the battery while the device is connected to the travel adapter. Doing so may damage the device. To save energy, unplug the travel adapter when not in use. The travel adapter does not have a power switch, so you must unplug the travel adapter from the electrical socket when not in use to avoid wasting power. The device should remain close to the electrical socket while charging. About the battery charging icons When you charge the battery while the device is off, the following icons will show the current battery charging status: Charging Fully chargedAssembling 20 › Charge with a USB cable Before charging, ensure that your computer is turned on. 1 Plug the small end (micro-USB) of the USB cable into the multifunction jack. 2 Plug the large end of the USB cable into a USB port on a computer. Depending on the type of the USB cable you are using, it may take some time before charging begins. 3 When the battery is fully charged, first unplug the USB cable from the device, and then from the computer. › Reduce the battery consumption Your device provides options that help you save battery power. By customising these options and deactivating features in the background, you can use the device longer between charges: ● Activate Power saving mode. ● When you are not using your device, switch to Sleep mode by pressing the Power key. ● Close unnecessary applications with the task manager. ● Deactivate the Bluetooth feature. ● Deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. ● Deactivate auto-syncing of applications. ● Decrease the backlight time. ● Decrease the brightness of the display.Assembling 21 Insert a memory card (optional) Your device accepts memory cards with maximum capacities of 64 GB. Depending on the memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your device. Samsung uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with your device. Using an incompatible memory card may damage your device or the memory card. It may also corrupt data saved on the memory card. ● Your device supports only the FAT file structure for memory cards. If you insert a memory card formatted with a different file structure, your device will ask you to reformat the memory card. ● Frequent writing and erasing of data will shorten the lifespan of your memory cards. ● When you insert a memory card into your device, the memory card’s file directory will appear in the extSdCard folder. 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards.Assembling 22 3 Push the memory card into the memory card slot until it locks in place. 4 Replace the back cover. › Remove a memory card Ensure that the device is not currently accessing the memory card. 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Storage→ Unmount SD card→ OK. 2 Remove the back cover. 3 Push the memory card gently until it disengages from the device. 4 Remove the memory card. 5 Replace the back cover. Do not remove a memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information, as this could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card or device. › Format a memory card Formatting your memory card on a computer may cause incompatibilities with your device. Format the memory card only on the device. In the application list, select Settings→ Storage→ Format SD card→ Format SD card→ Erase everything. Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all important data. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss of data resulting from user actions.23 Getting started Getting started Turn on or off your device 1 Press and hold the Power key. 2 Enter the PIN supplied with your SIM or USIM card and select OK (if necessary). If you are turning on your device for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to set up your device. You must sign in to Google or create a Google account to use applications that interact with the Google server. To turn off your device, press and hold the Power key, and then select Power off→ OK. ● Follow all posted warnings and directions from approved personnel in areas where the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals. ● To use only your device’s non-network features, switch to Flight mode. ► p. 14524 Getting started Use the touch screen Your device’s touch screen lets you easily select items or perform functions. Learn basic actions for using the touch screen. ● Do not press the touch screen with your fingertips, or use sharp tools on the touch screen. Doing so may damage the touch screen or cause it to malfunction. ● Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices. Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction. ● Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with liquids. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to liquids. ● Leaving the touch screen idle for extended periods may result in afterimages (screen burn-in) or ghosting. Turn off the touch screen when you do not use the device. ● For optimal use of the touch screen, remove the screen protection film before using your device. ● Your touch screen has a layer that detects small electrical charges emitted by the human body. For best performance, tap the touch screen with your fingertip. The touch screen will not react to touches from sharp objects, such as a stylus or pen.25 Getting started Control your touch screen with the following actions: Tap Touch once to select or launch a menu, option, or application. Tap and hold Tap an item and hold it for more than 2 seconds. Drag Tap an item and move it to a new location. Double-tap Tap an item twice quickly.26 Getting started Flick Briskly scroll up, down, left, or right to move through lists or screens. Pinch Place two of your fingers far apart, and then pinch them together. ● Your device turns off the touch screen when you do not use it for a specified period. To turn on the screen, press the Power key or the Home key. ● You can set the length of time that the device waits before turning off the screen. In the application list, select Settings→ Display→ Screen timeout. Use motions Built-in motion recognition allows you to perform actions by moving your device or making gestures with your hands. To use these functions, you must first activate the motion recognition feature. In the application list, select Settings→ Motion.27 Getting started Excessive shaking or impact the device may result in unintended inputs. To learn how to control motions properly, in the application list, select Settings→ Motion→ Learn about motions. ► p. 160 Pick up Pick up the device after not using it for a while or when the screen has turned off. The device will vibrate if you have missed calls or new messages. Hold to ear While viewing call, message, or contact details, pick up and hold the device to your ear to make a voice call. Tilt While holding the device with two hands, tap and hold two points on the screen, and then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out when viewing images or browsing webpages.28 Getting started Pan to move While holding an item, slide the device to the left or right to move the item to another page on the Home screen or the application list. Pan to browse When an image is zoomed in, tap and hold a point on the screen, and then slide the device in any direction to scroll through the image. Shake ● Shake your device to search for Bluetooth devices or Kies air devices. ● Shake your device to update the list of email messages or information from Yahoo News, Yahoo Finance, or AccuWeather. Updates will not work for widgets on the Home screen.29 Getting started Double-tap Double-tap the device to move to the top of a list of contacts or email messages. Turn over Place the device face down to mute ringtones, pause media playback, or mute the FM radio. Hand sweep Sweep your hand to the left or right across the screen to capture a screenshot. You cannot capture a screenshot while using some applications. Palm touch Touch the screen with your palm to pause media playback or mute the FM radio.30 Getting started Rotate While the screen is locked, tap and hold the screen, and then rotate the device to the landscape view to launch the camera (when the camera shortcut is activated). ► p. 152 Lock or unlock the touch screen and the keys When you do not use the device for a specified period, your device turns off the touch screen and locks the touch screen and the keys automatically to prevent unintended operations. To lock the touch screen and the keys manually, press the Power key. To unlock them, turn on the screen by pressing the Power key or the Home key, and then flick your finger in any direction. You can use the motion unlock for unlocking the screen. In the application list, select Settings→ Lock screen→ Screen lock→ Motion→ OK. To unlock the screen with the motion unlock, tap and hold a point on the screen, and then tilt the device forwards. You can activate the screen lock feature to prevent others from using or accessing your personal data and information saved in your device. ► p. 4131 Getting started Get to know the Home screen From the Home screen, you can view your device’s status and access applications. The Home screen has multiple panels. Scroll left or right to view the panels on the Home screen. You can also select one of the dots at the bottom of the screen to move directly to the corresponding panel. ›Indicator icons Icons shown on the display may vary depending on your region or service provider. Icon Definition No signal Signal strength Connected to GPRS network Connected to EDGE network Connected to HSDPA network Wi-Fi AP connected Bluetooth feature activated GPS-based services in use Call in progress32 Getting started Icon Definition Missed call Connected to computer No SIM or USIM card New message Alarm activated Roaming (outside of service area) Silent mode activated (vibrate) Silent mode activated (mute) Flight mode activated Error occurred or caution required Battery power level ›Use the notifications panel To open the notifications panel, tap the indicator icons area and drag it downwards. To hide the panel, drag the bottom of the panel upwards. From the notifications panel, you can view your device’s current status and use the following options: ● Wi-Fi: Activate or deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. ► p. 118 ● GPS: Activate or deactivate the GPS feature. ► p. 130 ● Sound: Activate or deactivate Silent mode. You can mute your device or set it to vibrate in Silent mode. ● Screen rotation: Allow or prevent the interface from rotating when you rotate the device.33 Getting started ● Power saving: Activate or deactivate Power saving mode. ● Blocking mode: Activate or deactivate Blocking mode. In Blocking mode, your device will block all notifications. ● Mobile data: Activate or deactivate the data connection. ● Bluetooth: Activate or deactivate the Bluetooth feature. ► p. 128 ● Sync: Activate or deactivate auto-syncing of applications. The options available may vary depending on your region or service provider. › Change the Home screen mode The Home screen has basic and easy modes. In easy mode, you can easily access your favourite contacts, applications, and settings by adding shortcuts to the Home screen. To change the Home screen mode, in the application list, select Settings→ Home screen mode→ a mode. ›Move an item on the Home screen Tap and hold an item, and then drag it to a new location.34 Getting started › Remove an item from the Home screen Tap and hold an item, and then drag it to the rubbish bin. › Customise the quick access panel You can customise the quick access panel at the bottom of the Home screen by adding or removing application shortcuts. ● To remove an application icon, tap and hold the icon, and then drag it to the rubbish bin. ● To add an application shortcut, tap and hold a new application shortcut on the Home screen, and then drag it to the empty location. › Add or remove a panel from the Home screen You can add or remove Home screen panels to organise widgets. 1 On the Home screen, place two fingers on the screen and pinch them together to switch to Edit mode. 2 Add, remove, or reorganise panels: ● To remove a panel, tap and hold the panel’s thumbnail image, and then drag it to the rubbish bin. ● To add a new panel, select .35 Getting started ● To set the main panel of the Home screen, select . ● To change the order of panels, tap and hold the panel’s thumbnail image, and then drag it to a new location. 3 Press the Back key to return to the previous screen. ›Use widgets Widgets are small applications that provide convenient functions and information on your Home screen. ● Some widgets connect to web services. Using a webbased widget may result in additional charges. ● The widgets available may vary depending on your region or service provider. Add a widget to the Home screen 1 In the application list, select Widgets to open the widget panel. 2 Scroll left or right on the widget panel to find a widget. 3 Tap and hold a widget to add it to the Home screen. Add a Settings shortcut to the Home screen You can create shortcuts to frequently-used setting options on the Home screen. 1 In the application list, select Widgets to open the widget panel. 2 Tap and hold Settings shortcut, and release it on the Home screen. 3 Select a setting option, such as S Beam or Wi-Fi.36 Getting started Access applications Launch applications and take full advantage of features on your device. You can reorganise the application list to match your preferences, or download applications from the Internet to enhance your device’s functionality. 1 On the Home screen, select Apps to access the application list. 2 Scroll left or right to another screen. You can also select one of the dots at the bottom of the screen to move directly to the corresponding screen. 3 Select an application. 4 Press the Back key to return to the previous screen. Press the Home key to return to the Home screen. ● You can add an application shortcut to the Home screen by tapping and holding an icon in the application list. ● If you rotate the device while using some features, the interface will rotate as well. To prevent the interface from rotating, select Settings→ Display→ Autorotate screen. ● While using the device, you can capture a screenshot by pressing and holding the Home key and the Power key simultaneously. The image will be saved in My Files→ sdcard0→ Pictures→ Screenshots. › Organise applications You can change the order of applications in the application list or group them into categories.37 Getting started 1 In the application list, press the Option key and select Edit. 2 Tap and hold an application icon. 3 Organise applications: ● To move the application, drag it to a new location. ● To add the application to a new folder, drag it to Create folder. ● To move the application to a new panel, drag it to Create page. ● To uninstall the application, drag it to Uninstall. When you drag the application icon to App info, you can view information about the application. 4 Select Save. ›Download an application 1 In the application list, select More Services. 2 Search for an application and download it to the device. You can also download various applications from Play Store, Samsung Apps, and S Suggest. ›Uninstall an application 1 In the application list, press the Option key and select Uninstall. 2 Select on an application icon and then select OK. You can uninstall only the applications that you have downloaded. 38 Getting started › Access recently-used applications 1 Press and hold the Home key to view the applications you have accessed recently. 2 Select an application. Launch multiple applications Your device allows you to multitask by running multiple applications at the same time. To launch multiple applications, press the Home key while using an application. Then select another application to launch from the Home screen. ›Manage applications You can manage multiple applications with the task manager. 1 Press and hold the Home key, and then select → Active applications. The task manager launches and shows active applications. 2 Control active applications: ● To switch applications, select one from the list. ● To close an application, select End. ● To close all active applications, select End all. Customise your device Get more from your device by changing settings to match your preferences.39 Getting started › Change the display language 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Language and input→ Language. 2 Select a language. › Turn on or off the touch tones In the application list, select Settings→ Sound→ Touch sounds. › Adjust the device’s volume 1 Press the Volume key up or down. 2 Select and drag the sliders to adjust the volume level for each sound. › Change your call ringtone 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Sound→ Device ringtone. 2 Select a ringtone → OK. › Switch to Silent mode To mute or unmute your device, do one of the following: ● Tap the indicator icons area and drag it downwards to open the notifications panel, and then select Sound. ● Press and hold the Power key, and then select Mute or Vibrate. ● In the application list, select Phone→ Keypad, and then tap and hold .40 Getting started › Select a wallpaper for the Home screen 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Display→ Wallpaper→ Home screen. 2 Select an image folder → an image. › Change the display font 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Display→ Font style. 2 Select a font → Yes. › Adjust the brightness of the display Your device includes a light sensor, which can detect the level of ambient light and adjust the brightness of the display automatically. You can also manually set the brightness of the display. The brightness of the display will affect how quickly the device consumes battery power. Set your device to adjust the brightness automatically 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Display→ Brightness. 2 Select the tick box next to Automatic brightness. 3 Select OK. The device will increase the brightness in bright surroundings and decrease the brightness in dim surroundings automatically.41 Getting started Adjust the brightness manually 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Display→ Brightness. 2 Clear the tick box next to Automatic brightness. 3 Drag the slider to the left or right. 4 Select OK. › Lock your device You can lock your device by activating the screen lock feature. ● If you forget your password, take your device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it. ● Samsung is not responsible for the loss of passwords or private information, or other damages caused by illegal software. Set a face detection unlock 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Lock screen→ Screen lock→ Face unlock. 2 Select Next→ Set it up→ Continue. 3 Adjust the device to fit your face inside the figure. 4 When your face is captured correctly, select Continue. 5 Complete the setup of the secondary unlock PIN or pattern. Set a face and voice recognition unlock 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Lock screen→ Screen lock→ Face and voice. 2 Select Next→ Set it up→ Continue.42 Getting started 3 Adjust the device to fit your face inside the figure. 4 When your face is captured correctly, select Continue. 5 Select . 6 Say a word or phrase to use as an unlock command 4 times. 7 Select Done. 8 Complete the setup of the secondary unlock PIN or pattern. Set an unlock pattern 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Lock screen→ Screen lock→ Pattern. 2 View the on-screen instructions and the example pattern, and then select Next. 3 Draw a pattern to connect at least 4 dots and select Continue. 4 Draw the pattern again to confirm and select Confirm. 5 Complete the setup of the backup PIN. If you forget your unlock pattern, you can deactivate the screen lock feature with a backup PIN. Set an unlock PIN 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Lock screen→ Screen lock→ PIN. 2 Enter a new PIN and select Continue. 3 Enter the PIN again and select OK.43 Getting started Set an unlock password 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Lock screen→ Screen lock→ Password. 2 Enter a new password (alphanumeric) and select Continue. 3 Enter the password again and select OK. › Lock your SIM or USIM card You can lock your device with the PIN that is supplied with your SIM or USIM card. Once the SIM or USIM lock is enabled, you must enter the PIN each time you turn on the device or access applications that require the PIN. 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Security→ Set up SIM card lock→ Lock SIM card. 2 Enter your PIN and select OK. ● If you enter an incorrect PIN too many times, your SIM or USIM card will be blocked. You must enter a PIN unlock key (PUK) to unblock the SIM or USIM card. ● If you block your SIM or USIM card by entering an incorrect PUK, take the SIM or USIM card to your service provider to unblock it. › Activate the Find my mobile feature When someone inserts a new SIM or USIM card into your lost or stolen device, the Find my mobile feature will send the contact number to your specified recipients automatically, so that you can locate and recover your device. To use this feature, you must create a Samsung account for controlling the device remotely via the Internet.44 Getting started 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Security→ SIM Change Alert. 2 Select Sign in. To create a Samsung account, select Create new account. 3 Enter the email address and password for your Samsung account, and then select Sign in. 4 Drag the SIM Change Alert switch to the right. 5 Select Alert message. 6 Enter the text message that will be sent to the recipients and select OK. 7 Add recipients: ● Select Create and enter phone numbers manually, including the country code and the + symbol. ● Select phone numbers from your contact list by selecting Contacts. 8 Select Save. Enter text You can enter text by speaking words into the microphone, by selecting characters on the virtual keypad, or by writing on the screen. Text entry is not supported in some languages. To enter text, you must change the input language to one of the supported languages. › Change the text input method 1 From a text field, tap the indicator icons area and drag it downwards to open the notifications panel. 2 Select Choose input method→ a text input method.45 Getting started › Enter text with the Google voice input feature 1 Speak your text into the microphone. 2 When you are finished, select . To add input languages for voice recognition, select the language → Add more languages. › Enter text with the Samsung keypad 1 From a text field, tap the indicator icons area and drag it downwards to open the notifications panel. 2 Select Choose input method→ Set up input methods, and then select next to Samsung keyboard→ Portrait keyboard types→ a keypad type. 3 Enter text by selecting alphanumeric keys. When entering text, rotate the device to view the QWERTY keypad in widescreen. Select the virtual keys as necessary to enter your text. You can also use the following keys: 7 Number Function 1 Change the case. 2 Switch text input modes.46 Getting started Number Function 3 Access the keypad settings; Tap and hold to switch to Handwriting mode, enter text by voice, or access the clipboard. 4 Clear your input. 5 Start a new line. 6 Insert a full stop; Open the symbol panel (tap and hold). 7 Insert a space. When Predictive text (XT9) mode is activated, you can use continuous input, which allows you to enter text by sweeping on the keypad. ► p. 156 When entering text with the 3x4 keypad, you can use the following modes: Mode Function ABC 1. Select to switch to ABC mode. 2. Select a corresponding virtual key until the appropriate character appears. Number 1. Select to switch to Number mode. 2. Select a number. You can enter numbers by tapping and holding a virtual key in ABC mode. Symbol 1. Select to switch to Symbol mode. 2. Select ◄ or ► to scroll to a symbol set. 3. Select a symbol.47 Getting started › Copy and paste text From a text field, you can copy and paste text to another application. 1 Tap and hold a passage of text. 2 Drag or to select the text to be copied. 3 Select or to add the text to the clipboard. 4 In another application, place the cursor at the point where the text will be inserted. 5 Select → Paste to insert the text from the clipboard into the text field.Communication 48 Communication Calling Learn to use calling functions, such as making and answering calls, using options available during a call, or customising and using call-related features. ● To prevent accidental inputs, turn on the proximity sensor to lock the touch screen when you hold the device near your face. ► p. 57 ● Static electricity discharged from your body or clothing may interfere with the proximity sensor during a call. ›Make a call 1 In the application list, select Phone→ Keypad, and then enter an area code and a phone number. 2 Select to make a voice call. To make a video call, select . 3 Select an application to use for making the call (if necessary). 4 Select End call to end the call. ● You can save numbers that you call frequently in the contact list. ► p. 93 ● To access the call log and redial numbers you have called recently, select Phone→ Logs.Communication 49 › Answer a call 1 During an incoming call, select and then drag your finger outside of the large circle. To mute the ringtone, press the Volume key. 2 Select End call to end the call. › Reject a call During an incoming call, select and then drag your finger outside of the large circle. To send a message to the caller when you reject a call, drag the reject message bar at the bottom of the screen upwards. You can select one of several preset messages or create your own messages. ► p. 56 ›Make an international call 1 In the application list, select Phone→ Keypad, and then tap and hold to insert the + character. 2 Enter a complete number (country code, area code, and phone number). 3 Select to dial the number. ›Use a headset Connect a headset to your device to answer and control calls conveniently. ● To answer a call, press the headset button. ● To reject a call, press and hold the headset button.Communication 50 ● To place a call on hold or retrieve a held call, press and hold the headset button. ● To end a call, press the headset button. ›Use options during a voice call You can use the following options during a voice call: The options available may vary depending on your region or service provider. ● To adjust the voice volume, press the Volume key up or down. ● To place a call on hold, select . To retrieve a held call, select . ● To dial a second call, select Add call, and then dial a new number. ● To switch between two calls, select Swap. ● To answer a second call, select and then drag your finger outside of the large circle when a call waiting tone sounds. The first call is placed on hold automatically. You must subscribe to the call waiting service to use this feature. ● To open the keypad, select Keypad. ● To activate the speakerphone feature, select Speaker. In noisy environments, you may have difficulty hearing some calls while using the speakerphone feature. For better audio performance, use the normal phone mode. ● To turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you, select Mute. ● To converse with the other party via a Bluetooth headset, select Headset.Communication 51 ● To make a multiparty call (conference call), make or answer a second call, and then select Merge when connected to the second party. Repeat this to add more parties. You must subscribe to the multiparty call service to use this feature. ● To open the contact list, press the Option key and select Contacts. ● To create a memo, press the Option key and select Memo. ● To deactivate the noise reduction feature that removes background noise so that the other party can hear you more clearly, press the Option key and select Noise reduction off. ● To select an equaliser option for use during a call, press the Option key and select In-call sound EQ. ● To connect the current party with the party placed on hold, press the Option key and select Transfer. You will be disconnected from both parties. ›Use options during a video call You can use the following options while a video call is in progress: The options available may vary depending on your region or service provider. ● To switch between the front and rear camera, select Switch camera. ● To turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you, select Mute. ● To hide your image from the other party, press the Option key and select Hide me. ● To select an image to be shown to the other party, press the Option key and select Outgoing image.Communication 52 ● To open the keypad, press the Option key and select Keypad. ● To converse with the other party via a Bluetooth headset, press the Option key and select Switch to headset. ● To deactivate the speakerphone feature, press the Option key and select Speaker off. ● To apply emotional icons to your image, press the Option key and select Animated emotions. ● To apply decorative icons to your image, press the Option key and select Theme view. ● To change the view mode to the cartoon view, press the Option key and select Enable cartoon view. ● Tap and hold the other party’s image to access the following options: - To capture the other party’s image, select Capture image. - To record a video of the other party’s image, select Record video. It is illegal in many areas to record a call without permission. Always ask the other party for permission before recording a call. › View and dial a missed call Your device will show missed calls. To return the call, tap the indicator icons area and drag it downwards to open the notifications panel, and then select the missed call notification.Communication 53 › Set auto rejection Use auto rejection to reject calls from specified numbers automatically. 1 In the application list, select Phone. 2 Press the Option key and select Call settings→ Call rejection. 3 Drag the Auto reject mode switch to the right. 4 Select Auto reject mode→ an option. Option Function All numbers Reject all calls. Auto reject numbers Reject calls from phone numbers on the auto reject list. 5 Select Auto reject list. 6 Select Create. 7 Enter a number and select Save. You can set the criteria for the number. 8 To add more numbers, repeat steps 6-7. › Activate Fixed Dialling Number (FDN) mode In FDN mode, your device will prevent outgoing calls to any number that is not saved in the FDN list on your SIM or USIM card. 1 In the application list, select Phone. 2 Press the Option key and select Call settings→ Additional settings→ Fixed Dialling Numbers.Communication 54 3 Select Enable FDN. 4 Enter the PIN2 supplied with your SIM or USIM card and select OK. 5 Select FDN list and add contacts. › Set call diverting Call diverting is a network feature that sends incoming calls to a specified number. You can set this feature separately for several conditions. 1 In the application list, select Phone. 2 Press the Option key and select Call settings→ Call forwarding→ a call type. 3 Select a condition. 4 Enter a number to which calls will be forwarded and select Enable. Your setting will be sent to the network. › Set call barring Call barring is a network feature that restricts certain types of calling or prevents others from making calls with your device. 1 In the application list, select Phone. 2 Press the Option key and select Call settings→ Additional settings→ Call barring→ a call type. 3 Select a call barring option. 4 Enter a call barring password and select OK. Your setting will be sent to the network.Communication 55 › Set call waiting Call waiting is a network feature that alerts you to an incoming call while you are on another call. This feature is available only for voice calls. 1 In the application list, select Phone. 2 Press the Option key and select Call settings→ Additional settings→ Call waiting. Your setting will be sent to the network. › View a call or message log You can view logs of calls and messages that are filtered by type. 1 In the application list, select Phone→ Logs. 2 Press the Option key and select View by→ an option. You can make a call or send a message to a contact by scrolling left or right on a log entry. 3 Select a log entry to view its details. From the detail view, you can make a call, send a message to the number, or add the number to the contact list or the auto reject list. › Customise call settings 1 In the application list, select Phone. 2 Press the Option key and select Call settings.Communication 56 3 Change the following options: Option Function Call rejection Set to reject calls from specified phone numbers automatically. You can add phone numbers to the auto reject list. Set reject messages Add or edit the message that will be sent when you reject a call. Ringtone and keypad tones → Device ringtone Select a ringtone to alert you to incoming calls. Ringtone and keypad tones → Device vibration Add or select a vibration pattern. Ringtone and keypad tones → Incoming call vibration Set the device to vibrate and ring to alert you to incoming calls. Ringtone and keypad tones → Keytones Set the device to sound when you enter numbers on the dialling screen. Call alert → Call vibrations Set the device to vibrate when the other party answers or ends a call. Call alert → Call status tones Set the device to alert you to the call status during a call. Call alert → Alerts on call Set the device to alert you to events during a call. Call answering/ ending → Answering key Set to answer calls by pressing the Home key.Communication 57 Option Function Call answering/ ending → The power key ends calls Set to end a call when you press the Power key. Auto screen off during calls Set to turn on the proximity sensor during a call. Accessory settings for call → Automatic answering Set whether or not the device answers calls automatically after a specified period (available only when a headset is connected). Accessory settings for call → Automatic answering timer Select the length of time that the device waits before answering calls. Accessory settings for call → Outgoing call conditions Set to allow outgoing calls with a Bluetooth headset, even when your device is locked. Accessory settings for call → Outgoing call type Select the type of outgoing calls to make you use a Bluetooth headset. My call sound → My call sound setting Select an equaliser option for use during a call. My call sound → Personalise call sound Customise the equaliser settings for use with a headset. Use extra vol. for calls Set to show the volume key during a call.Communication 58 Option Function Increase volume in pocket Set the device to raise the ringtone volume when the device is in an enclosed, such as a bag or pocket. Call forwarding Set to send incoming calls to a specified number. Additional settings → Caller ID Display your caller ID to other parties for outgoing calls. Additional settings → Call barring Set to restrict calls by call type. Additional settings → Call waiting Set the device to alert you to incoming calls during a call. Additional settings → Auto redial Set to automatically redial a call that was not connected or that was cut off. Additional settings → Noise reduction Set to remove background noise so that the other party can hear you more clearly. Additional settings → Fixed Dialling Numbers Activate FDN mode to prevent calls to phone numbers that are not in the FDN list on the SIM or USIM card. Additional settings → Auto area code Set to insert a prefix (area or country code) automatically before a phone number. Video call image Select an alternative image to be shown to the other party. Use call fail options Set to attempt a voice call when a video call fails to connect.Communication 59 Option Function Voicemail service Select a voicemail service provider. Voicemail settings Enter the voicemail server number. You can obtain this number from your service provider. Ringtone Select a ringtone to alert you to new voicemails. Vibrate Set the device to vibrate when voicemails are received. Accounts Set to accept IP calls and set up your accounts for IP call services. Use Internet calling Set whether to use IP call services for all calls or only for IP calls. Messages Learn to create and send text (SMS) or multimedia (MMS) messages, and view or manage messages that you have sent or received. You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages while you are outside your home service area. For details, contact your service provider. › Send a text message 1 In the application list, select Messaging→ .Communication 60 2 Add recipients: ● Enter phone numbers manually and separate them with a semicolon or a comma. ● Select phone numbers from your call, message, or contact lists by selecting . 3 Select the text field and enter your message text. To insert emoticons, press the Option key and select Insert smiley. 4 To send the message, select . › Send a multimedia message 1 In the application list, select Messaging→ . 2 Add recipients: ● Enter phone numbers or email addresses manually and separate them with a semicolon or a comma. ● Select phone numbers or email addresses from your call, message, or contact lists by selecting . When you enter an email address, the device will convert the message to a multimedia message. 3 Select the text field and enter your message text. To insert emoticons, press the Option key and select Insert smiley. 4 Select and attach a file. 5 Press the Option key and select Add subject, and then enter a subject. 6 To send the message, select .Communication 61 › View a text or multimedia message 1 In the application list, select Messaging. Your messages are grouped by contact as a message thread. 2 Select a contact. 3 Select a multimedia message to view more details. › Listen to a voicemail message If you have set your device to divert missed calls to the voicemail server, callers may leave voicemail messages when you miss calls. 1 In the application list, select Phone→ Keypad, and then tap and hold . 2 Follow the instructions from the voicemail server. You must save the voicemail server number before accessing the voicemail server. Contact your service provider for this number. Google Mail Learn to send or view email messages via the Google Mail™ webmail service. ● This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. ● This feature may be labelled differently depending on your region or service provider.Communication 62 › Send an email message 1 In the application list, select Google Mail→ . 2 Select the recipient field and enter an email address. 3 Select the subject field and enter a subject. 4 Select the text field and enter your email text. 5 Press the Option key and select Attach file, and then attach a file. 6 To send the message, select . If you are offline or outside your service area, the message will be held in the message thread until you are online and inside your service area. › View an email message 1 In the application list, select Google Mail. 2 Select to update the message list. 3 Select an email message. From the message view, use the following options: ● To move to the next or previous message, scroll right or left. ● To add the message to the favourites list, select . ● To reply to the message, select . ● To reply to the message and include all recipients, select → Reply all. ● To forward the message to others, select → Forward. ● To archive the message, select . ● To delete the message, select . ● To add a label to the message, select . ● To mark the message as unread, select . ● To mark the message as important, press the Option key and select Mark as important.Communication 63 ● To hide the message, press the Option key and select Mute. To view hidden messages, select → All mail from the label list. ● To add the message to the spam list, press the Option key and select Report spam. ● To change the email settings, press the Option key and select Settings. ● To view an attachment, select VIEW. To save it to your device, select SAVE. Email Learn to send or view email messages via your personal or company email account. › Set up an email account 1 In the application list, select Email. 2 Enter your email address and password. 3 Select Next. To enter account details manually, select Manual setup. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions. When you are finished setting up the email account, email messages will be downloaded to your device. If you have created two or more accounts, you can switch between them. Select an account name at the top of the screen, and then select the account from which you want to retrieve messages.Communication 64 › Send an email message 1 In the application list, select Email→ . 2 Add recipients: ● Enter email addresses manually and separate them with a semicolon or a comma. ● Select email addresses from your message or contact lists by selecting . 3 Select the subject field and enter a subject. 4 Select the text field and enter your email text. 5 Select and attach a file. 6 To send the message, select . If you are offline or outside your service area, the message will be held in the message thread until you are online and inside your service area. › View an email message 1 In the application list, select Email. 2 Select to update the message list. 3 Select an email message. From the message view, use the following options: ● To move to the next or previous message, scroll right or left. ● To reply to the message, select . ● To reply to the message and include all recipients, select . ● To forward the message to others, select .Communication 65 ● To delete the message, select . ● To mark the message as important, select . ● To mark the message as unread, press the Option key and select Mark as unread. ● To move the message to another folder, press the Option key and select Move. ● To save the message to your device, press the Option key and select Save email. The message will be saved in My Files→ sdcard0→ Saved Email. ● To print the message via Wi-Fi or USB, press the Option key and select Print. Your device is compatible only with some Samsung printers. ● To create a new message, press the Option key and select Compose. ● To save the email addresses of the recipients to the phonebook as a group of contacts, press the Option key and select Save as group. ● To change the font size, press the Option key and select Font size. ● To change the email settings, press the Option key and select Settings. ● To save an attachment to your device, select the attachment tab → . The options available may vary depending on the email account.Communication 66 Talk Learn to send and receive instant messages to friends and family with the Google Talk™ instant messaging service. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. › Set your status 1 In the application list, select Talk. 2 Select a Google account. 3 Select your name at the top of your friend list. 4 Customise your status, image, and message. › Add a contact to your friend list 1 In the application list, select Talk→ . 2 Enter a friend’s email address, and then select DONE. When your friend accepts the invitation, he or she is added to your friend list. › Start a conversation 1 In the application list, select Talk. 2 Select a contact from the friend list. The conversation screen opens.Communication 67 3 Enter and send your message. ● To add more contacts to the conversation, press the Option key and select Add to chat. ● To switch between active conversations, scroll left or right. ● To use video chat, select . ● To use voice chat, select . 4 Press the Option key and select End chat to end the conversation. ChatON Learn to use ChatON to send and receive instant messages from any device that has a mobile phone number. 1 In the application list, select ChatON. If you are launching this application for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the account setup. 2 Enter and send your message. Messenger Learn to send and receive instant messages from friends and family with the Google+ messenger instant messaging service. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In the application list, select Messenger. If you are launching this application for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the account setup. 2 Enter and send your message.Communication 68 Google+ Learn to access Google’s social network service. You can create groups to send and receive instant messages and upload your photos. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In the application list, select Google+. If you are launching this application for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the account setup. 2 Select a social network feature.Entertainment 69 Entertainment Camera Learn how to take and view photos and videos. ● The camera turns off automatically when you do not use it for a specified period. ● The memory capacity may differ depending on the scene or shooting conditions. › Take a photo 1 In the application list, select Camera. 2 Aim the camera lens at the subject and make any necessary adjustments.Entertainment 70 Number Function 1 Change the camera settings. 2 View photos you have taken. 3 Take a photo. 4 Use camera shortcuts. ● : Change the effect mode. ● : Change the shooting mode. ► p. 72 ● : Change the flash setting: You can turn on or off the flash manually, or set the camera to use the flash when needed. ● : Switch to the front camera to take a photo of yourself. You can add or remove shortcuts to frequently-used options. ► p. 79 5 View the storage location. 6 Switch to the camcorder. To zoom in, place two fingers on the screen and slowly spread them apart. To zoom out, pinch them together. You can also zoom in or out with the Volume key. The zoom function may be unavailable when shooting in the highest resolution. 3 Tap where you want to focus on the preview screen. The focus frame moves to the place you tapped and changes to green when the subject is in focus. 4 Select to take a photo. The photo is saved automatically.Entertainment 71 After taking a photo, select the image viewer to view it. ● To view more photos, scroll left or right. ● To zoom in or out, place two fingers on the screen and slowly spread them apart or pinch them together. To return to the original size, double-tap the screen. ● To send the photo to others or share it, select . ● To start a slide show, select → Start slideshow. Tap the screen to stop the slide show. ● To delete the photo, select . ● To register the faces in the photo as face tags, press the Option key and select Face tag. ► p. 84 ● To add the photo to the clipboard, press the Option key and select Copy to clipboard. ● To rotate the photo anti-clockwise, press the Option key and select Rotate left. ● To rotate the photo clockwise, press the Option key and select Rotate right. ● To crop a section from the photo, press the Option key and select Crop. ● To edit the photo with the image editor, press the Option key and select Edit. ● To set the photo as your wallpaper or a contact image, press the Option key and select Set as. ● To send the photo to a person whose face is tagged in the photo, press the Option key and select Buddy photo share. ● To print the photo via Wi-Fi or USB, press the Option key and select Print. Your device is compatible only with some Samsung printers.Entertainment 72 ● To change the name of a file, press the Option key and select Rename. ● To search for devices that have media sharing activated, press the Option key and select Scan for nearby devices. ● To view photo details, press the Option key and select Details. › Change the shooting mode You can take photos with various shooting modes. To change the shooting mode, select → an option. Option Function Burst shot Take a series of photos of moving subjects. When you take photos with the Best shot option activated, you can select and save photos. Face detection Set the device to recognise people’s faces and help you take photos of them. Panorama Take panoramic photos. Share shot Take a photo and send it to others via Wi-Fi Direct. HDR Take three photos with different exposures and then combine them to improve the contrast ratio. Buddy photo share Set the device to recognise a person’s face you have tagged in a photo and send it to that person. Face recognition may fail depending on face angle, face size, skin colour, facial expression, light conditions, or accessories the subject is wearing.Entertainment 73 Option Function Beauty Hide facial imperfections. Smile shot Set the device to recognise people’s faces and help you take photos of them when they smile. Cartoon Take photos with cartoon effects. › Customise camera settings Before taking a photo, select to access the following options: Option Function Edit shortcuts Edit shortcuts to frequently-used options. Self portrait Switch to the front camera to take a photo of yourself. Flash Change the flash setting: You can turn on or off the flash manually, or set the camera to use the flash when needed. Shooting mode Change the shooting mode. ► p. 72 Effects Apply a special effect. Scene mode Change the scene mode. Exposure value Adjust the exposure value to change the brightness. Focus mode Select a focus mode. You can take close-up photos, or set the camera to focus on the subject or human faces automatically. Timer Select the length of the delay before the camera takes a photo.Entertainment 74 Option Function Resolution Select a resolution option. White balance Adjust the colour balance according to the lighting conditions. ISO Adjust the sensitivity of the imaging sensor. Metering Select a type of exposure metering. Outdoor visibility Set to improve the contrast of the display in bright sunlight. Auto contrast Set the camera to adjust the contrast ratio between bright and dark areas in your photo automatically. Guidelines Set to view the grid lines on the preview screen. Anti-Shake Activate the anti-shake feature to reduce blur caused by the device’s vibration or movement. GPS tag Set the camera to include location information for your photos. ● To improve GPS reception, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be obstructed, such as between buildings or in lowlying areas, or in poor weather conditions. ● Your location may appear on your photos when you upload them to the Internet. To avoid this, deactivate the GPS tag setting.Entertainment 75 Option Function Save as flipped Set the camera to flip the image automatically when you take a photo with the front camera. Image quality Select a quality level for your photos. Storage Select a memory location for saving captured photos. Reset Reset camera settings. › Record a video 1 In the application list, select Camera. 2 Drag the slider to switch to the camcorder. 3 Aim the lens at the subject and make any necessary adjustments.Entertainment 76 Number Function 1 Change the camcorder settings. 2 View videos you have recorded. 3 Record a video. 4 Use camcorder shortcuts. ● : Change the effect mode. ● : Change the recording mode (for attaching to a multimedia message or for saving normally). ● : Change the flash setting. ● : Switch to the front camera to record a video of yourself. You can add or remove shortcuts to frequently-used options. ► p. 79 5 View the storage location. 6 Switch to the camera. To zoom in, place two fingers on the screen and slowly spread them apart. To zoom out, pinch them together. You can also zoom in or out with the Volume key. The zoom function may be unavailable when recording in the highest resolution. 4 Tap where you want to focus on the preview screen. The focus frame moves to the place you tapped and changes to green when the subject is in focus.Entertainment 77 5 Select to start recording. ● To change the focus, tap where you want to focus. To focus on the centre of the screen, select . ● To capture an image from the video while recording, select . This feature will not work when the anti-shake feature is activated. 6 Select to stop recording. The video is saved automatically. The camcorder may not be able to properly record videos on memory cards with slow transfer speeds. After recording a video, select the image viewer to view it. ● To view more videos, scroll left or right. ● To play the video, select . ● To send the video to others or share it, select . ● To start a slide show, select → Start slideshow. Tap the screen to stop the slide show. ● To delete the video, select . ● To change the name of a file, press the Option key and select Rename. ● To view video details, press the Option key and select Details. › Customise camcorder settings Before recording a video, select to access the following options: Option Function Edit shortcuts Edit shortcuts to frequently-used options. Self recording Switch to the front camera to record a video of yourself.Entertainment 78 Option Function Flash Change the flash setting. Recording mode Change the recording mode (for attaching to a multimedia message or for saving normally). Effects Apply a special effect. Exposure value Adjust the exposure value to change the brightness. Timer Select the length of the delay before the camcorder starts recording a video. Resolution Select a resolution option. White balance Adjust the colour balance according to the lighting conditions. Outdoor visibility Set to improve the contrast of the display in bright sunlight. Guidelines Set to view the grid lines on the preview screen. Anti-Shake Activate the anti-shake feature to reduce blur caused by the device’s vibration or movement. Save as flipped Set the camcorder to flip the image automatically when you record a video with the front camera. Video quality Select a quality level for your videos. Storage Select a memory location for saving recorded videos. Reset Reset camcorder settings.Entertainment 79 › Edit the shortcut icons You can add or remove shortcuts to frequently-used options. 1 From the preview screen, tap and hold the shortcut area, or select → Edit shortcuts. 2 Tap and hold an icon from the option list, and then drag it to the shortcut area. To remove shortcuts, tap and hold an icon, and then drag it to the option list. 3 Tap the screen to return to the preview screen. Video Player Learn to use the video player. ● Some file formats are not supported depending on the device’s software. ● If a file size exceeds the memory available, an error may occur when you try to open the file. ● Playback quality may vary by content type. ● Some files may not play properly depending on how they are encoded. › Play a video 1 In the application list, select Video Player. 2 Select a video.Entertainment 80 3 Control playback with the following keys: Number Function 1 Scan forwards or backwards in the file by dragging or tapping the bar. 2 Change the ratio of the video screen. 3 Restart playback; Skip to the previous file (tap within 3 seconds); Scan backwards in the file (tap and hold). 4 Adjust the volume. 5 Pause playback; Select to resume playback. 6 Reduce the size of the video screen. To return to the original size, double-tap the video screen. 7 Skip to the next file; Scan forwards in the file (tap and hold).Entertainment 81 During playback, press the Option key to access the following options: ● To search for devices that have media sharing activated, select Scan for nearby devices. ● To send the video to others or share it, select Share via. ● To divide the video into segments, select Chapter preview. You can search for a segment and skip directly to that point. ● To trim a segment of the video, select Trim. ● To listen to audio via a Bluetooth headset, select Via Bluetooth. You cannot use this option if you connect a headset to your device’s headset jack. ● To set the video player to turn off automatically after a specific period of time, select Video auto off. ● To change the video player settings, select Settings. ● To view video details, select Details. › Customise video player settings 1 During playback, press the Option key and select Settings. 2 Change the following options: Option Function Auto play next Set the video player to play the next file automatically. Play speed Change the playback speed. SoundAlive Select a sound effect. Subtitles Customise the settings for a subtitle file.Entertainment 82 Option Function Colour tone Select a colour tone. Outdoor visibility Set to improve the contrast of the display in bright sunlight. Gallery Learn to view images and play videos saved in your device. ● Some file formats are not supported depending on the device’s software. ● If a file size exceeds the memory available, an error may occur when you try to open the file. ● Playback quality may vary by content type. ● Some files may not play properly depending on how they are encoded. › View an image 1 In the application list, select Gallery. 2 Select a folder → an image. While viewing an image, use the following options: ● To view more images, scroll left or right. ● To zoom in or out, place two fingers on the screen and slowly spread them apart or pinch them together. To return to the original size, double-tap the screen. ● To send the image to others or share it, select .Entertainment 83 ● To start a slide show, select → Start slideshow. Tap the screen to stop the slide show. ● To delete the image, select . ● To register the faces in the image as face tags, press the Option key and select Face tag. ● To add the image to the clipboard, press the Option key and select Copy to clipboard. ● To rotate the image anti-clockwise, press the Option key and select Rotate left. ● To rotate the image clockwise, press the Option key and select Rotate right. ● To crop a section from the image, press the Option key and select Crop. ● To edit the image with the image editor, press the Option key and select Edit. ● To set the image as your wallpaper or a contact image, press the Option key and select Set as. ● To send the image to a person whose face is tagged in the image, press the Option key and select Buddy photo share. ● To print the image via Wi-Fi or USB, press the Option key and select Print. Your device is compatible only with some Samsung printers. ● To change the name of a file, press the Option key and select Rename. ● To search for devices that have media sharing activated, press the Option key and select Scan for nearby devices. ● To view image details, press the Option key and select Details. The options available may vary depending on the selected folder.Entertainment 84 › Tag a face in an image Learn to tag faces in your images to make calls, send messages, and upload messages to social networks with the face tag shortcuts. Face recognition may fail depending on face angle, face size, skin colour, facial expression, light conditions, or accessories the subject is wearing. 1 In the application list, select Gallery. 2 Select an image. 3 Press the Option key and select Face tag→ On. Recognised faces appear in the frame. If faces are not recognised automatically, tap and hold a face area to add a frame manually. 4 Select a recognised face → Add name. 5 Select the person’s name from the contact list. The contact is linked to the face in the image. When the face tag appears with a name, select the face tag and use the available options. › Play a video 1 In the application list, select Gallery. 2 Select a folder → a video (indicated by the icon). 3 Select to begin playback. 4 Control playback with the keys. ► p. 79Entertainment 85 During playback, press the Option key to access the following options: ● To search for devices that have media sharing activated, select Scan for nearby devices. ● To send the video to others or share it, select Share via. ● To divide the video into segments, select Chapter preview. You can search for a segment and skip directly to that point. ● To trim a segment of the video, select Trim. ● To listen to audio via a Bluetooth headset, select Via Bluetooth. You cannot use this option if you connect a headset to your device’s headset jack. ● To set the video player to turn off automatically after a specific period of time, select Video auto off. ● To change the video player settings, select Settings. ● To view video details, select Details. Music Player Learn to listen to your favourite music while on the go. ● Some file formats are not supported depending on the device’s software. ● If a file size exceeds the memory available, an error may occur when you try to open the file. ● Playback quality may vary by content type. ● Some files may not play properly depending on how they are encoded. › Add music files to your device Start by transferring files to your device or memory card: ● Download from the Internet. ► p. 103 ● Download from a computer with Samsung Kies. ► p. 116Entertainment 86 ● Download from a computer with Windows Media Player. ► p. 117 ● Receive via Bluetooth. ► p. 130 ● Receive via Wi-Fi. ► p. 120 ● Copy to your memory card. › Play music 1 In the application list, select Music Player. 2 Select a music category → a music file. 3 Control playback with the following keys: Number Function 1 Activate Shuffle mode. 2 Scan forwards or backwards in the file by dragging or tapping the bar. 3 Select a sound effect.Entertainment 87 Number Function 4 Restart playback; Skip to the previous file (tap within 3 seconds); Scan backwards in the file (tap and hold). 5 Adjust the volume. 6 Change the repeat mode. 7 Sort music files by mood or year. 8 Pause playback; Select to resume playback. 9 Open the playlist. 10 Skip to the next file; Scan forwards in the file (tap and hold). You can control the music player with a headset. On the Home screen, press and hold the headset button to launch the music player. Then, press the headset button to start or pause playback. During playback, press the Option key to access the following options: ● To add music files to the quick list (for saving as a playlist), select Add to quick list. ● To listen to music via a Bluetooth headset, select Via Bluetooth. You cannot use this option if you connect a headset to your device’s headset jack. ● To send the music file to others or share it, select Share via. ● To add the music file to a playlist, select Add to playlist. ● To view music details, select Details.Entertainment 88 ● To set the music file as your ringtone, select Set as. ● To search for devices that have media sharing activated, select Scan for nearby devices. ● To change the music player settings, select Settings. ● To stop playback and close the music player, select End. › Create a playlist 1 In the application list, select Music Player→ Playlists. 2 Press the Option key and select Create playlist. 3 Enter a title for your new playlist and select OK. 4 Select Add music. 5 Select the files to include and select Done. › Customise music player settings 1 In the application list, select Music Player. 2 Press the Option key and select Settings. 3 Change the following options: Option Function SoundAlive Select a sound effect. Play speed Change the playback speed. Music menu Select music categories to show on the music library screen. Lyrics Set to show song lyrics during playback. Music auto off Set the music player to turn off automatically after a specific period of time.Entertainment 89 Music Hub You can access the online music store to search for and buy your favourite songs. You can also add music files to your wish list and play them. ● This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. ● To use this feature, you may need to download the application from the Internet. 1 In the application list, select Music Hub. 2 Search for, preview, or buy your favourite songs. FM Radio Learn to listen to music and news on the FM radio. To listen to the FM radio, you must connect a headset, which serves as the radio antenna. › Listen to the FM radio 1 Plug a headset into your device. 2 In the application list, select FM Radio. The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically. The first time you turn on the FM radio, it will start automatic tuning. 3 Select a radio station.Entertainment 90 4 Control the FM radio with the following keys: Number Function 1 Record a song from the FM radio. 2 Turn on or off the FM radio. 3 Search for an available radio station. 4 Add the current radio station to the favourites list. 5 Adjust the volume. 6 Access services for the current station, such as downloading music files or calling the station. This option may be unavailable depending on your region. 7 Fine-tune the frequency.Entertainment 91 › Record a song from the FM radio 1 Plug a headset into your device. 2 In the application list, select FM Radio. 3 Select to turn on the FM radio. 4 Scroll to a radio station. 5 Select to start recording. 6 When you are finished, select . The recorded file will be saved in My Files→ sdcard0→ Sounds. › Save radio stations automatically 1 Plug a headset into your device. 2 In the application list, select FM Radio. 3 Select to turn on the FM radio. 4 Press the Option key and select Scan→ an option. The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically. › Add a radio station to the favourites list 1 Plug a headset into your device. 2 In the application list, select FM Radio. 3 Select to turn on the FM radio. 4 Scroll to a radio station. 5 Select to add the station to the favourites list.Entertainment 92 › Customise FM radio settings 1 In the application list, select FM Radio. 2 Press the Option key and select Settings. 3 Change the following options: Option Function Storage Select a memory location for saving FM radio clips. Radio text Set to show the station ID on the FM radio screen. Station IDs are available only from radio stations that provide this information. Alternative frequency Set to retune frequencies for stations automatically when the current signal is weak. FM auto off Set the FM radio to turn off automatically after a specified length of time.93 Personal information Personal information Contacts Learn to create and manage a list of your personal or business contacts. You can save names, phone numbers, email addresses, and more for your contacts. › Create a contact 1 In the application list, select Contacts→ Contacts→ . 2 Select a memory location. 3 Enter contact information. 4 Select Save to add the contact to memory. You can create contacts from the dialling screen by selecting Add to contacts. › Find a contact 1 In the application list, select Contacts→ Contacts. 2 Scroll up or down the contact list. You can make a call or send a message to a contact by scrolling left or right on the contact’s name. 3 Select a contact’s name.94 Personal information From the contact view, use the following options: ● To make a voice call, select . ● To make a video call, select . ● To send a text or multimedia message, select . ● To send an email message, select . ● To set a favourite number, select . ● To edit the contact information, select . › Set a speed dial number 1 In the application list, select Contacts→ Contacts. 2 Press the Option key and select Speed dial setting. 3 Select a location number → a contact. You can call a speed dial number by tapping and holding the location number on the dialling screen. › Create your namecard 1 In the application list, select Contacts→ Contacts. 2 Select your name at the top of the contact list. 3 Select . 4 Enter your personal details and select Save. You can send your namecard to others or share it by pressing the Option key and selecting Share namecard via.95 Personal information › Create a group of contacts By creating groups of contacts, you can manage multiple contacts and send a message to an entire group. 1 In the application list, select Contacts→ Groups. 2 Press the Option key and select Create. 3 Enter a name and customise the settings for the group. 4 Add members to the group. 5 Select Save. › Copy a contact Copy contacts from the SIM or USIM card to your device 1 In the application list, select Contacts→ Contacts. 2 Press the Option key and select Import/Export→ Import from SIM card. 3 Select a memory location. 4 Select contacts to copy, and then select Done. Copy contacts from your device to the SIM or USIM card 1 In the application list, select Contacts→ Contacts. 2 Press the Option key and select Import/Export→ Export to SIM card. 3 Select contacts to copy, and then select Done→ OK.96 Personal information ›Import or export a contact You can import or export files (in vcf format) to or from your device’s USB storage or a memory card. Import contact files 1 In the application list, select Contacts→ Contacts. 2 Press the Option key and select Import/Export→ Import from SD card or Import from USB storage. 3 Select a memory location. 4 Select an option for importing a single contact file, multiple contact files, or all contact files, and then select OK. 5 Select contact files to import, and then select OK. Export contacts 1 In the application list, select Contacts→ Contacts. 2 Press the Option key and select Import/Export→ Export to SD card or Export to USB storage. 3 Select OK to confirm. S Planner Your device includes a powerful planner to help you organise your schedules more conveniently and effectively. Learn to create and manage events and tasks, and set alarms to remind yourself of important events and tasks.97 Personal information › Create an event or task 1 In the application list, select S Planner. 2 Select . 3 Select an event type at the top of the screen. To create an event from a memo, select Quick add. This feature is available only for English and Korean. 4 Enter the details of the event and select Save. › Change the view mode 1 In the application list, select S Planner. 2 Select . 3 Select a view mode. ● Year: All months in the year ● Month: A full month in one view ● Week: Hourly blocks for the days in one full week ● Day: Hourly blocks for one full day ● List: A list of all the events and tasks scheduled for a specific period ● Task: A list of tasks You can also change the view mode by placing two fingers on the screen and spreading them apart or pinching them together.98 Personal information › View an event or task 1 In the application list, select S Planner. 2 Select a date on the calendar. ● To move to a specific day, press the Option key and select Go to, and then enter the date. ● To move to today’s date, select Today. 3 Select an event to view its details. You can send the event to others or share it by pressing the Option key and selecting Share via. › Stop an event or task alarm If you set a reminder for a calendar event or task, an alarm will sound at the specified time. 1 Tap the indicator icons area and drag it downwards to open the notifications panel. 2 Select the event notification. 3 Select an event to view more details. To snooze the event alarm, select Snooze. S Memo With S Memo, you can create memos with enriched content by drawing sketches or adding images or voice memos.99 Personal information › Create a memo 1 In the application list, select S Memo. If you are launching this application for the first time when you sign in to your Samsung account, select a location to synchronise memos with. 2 Select to write or draw on the screen, or select to enter text with the keypad. 3 Select Enter title, enter a title for the memo, and select OK. 4 Enter your memo text or draw a sketch with the following tools: Tool Function Browse the memo. Draw a sketch; Change the pen settings (double-tap). Enter text with the keypad. Erase your text or sketch; Change the eraser thickness or clear your input (double-tap). Undo your last action. Redo your last action. Add a sound clip by recording voices or other sounds. Add a new page to the memo.100 Personal information 5 Select Save. To convert your writing to text, press the Option key and select Handwriting-to-text. If the memo is written in multiple languages or contains both numbers and letters, the conversion to text may fail. › View a memo 1 In the application list, select S Memo. 2 Select a memo to view its details. While viewing the memo, use the following options: ● To view more memos, scroll left or right. ● To edit the memo, tap the screen or select . ● To delete the memo, select . ● To mark the memo as important, select . ● To send the memo to others or share it, press the Option key and select Share via. ● To export the memo as a PDF file or as an image file, press the Option key and select Export. The exported file will be saved in My Files→ sdcard0→ S Memo. ● To protect the memo from accidental deletion, press the Option key and select Lock. ● To set the memo as your wallpaper or a contact image, press the Option key and select Set as. ● To print the memo via Wi-Fi or USB, press the Option key and select Print. Your device is compatible only with some Samsung printers.101 Personal information › Organise memos in folders 1 In the application list, select S Memo. 2 Press the Option key and select Create folder. 3 Enter a name for the folder and select OK. 4 Press the Option key and select Move or Copy. 5 Select memos and select Done. 6 Select the new folder and select Paste here. Voice Recorder Learn to operate your device’s voice recorder. › Record a voice memo 1 In the application list, select Voice Recorder. 2 Select to start recording. To pause recording, select . 3 Speak into the microphone. 4 When you are finished, select . Your memo is saved automatically.102 Personal information › Play a voice memo 1 In the application list, select Voice Recorder. 2 Select to access the voice memo list. 3 Select a voice memo. To pause playback, select . 4 Select to stop playback. You can send the voice memo to others or share it by pressing the Option key and selecting Share via. › Customise voice recorder settings 1 In the application list, select Voice Recorder. 2 Press the Option key and select Settings. 3 Change the following options: Option Function Storage Select a memory location for saving voice memos. Default name Enter a prefix for naming voice memos. Recording quality Select a quality level for voice memos. Limit for MMS Set to limit recordings to the maximum length that can be attached to a multimedia message.Web and GPS-based services 103 Web and GPS-based services You may incur additional charges for accessing the Internet and downloading media files. For details, contact your service provider. Internet Learn to access and bookmark your favourite webpages. ● This feature may be labelled differently depending on your region or service provider. ● Available icons may vary depending on your region or service provider. › Browse a webpage 1 In the application list, select Internet. 2 To access a specific webpage, select the URL field, enter the web address, and then select Go. 3 Navigate webpages with the following keys: Number Function 1 Move backwards or forwards to webpages in history. 2 Enter a web address or a keyword.Web and GPS-based services 104 Number Function 3 Reload the current webpage. While the device is loading webpages, this icon changes to . 4 View your bookmarks, saved pages, and recent Internet history. 5 View thumbnails of active browser windows. While browsing a webpage, access the following options: ● To zoom in or out, place two fingers on the screen and slowly spread them apart or pinch them together. To return to the original size, double-tap the screen. This feature may be unavailable on some webpages. ● To open a new window, press the Option key and select New window. ● To bookmark the current webpage, press the Option key and select Bookmark this page. ● To add a shortcut for the current webpage to the Home screen, press the Option key and select Add shortcut to home. ● To send a web address to others or share it, press the Option key and select Share page. ● To search for text on a webpage, press the Option key and select Find on page. ● To switch to the desktop view, press the Option key and select Request desktop site.Web and GPS-based services 105 ● To save the current webpage for reading offline, press the Option key and select Save for offline reading. You can view the saved pages by selecting → Saved pages. ● To change the brightness setting, press the Option key and select Brightness. ● To view your download history, press the Option key and select Downloads. ● To print the webpage via Wi-Fi or USB, press the Option key and select Print. Your device is compatible only with some Samsung printers. ● To change the browser settings, press the Option key and select Settings. › Search for information by voice This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In the application list, select Internet. 2 Select the URL field. 3 Select and say a keyword into your device’s microphone. The device searches for webpages related to the keyword. 4 Select a search result. › Bookmark your favourite webpage 1 In the application list, select Internet. 2 Enter a web address or navigate to a webpage. 3 Press the Option key and select Bookmark this page. 4 Enter a name for the bookmark and select Save.Web and GPS-based services 106 To view your bookmarks, select → Bookmarks. From the bookmark list, tap and hold a bookmark to access the following options: ● To open the webpage in the current window, select Open. ● To open a new window, select Open in new tab. ● To edit bookmark details, select Edit bookmark. ● To add the bookmark shortcut to the Home screen, select Add shortcut to home. ● To send the address of the current webpage to others, select Share link. ● To copy the address of the current webpage, select Copy link URL. ● To delete the bookmark, select Delete bookmark. ● To set the webpage as your browser’s homepage, select Set as homepage. ›Download a file from the Internet When you download files or applications from the Internet, your device saves them to the internal memory. Files you download from the Internet can include viruses that will damage your device. To reduce this risk, only download files from sources you trust. Some media files include Digital Rights Management to protect copyrights. This protection may prevent you from downloading, copying, modifying, or transferring some files. 1 In the application list, select Internet. 2 Search for a file or application and download it to the device.Web and GPS-based services 107 › View your recent history 1 In the application list, select Internet→ → History. 2 Select a webpage to access. Flipboard Learn to access your personalised news magazine. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In the application list, select Flipboard. 2 Select Get Started. If you sign in to your Flipboard account, you can get news from your social networks. 3 Select news topics, and then select Done. 4 Flip through news articles. Game Hub Learn to access games. 1 In the application list, select Game Hub. 2 Select a game service. 3 Search for and access games. The games available may vary depending on your region or service provider.Web and GPS-based services 108 Latitude Learn to share your location with your friends and view their locations with the Google Latitude™ location service. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In the application list, select Latitude. The device joins Latitude automatically. 2 Select → an option. 3 Select a friend, or enter an email address and select Add friends. 4 Select Yes. When your friend accepts your invitation, you can share locations. 5 Select MAP VIEW. Your friends’ locations on the map are shown with their photos. Maps Learn to use the Google Maps™ mapping service to find your location, search for places, and get directions. ● This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. ● You must activate location services to find your location and search the map. ► p. 130Web and GPS-based services 109 › Search for a location 1 In the application list, select Maps. The map will show your current location. 2 Select . 3 Enter a keyword for the location and select . To search for a location by voice, select . 4 Select the location to view its details. While viewing the map, use the following options: ● To zoom in or out, place two fingers on the screen and slowly spread them apart or pinch them together. ● To view all of the search results, select RESULTS LIST. ● To view your current location, select . To switch to the compass view of the map that changes orientation when you move the device, select . ● To add a star to the location, select the balloon with the location name → . ● To add layers of additional information to the map or change the view mode, press the Option key and select Layers. ›Get directions to a specific destination 1 In the application list, select Maps. 2 Select . 3 Enter the addresses of the starting location and the destination. To enter an address from your contact list or starred places, or select a point on the map, select → an option.Web and GPS-based services 110 4 Select a travel method and select GET DIRECTIONS. The route is indicated on the map. Depending on the selected travel method, you may see multiple routes. 5 When you are finished, press the Option key and select Clear Map. More Services Access more services to download and install additional applications for your device. In the application list, select More Services. Navigation Learn to get spoken directions to your destination. ● Navigation maps, your current location, and other navigational data may differ from actual location information. You should always pay attention to road conditions, traffic, and any other factors that may affect your driving and follow all safety warnings and regulations while driving. ● This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In the application list, select Navigation. 2 Enter your destination with the following methods: ● Enter your destination by voice. ● Enter your destination with the virtual keypad. ● Select your destination from contacts’ addresses. ● Select your destination from your starred places. 3 Install the required software, and then use the navigation features.Web and GPS-based services 111 Local Learn to search for business and attractions. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In the application list, select Local. 2 If you want to search for businesses or attractions near a specific location, select your location → Enter an address. 3 Select a category. The device searches for places nearby that are related to the category. 4 Select a place name to view its details. You can add more categories by pressing the Option key and selecting Add a search. Play Store Your device’s functionality can be extended by installing additional applications. Play Store provides a quick and easy way to shop for mobile applications. ● This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. ● Your device will save user files from downloaded applications to the internal memory.Web and GPS-based services 112 ›Download an application 1 In the application list, select Play Store. 2 Search for an application and download it to the device. When the download is complete, the device will install the application automatically. ›Uninstall an application 1 In the application list, select Play Store. 2 Press the Option key and select My Apps. 3 Select an item. 4 Select Uninstall→ OK. Samsung Apps Samsung Apps allows you to easily download a wide range of applications and updates for your device. With fully optimised applications from Samsung Apps, your device becomes even smarter. Explore the useful applications on offer and enhance your mobile life. 1 In the application list, select Samsung Apps. 2 Search for and download applications to the device. ● This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. ● For details, please visit www.samsungapps.com or refer to the Samsung Apps leaflet.Web and GPS-based services 113 S Suggest Find and download the latest applications suggested by Samsung. In the application list, select S Suggest. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. YouTube Learn to view and upload videos via the YouTube™ video sharing service. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. › Play a video 1 In the application list, select YouTube. 2 Select a video. 3 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to the landscape view. 4 Control playback with the following keys:Web and GPS-based services 114 Number Function 1 Pause or resume playback. 2 Scan forwards or backwards in the file by dragging the bar. 3 View the video quality. This feature may not be available for some videos. 4 Add the video to your playlist. 5 Send the URL to others. 6 Search for videos. 7 Rotate the screen to the portrait view. ›Upload a video 1 In the application list, select YouTube. 2 Select your Google account if it is linked to YouTube. 3 Select → a video. If you are uploading a video for the first time, select a network type to upload a video. 4 Enter the details of the upload and select Upload.Web and GPS-based services 115 Voice Search Learn to search the Internet by voice. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In the application list, select Voice Search. 2 Say a keyword into the microphone. The device searches for webpages related to the keyword. 3 Select a search result. Video Hub Learn to access videos. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In the application list, select Video Hub. 2 Select a category. 3 Search for and access videos.Connectivity 116 Connectivity USB connections Learn to connect your device to a computer with a USB cable. Do not disconnect the USB cable from a computer while the device is transferring or accessing data. Doing so may result in data loss or damage to the device. For best results, connect the USB cable directly to a USB port on a computer. Data transfers may fail when using a USB hub. › Connect with Samsung Kies Ensure that Samsung Kies is installed on your computer. You can download the program from the Samsung website. Samsung Kies will work on both Windows and Macintosh computers. 1 Connect your device to a computer with a USB cable. Samsung Kies launches on the computer automatically. If Samsung Kies does not launch, double-click the Samsung Kies icon on the computer. 2 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information.Connectivity 117 › Connect with Windows Media Player Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your computer. 1 Connect your device to a computer with a USB cable. 2 Open Windows Media Player and synchronise music files. › Connect as a media device You can connect your device to a computer and access media files stored on your device. 1 Connect your device to a computer with a USB cable. 2 Tap the indicator icons area and drag it downwards to open the notifications panel. 3 Select Connected as a media device→ Media device (MTP). 4 Transfer files between your device and the computer. › Connect as a camera device You can connect your device to a computer as a camera and access files in your device. Use this USB connection mode when your computer does not support the media transfer protocol (MTP) or does not have the USB driver for your device installed. 1 Connect your device to a computer with a USB cable. 2 Tap the indicator icons area and drag it downwards to open the notifications panel. 3 Select Connected as a media device→ Camera (PTP). 4 Transfer files between your device and the computer.Connectivity 118 Wi-Fi Learn to use your device’s wireless networking capabilities to activate and connect to any wireless local area network (WLAN) compatible with the IEEE 802.11 standards. You can connect to the Internet or other network devices anywhere an access point or wireless hotspot is available. Your device uses a non-harmonised frequency and is intended for use in all European countries. The WLAN can be operated in the EU without restriction indoors, but cannot be operated outdoors. › Activate the Wi-Fi feature In the application list, select Settings and then drag the Wi-Fi switch to the right. The Wi-Fi feature running in the background will consume battery power. To preserve battery power, activate the feature only when needed. › Find and connect to a Wi-Fi AP 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Wi-Fi. Your device searches for available Wi-Fi APs automatically. 2 Select an AP. 3 Enter the password for the AP (if necessary). 4 Select Connect.Connectivity 119 › Add a Wi-Fi AP manually 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Wi-Fi→ Add Wi-Fi network. 2 Enter an SSID for the AP and select a security type. 3 Set the security settings according to the security type you selected, and then select Save. › Connect to a Wi-Fi AP with a protected setup You can connect to a secured AP with a WPS button or WPS PIN. To use this method, your wireless access point must have a WPS button. Connect with a WPS button 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Wi-Fi. 2 Press the Option key and select WPS push button. 3 Press the WPS button on the AP within 2 minutes. Connect with a WPS PIN 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Wi-Fi. 2 Press the Option key and select WPS PIN entry. 3 On the AP, enter the PIN of your device. › Set the static IP settings 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Wi-Fi. 2 Select an AP → Show advanced options. 3 Select the IP settings drop-down menu. 4 Select Static.Connectivity 120 5 Change the IP settings. 6 Select Connect. › Customise Wi-Fi settings 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Wi-Fi. 2 Press the Option key and select Advanced. 3 Change the following options: Option Function Network notification Set the device to notify you when an open Wi-Fi AP is available. Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep Set whether or not to keep the Wi-Fi feature active in Sleep mode. Check for Internet service Set to check if you can access Internet services while using the current AP. Wi-Fi timer Set the time to turn the WLAN feature on or off. MAC address View the MAC address. IP address View the IP address. Wi-Fi Direct Learn to use the Wi-Fi Direct feature to connect two devices via Wi-Fi without requiring an AP.Connectivity 121 › Connect your device to another device 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Wi-Fi→ Wi-Fi Direct. 2 Select Scan. 3 Select a device. When the owner of the other device accepts the connection, the devices are connected. You can connect your device to multiple devices and send data by selecting Multi-connect. › Send data via Wi-Fi 1 Select a file or item from an appropriate application. 2 Select an option for sending data via Wi-Fi. The method for selecting an option may vary by data type. 3 Search for and select another device. › Receive data via Wi-Fi When you receive data, it is saved to your device automatically. Received data is saved to the ShareViaWiFi folder.Connectivity 122 AllShare Cast Learn to connect your device to a large screen by using an AllShare Cast dongle, and then share your contents. ● This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. ● Some files may be buffered while playing depending on the network connection. ● To save energy, deactivate the AllShare Cast feature when not in use. ● If you specify a Wi-Fi frequency band, AllShare Cast dongles may not be found or connected. ● If you play videos or games on a TV, select an appropriate TV mode to get the best experience from AllShare Cast. 1 In the application list, select Settings→ More settings→ AllShare Cast. If you add the AllShare Cast widget to the Home screen, you can access this feature conveniently. 2 Drag the AllShare Cast switch to the right. 3 Select a device. When the devices are connected, you can see your device’s display on the other’s display. 4 Open or play a file. 5 Control the display with the keys on your device.Connectivity 123 AllShare Play Learn to use the AllShare Play service that enables you to play contents saved on various devices over the Internet. You can play and send any file on any device to another device or web storage server via AllShare Play. To use the AllShare Play service, you must sign in to your Google and Samsung accounts, and register two or more devices as file servers. The registration methods may vary depending on the device type. To get more details about using AllShare Play, press the Option key and select FAQ. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. › Send a file 1 In the application list, select AllShare Play. 2 Select a device or web storage that contains media files. 3 Select a media category and select the tick box on a file. 4 Select . 5 Select a device or web storage to save the file. › Share a file 1 In the application list, select AllShare Play. 2 Select a device or web storage that contains media files. 3 Select a media category and select the tick box on a file. 4 Select and then select a social network site.Connectivity 124 › Play a file on a remote device ● Supported file formats may differ depending on connected devices as a media player. ● Some files may be buffered while playing depending on the network connection. 1 In the application list, select AllShare Play. 2 Select a device or web storage that contains media files. 3 Select a media category and select the tick box on a file. 4 Select . 5 Select a device to use as a media player. 6 Control playback with the keys on your device. ›Use the Group Cast feature You can share screens with multiple other devices that are connected to the same Wi-Fi AP. 1 In the application list, select AllShare Play. 2 Select a media category and select the tick box on a file. 3 Select → Group Cast. 4 Enter a PIN and select Done. 5 Select OK to start Group Cast. 6 On another device, join Group Cast with the PIN.Connectivity 125 ›Manage contents on a web storage server 1 In the application list, select AllShare Play. 2 Select a web storage server. 3 View and manage your files. › Customise AllShare Play settings 1 In the application list, select AllShare Play. 2 Press the Option key and select Settings. 3 Change the following options: Option Function Registered storage View web storage servers that have been added to AllShare Play. Registered devices View or edit devices that have been added to AllShare Play. Setting up web services Sign in to social network sites to upload files. Auto upload photos from mobile Set to upload photos to the web storage automatically when you sign in. Video quality settings Set to optimise the video quality for your device when playing videos saved on a computer. Lock AllShare Play Set to lock AllShare Play with the password for your Samsung account. Language Select a display language. About View AllShare Play information.Connectivity 126 Mobile network sharing Learn to share your device’s mobile network connection with other devices. › Share your device’s mobile network via Wi-Fi Learn to use your device as a wireless access point for other devices. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In the application list, select Settings→ More settings → Tethering and portable hotspot→ Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. 2 Drag the Portable Wi-Fi hotspot switch to the right to activate mobile network sharing via Wi-Fi. 3 Select Configure to configure network settings to use your device as an AP. Option Function Network SSID Edit the device name that will be shown to other devices. Hide my device Set to prevent other devices from locating your device. Security Select a security type. Password Enter a password to prevent unapproved access to your mobile network. This option is available only when you set the security option.Connectivity 127 Option Function Show password Set to show your password as you enter them. Show advanced options Select a broadcast channel. 4 Select Save. 5 On another device, locate your device’s name and connect to your mobile network. You can restrict mobile network sharing to specified devices. Select Allowed devices, create a device list, and then select your device’s name to change the sharing mode to Only allowed devices. › Share your device’s mobile network via USB Learn to use your device as a wireless modem by making a USB connection with a computer. 1 Connect your device to a computer with a USB cable. 2 In the application list, select Settings→ More settings→ Tethering and portable hotspot. 3 Select USB tethering to activate mobile network sharing via USB. To stop sharing the network connection, clear the tick box next to USB tethering. The sharing method may differ depending on the computer’s operating system.Connectivity 128 › Share your device’s mobile network via Bluetooth 1 In the application list, select Settings→ More settings→ Tethering and portable hotspot. 2 Select Bluetooth tethering to activate the mobile network sharing via Bluetooth. 3 On another device, find and pair with your device. Ensure that you have activated the Bluetooth feature and the visibility setting. Bluetooth Learn to exchange data or media files with other devices via Bluetooth. ● Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or received via the Bluetooth feature. ● Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced. ● Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by the Bluetooth SIG, may be incompatible with your device. ● Do not use the Bluetooth feature for illegal purposes (for example, pirating copies of files or illegally tapping communications for commercial purposes). Samsung is not responsible for the repercussions of illegal use of the Bluetooth feature. Connectivity 129 › Activate the Bluetooth feature In the application list, select Settings and then drag the Bluetooth switch to the right. › Find and pair with another device 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Bluetooth→ Scan. 2 Select a device. 3 Select OK to match the Bluetooth PIN between two devices. Alternately, enter a Bluetooth PIN and select OK. When the owner of the other device accepts the connection or enters the same PIN, pairing is complete. If the pairing is successful, the device will search for available services automatically. Some devices, especially headsets or hands-free car kits, may have a fixed Bluetooth PIN, such as 0000. If the other device has a PIN, you must enter it. › Send data via Bluetooth 1 Select a file or item from an appropriate application. 2 Select an option for sending data via the Bluetooth feature. The method for selecting an option may vary by data type. 3 Search for and pair with a Bluetooth device.Connectivity 130 › Receive data via Bluetooth 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Bluetooth and then select the tick box next to your device. To select the length of time that your device will be visible, press the Option key and select Visible timeout. 2 When prompted, select OK to match the Bluetooth PIN or enter the Bluetooth PIN and select OK (if necessary). 3 Select Accept to confirm the connection between two devices. Received data is saved to the Bluetooth folder. If you receive a contact, it is saved to the phonebook automatically. GPS Your device is equipped with a global positioning system (GPS) receiver. Learn to activate location services and use additional GPS functions. For better reception of GPS signals, avoid using your device in the following conditions: ● Between buildings, in tunnels or underground passages, or inside buildings ● In poor weather ● Around high voltage or electromagnetic fields ● In a vehicle with sun protection film Do not touch or cover the area around the antenna with your hands or other objects while using the GPS functions. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider.Connectivity 131 › Activate location services You must activate location services to receive location information or search the map. 1 In the application list, select Settings→ Location services. 2 Change the following options: Option Function Use wireless networks Set to use Wi-Fi and/or mobile networks to find your location. You may incur additional charges for using mobile networks. Use GPS satellites Set to use GPS satellites to find your location. Location and Google search Set the device to use your current location for Google search and other Google services. VPN connections Learn to create virtual private networks (VPNs) and connect to them securely over the Internet. ● Your device should already be configured with Internet access. If you have trouble accessing the Internet, you must edit the connections. If you are not sure what information to enter, ask your VPN administrator. ● To use this feature, you must activate the screen lock feature.Connectivity 132 › Set up a VPN profile 1 In the application list, select Settings→ More settings→ VPN→ Add VPN network. 2 Change the following options: Option Function Name Enter a name for the VPN server. Type Select a VPN type. Server address Enter the address of the VPN server. L2TP secret Enter an L2TP secret password. IPSec identifier Enter a user name. IPSec preshared key Enter a pre-shared security key. IPSec user certificate Select a user certificate that the VPN server will use to identify you. You can import certificates from the VPN server or download them from the Internet. IPSec CA certificate Select a certificate authority (CA) certificate that the VPN server will use to identify you. You can import certificates from the VPN server or download them from the Internet. IPSec server certificate Select a server certificate that the VPN server will use to identify you. You can import certificates from the VPN server or download them from the Internet.Connectivity 133 Option Function PPP encryption (MPPE) Set to encrypt data before sending it to the VPN server. Show advanced options Set to change the advanced network settings. The options available may vary depending on the VPN type. 3 When you are finished, select Save. › Connect to a private network 1 In the application list, select Settings→ More settings→ VPN. 2 Select a private network. 3 Enter the user name and password, and then select Connect.134 Tools Tools Calculator Learn to perform calculations with your device. › Perform a calculation 1 In the application list, select Calculator. 2 Use the keys on the screen to perform basic calculations. Rotate the device to the landscape view to use the scientific calculator. If you have prevented the display from rotating when you rotate the device, press the Option key and select Scientific calculator. › View the calculation history 1 In the application list, select Calculator. 2 Perform a calculation. 3 Select to hide the calculator keypad. The calculation history appears. Clock Learn to set and control alarms and world clocks. You can also use the stopwatch, the countdown timer, and the desk clock.135 Tools › Set an alarm 1 In the application list, select Clock→ Alarm. 2 Select Create alarm. 3 Set the details of the alarm. Drag the Smart alarm switch to the right to activate simulated nature sounds prior to the main alarm. 4 When you are finished, select Save. To deactivate an alarm, select the clock icon next to the alarm. To delete an alarm, press the Option key and select Delete. › Stop an alarm When the alarm sounds, ● To stop the alarm, select and then drag your finger outside of the large circle. ● To silence the alarm for the snooze period, select and then drag your finger outside of the large circle. › Create a world clock 1 In the application list, select Clock→ World clock→ Add city. 2 Enter a city name or select one from the city list. ● To select your current city, select . ● To select a city in the world map view, select . To apply summer time to the clock, tap and hold the clock, and then select DST settings.136 Tools ›Use the stopwatch 1 In the application list, select Clock→ Stopwatch. 2 Select Start to begin the stopwatch. 3 Select Lap to record lap times. 4 When you are finished, select Stop. ›Use the countdown timer 1 In the application list, select Clock→ Timer. 2 Set the length of time to count down. 3 Select Start to begin the countdown. 4 When the timer expires, select and then drag your finger outside of the large circle to stop the alarm. ›Use the desk clock The desk clock displays the current time, date, and weather. 1 In the application list, select Clock→ Desk clock. 2 Select to view the desk clock on the full screen. 3 Press the Option key and select Settings. 4 Change the following options: Option Function Hide status bar Set to hide or show the status bar. Wallpaper Select a background image for the desk clock. Calendar Set to show the calendar.137 Tools Option Function AccuWeather Set to show the weather for your current location. You can also select temperature units and set the desk clock to update weather information automatically. Brightness Adjust the brightness of the display. Dock Change the settings for using a desktop dock with your device. Downloads Learn to manage logs of files you have downloaded from the web or email. 1 In the application list, select Downloads. 2 Select a download category. 3 To open a downloaded file, select the log. To delete a log, select the tick box and select . Dropbox Learn to use the Dropbox cloud storage service to save and share your files with others. When you save files to your Dropbox folder, your device automatically synchronise with the web server and any other computers that have Dropbox installed.138 Tools › Activate Dropbox 1 In the application list, select Dropbox→ Start. 2 Select I’m already a Dropbox user. If you are a new user, select I’m new to Dropbox to create an account. 3 Enter an email address and password, and then select Log in. 4 Select Next. 5 Select Turn on to automatically upload photos and videos captured by the camera on your device. ›Upload files to your Dropbox folder 1 In the application list, select Dropbox. 2 Select → Photos or videos or Other files. 3 Select files. 4 Select Dropbox→ a folder. 5 Select Upload. The files in the folder will be added to the web server and your computer at home. › View a file 1 In the application list, select Dropbox→ . 2 Select a file.139 Tools Help Access help information to learn how to use the device and applications or configure important settings. 1 In the application list, select Help. 2 Select an item to view tips. To reset help pop-ups if you have hidden them, select Show help tip pop-ups, and then select items. My Files Learn to access various types of files saved in your device. › Supported file formats Your device supports the following file formats: Type Format Image bmp, gif, jpg, png Video 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, mkv Music mp3, 3ga, aac, m4a, wma Sound wav, mmf, xmf, imy, midi, amr Others doc, docx, pdf, ppt, pptx, txt, xls, xlsx, htm, html, vbm, vcf, vcs, vnt, jad, jar, crt, der ● Some file formats are not supported depending on the device’s software. ● If a file size exceeds the memory available, an error may occur when you try to open the file.140 Tools › View a file 1 In the application list, select My Files. 2 Select a folder. ● To move up one level in the file directory, select . ● To return to the Home directory, select . 3 Select a file. From the folder list, press the Option key to access the following options: ● To create folders for managing files, select Create folder. ● To delete files or folders, select Delete. ● To search for files saved in your device, select Search. ● To change the view mode, select View by. ● To sort files or folders, select Sort by. ● To send a file to others or share it, select Share via. ● To copy or move the files or folders to another file folder, select Copy or Move. ● To change the name of a file or a folder, select Rename. ● To change the file manager settings, select Settings. NFC Your device allows you to read near field communication (NFC) tags that contain information about products. You can also use this feature to make payments and buy tickets for transportation or events after downloading the required applications. The battery contains a built-in NFC antenna. Handle the battery carefully to avoid damaging the NFC antenna. If the screen is locked, your device will not read NFC tags or receive data.141 Tools › Activate the NFC feature In the application list, select Settings→ More settings→ NFC and then drag the NFC switch to the right. › Read information from an NFC tag Once you activate the NFC feature, your device will read product information when you place it near an NFC tag. The information from the tag will appear on your display. ›Make a purchase with the NFC feature Before you can use the NFC feature to make payments, you must register for the mobile payment service. To register or get details about the service, contact your service provider. 1 Touch the back of your device to the NFC card reader. 2 When prompted, enter your PIN and touch your device to the NFC card reader again (if necessary). › Send data via Android Beam With the Android Beam feature, you can send data, such as webpages and contacts, to NFC-enabled devices. 1 In the application list, select Settings→ More settings→ NFC. 2 Drag the Android Beam switch to the right. 3 Open a webpage or select an item from an appropriate application. 4 Touch the back of your device to the back of the other device. 5 Tap your device’s screen. The data on your device will be sent and displayed on the screen of the other device.142 Tools › Send data via S Beam With the S Beam feature, you can send data, such as music, videos, images, and documents. Do not send copyright-protected data via S Beam. Doing this may violate copyright laws. Samsung is not responsible for any legal issues caused by the user’s illegal use of copyrighted data. 1 In the application list, select Settings→ More settings→ S Beam. 2 Drag the S Beam switch to the right. 3 Launch an application that uses music, videos, images, or documents. 4 Open or play a file. 5 Touch the back of your device to the back of the other device. 6 Tap your device’s screen. The data on your device will be sent and displayed on the screen of the other device. If the two devices try to send data simultaneously, the file transfer may fail.143 Tools Google Learn to search for data in your device or information on the Internet. 1 In the application list, select Google. 2 Enter a keyword and select . To search for data by voice, select and say a keyword into your device’s microphone. 3 Select a search result. SIM Toolkit Use a variety of additional services offered by your service provider. Depending on your SIM or USIM card, this application may be labelled differently. In the application list, select SIM Toolkit. S Voice Learn to use the voice command feature provided by S Voice. You can dial a number, send a message, write a memo, or complete other tasks simply by speaking to your device. ● This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. ● If your pronunciation is unclear, when speaking in noisy places, or when speaking with offensive or slang words and in dialectal accents, the device may not recognise your commands or may perform unwanted commands. 1 In the application list, select S Voice. 2 Say a command into the microphone. To say a new command, select . You can deactivate voice prompts by selecting .Settings 144 Settings Access the setting options 1 In the application list, select Settings. 2 Select a setting category, and then select an option. Wi-Fi Activate the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a Wi-Fi AP and access the Internet or other network devices. To use options, press the Option key. ● Advanced: Customise Wi-Fi settings. ● WPS push button: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi AP with a WPS button. ● WPS PIN entry: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi AP with a WPS PIN. Bluetooth Activate the Bluetooth feature to exchange information over short distances. Data usage Keep track of your data usage amount, and customise the settings for the limitation.Settings 145 ● Mobile data: Set to use data connections on any mobile network. ● Set mobile data limit: Set a limit for the mobile data usage. ● Data usage cycle: Enter monthly reset date to monitor your data usage. To use more options, press the Option key. ● Data roaming: Set to use data connections when you are roaming. ● Restrict background data: Set to disable synchronisation in the background while using a mobile network. ● Auto sync data: Set the device to synchronise contact, calendar, email, bookmark, and social network image data automatically. ● Show Wi-Fi usage: Set to show your data usage via Wi-Fi. ● Mobile hotspots: Search for and use another device’s mobile network. More settings Change the settings to control connections with other devices or networks. › Flight mode Activate Flight mode to disable all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network features. ›Mobile networks ● Mobile data: Set to use data connections on any mobile network. ● Data roaming: Set to use data connections when you are roaming.Settings 146 ● Access Point Names: Select an access point name (APN) for mobile networks. You can add or edit APNs. To reset your APN settings to the factory defaults, press the Option key and select Reset to default. ● Network mode: Select a network type. ● Network operators: - Search networks: Search for and select a network. - Select automatically: Set the device to select the first available network. › Tethering and portable hotspot ● Portable Wi-Fi hotspot: Set to use your device as a wireless access point for other devices. ● USB tethering: Set to use your device as a wireless modem by making a USB connection with a computer. ● Bluetooth tethering: Activate the Bluetooth tethering feature to share your mobile network with computers via Bluetooth. ● Help: View information about using the tethering features. › VPN Set up and manage virtual private networks (VPNs). ›NFC Activate the NFC feature to read or write NFC tags that contain information. › S Beam Activate the S Beam feature to send data, such as music, videos, images, and documents, to devices that support NFC and Wi-Fi Direct.Settings 147 ›Nearby devices ● File sharing: Activate media sharing to allow other DLNA certified devices to access media files on your device. ● Shared contents: Set to share your contents with other devices. ● Device name: Enter a media server name for your device. ● Allowed devices list: View the list of devices that can access your device. ● Not-allowed devices list: View the list of devices that are blocked from accessing your device. ● Download to: Select a memory location for saving downloaded media files. ● Upload from other devices: Set to accept uploads from other device. › AllShare Cast Activate the AllShare Cast feature and share your display with others. › Kies via Wi-Fi Connect your device to Samsung Kies via Wi-Fi. Home screen mode Select a Home screen mode (basic or easy).Settings 148 Blocking mode Select which notifications will be blocked or set to allow notifications for calls from specified contacts in Blocking mode. Sound Change the settings for various sounds on your device. ● Volume: Adjust the volume for various sounds on your device. ● Vibration intensity: Adjust the vibration intensity. ● Device ringtone: Select a ringtone to alert you to incoming calls. ● Device vibration: Add or select a vibration pattern. ● Default notifications: Select a ringtone to alert you to events, such as new messages and missed calls. ● Sound and vibration: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone for incoming calls. ● Keytones: Set the device to sound when you enter numbers on the dialling screen. ● Touch sounds: Set the device to sound when you select an application or option. ● Screen lock sound: Set the device to sound when you lock or unlock the touch screen. ● Haptic feedback: Set the device to vibrate when you press the Option key or the Back key, or press and hold the Power key or the Home key. ● Auto haptic: Set the device to vibrate when playing sounds in downloaded applications.Settings 149 Display Change the settings to control the display and backlight on your device. ● Wallpaper - Home screen: Select a background image for the Home screen. - Lock screen: Select a background image for the locked screen. - Home and lock screens: Select a background image for the Home screen and the locked screen. ● LED indicator - Charging: Set to turn on the service light while you are charging the battery. - Low battery: Set to turn on the service light when the battery is low. - Notifications: Set to turn on the service light when you have missed calls, messages, or notifications. - Voice recording: Set to turn on the service light when you record voice memos. ● Screen mode: Select a display mode. - Dynamic: Use this mode to make the display tone more vivid. - Standard: Use this mode for normal surroundings. - Natural: Use this mode to make the display tone appear similar to a TV. - Movie: Use this mode for dim surroundings, such as in a dark room. ● Brightness: Adjust the brightness of the display.Settings 150 ● Auto-rotate screen: Set the interface to rotate automatically when you rotate the device. ● Screen timeout: Select the length of time that the device waits before turning off the display backlight. ● Smart stay: Set to prevent the display backlight from turning off while you are looking at the display. ● Font style: Change the font type for the display text. ● Font size: Change the font size for creating or showing items in applications. ● Touch key light duration: Select the length of time that the device waits before turning off the touch key backlight. ● Display battery percentage: Set to view the remaining battery life. ● Auto adjust screen tone: Set to save power by adjusting the brightness of the display. Storage View memory information for your device and memory card. You can also format the memory card. Formatting a memory card will permanently delete all data from the memory location. The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified capacity because the operating system and default applications occupy part of the memory.Settings 151 Power saving Activate Power saving mode and change the settings for Power saving mode. ● CPU power saving: Set the device to limit some system resource usage. ● Screen power saving: Set the device to decrease the brightness of the display. ● Background colour: Set the device to decrease the brightness of the background colour of email and Internet. ● Turn off haptic feedback: Set to prevent the device from vibrating when you press the Option key or the Back key, or press and hold the Power key or the Home key. ● Learn about power saving: View information for saving battery power. Battery View the amount of battery power consumed by your device. Applications manager View and manage the applications on your device. Location services Change the settings for location services. ● Use wireless networks: Set to use Wi-Fi and/or mobile networks for finding your location. ● Use GPS satellites: Set to use GPS satellites for finding your location. ● Location and Google search: Set the device to use your current location for Google search and other Google services.Settings 152 Lock screen Change the settings for securing your device. ● Screen lock: Activate the screen lock feature. ● Lock screen options: The settings are applied only when you set the swipe lock option. - Shortcuts: Set to show and edit application shortcuts on the locked screen. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. - Information ticker: Set to show news or stock information on the locked screen. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. - Clock: Set to show the clock on the locked screen. - Dual clock: Set to show the dual clock on the locked screen. - Weather: Set to show the weather information and change the settings for the weather display. - Ripple effect: Set to show the ripple effect on the locked screen. - Help text: Set to show the help text on the locked screen. - Camera quick access: Set the device to launch the camera by tapping and holding the screen and rotating the device while the screen is locked.Settings 153 - Wake up in lock screen: Set the device to recognise your wake up command when the screen is locked. - Set wake-up command: Set a wake up command to launch the S Voice application or perform a specified function. ● Owner information: Enter your information that is shown on the locked screen. Security ● Encrypt device: Set a password to encrypt data saved on the device. You must enter the password each time you turn on the device. Charge the battery before enabling this setting because it may take more than an hour to encrypt your data. ● Encrypt external SD card: - Encrypt: Set to encrypt files when you save them to a memory card. - Full encryption: Set to encrypt all files on a memory card. - Exclude multimedia files: Set to encrypt all files on a memory card, except for media files. If you reset your device to the factory defaults with this setting enabled, the device will not be able to read your encrypted files. Disable this setting before resetting the device.Settings 154 ● Remote controls: Set to allow control of your lost or stolen device remotely via the Internet. To use this feature, you must sign in to your Samsung and Google accounts. - Account registration: Add or view your Samsung and Google accounts. - Use wireless networks: Set to allow location data collection and to determine the location of your lost or stolen device via Wi-Fi and mobile networks. ● SIM Change Alert: Activate the Find my mobile feature. ● Find my mobile web page: Access the SamsungDive website (www.samsungdive.com). You can track and control your lost or stolen device on the SamsungDive website. ● Set up SIM card lock: - Lock SIM card: Set to lock the SIM or USIM card. To use your device with the SIM or USIM card, you must enter the PIN. - Change SIM PIN: Change the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. ● Make passwords visible: Set to show your passwords as you enter them. ● Device administrators: View the administrators you have approved for your device. You can allow device administrators to apply new policies to your device. ● Unknown sources: Set the device to install applications downloaded from any source. If you do not select this option, you can install only applications downloaded from Play Store. ● Trusted credentials: Set to use certificates and credentials to ensure the secure use of applications.Settings 155 ● Install from device storage: Install encrypted certificates that are saved in the device’s USB storage. ● Clear credentials: Delete credentials from the device and reset the password. Language and input Change the settings for languages and text input. › Language Select a display language. ›Default Select a text input method. ›Google voice typing Activate the Google voice input feature to enter text by voice. To change the voice input settings, select . ● Choose input languages: Select input languages for Google voice recognition. ● Block offensive words: Set to prevent the device from recognising offensive words in voice inputs. ● Download offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. › Samsung keyboard To change the Samsung keypad settings, select . ● Portrait keyboard types: Select a keypad type. ● Input language: Select input languages to use with the keypad.Settings 156 ● Predictive text: Activate XT9 mode to predict words based on your input and show word suggestions. You can also customise the word prediction settings. ● Continuous input: Set to enter text by sweeping on the keypad. ● Keyboard swipe: Set to switch text input modes by sweeping your finger left or right across the keypad. ● Handwriting: Activate Handwriting mode. You can also change the settings for Handwriting mode, such as recognition time, pen thickness, or pen colour. ● Voice input: Activate the voice input feature to enter text by voice. ● Auto capitalisation: Set to capitalise the first letter of a sentence automatically. ● Auto-punctuate: Set to insert punctuation marks automatically when needed. ● Character preview: Set the device to show a preview image of each letter you tap. ● Key-tap vibration: Set the device to vibrate when you tap a key. ● Key-tap sound: Set the device to sound when you tap a key. ● Tutorial: View the tutorial for using the Samsung keypad. ● Reset settings: Reset the Samsung keypad settings to the factory defaults. › Voice recogniser Select a voice recognition engine.Settings 157 › Voice search The following options are available for Google voice recognition: ● Language: Select a language for Google voice recognition. ● Speech output: Set the device to provide voice feedback to alert you to the current action. ● Block offensive words: Set to hide offensive words from voice search results. ● Download offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. The following options are available for Samsung voice recognition: ● Language: Select a language for voice recognition. ● Open via the home key: Set to launch the S Voice application by pressing the Home key twice. ● Use location data: Set to use your location information for voice search results. ● Hide offensive words: Set to hide offensive words from voice search results. ● Help: View information about using the S Voice application. ● About: View version information. ● Voice cmd for apps: Set the device to recognise voice commands for controlling your device. You can select the features to control with voice commands. ● Auto-start speaker: Set to turn on the speakerphone automatically when making a call with the S Voice application. ● Show body of message: Set to view the text of a new message received while in Driving mode.Settings 158 ● Wake up command: Set to begin voice recognition when you say the wake up command while using the S Voice application. ● Wake up in lock screen: Set the device to recognise your wake up command when the screen is locked. ● Set wake-up command: Set a wake up command to launch the S Voice application or perform a specified function. ● Check missed events: Set to view missed calls, messages, or events when you launch the S Voice application by pressing the headset button. ● Home address: Enter your home address to use your location information in the S Voice application. ● Log in to Facebook: Enter your Facebook account information. ● Log in to Twitter: Enter your Twitter account information. › Text-to-speech output ● Preferred TTS engine: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, select . ● Speech rate: Select a speed for the TTS feature. ● Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. ● Driving mode: Activate Driving mode to provide audible notifications for incoming calls, messages, or event details. › Pointer speed Adjust the pointer speed for the mouse or trackpad connected to your device.Settings 159 Back up and reset Change the settings for managing settings and data. ● Back up my data: Set to back up your settings and application data to the Google server. ● Backup account: Set up or edit your Google backup account. ● Automatic restore: Set to restore your settings and application data when you must reinstall an application. ● Factory data reset: Reset your settings to the factory defaults and delete all your data. Add account Add your email or SNS accounts. Motion Activate the motion feature and change the settings that control the motion recognition feature on your device. ● Direct call: Set to make a voice call by picking up and holding the device near your ear while viewing call, message, or contact details. ● Smart alert: Set the device to alert you if you have missed calls or new messages when you pick up your device. ● Double tap to top: Set to move to the top of a list of contacts or email messages when you double-tap the device. ● Tilt to zoom: Set to use a tilting motion to zoom in or out when viewing images or browsing webpages.Settings 160 ● Pan to move icon: Set to move an item to another page when you tap and hold the item, and then slide the device to the left or right. ● Pan to browse images: Set to scroll through an image by sliding the device in any direction when the image is zoomed in. ● Shake to update: Set to shake your device to search for Bluetooth devices or Kies air devices. ● Turn over to mute/pause: Set to mute ringtones, pause media playback, or mute the FM radio when you place the device face down. ● Sensitivity settings: Adjust the reaction speed for each motion. ● Learn about motions: View the tutorial for controlling motions. ● Palm swipe to capture: Set to capture an image of the screen when you sweep your hand to the left or right across the screen. ● Palm touch to mute/pause: Set to pause media playback or mute the FM radio when you touch the screen with your palm. ● Learn about hand motions: View the tutorial for controlling hand motions. Accessory Change the accessory settings. ● Dock sound: Set the device to play a sound when your device is connected to or removed from a desktop dock. ● Audio output mode: Set to use the dock speaker when your device is connected to a desktop dock.Settings 161 ● Desk home screen display: Set the device to show the desk clock when your device is connected to a desktop dock. ● Audio output: Select a sound output format to use when connecting your device to HDMI devices. Some devices may not support the surround sound setting. ● Audio applications: Set the device to show which applications are available when you connect a headset to the device. Date and time Change the settings to control how time and date appears on your device. If the battery remains fully discharged or removed from the device, the time and date will be reset. ● Automatic date and time: Set to receive time information from the network and update the time and date automatically. ● Set date: Set the current date manually. ● Set time: Set the current time manually. ● Automatic time zone: Set to receive time zone information from the network when you move across time zones. ● Select time zone: Select a time zone. ● Use 24-hour format: Set to show the time in 24-hour format or 12-hour format. ● Select date format: Select a date format.Settings 162 Accessibility Accessibility services are special features for those with physical challenges. Change the settings to improve accessibility to the device’s interface and features. ● Auto-rotate screen: Set the interface to rotate automatically when you rotate the device. ● Screen timeout: Select the length of time that the device waits before turning off the display backlight. ● Speak passwords: Set the device to read aloud passwords you enter with TalkBack. ● Call answering/ending: - Answering key: Set to answer calls by pressing the Home key. - The power key ends calls: Set to end a call when you press the Power key. ● Accessibility shortcut: Add a shortcut to accessibility settings that appears when you press and hold the Power key. ● TalkBack: Activate TalkBack, which provides voice feedback. ● Font size: Change the font size for creating or showing items in applications. ● Negative colours: Reverse the display colours to improve visibility. ● Enhance web accessibility: Set applications to install web scripts to make their web content more accessible. ● Mono audio: Enable mono sound when you listen to audio with one earbud. ● Turn off all sounds: Mute all device sounds. ● Tap and hold delay: Set the recognition time for tapping and holding the screen.Settings 163 Developer options Activate and change the settings for application development. ● Desktop backup password: Set a password to secure your backup data. ● Stay awake: Set the screen to remain on while you are charging the battery. ● Protect SD card: Set to request a confirmation when reading data from a memory card. ● USB debugging: Activate USB debugging mode to connect your device to a computer with a USB cable. ● Allow mock locations: Allow mock locations and service information to be sent to a Location Manager service for testing. ● Select debug app: Select applications to debug and prevent errors when you pause debugging. ● Wait for debugger: Set to prevent the selected application from loading until the debugger is ready. ● Show touches: Set to show the pointer when you touch the screen. ● Show pointer location: Set to show the coordinates and traces of the pointer when you touch the screen. ● Show layout boundaries: Set to show boundaries. ● Show GPU view updates: Set to flash areas of the screen when they are updated with the GPU. ● Show screen updates: Set to flash areas of the screen when they are updated. ● Window animation scale: Select a speed for opening and closing pop-up windows.Settings 164 ● Transition animation scale: Select a speed for switching between screens. ● Animator duration scale: Select how long pop-up windows will be shown. ● Disable hardware overlays: Set to hide hardware overlays. ● Force GPU rendering: Set to use 2D hardware acceleration to improve graphic performance. ● Strict mode: Set the device to flash the screen when applications perform long operations. ● Show CPU usage: Set to list all active processes. ● Profile GPU rendering: Set to check the time of GPU rendering time. ● Enable traces: Set to capture traces of application and system performance. ● Do not keep activities: Set to end a running application when you launch a new application. ● Limit background processes: Set to limit the number of processes that can run in the background. ● Show all ANRs: Set the device to alert you to unresponsive applications that are running in the background. About device View information about your device, such as model number and version. You can download and install firmware update with the firmware over-the-air (FOTA) service. To check for firmware updates, select Software update→ Update.Troubleshooting 165 Troubleshooting When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it prompts you to enter one of the following codes: Code Try this to solve the problem: Password When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set for the device. PIN When using the device for the first time or when the PIN requirement is enabled, you must enter the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. You can disable this feature by using Lock SIM card. PUK Your SIM or USIM card is blocked, usually as a result of entering your PIN incorrectly several times. You must enter the PUK supplied by your service provider. PIN2 When you access a menu requiring the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. For details, contact your service provider. Your device displays network or service error messages ● When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. ● You cannot access some options without a subscription. Contact your service provider for more details.Troubleshooting 166 The touch screen responds slowly or improperly If your device has a touch screen and the touch screen is not responding properly, try the following: ● Remove any protective covers from the touch screen. Protective covers may prevent the device from recognising your inputs and are not recommended for touch screen devices. ● Ensure that your hands are clean and dry when tapping the touch screen. ● Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs. ● Ensure that your device’s software is upgraded to the latest version. ● If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, take your device to a Samsung Service Centre. Your device freezes or has fatal errors If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close applications or reset the device to regain functionality. If your device is still responsive and an application is frozen, close the application with the task manager. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power key for 8-10 seconds. If this problem persists, perform a factory data reset. In the application list, select Settings→ Back up and reset→ Factory data reset→ Reset device→ Erase everything. Calls are being dropped When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose your connection to the network. Move to another area and try again.Troubleshooting 167 Outgoing calls are not connected ● Ensure that you have pressed the Dial key. ● Ensure that you have accessed the correct cellular network. ● Ensure that you have not set call barring for the phone number you are dialling. Incoming calls are not connected ● Ensure that your device is turned on. ● Ensure that you have accessed the correct cellular network. ● Ensure that you have not set call barring for the incoming phone number. Others cannot hear you speaking on a call ● Ensure that you are not covering the built-in microphone. ● Ensure that the microphone is close to your mouth. ● If using a headset, ensure that it is properly connected. Audio quality is poor ● Ensure that you are not blocking the device’s internal antenna. ● When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. When dialling from contacts, the call is not connected ● Ensure that the correct number is stored in the contact list. ● Re-enter and save the number, if necessary. ● Ensure that you have not set call barring for the contact’s phone number.Troubleshooting 168 The device beeps and the battery icon is empty Your battery is low. Recharge or replace the battery to continue using the device. The battery does not charge properly or the device turns off ● The battery terminals may be dirty. Wipe the gold-coloured contacts with a clean, soft cloth and try charging the battery again. ● If the battery will no longer charge completely, dispose of the old battery properly and replace it with a new battery (refer to your local regulations for proper disposal instructions). Your device is hot if touched When you use applications that require more power or use applications on your device for an extended period of time, your device may feel hot. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance. Error messages appear when launching the camera Your device must have sufficient memory and battery power available to operate the camera application. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the following: ● Charge the battery or replace it with a battery that is fully charged. ● Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. ● Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera application after trying these tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre.Troubleshooting 169 Error messages appear when launching the FM radio The FM radio application on your device uses the headset cable as an antenna. Without a headset connected, the FM radio will be unable to receive radio stations. To use the FM radio, first ensure that the headset is properly connected. Next, scan for and save the available radio stations. If you still cannot use the FM radio after performing these steps, try accessing your desired station with another radio receiver. If you can hear the station with another receiver, your device may require service. Contact a Samsung Service Centre. Error messages appear when opening music files Some music files may not play on your device for a number of reasons. If you receive error messages when opening music files on your device, try the following: ● Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. ● Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is DRM-protected, ensure that you have the appropriate licence or key to play the file. ● Ensure that your device supports the file type.Troubleshooting 170 Another Bluetooth device is not located ● Ensure that the Bluetooth feature is activated on your device. ● Ensure that the Bluetooth feature is activated on the device you wish to connect to, if necessary. ● Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum Bluetooth range (10 m). If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre. A connection is not established when you connect the device to a computer ● Ensure that the USB cable you are using is compatible with your device. ● Ensure that you have the proper drivers installed and updated on your computer. ● If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. ● Ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0 or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer.Safety information 171 Safety information To prevent injury to yourself and others, or damage to your device, read all of the following information before using your device. Warning: Prevent electric shock, fire, and explosion Do not use damaged power cords or plugs, or loose electrical sockets Do not touch the power cord with wet hands or disconnect the charger by pulling the cord Do not bend or damage the power cord Do not use your device while it is charging or touch your device with wet hands Do not short-circuit the charger or the battery Do not drop or cause an impact to the charger or the battery Do not charge the battery with chargers that are not approved by the manufacturer Do not use your device during a thunderstorm Your device may malfunction and your risk of electric shock is increased. Do not handle a damaged or leaking Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) battery For safe disposal of your Li-Ion batteries, contact your nearest authorised service centre. Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care • Use only Samsung-approved batteries and chargers specifically designed for your device. Incompatible batteries and chargers can cause serious injuries or damage to your device. • Never dispose of batteries or devices in a fire. Follow all local regulations when disposing of used batteries or devices.Safety information 172 • Never place batteries or devices on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when overheated. • Never crush or puncture the battery. Avoid exposing the battery to high external pressure, which can lead to an internal short circuit and overheating. Protect the device, batteries, and chargers from damage • Avoid exposing your device and batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures. • Extreme temperatures can damage the device and reduce the charging capacity and life of your device and batteries. • Prevent batteries from coming into contact with metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your batteries and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage. • Never use a damaged charger or battery. Caution: Follow all safety warnings and regulations when using your device in restricted areas Do not use your device near other electronic devices Most electronic devices use radio frequency signals. Your device may interfere with other electronic devices. Do not use your device near a pacemaker • Avoid using your device within a 15 cm range of a pacemaker, if possible, as your device can interfere with the pacemaker. • To minimise possible interference with a pacemaker, use your device only on the side of your body that is opposite the pacemaker. Do not use your device in a hospital or near medical equipment that can be interfered with by radio frequency If you use medical equipment, contact the equipment manufacturer before using your device to determine whether or not the equipment will be affected by radio frequencies emitted by the device.Safety information 173 If you use a hearing aid, contact the manufacturer for information about radio interference The radio frequency emitted by your device may interfere with some hearing aids. Before using your device, contact the manufacturer to determine whether or not your hearing aid will be affected by radio frequencies emitted by the device. Turn off the device in potentially explosive environments • Turn off your device in potentially explosive environments instead of removing the battery. • Always comply with regulations, instructions and signs in potentially explosive environments. • Do not use your device at refuelling points (petrol stations), near fuels or chemicals, or in blasting areas. • Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or accessories. Turn off your device when on an aircraft Your device may interfere with the aircraft’s electronic navigation instruments. Your device may interfere with automotive equipment Electronic devices in your car may malfunction, due to radio interference from your device. Contact the manufacturer for more information. Comply with all safety warnings and regulations regarding mobile device usage while operating a vehicle While driving, safely operating the vehicle is your first responsibility. Never use your mobile device while driving, if it is prohibited by law. For your safety and the safety of others, use your common sense and remember the following tips: • Get to know your device and its convenience features, such as speed dial and redial. These features help you reduce the time needed to place or receive calls on your mobile device. • Position your device within easy reach. Make sure you can access your wireless device without taking your eyes off the road. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time, let your voicemail answer it for you. • Suspend calls in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and heavy traffic can be hazardous.Safety information 174 • Do not take notes or look up phone numbers. Jotting down a “to do” list or flipping through your address book takes attention away from your primary responsibility of driving safely. • Dial sensibly and assess the traffic. Place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. • Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Make the person you are talking to aware that you are driving and suspend conversations that could potentially divert your attention from the road. • Use your device to call for help. Dial a local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accidents, or medical emergencies. • Use your device to help others in emergencies. If you see a car accident, a crime in progress, or a serious emergency where lives are in danger, call a local emergency number. • Call roadside assistance or a special, non-emergency assistance number when necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle that you know to be stolen, call a number that is designated for reporting these types of situations. Proper care and use of your mobile device Keep your device dry • Humidity and liquids may damage the parts or electronic circuits in your device. • Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery, leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it to a service centre. • Liquids will change the colour of the label that indicates water damage inside the device. Water damage to your device can void your manufacturer’s warranty. Do not use or store your device in areas with high concentrations of dust or airborne materials Dust or foreign materials can cause your device to malfunction and may result in fire or electric shock. Store your device only on flat surfaces If your device falls, it may be damaged.Safety information 175 Do not store your device in very hot or very cold areas. It is recommended to use your device at temperatures from 5 °C to 35 °C • Your device can explode if left inside a closed vehicle, as the internal temperature can reach up to 80 °C. • Do not expose your device to direct sunlight for extended periods of time (on the dashboard of a car, for example). • Store the battery at temperatures from 0 °C to 45 °C. Do not store your device with metal objects, such as coins, keys, and necklaces • Your device may be scratched or may malfunction. • If the battery terminals come into contact with metal objects, this may cause a fire. Do not store your device near magnetic fields • Your device may malfunction or the battery may discharge from exposure to magnetic fields. • Magnetic stripe cards, including credit cards, phone cards, passbooks, and boarding passes, may be damaged by magnetic fields. • Do not use carrying cases or accessories with magnetic closures or allow your device to come into contact with magnetic fields for extended periods of time. Do not store your device near or in heaters, microwaves, hot cooking equipment, or high pressure containers • The battery may leak. • Your device may overheat and cause a fire. Do not drop your device or cause impacts to your device • The screen of your device may be damaged. • If bent or deformed, your device may be damaged or parts may malfunction. Do not use your device or applications for a while if the device is overheated Prolonged exposure of your skin to an overheated device may cause low temperature burn symptoms, such as red spots and pigmentation. If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use it close to the eyes of people or pets Using a flash close to the eyes may cause temporary loss of vision or damage to the eyes.Safety information 176 Use caution when exposed to flashing lights • While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do not hold the screen too close to your eyes. • Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights while watching videos or playing Flash-based games for extended periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device immediately. Reduce the risk of repetitive motion injuries When you repetitively perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders, or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly, and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort during or after such use, stop using the device and consult a physician. Ensure maximum battery and charger life • Avoid charging batteries for more than a week, as overcharging may shorten battery life. • Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use. • Disconnect chargers from power sources when not in use. • Use batteries only for their intended purposes. Use manufacturer-approved batteries, chargers, accessories, and supplies • Using generic batteries or chargers may shorten the life of your device or cause the device to malfunction. • Samsung cannot be responsible for the user’s safety when using accessories or supplies that are not approved by Samsung. Do not bite or suck the device or the battery • Doing so may damage the device or cause an explosion. • If children use the device, make sure that they use the device properly. Do not insert the device or supplied accessories into the eyes, ears, or mouth Doing so may cause suffocation or serious injuries.Safety information 177 When speaking on the device: • Hold the device upright, as you would with a traditional phone. • Speak directly into the microphone. • Do not touch the device’s internal antenna. Doing so may result in reduced call quality or cause the device to emit unintended levels of radio frequency (RF) energy. Protect your hearing and ears when using a headset • Excessive exposure to loud sounds can cause hearing damage. • Exposure to loud sounds while driving may distract your attention and cause an accident. • Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source and use only the minimum volume setting necessary to hear your conversation or music. • In dry environments, static electricity can build up in the headset. Avoid using headsets in dry environments or touch a metal object to discharge static electricity before connecting a headset to the device. Use caution when using the device while walking or moving • Always be aware of your surroundings to avoid injury to yourself or others. • Make sure the headset cable does not become entangled in your arms or on nearby objects. Do not carry your device in your back pockets or around your waist You could be injured or damage the device if you fall. Do not disassemble, modify, or repair your device • Any changes or modifications to your device can void your manufacturer’s warranty. If your device needs servicing, take your device to a Samsung Service Centre. • Do not disassemble or puncture the battery, as this can cause explosion or fire.Safety information 178 Do not paint or put stickers on your device Paint and stickers can clog moving parts and prevent proper operation. If you are allergic to paint or metal parts of the device, you may experience itching, eczema, or swelling of the skin. When this happens, stop using the device and consult your physician. When cleaning your device: • Wipe your device or charger with a towel or an eraser. • Clean the battery terminals with a cotton ball or a towel. • Do not use chemicals or detergents. Do not use the device if the screen is cracked or broken Broken glass or acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to have it repaired. Do not use the device for anything other than its intended use Avoid disturbing others when using the device in public Do not allow children to use your device Your device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as they could hurt themselves and others, damage the device, or make calls that increase your charges. Install mobile devices and equipment with caution • Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your vehicle are securely mounted. • Avoid placing your device and accessories near or in an airbag deployment area. Improperly installed wireless equipment can cause serious injury when airbags inflate rapidly. Allow only qualified personnel to service your device Allowing unqualified personnel to service your device may result in damage to your device and will void your manufacturer’s warranty.Safety information 179 Handle SIM cards or memory cards with care • Do not remove a card while the device is transferring or accessing information, as this could result in loss of data and/or damage to the card or device. • Protect cards from strong shocks, static electricity, and electrical noise from other devices. • Do not touch gold-coloured contacts or terminals with your fingers or metal objects. If dirty, wipe the card with a soft cloth. Ensure access to emergency services Emergency calls from your device may not be possible in some areas or circumstances. Before travelling in remote or undeveloped areas, plan an alternative method of contacting emergency services personnel. Keep your personal and important data safe • While using your device, be sure to back up important data. Samsung is not responsible for the loss of any data. • When disposing of your device, back up all data and then reset your device to prevent misuse of your personal information. • Carefully read the permissions screen when downloading applications. Be particularly cautious with applications that have access to many functions or to a significant amount of your personal information. • Check your accounts regularly for unapproved or suspicious use. If you find any sign of misuse of your personal information, contact your service provider to delete or change your account information. • In the event your device is lost or stolen, change the passwords on your accounts to protect your personal information. • Avoid using applications from unknown sources and lock your device with a pattern, password, or PIN. Do not distribute copyright-protected material Do not distribute copyright-protected material without the permission of the content owners. Doing this may violate copyright laws. The manufacturer is not liable for any legal issues caused by the user’s illegal use of copyrighted material.Safety information 180 Correct disposal of this product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. This EEE is compliant with RoHS. Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system.Safety information 181 Disclaimer Some content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal non-commercial use. You may not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorised by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorised by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not modify, copy, republish, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, create derivative works, exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device. “THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.” SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT CONTENT OR SERVICES SO PROVIDED, EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PURPOSE. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.” Third party services may be terminated or interrupted at any time, and Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are transmitted by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which Samsung has no control. Without limiting the generality of this disclaimer, Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any interruption or suspension of any content or service made available through this device. Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any question or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the respective content and service providers.Index 182 alarms 135 AllShare Cast 122 AllShare Play 123 Android Beam 141 applications closing 38 downloading 37 launching 36 multitasking 38 organising 36 uninstalling 37 auto rejection 53 battery charging 17 inserting 15 Bluetooth 128 calculator 134 calls barring 54 forwarding 54 making 48 making international calls 49 making multiparty calls (conference calls) 51 rejecting 49 speed dialling 94 using in-call options 50, 51 viewing logs 55 waiting 55 camera changing camcorder settings 77 changing camera settings 73 recording videos 75 taking photos 69 connectivity AllShare Play 123 Bluetooth 128 GPS connections 130 mobile network sharing 126 NFC 140 USB connections 116 VPN connections 131 Wi-Fi 118 contacts copying/moving 95 creating 93 creating groups 95 finding 93 importing/exporting 96 setting speed dial 94 device lock 41 display brightness 40 font style 40 language 39 settings 149 wallpaper 40 FDN mode 53 IndexIndex 183 sending email 64 sending Google Mail 62 sending multimedia 60 sending text 59 viewing email 64 viewing Google Mail 62 viewing logs 55 viewing multimedia 61 viewing text 61 multiparty calls (conference calls) 51 music player 85 NFC 140 photos taking 69 viewing 82 Play Store 111 power saving 20, 151 Samsung Apps 112 S Beam 142 settings 144 silent mode 39 SIM/USIM card inserting 15 locking 43 sound call ringtone 39 device volume 39 settings 148 touch tone 39 stopwatch 136 tethering via Bluetooth 128 file manager 139 find my mobile 43 flight mode 23 FM radio 89 gallery 82 Google Latitude 108 Google Mail 61 Google Maps 108 Google Talk 66 home screen adding panels 34 moving items 33 removing items 34 removing panels 34 using the notifications panel 32 using widgets 35 indicator icons 31 Internet 103 key functions 14 maps getting directions 109 searching for locations 109 searching for places nearby 111 sharing locations 108 using the navigation 110 memory card formatting 22 inserting 21 removing 22 messages accessing voicemail 61Index 184 via USB 127 via Wi-Fi 126 text input copy and paste 47 with Google voice input 45 with Samsung keypad 45 timer 136 touch screen locking/unlocking 30 using 24 touch tone 39 unpack 11 USB connections as camera device 117 as media device 117 as wireless modem 127 with Samsung Kies 116 with Windows Media Player 117 video player 79 videos playing 79, 84 recording 75 uploading to YouTube 114 VPN connections 131 web browser 103 Wi-Fi 118 world clock 135 YouTube 113Some contents in this manual may differ from your device depending on the software of the device or your service provider. www.samsung.com English (EU). 11/2012. Rev. 1.1 To install Samsung Kies (PC Sync) 1. Download the latest version of Samsung Kies from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/kies) and install it on your computer. 2. Connect your device to a computer with a USB cable. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information. GT-I9300 使用说明书使用本说明书 2 使用本说明书 感谢您选择三星移动设备。本设备基于三星的高科技 和高标准,为您提供极高品质的移动通信和娱乐享 受。 本说明书专门用于指导您了解设备的功能与特性。 请先阅读说明文件 ● 使用本设备之前,请先阅读完整的说明书及所有安 全指示,以确保安全和妥善使用。 ● 本说明书中的描述基于设备的默认设定。 ● 本说明书中所用的图像和屏幕截图可能与实际产品 不同。 ● 本说明书中的内容可能与产品不同,也可能与服务 提供商或服务商提供的软件不同。如有变更,恕不 另行通知。访问三星网站 (www.samsung.com) 以 获得最新版本的说明书。 ● 可用功能和附加服务可能因设备、软件或服务提供 商而异。 ● 本说明书的格式和资讯基于 Android 操作系统,用 户使用的操作系统可能与之有所不同。 ● 本设备上的应用程序执行的功能与对应的电脑应用 程序可能有所不同,并且可能未包括电脑版本中可 用的所有功能。使用本说明书 3 ● 应用程序及其功能可能因地区或硬件规格而异。三 星对由第三方应用程序导致的性能问题概不负责。 ● 对于编辑注册表设定或修改操作系统软件所造成 的性能问题或不兼容性,三星概不负责。尝试定制 操作系统可能导致您的设备或应用程序无法正常工 作。 ● 可以通过访问三星网站 (www.samsung.com) 升级 设备的软件。 ● 本设备中提供的软件、音频、墙纸和图像被许可在 三星及其各自所有人之间有限使用。针对商业或其 他用途抽取和使用这些资料将违反版权法。三星对 用户的此类版权侵权行为概不负责。 ● 收发讯息、上传和下载、进行自动同步或使用定 位服务可能会产生其他费用。如欲避免产生额外费 用,请选择合适的数据收费计划。有关详细信息, 请联系服务提供商。 ● 请妥善保存本说明书以供日后参考。使用本说明书 4 指示图标 在开始使用前,请先熟悉本说明书中使用的图标: 警告 — 可能伤及自己或他人的情况 小心 — 可能损坏设备或其他设备的情况 注意 — 注释、使用提示或其他信息 ► 参照 — 含有相关资讯的页面。例如: ► 第 12 页 (表示“参照第 12 页”) → 下一步 — 执行某个步骤所必须遵循的选项或 功能表选择次序,例如:在应用程序列表中, 选择设定 → 声音 → 设备铃声 (表示先选择设 定,下一步选择声音,再下一步选择设备铃声) 版权 版权 © 2012 Samsung Electronics 本说明书受国际版权法保护。 未经 Samsung Electronics 事先书面许可,不得以任 何形式或方式 (电子或机械) 复制、分发、转译或传播 本使用说明书中的任何内容,包括影印、录制或存储 在任何信息存储器和检索系统中。使用本说明书 5 商标 ● SAMSUNG 和 SAMSUNG 徽标是 Samsung Electronics 的注册商标。 ● Android 徽标、Google™、Google Maps™、 Google Mail™、YouTube™、Google Play™ Store、Google Latitude™和 Google Talk™是 Google, Inc. 的商标。 ● 蓝牙®是 Bluetooth SIG Inc. 在全球的注册商标。 ● Windows Media Player®是 Microsoft Corporation 的注册商标。 ● Wi-Fi®、Wi-Fi Protected Setup™、 Wi-Fi Direct™、Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™和 Wi-Fi 徽标 是 Wi-Fi Alliance 的注册商标。 ● DivX®、DivX Certified®和相 关徽标是 Rovi Corporation 或其子公司的商标,均为授 权使用。 ● 其他所有商标和版权的所有权归各自所有者所有。使用本说明书 6 关于 DIVX 视像 DivX®是由 Rovi Corporation 的子公司 DivX, LLC 创建的数字视频格式。本设备已获得官方 DivX Certified®认证,可播放 DivX 视像。请访问 www.divx.com 了解详细信息,以及获取将文件转换 为 DivX 视像的软件工具。 关于 DIVX 视像点播 此 DivX Certified®设备必须先经过注册,然后才能 播放购买的 DivX 视像点播 (VOD) 电影。将 DivX VOD 置于设备的安装菜单以获得登录编号。请在 vod.divx.com 上了解更多关于完成注册的信息。 DivX Certified®播放 DivX®视像的分辨率高达 HD 720p,包括付费内容。目录 7 安装 ............................................................ 11 配件介绍 ........................................................... 11 设备部位图 ........................................................ 12 按键 .................................................................. 14 插入 SIM 或 USIM 卡和电池 ............................. 15 电池充电 ........................................................... 17 插入存储卡 (选配) ............................................. 21 入门指南..................................................... 23 开机和关机 ........................................................ 23 使用触摸屏 ........................................................ 24 使用动作 ........................................................... 26 锁定或解锁触摸屏和按键 .................................. 30 逐步了解主屏 .................................................... 31 访问应用程序 .................................................... 36 启动多个应用程序 ............................................. 38 自定义设备 ........................................................ 38 输入文本 ........................................................... 44 通讯 ............................................................ 48 通话 .................................................................. 48 信息 .................................................................. 59 谷歌邮箱 ........................................................... 61 电子邮件 ........................................................... 63 Google Talk ....................................................... 66 ChatON ............................................................. 67 碰头 .................................................................. 67 Google+ ............................................................ 68 目录目录 8 娱乐 ............................................................ 69 照相机 ............................................................... 69 视频播放器 ........................................................ 79 相册 .................................................................. 82 音乐播放器 ........................................................ 85 FM 收音机 ......................................................... 89 个人信息..................................................... 92 联系人 ............................................................... 92 S日历 ................................................................ 95 S 备忘录 ........................................................... 97 录音机 ............................................................ 100 基于网络和 GPS 的服务........................... 102 互联网 ............................................................ 102 Flipboard ........................................................ 106 Game Hub ..................................................... 106 谷歌纵横 ........................................................ 107 地图 ............................................................... 107 更多服务 ........................................................ 109 导航 ............................................................... 109 本地 ................................................................ 110 Play 商店 ........................................................ 110 Samsung Apps ............................................... 111 应用精品 ......................................................... 112 YouTube ......................................................... 112 语音搜索 ......................................................... 114目录 9 连接能力................................................... 115 USB 连接 ........................................................ 115 Wi-Fi ............................................................... 117 Wi-Fi直连 ........................................................ 119 AllShare Cast ................................................. 121 AllShare Play ................................................. 122 移动网络共享 ................................................. 125 蓝牙 ............................................................... 127 GPS ............................................................... 129 VPN 连接 ....................................................... 130 工具 .......................................................... 133 计算器 ............................................................ 133 时钟 ............................................................... 133 下载列表 ........................................................ 136 Dropbox ......................................................... 136 帮助 ............................................................... 138 我的文件 ........................................................ 138 NFC ............................................................... 139 Google ........................................................... 142 SIM 工具包 .................................................... 142 S Voice .......................................................... 142 设定 .......................................................... 143 访问设定选项 ................................................. 143 Wi-Fi .............................................................. 143 蓝牙 ............................................................... 143目录 10 数据使用 ........................................................ 143 更多设置 ........................................................ 144 主屏模式 ........................................................ 146 阻止模式 ........................................................ 147 声音 ............................................................... 147 显示 ............................................................... 148 存储 ............................................................... 149 省电模式 ........................................................ 150 电池 ............................................................... 150 应用程序管理器 ............................................. 150 定位服务 ........................................................ 150 锁定屏幕 ........................................................ 151 安全 ............................................................... 152 语言和输入 ..................................................... 154 备份并重置 ..................................................... 158 添加账户 ........................................................ 158 动作 ............................................................... 158 配件 ............................................................... 159 日期和时间 ..................................................... 160 辅助功能 ........................................................ 161 开发者选项 ..................................................... 162 关于设备 ........................................................ 163 故障排除................................................... 164 安全预防措施............................................ 170安装 11 安装 配件介绍 检查产品包装盒内是否有下列物品: ● 移动设备 ● 电池 ● 快速入门指南 只可使用经过三星认可的软件。盗版或非法软件 可能会导致损坏或故障,制造商对此不予保修。 ● 设备随附的用品和配件可能会因所在地区或服 务商而异。 ● 可以向本地三星零售商购买其他配件。 ● 随附的用品专为您的设备设计,并不兼容于其 他设备。 ● 其他配件可能与您的设备不兼容。 ● 只可使用经过三星认可的配件。未经认可的配 件可能会引起设备故障。安装 12 设备部位图 ›前视图 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 6 4 5 数字 功能 1 服务灯 2 听筒 3 音量键 4 主页键 5 选项键 6 多功能插口 7 前置镜头 8 距离传/光传感器 9 触摸屏 10 返回键 11 话筒安装 13 ›后视图 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 12 13 数字 功能 12 话筒1 13 GPS 天线2 14 闪光 15 电源/重置/锁定键 16 后置镜头 17 耳机插口 18 扬声器 19 后盖 20 主天线 1.仅当使用扩音器功能或录制视频时才会启动。 2.使用 GPS 功能时请勿用手或其他物体触碰或挡住天线 周围的区域。安装 14 按键 按键 功能 电源/ 重置1 / 锁定键 开机 (紧按住);进入设备选 项 (紧按住);重置设备 (紧按住 8-10 秒);关闭和锁定触摸屏或打 开触摸屏。 选项键 打开当前屏幕上可用的选项列 表;在主屏幕上,启动搜索应用 程序 (紧按住);在使用某些应用 程序时打开搜索输入窗口 (紧按 住)。 主页键 返回到主屏幕;打开最近应用程 序的列表 (紧按住);启动 S Voice 应用程序 (按下两次)。 返回键 返回到上一屏幕。 音量键 调整设备的音量。 1.如果设备出现致命错误、挂断或死机,则可能需要重置 设备才能恢复正常。安装 15 插入 SIM 或 USIM 卡和电池 当您订购移动电话服务时,将获得一张用户识别模 块 (SIM) 卡,其中载有您的订购详细信息,例如个 人识别号码 (PIN) 和可选服务。如欲使用 UMTS 或 HSDPA 服务,可购买通用用户识别模块 (USIM) 卡。 仅可使用 microSIM 卡。 1 取下后盖。 取下后盖时,请务必小心操作,以免伤及自己的 指甲。 请勿过度弯曲或扭转后盖。否则会损坏后盖。安装 16 2 将 SIM 或 USIM 卡插入设备,使其金色触点面向 下。 请勿将存储卡插入 SIM 卡插槽中。如果存储卡卡 在 SIM 卡插槽中,须带上设备前往三星服务中心 将存储卡取出。 3 插入电池。 4 装回后盖。安装 17 电池充电 首次使用设备之前或电池长时间未用时,必须先为电 池充电。可使用旅行充电器或通过 USB 数据线将设 备与电脑相连,以对电池进行充电。 仅使用三星许可的充电器和数据线。未经许可的 充电器或数据线可能会导致电池爆炸或损坏您的 设备。 ● 电池电量不足时,设备会发出警告音并显示电 量不足信息。需给电池充电后才能继续使用设 备。 ● 如果电池电量已完全耗尽,即便连接上旅行充 电器,也无法开启设备。尝试开启设备前,让 耗尽的电池先充电片刻。 ● 如果同时使用多个应用程序,使用网络应用程 序或需要连接至其他设备的应用程序,电池电 量消耗会更快。为避免网络断开或数据传输期 间断电,务必在为电池完全充电后使用这些应 用程序。安装 18 ›用旅行充电器充电 1 将旅行充电器的小端插头插入多功能插口中。 旅行充电器连接不当很可能会严重损坏设备。对 于因误操作造成的任何损坏,将不予保修。 2 将旅行充电器的大端插头插入电源插座中。 ● 如果在充电时电源电压不稳定,触摸屏可能无 法正常工作。这时,请从设备上拔下旅行充电 器。 ● 设备在充电时会变热。该现象属于正常情况, 不会影响设备的使用寿命或性能。 ● 如果设备无法正常充电,请将设备和充电器拿 到三星服务中心。安装 19 3 电池完全充电时,先从设备拔下旅行充电器,然后 从电源插座拔下插头。 请勿在设备与旅行充电器相连时取下电池。否则 会损坏设备。 为了节能,不用时,请拔下旅行充电器。旅行充 电器上没有电源开关,因此必须要从电源插座上 拔下旅行充电器,才能断开电源。充电时,设备 应该保持靠近电源插座。 关于电池充电图标 若在设备关闭的情况下为电池充电,以下图标将会显 示当前电池充电状态: 正在充电 已完全充电安装 20 ›用 USB 数据线充电 充电前,请确保电脑已开机。 1 将 USB 数据线较小一端 (微型 USB) 插入多功能插 口。 2 将 USB 数据线的较大一端插入电脑的 USB 端口。 根据所用的 USB 数据线类型,可能需等待片刻 才能开始充电。 3 当电池充满电 (电池图标不再移动) 时,断开 USB 数据线与设备的连接,然后将其从电脑上拔下。 ›减少电池消耗 本设备提供了若干选项,可助您节省电池电量。自定 义以下选项并取消后台运行的功能,可以延长每次充 电后设备的使用时间: ● 启动省电模式。 ● 在不用设备时,按下电源开关键切换到休眠模式。 ● 使用任务管理器关闭不必要的应用程序。 ● 取消蓝牙功能。 ● 取消 WLAN 功能。 ● 取消应用程序的自动同步功能。 ● 减少背景灯时间。 ● 降低显示屏的亮度。安装 21 插入存储卡 (选配) 本设备可接受最大容量为 64 GB 的存储卡。取决于存 储卡制造商和类型,有些存储卡可能与本设备并不兼 容。 三星使用公认的存储卡行业标准,但是某些品牌 可能无法与设备完全兼容。使用不兼容的存储卡 可能会损坏设备或存储卡。也可能会损坏存储卡 上储存的数据。 ● 设备仅支持存储卡的 FAT 文件结构。如果插入 其他文件格式的存储卡,设备会要求重新格式 化存储卡。 ● 频繁写入和删除数据会缩短存储卡的使用寿 命。 ● 将存储卡插入设备中时,存储卡的文件目录会 显示在 extSdCard 文件夹中。 1 取下后盖。 2 将金色触点面向下插入存储卡。安装 22 3 将存储卡推进存储卡槽,直至锁定到位。 4 装回后盖。 ›取出存储卡 确保设备当前未访问存储卡。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 存储 → 卸载SD 卡 → 确定。 2 取下后盖。 3 轻推存储卡直到其脱离设备。 4 取出存储卡。 5 装回后盖。 设备正在发送或访问信息时,请勿取出存储卡, 否则可能造成数据丢失或损坏设备和存储卡。 ›格式化存储卡 在电脑上格式化存储卡会导致存储卡与设备不兼容。 请仅在设备上格式化存储卡。 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 存储 → 格式化SD卡 → 格式化SD卡 → 全部删除。 格式化存储卡前,记住要备份所有重要数据。因 用户操作而导致的数据丢失,制造商不提供保修 服务。23 入门指南 入门指南 开机和关机 1 紧按住电源开关键。 2 输入 SIM 或 USIM 卡随附的 PIN 码并选择确定 (如 有必要)。 如果您首次开机,请按照屏幕提示设定设备。您 必须登录 Google 或创建 Google 帐户才能使用 与 Google 服务器互动的应用程序。 如欲关机,紧按住电源开关键,然后选择关机 → 确定。 ● 在禁止使用无线装置的区域 (例如飞机和医院),请遵守所有张贴的警告和 授权人员的指示。 ● 如欲仅使用设备的非网络功能,可切换到飞行 模式。► 第 144 页24 入门指南 使用触摸屏 使用设备触摸屏可以更轻松地选择项目或执行功能。 了解使用触摸屏的基本操作。 ● 请勿用指尖按下触摸屏,或在触摸屏上使用尖 利的工具。否则可能损坏触摸屏或导致触摸屏 发生故障。 ● 禁止触摸屏接触其他电子设备。静电放电会导 致触摸屏发生故障。 ● 禁止触摸屏接触液体。触摸屏在潮湿环境中或 接触到液体时可能发生故障。 ● 使触摸屏待机过长时间可能会产生残像 (屏幕老 化) 或重像。不使用设备时请关闭触摸屏。 ● 为了更好地使用触摸屏,使用设备前请取下触 摸屏保护膜。 ● 触摸屏有一个探测层,可以探测人体发出的微 弱电荷。为达到最佳效果,请使用指尖点击触 摸屏。触摸屏无法正常反应使用手写笔或钢笔 等尖锐物体进行的触碰操作。25 入门指南 可执行以下操作来控制触摸屏: 点击 触摸一次,选择或启动功能表、 选项或应用程序。 点住 点住一个项目并维持至少 2 秒 钟。 拖动 点击一个项目并将其移至新位 置。 双击 快速地点击一个项目两次。26 入门指南 快速移动 向上、向下、向左或向右快速滚 动以浏览列表或屏幕。 双指缩放 两指分开放在屏幕上,然后通过 分合控制放大或缩小。 ● 如果未使用设备的时间达到指定时间长度,设 备会关闭触摸屏。如欲打开屏幕,按下电源开 关键或主页键。 ● 可以设置设备在关闭屏幕前等待的时间长度。 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 显示 → 屏幕 自动关闭。 使用动作 内置式动作识别可让您通过移动设备或做手势来执行 操作。 如欲使用这些功能,必须首先启动动作识别功能。在 应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 动作。27 入门指南 剧烈晃动或碰撞设备可能导致意外输入。如欲了 解如何正确控制动作,在应用程序列表中,选择 设定 → 动作 → 了解动作。► 第 159 页 拿起 在一段时间没有使用后或屏 幕关闭时拿起设备。如果有 未接来电或新讯息,设备将 会振动。 放在耳边 当查看电话、信息或联系人 详情时,拿起设备放在耳边 进行语音通话。 倾斜 在检视图像或浏览网页时, 两手握住设备,在屏幕上点 住两个点,然后来回倾斜可 放大或缩小。28 入门指南 摇移移动 点住一个项目时,将设备向 左或向右滑动,可将项目移 至主屏幕或应用程序列表的 下一页。 摇移浏览 图像放大显示时,点住屏幕 上某点,然后朝任意方向滑 动设备即可滚动浏览图像。 摇晃 ● 甩动设备可搜索蓝牙设备或 Kies air 设备。 ● 摇晃设备可从雅虎新闻、雅 虎财经或 AccuWeather 更 新电子邮件或信息列表。 更新将不适用于主屏上 的桌面工具。29 入门指南 双击 双击设备可移至联系人列表 或电子邮件的顶端。 翻转 翻转设备可关闭铃声、暂停 媒体播放或关闭 FM 收音机 声音。 手擦 将手左右掠过屏幕捕获屏幕 截图。 使用某些应用程序时, 不能捕获屏幕截图。 掌触 用手掌触摸屏幕可暂停媒体 播放或使 FM 收音机静音。30 入门指南 旋转 当屏幕锁定时,点住屏幕, 然后旋转设备进入横屏模式 以启动照相机 (当照相机快捷 键启动时)。► 第 151 页 锁定或解锁触摸屏和按键 如果未使用设备的时间达到指定时间长度,设备会关 闭触摸屏并自动锁定触摸屏和按键以防意外操作设 备。如欲手动锁定触摸屏和按键,按下电源开关键。 如欲解锁,按下电电源开关键主页键打开屏幕,然后 向任意方向滑动手指。 可以使用动作解锁来解锁屏幕。在 应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 锁定 屏幕 → 屏幕锁定 → 动作 → 确定。 如欲通过动作解锁解开屏幕锁,点 住屏幕上的一个点,然后向前倾斜 设备。 您可以启动屏幕锁功能以防他人使用或访问储存 在您设备中的个人数据和资料。► 第 41 页31 入门指南 逐步了解主屏 在主屏中,可检视设备的状态和访问应用程序。 主屏有多个面板。向左或向右滚动以检视主屏上的面 板。也可选择屏幕底部其中一个点以直接移动到相应 的面板。 ›指示符图标 显示屏上显示的图标可能会因所在地区或服务提 供商而异。 图标 定义 无信号 信号强度 已连接至 GPRS 网络 已连接至 EDGE 网络 已连接至 HSDPA 网络 已连接 Wi-Fi 接入点 已启动蓝牙功能 正在使用基于 GPS 的服务 正在通话32 入门指南 图标 定义 未接来电 已连接至电脑 无 SIM 卡或 USIM 卡 新讯息 已启动闹钟 漫游中 (在服务区外) 已启动安静模式 (振动) 已启动安静模式 (静音) 已启动飞行模式 发生错误或需要注意 电池电量 ›使用通知面板 如欲打开通知面板,点击指示符图标区域并将其向下 拖动。如欲隐藏面板,向上拖动面板的下边框。 从通知面板中,可以检视设备的当前状态并使用以下 选项: ● Wi-Fi:启动或取消 Wi-Fi 功能。► 第 117 页 ● GPS:启动或取消 GPS 功能。► 第 129 页 ● 声音:启动或取消安静模式。在安静模式下,您可 以使设备静音或将它设置成振动。 ● 屏幕旋转:允许或防止界面在旋转设备时旋转。33 入门指南 ● 省电模式:启动或取消省电模式。 ● 阻止模式:启动或取消阻止模式。在阻止模式下, 设备将阻止所有通知。 ● 移动数据:启动或取消数据连接。 ● 蓝牙:启动或取消蓝牙功能。► 第 127 页 ● 同步:启动或取消应用程序的自动同步功能。 可用的选项可能会因所在地区或服务提供商而 异。 ›更改主屏幕模式 主屏幕具有基本和简易模式。在简易模式下,可以通 过向主屏幕添加快捷方式来轻松访问常用联系人、应 用程序和设定。 如欲更改主屏模式,在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 主屏模式 → 模式。 ›移动主屏上的项目 点住项目,然后将其拖至新 位置。34 入门指南 ›从主屏移除项目 点住项目,然后将其拖至回收站。 ›自定义快速访问面板 可以通过添加或移除应用程序快捷方式来自定义主屏 底部的快速访问面板。 ● 如欲移除应用程序图标,点住该图标,然后将其拖 到回收站。 ● 如欲添加应用程序快捷方式,点住主屏上的新应用 程序快捷方式,然后将其拖到空位置。 ›从主屏添加或移除面板 可以添加或移除主屏面板以整理桌面工具。 1 在主屏幕上,用两个手指点住屏幕并合拢手指可切 换到编辑模式。 2 添加、移除或重新整理面板: ● 如欲移除面板,点住面板的缩略图图像,然后将 其拖至回收站。 ● 如欲添加新面板,选择 。35 入门指南 ● 如欲设定主屏的主面板,选择 。 ● 如欲更改面板的顺序,点住面板的缩略图图像, 然后将其拖至新位置。 3 按下返回键返回上一个屏幕。 ›使用工具 桌面工具是小型应用程序,可在主屏幕上提供便捷功 能和信息。 ● 一些工具与网络服务相连。使用基于网络的桌 面工具可能会导致额外的费用。 ● 可用的工具可能会因所在地区或服务提供商而 异。 添加桌面工具到主屏 1 在应用程序列表中,选择小组件,打开工具面板。 2 在工具面板上向左或向右滚动来查找工具。 3 点住工具可将其添加到主屏幕。 添加设定快捷方式到主屏 可以在主屏上创建常用设定选项的快捷方式。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择小组件,打开桌面工具面 板。 2 点住设置快捷方式,然后在主屏上放开。 3 选择 S 传送或 WLAN 等设定选项。36 入门指南 访问应用程序 启动应用程序并使用设备上的功能。可以重新整理应 用程序列表以满足您的个人喜好,或从互联网下载应 用程序以增强设备的功能。 1 在主屏上,通过选择应用程序来访问应用程序列 表。 2 向左或向右滚动进入其他屏幕。 也可选择屏幕底部其中一个点以直接移动到相应的 屏幕。 3 选择应用程序。 4 按下返回键返回上一个屏幕。按下主页键返回主 屏。 ● 点住应用程序列表中的图标即可将应用程序快 捷键添加到主屏上。 ● 如果在使用一些功能时旋转设备,设备界面也 会旋转。如欲防止界面旋转,选择设定 → 显示 → 自动旋转屏幕。 ● 使用设备时,同时按住主页键和电源开关键可 以捕捉屏幕抓图。图像将储存在我的文件 → sdcard0 → Pictures → Screenshots。37 入门指南 ›整理应用程序 可以更改应用程序在应用程序列表中的顺序,或将它 们按类别分组。 1 在应用程序列表中,按下选项键,然后选择编辑。 2 点住应用程序图标。 3 整理应用程序: ● 如欲移动应用程序,拖动它可移至新位置。 ● 如欲将应用程序添加到新文件夹中,将其拖动至 新建文件夹。 ● 如欲将应用程序移动到新面板中,将其拖动至 创建页面。 ● 如欲卸载应用程序,将其拖动至卸载。 将应用程序图标拖到应用程序信息时,可以检视 有关该应用程序的信息。 4 选择保存。 ›下载应用程序 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 More Services。 2 搜索应用程序并将其下载到设备中。 也可以从 Play 商店、Samsung Apps 和 S Suggest 下载各种应用程序。 ›卸载应用程序 1 在应用程序列表中,按下选项键,然后选择卸载。 2 在应用程序图标上选择 ,然后选择确定。 您只能卸载您下载的应用程序。38 入门指南 ›访问最近使用的应用程序 1 紧按住主页键可查看最近访问的应用程序。 2 选择应用程序。 启动多个应用程序 设备可以同时运行多个应用程序来执行多项任务。如 欲启动多个应用程序,可在使用应用程序时按下主页 键。然后从主屏中选择欲启动的其他应用程序。 ›管理应用程序 可使用任务管理器管理多个应用程序。 1 紧按住主页键,然后选择 → 活动应用程序。 任务管理器启动并显示活动应用程序。 2 控制活动应用程序: ● 如欲切换应用程序,可从列表中选择应用程序。 ● 如欲关闭应用程序,选择结束。 ● 如欲关闭所有使用中的应用程序,选择全部结 束。 自定义设备 根据个人喜好更改设备设定可实现更多功能。39 入门指南 ›更改显示语言 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 语言和输入 → 语言。 2 选择语言。 ›打开或关闭按键音 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 声音 → 触摸声音。 ›调整设备的音量 1 按上/下音量键。 2 选择 ,然后拖动滑块来调节各声音的音量大小。 ›更改来电铃声 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 声音 → 设备铃 声。 2 选择铃声 → 确定。 ›切换至安静模式 如欲启动或取消安静模式,执行以下操作之一: ● 点击指示符图标区域并将其向下拖动以打开通知面 板,然后选择声音。 ● 紧按住电源开关键,然后选择静音或振动。 ● 在应用程序列表中,选择手机 → 键盘,然后点住 。40 入门指南 ›选择主屏墙纸 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 显示 → 墙纸 → 主屏。 2 选择图像文件夹 → 图像。 ›更改显示字体 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 显示 → 字体风 格。 2 选择字体 → 是。 ›调整显示屏的亮度 您的设备配有光感应器,可探测周围环境光线亮度并 自动调节显示屏的亮度。您也可手动设置显示屏亮 度。 显示屏的亮度会影响设备消耗电池电量的速度。 设定设备自动调节亮度 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 显示 → 亮度。 2 选择自动亮度旁边的复选框。 3 选择确定。 设备将自动在明亮的环境中增加亮度并在昏暗的环 境中减少亮度。41 入门指南 手动调整亮度 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 显示 → 亮度。 2 清除自动亮度旁边的复选框。 3 向左或向右拖动滑块。 4 选择确定。 ›锁定设备 启动屏幕锁定功能可锁定设备。 ● 如果忘记密码,需要将设备带到三星服务中心 将其重置。 ● 对于因使用非法软件造成的密码或私人资讯丢 失或其他损害,三星概不负责。 设定面部探测解锁 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕 锁定 → 面部解锁。 2 选择下一步 → 设置 → 继续。 3 调节设备,使之适应图片内的脸部大小。 4 正确捕捉到您的脸时,选择继续。 5 完成设定辅助解锁 PIN 码或图案。 设定面部或声音辨识解锁 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕 锁定 → 面部与语音。 2 选择下一步 → 设置 → 继续。42 入门指南 3 调节设备,使之适应图片内的脸部大小。 4 正确捕捉到您的脸时,选择继续。 5 选择 。 6 重复一个字或短语 4 次可用作解锁命令。 7 选择完成。 8 完成设定辅助解锁 PIN 码或图案。 设定解锁图案 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕 锁定 → 图案。 2 注意观看屏幕提示和示例图案,然后选择下一步。 3 画出图案至少连接 4 个点,然后选择继续。 4 重新绘制图案以确认,然后选择确认。 5 完成部分 PIN 码的设定。 如果忘记解锁图案,则可通过备份 PIN 码取消屏 幕锁定功能。 设定解锁 PIN 码 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕 锁定 → PIN 码。 2 输入新 PIN 码并选择继续。 3 再次输入 PIN 码并选择确定。43 入门指南 设定解锁密码 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕 锁定 → 密码。 2 输入新密码 (字母数字) 并选择继续。 3 再次输入密码并选择确定。 ›锁定 SIM 或 USIM 卡 可使用随 SIM 或 USIM 卡提供的 PIN 码来锁定设 备。如果启动 SIM 或 USIM 卡锁,必须在每次开机或 进入需要 PIN 码的应用程序时输入 PIN 码。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 安全 → 设置 SIM 卡锁 → 锁定SIM卡。 2 输入 PIN 码并选择确定。 ● 如果多次错误地输入 PIN 码,则 SIM 或 USIM 卡会被锁定。此时必须输入 PIN 解锁密钥 (PUK) 才能解锁 SIM 或 USIM 卡。 ● 如果因输入错误的 PUK 码而导致 SIM 或 USIM 卡被锁定,请将 SIM 或 USIM 卡带到服 务提供商处进行解锁。 ›启动查找我的手机功能 如果您的设备丢失或被盗,当有人在设备中插入新 SIM 或 USIM 卡时,查找我的手机功能会自动向指定 收件人发送联系号码,以便您定位并找回设备。如欲 使用此功能,必须创建三星帐户,才能通过互联网远 程控制设备。44 入门指南 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 安全 → SIM卡更 换警告。 2 选择登录。 如欲创建三星帐户,选择创建新账户。 3 输入用于三星帐户的电邮地址和密码,然后选择 登录。 4 向右拖动 SIM卡更换警告开关。 5 选择提醒信息。 6 输入要发送至收件人的简讯,然后选择确定。 7 添加收件人: ● 选择创建,然后手动输入电话号码,包括国家代 码和 + 号。 ● 选择联系人可从联系人列表中选择电话号码。 8 选择储存。 输入文本 可通过对准话筒讲话、在虚拟键盘上选择字符或在屏 幕上手写来输入文本。 有些语言不支持文本输入。如欲输入文本,必须 将输入语言改为受支持的语言。 ›更改文本输入法 1 在文本区域,点击指示符图标区域并向下拖动以打 开通知面板。 2 选择选择输入法 → 文字输入法。45 入门指南 ›使用 Google 语音输入功能输入文本 1 对着话筒讲出文本信息。 2 完成后,选择 。 如欲添加声音识别的输入语言,选择语言 → 添加更多语言。 ›使用三星键盘输入文本 1 在文本区域,点击指示符图标区域并向下拖动以打 开通知面板。 2 选择选择输入法 → 配置输入方法,然后选择三星 键盘旁边的 → 纵向键盘类型 → 键盘类型。 3 通过字母数字键输入文本。 输入文本时,旋转设备可在宽屏下显示 QWERTY 键盘。必要时选择虚拟键输入文本。 也可使用以下按键: 7 数字 功能 1 更改大小写。 2 切换文本输入模式。46 入门指南 数字 功能 3 访问键盘设定。点住 切换至手写模 式、通过语音输入文本或访问剪贴板。 4 清除输入。 5 另起一行。 6 插入句号;打开符号面板 (点住)。 7 插入空格。 使用 3x4 键盘输入文本时,可使用以下模式: 模式 功能 ABC 1. 选择 切换到 ABC 模式。 2. 选择相应的虚拟键,直到适当的字 符出现。 数字 1. 选择 可切换至数字模式。 2. 选择数字。 在 ABC 模式下可点住虚拟键来 输入数字。 符号 1. 选择 可切换至符号模式。 2. 选择 ◄ 或 ► 以滚动选择符号集。 3. 选择符号。47 入门指南 ›复制和粘贴文本 从文本字段中,可以将文本复制和粘贴到另一应用程 序。 1 点住文本的一段。 2 拖动 或 选择要复制的文本。 3 选择 或 添加文本到剪贴板。 4 在另一应用程序中,将光标放置于将要插入文本的 位置。 5 选择 → 粘贴将文本从剪贴板插入到文本字段 中。通讯 48 通讯 通话 了解如何使用通话功能,如拨打和接听电话、在通话 过程中使用选项,或者自定义和使用与通话相关的功 能。 ● 为了防止意外输入,在设备紧贴脸部时,打开 距离传感器可锁定触摸屏。► 第 57 页 ● 通话时身体和衣物散发的静电可能会干扰距离 传感器。 ›拨打电话 1 在应用程序列表中,选择手机 → 键盘,然后输入 区号和电话号码。 2 选择 拨打语音通话。 如欲拨打视频电话,选择 。 3 选择用于拨打电话的应用程序 (如有必要)。 4 选择结束通话结束通话。 ● 可以在联系人列表中储存经常呼叫的号码。 ► 第 92 页 ● 如欲访问通话记录并重新拨打最近拨打的号 码,选择手机 → 记录。通讯 49 ›接听电话 1 来电时,选择 ,然后将手指拖到大圆外面。 如欲使设备静音,按下音量键。 2 选择结束通话结束通话。 ›拒绝来电 来电时,选择 ,然后将手指拖到大圆外面。 如欲在拒绝来电时给呼叫者发送讯息,向上拖动屏幕 底部的拒绝讯息栏。 您可以选择一条预设简讯或创建自己的简讯。 ► 第 56 页 ›拨打国际电话 1 在应用程序列表中,选择手机 → 键盘,然后点住 插入 + 号。 2 输入完整的号码 (国家代码、区号和电话号码)。 3 选择 拨打号码。 ›使用耳机 将耳机连接至设备,可方便地接听电话并控制通话。 ● 如欲接听电话,按下耳机按钮。 ● 如欲拒绝电话,紧按住耳机按钮。通讯 50 ● 如欲保持通话或恢复保持中的通话,紧按住耳机按 钮。 ● 如欲结束通话,按下耳机按钮。 ›在语音通话中使用选项 在语音通话中,可使用以下选项: 可用的选项可能会因所在地区或服务提供商而 异。 ● 如欲调整语音音量,可按下上/下音量键。 ● 如欲保持通话,选择 。如欲返回保持的通话,选 择 。 ● 如欲拨打第二个电话,选择添加呼叫,然后拨打新 号码。 ● 如欲在两个通话间进行切换,可选择切换。 ● 如欲接听第二个电话,在来电等待铃音响起时,选 择 ,然后将手指拖到大圆外面。手机会自动保持 第一个通话。必须订制呼叫等待服务才能使用此功 能。 ● 如欲打开键盘,选择键盘。 ● 如欲启动扬声器功能,选择扬声器。 在嘈杂环境中,使用扬声器功能可能很难听清通 话内容。为改善音质效果,请使用正常通话模 式。 ● 如欲关闭话筒使对方听不到自己的声音,选择 静音。 ● 如欲通过蓝牙耳机与对方交谈,选择耳机。通讯 51 ● 如欲进行多方通话 (电话会议),拨打或接听第二方 电话,然后在接通第二方时选择合并。重复此操作 可以添加更多方。必须订制多方通话服务才能使用 此功能。 ● 如欲打开联系人列表,按下选项键,然后选择联系 人。 ● 如欲创建备忘录,按下选项键并选择备忘录。 ● 如欲取消可消除背景噪音的降噪功能,以便对方 能够听得更清晰,按下选项键,然后选择噪音降低 关。 ● 如欲接通当前通话方与保持中的通话方,按下选项 键并选择转接。双方的通话将被断开。 ›在视频通话中使用选项 进行视频通话时可使用以下选项: 可用的选项可能会因所在地区或服务提供商而 异。 ● 如欲在前置照相机和后置照相机之间切换,选择照 相机切换。 ● 如欲关闭话筒使对方听不到自己的声音,选择 静音。 ● 如果不想让对方看到您,按下选项键并选择隐藏自 己。 ● 如欲选择向对方显示某个图像,按下选项键并选择 发出图像。通讯 52 ● 如欲删除讯息,按下选项键,然后选择键盘。 ● 如欲通过蓝牙耳机与对方交谈,按下选项键并选择 转换到耳机。 ● 如欲取消扬声器功能,按下选项键,然后选择扬声 器。 ● 如欲为图像应用表情图标,按下选项键,然后选择 动态表情。 ● 如欲为图像应用修饰图标,按下选项键,然后选择 主题视图。 ● 如欲将视图模式更改为卡通视图,按下选项键并选 择启用卡通视图。 ● 点住对方图像访问以下选项: - 如欲捕捉对方图像,选择戴取图像。 - 如欲录制对方的图像,选择录制视频。 在许多领域,未经允许录制通话是违法的。务必 在录制通话之前征求对方许可。 ›检视和拨打未接来电 设备将显示未接来电。如欲返回通话,点击指示符图 标区域,并将其向下拖动以打开通知面板,然后选择 未接来电通知。通讯 53 ›设定自动拒绝 使用自动拒绝可自动拒绝特定号码的来电。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择手机。 2 按下选项键,然后选择通话设定 → 呼叫拒绝。 3 向右拖动自动拒绝模式开关。 4 选择自动拒绝模式 → 选项。 选项 功能 全部号码 拒接所有来电。 自动拒绝号码 拒接自动拒绝列表上电话号码的 来电。 5 选择自动拒绝列表。 6 选择新建。 7 输入号码并选择储存。 您可以为该号码设置标准。 8 如欲添加更多号码,重复步骤 6-7。 ›启动指定拨号 (FDN) 模式 在指定拨号模式下,除储存在 SIM 或 USIM 卡上指定 拨号列表中的号码外,设备将阻止任何其他号码的拨 出通话。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择手机。 2 按下选项键,然后选择通话设定 → 其它设置 → 固定拨号号码。通讯 54 3 选择启动固定拨号。 4 输入 SIM 或 USIM 卡随附的 PIN2 码并选择确定。 5 选择固定拨号列表并添加联系人。 ›设置呼叫前转 呼叫前转是一种网络功能,该功能可将来电发送给指 定的号码。可以针对几种不同情况分别设置此功能。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择手机。 2 按下选项键,然后选择通话设定 → 呼叫转移 → 呼 叫类型。 3 选择一种情况。 4 输入呼叫转移的目的号码并选择启动。 设置将发送至网络。 ›设置呼叫限制 呼叫限制是一种网络功能,可限制特定通话类型或阻 止对方拨打您的设备。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择手机。 2 按下选项键,然后选择通话设定 → 其它设置 → 呼叫限制 → 呼叫类型。 3 选择一个呼叫限制选项。 4 输入呼叫限制密码并选择确定。 设置将发送至网络。通讯 55 ›设置呼叫等待 呼叫等待是一种网络功能,该功能可以在您正在通话 时提醒有来电。此功能仅可用于语音通话。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择手机。 2 按下选项键,然后选择通话设定 → 其它设置 → 呼叫等待。 设置将发送至网络。 ›检视通话或讯息记录 可以检视按类型筛选的通话和讯息记录。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择手机 → 记录。 2 按下选项键,然后选择查看方式 → 选项。 向左或向右滚动通讯记录条目,可拨打电话或给 某一联系人发送讯息。 3 选择欲检视其详细信息的记录条目。 从详细信息视图中,可以拨打电话、给该号码发 送讯息,或将该号码添加到联系人列表或自动拒 绝列表。 ›自定义通话设定 1 在应用程序列表中,选择手机。 2 按下选项键,然后选择通话设定。通讯 56 3 更改以下选项: 选项 功能 呼叫拒绝 设定为自动拒接特定电话号码的 来电。可添加电话号码到自动拒 绝列表。 设置拒绝信息 添加或编辑拒接来电时将要发送 的信息。 铃声与按键音 → 设备铃声 选择来电提示铃声。 铃声与按键音 → 设备振动 添加或选择振动模式。 铃声与按键音 → 来电振动 设定设备在来电时振动并响铃来 提示来电。 铃声与按键音 → 按键声音 设定设备以在拨号屏幕上输入号 码时发出声音。 来电提示 → 通话振动 设定设备在对方接听电话或结束 通话时进行振动。 来电提示 → 通话状态音 设定设备在通话过程中提示您通 话状态。 来电提示 → 通话中提示 设定在通话过程中设备提示您有 关事件。 呼叫应答/结束 → 应答键 设定在按下主页键时接听来电。通讯 57 选项 功能 呼叫应答/结束 → 电源键结束 通话 设定即可在按下电源开关键时结 束通话。 通话期间自动 关闭屏幕 设定在通话中开启接近传感器。 通话配件设置 → 自动应答 设定设备是否在指定时长后自 动接听来电 (仅在连接耳机时可 用)。 通话配件设置 → 自动应答计 时器 选择接通来电前设备等待的时 长。 通话配件设置 → 拨出通话条 件 设定即使在设备锁定的情况下, 也允许通过蓝牙耳机拨出电话。 通话配件设置 → 拨出通话类 型 通过选择拨出通话类型来使用蓝 牙耳机。 My call sound → 我的来电声 音设置 选择通话中使用的均衡器选项。 My call sound → 个性化来电 声音 自定义使用耳机时的均衡器设 定。 使用通话超大 音量 设定为在通话期间显示音量键。通讯 58 选项 功能 增加口袋中的 音量 设定设备以在其装在手提包或口 袋等封闭空间时增大铃声音量。 呼叫转移 设定即可将来电发送至指定号 码。 其它设置 → 来电显示 拨打电话时向对方显示自己的 ID。 其它设置 → 呼叫限制 通过通话类型来设定限制通话。 其它设置 → 呼叫等待 设定在通话过程中设备提示您有 来电。 其它设置 → 自动重拨 设定即可在电话无法接通或挂断 时自动重拨。 其它设置 → 降噪 设定为消除背景噪音以使对方听 得更清楚。 其它设置 → 固定拨号号码 启动指定拨号模式,此时除 SIM 或 USIM 卡上的 FDN 列表中的 电话号码以外,其他号码的通话 都会被阻止。 其它设置 → 自动区域代码 将设备设定为在电话号码前自动 添加前缀 (区域或国家代码)。 视频电话图像 选择向对方显示的其它图像。 使用呼叫失败 选项 设定即可在视频通话连接失败时 尝试语音通话。通讯 59 选项 功能 语音信箱服务 选择语音信箱服务提供商。 语音信箱设置 输入语音信箱服务器号码。可以 从服务提供商处获取此号码。 铃声 选择收到语音信箱的提示铃声。 振动 设定设备在收到语音邮件时振 动。 帐户 设定即可接受 IP 通话并且针对 IP 通话服务设定您的帐户。 使用互联网呼 叫 设定要为所有通话还是仅为 IP 通话使用 IP 通话服务。 信息 了解如何创建和发送短信 (SMS) 或彩信 (MMS),以 及查看或管理已发送或接收的讯息。 在本地服务区外发送或接收讯息可能会产生额外 的费用。有关详细信息,请联系服务提供商。 ›发送简讯 1 在应用程序列表中,选择信息 → 。通讯 60 2 添加收件人: ● 手动输入电话号码,多个号码之间使用分号或逗 号隔开。 ● 选择 ,可从通话、信息或联系人列表中选择电 话号码。 3 选择文本字段并输入讯息文本。 如欲插入表情符号,按下选项键,然后选择插入笑 脸符号。 4 如欲发送讯息,选择 。 ›发送多媒体简讯 1 在应用程序列表中,选择信息 → 。 2 添加收件人: ● 手动输入电话号码或电邮地址,多个号码或地址 之间使用分号或逗号隔开。 ● 选择 ,可从通话、讯息或联系人列表中选择电 话号码或电邮地址。 输入电邮地址时,设备将讯息转换为多媒体简 讯。 3 选择文本字段并输入讯息文本。 如欲插入表情符号,按下选项键,然后选择插入笑 脸符号。 4 选择 并附加文件。 5 按下选项键并选择添加主题,然后输入主题。 6 如欲发送讯息,选择 。通讯 61 ›检视简讯或多媒体简讯 1 在应用程序列表中,选择信息。 讯息会按照联系人分组为讯息对话。 2 选择联系人。 3 选择多媒体简讯,查看更多详细信息。 ›听取语音信箱讯息 如果将设备设置为将未接来电转移至语音信箱服务 器,在您未接听来电时,来电者可以留下语音信箱讯 息。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择手机 → 键盘,然后点住 。 2 按照语音信箱服务器的指示操作。 访问语音信箱服务器前,必须先储存语音信箱服 务器号码。请联系服务提供商以获取此号码。 谷歌邮箱 了解如何通过 Google Mail™邮箱服务发送或检视电 子邮件。 ● 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区 或服务提供商。 ● 视所在的地区或服务提供商而定,此功能使用 的标签可能不同。通讯 62 ›发送电子邮件 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Gmail → 。 2 选择收件人字段并输入电邮地址。 3 选择主题字段并输入主题。 4 选择文本字段并输入电邮正文。 5 按下选项键并选择添加附件,然后附加文件。 6 如欲发送讯息,选择 。 如果用户离线或不在服务区,则在其上线或进入 服务区之前,信息将一直保留在信息对话中。 ›检视电子邮件 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Gmail。 2 按下 更新讯息列表。 3 选择电子邮件。 在讯息视图中,可使用以下选项: ● 如欲移动至下一条或上一条讯息,可向右或向左滚 动。 ● 如欲添加讯息到收藏列表,选择 。 ● 如欲回复讯息,选择 。 ● 如欲给包括其他收件人在内的所有人回复信息,选 择 → 全部回复。 ● 如欲将讯息转发给其他联系人,选择 → 转发。 ● 如欲保存讯息,选择 。 ● 如欲删除讯息,选择 。 ● 如欲给讯息添加标签,选择 。 ● 如欲将讯息标记为未读,选择 。 ● 如欲将讯息标记为重要,按下选项键并选择标记为 "重要"。通讯 63 ● 如欲隐藏讯息,按下选项键并选择忽略。如欲查看 隐藏讯息,在标签列表中选择 → 所有邮件。 ● 如欲将讯息移至垃圾箱,按下选项键并选择举报为 垃圾邮件。 ● 如欲更改电子邮件设定,按下选项键,然后选择 设置。 ● 如欲查看附件,选择查看。如欲将附件储存至设 备,选择保存。 电子邮件 了解如何通过个人或公司电子邮件帐户发送或查看电 邮讯息。 ›设置电子邮件帐户 1 在应用程序列表中,选择电子邮件。 2 输入电邮地址和密码。 3 选择下一步。如欲手动输入帐户详细信息,选择 手动设置。 4 按照屏幕指示进行操作。 完成电子邮件帐户设置后,电子邮件将下载至设备。 如果已创建两个或多个帐户,可以在它们之间切换。 在屏幕上选择一个帐户名称,然后选择欲提取讯息的 帐户。通讯 64 ›发送电子邮件 1 在应用程序列表中,选择电子邮件 → 。 2 添加收件人: ● 手动输入电邮地址,多个号码之间使用分号或逗 号隔开。 ● 选择 ,可从讯息或联系人列表中选择电邮地 址。 3 选择主题字段并输入主题。 4 选择文本字段并输入电邮正文。 5 选择 并附加文件。 6 如欲发送讯息,选择 。 如果用户离线或不在服务区,则在其上线或进入 服务区之前,信息将一直保留在信息对话中。 ›检视电子邮件 1 在应用程序列表中,选择电子邮件。 2 按下 更新讯息列表。 3 选择电子邮件。 在讯息视图中,可使用以下选项: ● 如欲移动至下一条或上一条讯息,可向右或向左滚 动。 ● 如欲回复讯息,选择 。 ● 如欲回复讯息并包括所有收件人,选择 。 ● 如欲将讯息转发给其他联系人,选择 。通讯 65 ● 如欲删除讯息,选择 。 ● 如欲将讯息标记为重要,选择 。 ● 如欲将讯息标记为未读,按下选项键并选择标记为 未读。 ● 如欲将讯息移至其他文件夹,按下选项键并选择 移动。 ● 如欲保存讯息到设备,按下选项键并选择保存电子 邮件。讯息将保存在我的文件 → sdcard0 → Saved Email。 ● 如欲通过 WLAN 或 USB 打印讯息,按下选项键并 选择打印。设备仅与部分三星打印机兼容。 ● 如欲创建新讯息,按下选项键并选择编写。 ● 如欲把收件人的电子邮箱地址作为一个联系人群组 保存到电话簿中,按下选项键并选择保存为群组。 ● 如欲更改字体大小,按下选项键,然后选择字体大 小。 ● 如欲更改电子邮件设定,按下选项键,然后选择 设定。 ● 如欲将附件保存至设备,选择附件选项卡 → 。 可用选项因电子邮件帐户而异。通讯 66 Google Talk 了解如何通过 Google Talk™即时讯息服务与家人和 朋友进行即时通讯。 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区或 服务提供商。 ›设置您的状态 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Google Talk。 2 选择 Google 帐户。 3 在好友列表上选择您的名称。 4 自定义您的状态、图像和讯息。 ›添加联系人到好友列表 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Google Talk → 。 2 输入好友的电邮地址,然后选择完成。 当好友接受邀请后,即会被添加到好友列表中。 ›开始会话 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Google Talk。 2 从好友列表中选择联系人。 会话屏幕打开。通讯 67 3 输入并发送讯息。 ● 如欲添加更多联系人到会话,按下选项键,然后 选择添加到聊天。 ● 如欲在活跃的会话间切换,可向左或向右滚动。 ● 如欲使用视频聊天,选择 。 ● 如欲使用语音聊天,选择 。 4 按下选项键,然后选择结束聊天以结束会话。 ChatON 了解如何通过使用 ChatON 在任何一个有手机号码的 设备上发送和接收即时讯息。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 ChatON。 如果您首次启动该应用程序,请遵照屏幕提示完 成帐户设定。 2 输入并发送讯息。 碰头 了解如何通过 Google+ Messenger 即时讯息服务与 家人和朋友进行即时通讯。 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区或 服务提供商。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择碰头。 如果首次启动此应用程序,请按照屏幕提示完成 帐户设置。 2 输入并发送讯息。通讯 68 Google+ 了解如何访问 Google 的社交网络服务。您可创建群 组来发送和接收即时讯息并上传照片。 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区或 服务提供商。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Google+。 如果您首次启动该应用程序,请遵照屏幕提示完 成帐户设定。 2 选择一个社交网络功能。娱乐 69 娱乐 照相机 了解如何拍摄和检视照片及视频。 ● 如果未使用照相机的时间达到指定时间长度, 照相机会自动关闭。 ● 视场景或拍摄条件的不同,存储容量可能不 同。 ›拍摄照片 1 在应用程序列表中,选择照相机。 2 将照相机镜头对准拍摄对象并进行必要的调整。娱乐 70 数字 功能 1 更改照相机设定。 2 检视拍摄的照片。 3 拍摄照片。 4 使用照相机快捷键。 ● :更改效果模式。 ● :更改拍摄模式。► 第 72 页 ● :更改闪光灯设定:可手动开启 或关闭闪光灯,或者设置照相机在需 要时使用闪光灯。 ● :切换为前置摄像头进行自拍。 您可添加或删除常用选项的快捷方 式。► 第 79 页 5 检视存储位置。 6 切换到摄像机。 如欲放大,将两根手指放在屏幕上并缓慢张开手 指。如欲缩小,合拢手指。您也可通过音量键来 放大或缩小。使用最高分辨率拍摄时,可能无法 使用变焦功能。 3 在预览屏幕上点击要聚焦的位置。 对焦框将移至点击的位置,并在对准拍摄对象后变 为绿色。 4 选择 进行拍照。 照片会自动储存。娱乐 71 拍照后,选择照片查看器进行查看。 ● 如欲检视更多照片,可向左或向右滚动。 ● 如欲放大或缩小,将两个手指放在屏幕上并慢慢分 开或合拢。如欲返回原始大小,双击屏幕。 ● 如欲将照片发送给其他人或共享照片,选择 。 ● 如欲开始幻灯片放映,选择 → 开始播放幻灯片。 点击屏幕可停止幻灯片放映。 ● 如欲删除照片,选择 。 ● 如欲将照片中的面部注册为面部标签,按下选项键 并选择脸部标记。► 第 84 页 ● 如欲将照片添加到剪贴板,按下选项键,然后选择 复制至剪贴板。 ● 如欲逆时针旋转照片,按下选项键并选择向左旋 转。 ● 如欲顺时针旋转照片,按下选项键并选择向右旋 转。 ● 如欲裁剪照片,按下选项键并选择裁剪。 ● 如欲使用图像编辑器编辑照片,按下选项键,然后 选择编辑。 ● 如欲将照片设定为墙纸或联系人图像,按下选项键 并选择设定为。 ● 如欲将照片发送给面部标记在照片中的联系人,按 下选项键,然后选择好友照片共享。 ● 如欲通过 WLAN 或 USB 打印照片,按下选项键并 选择打印。设备仅与部分三星打印机兼容。娱乐 72 ● 如欲更改文件名,按下选项键,然后选择重命名。 ● 如欲搜索已启动媒体共享的设备,按下选项键,然 后选择扫描附近设备。 ● 如欲查看照片详情,按下选项键,然后选择详情。 ›更改拍摄模式 可以使用多种拍摄模式进行拍照。如欲更改拍摄模 式,选择 → 选项。 选项 功能 急速连拍 对移动对象进行连拍。在已启用最佳 拍摄选项的情况下拍摄照片时,可以 选择并储存照片。 人脸识别 设定设备识别人脸并帮助您拍摄他们 的照片。 全景拍摄 拍摄全景照片。 共享拍摄 拍摄照片并通过直接 WLAN 将其发 送给他人。 HDR 使用不同的曝光拍摄三张照片,然后 合并它们提高对比度。 好友照片共享 设定设备识别照片中已标记脸部的 人,并将照片发送给此人。取决于面 部的角度、面部大小、肤色、面部表 情、光照条件或主体配戴的饰品,面 部识别功能可能会失败。娱乐 73 选项 功能 美肌 去除面部瑕疵。 笑脸拍摄 设定设备识别人脸并帮助您在被拍的 人微笑时进行拍照。 卡通 拍摄具有卡通效果的照片。 ›自定义照相机设定 拍摄照片之前,选择 访问以下选项: 选项 功能 编辑快捷方式 编辑常用选项的快捷方式。 自拍 切换为前置摄像头进行自拍。 闪光灯 更改闪光灯设定:可手动开启或关闭 闪光灯,或者设置照相机在需要时使 用闪光灯。 拍摄模式 更改拍摄模式。► 第 72 页 效果 应用特效。 场景模式 更改场景模式。 曝光值 调整曝光值以更改亮度。 聚焦模式 选择聚焦模式。您可以拍摄近景照片 或将相机设定为自动对焦拍摄主体或 人脸。 定时器 选择照相机开始拍照前的延迟时间。娱乐 74 选项 功能 分辨率 选择分辨率选项。 白平衡 根据光线条件调整色彩平衡。 感光度 调整图像传感器的敏感度。 测光 选择曝光测量类型。 户外能见度 设定即可提高明亮阳光下的显示对比 度。 自动调整对 比度 设置照相机自动调节照片中的明暗区 域间的对比度。 构图线 设定即可在预览屏幕上显示网格线。 防抖动 开启防震可减少由于设备振动或移动 造成的模糊。 GPS标签 设定照相机在照片中加入位置信息。 ● 如欲改善 GPS 接收效果,请 避免在信号受阻的环境下拍 摄,如建筑物之间、低洼之处 或者天气条件恶劣时。 ● 您的位置可能会在您将照片 上传到互联网时显示在照片 上。如欲避免这种情况,取消 GPS 标签设置。娱乐 75 选项 功能 另存为翻版 设定照相机以在您使用前置照相机拍 照时自动翻转图像。 图像质量 选择照片的质量级别。 存储 选择用于储存所拍摄照片的存储位 置。 重置 重置照相机设定。 ›录制视频 1 在应用程序列表中,选择照相机。 2 拖动滑块,切换到摄像机。 3 将镜头对准拍摄主体并进行必要调整。娱乐 76 数字 功能 1 更改摄像机设定。 2 检视已录制的视频。 3 录制视频。 4 使用摄像机快捷键。 ● :更改效果模式。 ● :更改录制模式 (用于附加到多 媒体简讯或用于正常储存)。 ● :更改闪光灯设定。 ● :切换为前置摄像头进行自拍。 您可添加或删除常用选项的快捷方 式。► 第 79 页 5 检视存储位置。 6 切换到照相机。 如欲放大,将两根手指放在屏幕上并缓慢张开手 指。如欲缩小,合拢手指。您也可通过音量键来 放大或缩小。使用最高分辨率录制时,可能无法 使用变焦功能。 4 在预览屏幕上点击要聚焦的位置。 对焦框将移至点击的位置,并在对准拍摄对象后变 为绿色。娱乐 77 5 选择 开始录制。 ● 如欲更改对焦,点击您要对焦的任意位置。如欲 对焦屏幕中央,选择 。 ● 如欲在录制过程中捕捉视频中的图像,选择 。 防震功能启动时,此功能将无法使用。 6 选择 结束录制。 视频会自动储存。 使用慢速存储卡,摄像机可能无法正常录制视 频。 摄像后,选择视频查看器进行查看。 ● 如欲检视更多视频,可向左或向右滚动。 ● 如欲播放视频,选择 。 ● 如欲将视频发送给其他人或共享视频,选择 。 ● 如欲开始幻灯片放映,选择 → 开始播放幻灯片。 点击屏幕可停止幻灯片放映。 ● 如欲删除视频,选择 。 ● 如欲更改文件名,按下选项键,然后选择重命名。 ● 如欲查看视频详情,按下选项键,然后选择详情。 ›自定义摄像机设定 录制视频之前,选择 访问以下选项: 选项 功能 编辑快捷方式 编辑常用选项的快捷方式。 自拍 切换为前置摄像头进行自我摄像。娱乐 78 选项 功能 闪光灯 更改闪光灯设定。 录制模式 更改录制模式 (用于附加到多媒体简 讯或用于正常储存)。 效果 应用特效。 曝光值 调整曝光值以更改亮度。 定时器 选择摄像机开始录制视频前的延迟时 间。 分辨率 选择分辨率选项。 白平衡 根据光线条件调整色彩平衡。 户外能见度 设定即可提高明亮阳光下的显示对比 度。 构图线 设定即可在预览屏幕上显示网格线。 防抖动 开启防震可减少由于设备振动或移动 造成的模糊。 另存为翻版 设定摄像机以在您使用前置照相机录 制视频时自动翻转图像。 视频质量 选择视频的质量级别。 存储 选择用于储存所录制视频的存储位 置。 重置 重置摄像机设定。娱乐 79 ›编辑快捷键图标 您可添加或删除常用选项的快捷方式。 1 在预览屏幕中,点住快捷键区域或选择 → 编辑 快捷方式。 2 点住选项列表中的图标,然后将其拖到快捷键区 域。 如欲删除快捷键,点住图标,然后将其拖到选项列 表中。 3 点击屏幕返回到预览屏幕。 视频播放器 了解如何使用视频播放器。 ● 不支持某些文件格式,具体取决于设备的软 件。 ● 如果文件大小超出可用内存,在尝试打开文件 时会出现错误。 ● 播放质量可能随内容类型而异。 ● 有些文件可能无法正常播放,具体取决于文件 编码的方式。 ›播放视频 1 在应用程序列表中,选择视频播放器。 2 选择视频。娱乐 80 3 使用下列按键控制播放过程: 数字 功能 1 拖动或点击该栏可在文件中快进或快 退。 2 更改视频画面的比例。 3 重新开始播放;跳至上一个文件 (在 3 秒内点击);在文件中快退 (点住)。 4 调整音量。 5 暂停播放;选择 继续播放。 6 减小视频画面的尺寸。如欲返回原始 大小,双击视频画面。 7 跳至下一个文件;在文件中快进 (点 住)。娱乐 81 在播放期间,按下选项键访问以下选项: ● 如欲搜索已启动媒体共享的设备,选择扫描附近设 备。 ● 如欲将视频发送给其他人或共享视频,选择共享通 过。 ● 如欲将视频分割成几部分,选择章节预览。您可以 搜索某个部分并可直接跳至该部分。 ● 如欲修剪视频的某个部分,选择修剪。 ● 如欲通过蓝牙耳机收听音频,选择通过蓝牙。当 您将耳机连接到设备的耳机插口时,无法使用此选 项。 ● 要设定视频播放器在指定时间后自动关闭,选择 视频自动关闭。 ● 如欲更改视频播放器设定,选择设定。 ● 如欲查看视频详情,选择详情。 ›自定义视频播放器设定 1 在播放中,按下选项键,然后选择设定。 2 更改以下选项: 选项 功能 自动播放下 一个 设置视频播放器自动播放下一个 文件。 播放速度 更改播放速度。 SoundAlive 选择音效。 字幕 自定义字幕文件的设定。娱乐 82 选项 功能 色调 选择色调。 户外能见度 设定即可提高明亮阳光下的显示 对比度。 相册 了解如何检视和播放储存在设备中的图像和视频。 ● 不支持某些文件格式,具体取决于设备的软 件。 ● 如果文件大小超出可用内存,在尝试打开文件 时会出现错误。 ● 播放质量可能随内容类型而异。 ● 有些文件可能无法正常播放,具体取决于文件 编码的方式。 ›检视图像 1 在应用程序列表中,选择相册。 2 选择文件夹 → 图像。 检视图像时,使用以下选项: ● 如欲检视更多图像,向左或向右滚动。 ● 如欲放大或缩小,将两个手指放在屏幕上并慢慢分 开或合拢。如欲返回原始大小,双击屏幕。 ● 如欲将图像发送给其他人或共享图像,选择 。娱乐 83 ● 如欲开始幻灯片放映,选择 → 开始播放幻灯片。 点击屏幕可停止幻灯片放映。 ● 如欲删除图像,选择 。 ● 如欲将图像中的面部注册为面部标签,按下选项键 并选择脸部标记。 ● 如欲将图像添加到剪贴板,按下选项键,然后选择 复制至剪贴板。 ● 如欲逆时针旋转图像,按下选项键并选择向左旋 转。 ● 如欲顺时针旋转图像,按下选项键并选择向右旋 转。 ● 如欲裁剪图像,按下选项键并选择裁剪。 ● 如欲使用图像编辑器编辑图像,按下选项键,然后 选择编辑。 ● 如欲将图像设定为墙纸或联系人图像,按下选项键 并选择设定为。 ● 如欲将图像发送至已标注面部标签的人,按下选项 键并选择好友照片共享。 ● 如欲通过 WLAN 或 USB 打印图像,按下选项键并 选择打印。设备仅与部分三星打印机兼容。 ● 如欲更改文件名,按下选项键,然后选择重命名。 ● 如欲搜索已启动媒体共享的设备,按下选项键,然 后选择扫描附近设备。 ● 如欲查看图像详情,按下选项键,然后选择详情。 可用选项因所选文件夹而异。娱乐 84 ›在图像中标记面部 了解如何在图像中标记面部,并通过面部标签快捷键 拨打电话、发送简讯或将讯息上传到社交网络。 取决于面部的角度、面部大小、肤色、面部表 情、光照条件或主体配戴的饰品,面部识别功能 可能会失败。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择相册。 2 选择图像。 3 按下选项键,然后选择脸部标记 → 开。 被识别的面部将出现在方框中。如果未自动识别脸 孔,点住脸部区域以手动添加边框。 4 选择被识别的面部 → 添加名称。 5 从联系人列表中选择联系人姓名。 联系人已与此图像中的面部相关联。 当带有姓名的面部标签出现时,选择面部标签并使用 可用选项。 ›播放视频 1 在应用程序列表中,选择相册。 2 选择文件夹 → 视频 (以 图标指示)。 3 选择 开始播放。 4 使用按键控制播放过程。► 第 79 页娱乐 85 在播放期间,按下选项键访问以下选项: ● 如欲搜索已启动媒体共享的设备,选择扫描附近设 备。 ● 如欲将视频发送给其他人或共享视频,选择共享通 过。 ● 如欲将视频分割成几部分,选择章节预览。您可以 搜索某个部分并可直接跳至该部分。 ● 如欲修剪视频的某个部分,选择修剪。 ● 如欲通过蓝牙耳机收听音频,选择通过蓝牙。当 您将耳机连接到设备的耳机插口时,无法使用此选 项。 ● 要设定视频播放器在指定时间后自动关闭,选择 视频自动关闭。 ● 如欲更改视频播放器设定,选择设定。 ● 如欲查看视频详情,选择详情。 音乐播放器 了解如何收听自己喜爱的音乐。 ● 不支持某些文件格式,具体取决于设备的软 件。 ● 如果文件大小超出可用内存,在尝试打开文件 时会出现错误。 ● 播放质量可能随内容类型而异。 ● 有些文件可能无法正常播放,具体取决于文件 编码的方式。 ›向设备中添加音乐文件 首先将文件传输到设备或存储卡中: ● 从互联网下载。► 第 102 页 ● 通过 Samsung Kies 从电脑下载。► 第 115 页娱乐 86 ● 从配有 Windows Media Player 的电脑上下载。 ► 第 116 页 ● 通过蓝牙接收。► 第 129 页 ● 通过 WLAN 接收。► 第 119 页 ● 复制到存储卡。 ›播放音乐 1 在应用程序列表中,选择音乐播放器。 2 选择音乐类别 → 音乐文件。 3 使用下列按键控制播放过程: 数字 功能 1 启动随机播放模式。 2 拖动或点击该栏可在文件中快进或快 退。 3 选择音效。娱乐 87 数字 功能 4 重新开始播放;跳至上一个文件 (3 秒 内点击);在文件中快退 (点住)。 5 调整音量。 6 更改重放模式。 7 按类型或年份对音乐文件进行分类。 8 暂停播放;选择 继续播放。 9 打开播放列表。 10 跳至下一个文件;在文件中快进 (点 住)。 可使用耳机控制音乐播放器。在主屏上,紧按住 耳机按钮启动音乐播放器。然后,按下耳机按钮 开始或暂停播放。 在播放期间,按下选项键访问以下选项: ● 如欲将音乐文件添加到快速列表 (作为播放列表保 存),选择添加到快捷列表。 ● 如欲通过蓝牙耳机收听音乐,选择通过蓝牙。当 您将耳机连接到设备的耳机插口时,无法使用此选 项。 ● 如欲将音乐文件发送给其他人或共享音乐文件,选 择共享通过。 ● 如欲将音乐文件添加至播放列表,选择添加到播放 列表。 ● 如欲查看音乐详情,选择详情。娱乐 88 ● 如欲将音乐文件设为您的铃声,选择设定为。 ● 如欲搜索已启动媒体共享的设备,选择 扫描附近设 备。 ● 如欲更改音乐播放器设定,选择设定。 ● 如欲停止播放并关闭音乐播放器,选择结束。 ›创建播放列表 1 在应用程序列表中,选择音乐播放器 → 播放列 表。 2 按下选项键,然后选择新建播放列表。 3 输入新播放列表的标题,然后选择确定。 4 选择添加音乐。 5 选择欲添加的文件,然后选择完成。 ›自定义音乐播放器设定 1 在应用程序列表中,选择音乐播放器。 2 按下选项键,然后选择设定。 3 更改以下选项: 选项 功能 SoundAlive 选择音效。 播放速度 更改播放速度。 音乐菜单 选择要在音乐库屏幕中显示的音 乐类别。 歌词 设定即可在播放期间显示歌词。 音乐自动关 设定音乐播放器在指定时间后自 动关闭。娱乐 89 FM 收音机 了解如何在 FM 收音机上收听音乐和新闻。如欲收听 FM 收音机,必须连接耳机 (该耳机用作收音机天线)。 ›收听 FM 收音机 1 将耳机插入设备中。 2 在应用程序列表中,选择 FM 收音机。 FM 收音机会自动搜索并储存可用电台。 第一次打开 FM 收音机时,设备会开始自动调 频。 3 选择电台。 4 使用下列按键控制 FM 收音机: 数字 功能 1 从 FM 收音机录制歌曲。 2 打开或关闭 FM 收音机。 3 搜索可用电台。娱乐 90 数字 功能 4 将当前电台添加到收藏列表。 5 调整音量。 6 访问当前电台的服务,例如下载音乐 文件或呼叫电台。该选项可能无法使 用,具体取决于所在的区域。 7 微调频率。 ›从 FM 收音机录制歌曲 1 将耳机插入设备中。 2 在应用程序列表中,选择 FM 收音机。 3 选择 打开 FM 收音机。 4 滚动到电台。 5 选择 开始录制。 6 完成后,选择 。 所录文件将保存在我的文件 → sdcard0 → Sounds 中。 ›自动储存电台 1 将耳机插入设备中。 2 在应用程序列表中,选择 FM 收音机。 3 选择 打开 FM 收音机。 4 按下选项键,然后选择扫描 → 选项。 FM 收音机会自动搜索并储存可用电台。娱乐 91 ›将电台添加到收藏列表中 1 将耳机插入设备中。 2 在应用程序列表中,选择 FM 收音机。 3 选择 打开 FM 收音机。 4 滚动到电台。 5 选择 ,将电台添加到收藏列表中。 ›自定义 FM 收音机设定 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 FM 收音机。 2 按下选项键,然后选择设定。 3 更改以下选项: 选项 功能 存储 选择用于存储 FM 电台剪辑的存 储位置。 收音机文本 设定即可在 FM 电台屏幕上显示 电台代码。电台代码仅在提供此 信息的电台上可用。 可选频率 设定即可在当前信号较弱时自动 重新调整电台频率。 FM 自动关闭 设定 FM 收音机在指定时间后自 动关闭。92 个人信息 个人信息 联系人 了解如何创建和管理个人或业务联系人列表。可储存 联系人的姓名、手机号码、电邮地址及更多信息。 ›创建联系人 1 在应用程序列表中,选择联系人 → 联系人 → 。 2 选择存储位置。 3 输入联系人信息。 4 选择储存将联系人添加到存储器。 选择添加到联系人可从拨号屏幕创建联系人。 ›寻找联系人 1 在应用程序列表中,选择联系人 → 联系人。 2 向上或向下滚动联系人列表。 向左或向右滚动联系人姓名,可拨打电话或给某 一联系人发送讯息。 3 选择联系人姓名。93 个人信息 在联系人视图中,可使用以下选项: ● 如欲拨打语音电话,选择 。 ● 如欲发起视像通话,选择 。 ● 如欲发送简讯或多媒体简讯,选择 。 ● 如欲发送电邮讯息,选择 。 ● 如欲设定收藏号码,选择 。 ● 如欲编辑联系人信息,选择 。 ›设定快速拨号号码 1 在应用程序列表中,选择联系人 → 联系人。 2 按下选项键,然后选择快速拨号设置。 3 选择位置编号 → 联系人。 点住拨号屏幕上的位置编号可快速拨打此号码。 ›创建名片 1 在应用程序列表中,选择联系人 → 联系人。 2 在联系人列表上选择您的姓名。 3 选择 。 4 输入个人详细信息并选择储存。 按下选项键,然后选择共享名片通过,可以将名 片发送给其他人或共享名片。94 个人信息 ›创建联系人分组 通过创建联系人群组,可管理多个联系人,或向整个 群组发送信息。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择联系人 → 群组。 2 按下选项键,然后选择新建。 3 输入名称并自定义群组的设定。 4 添加成员到群组。 5 选择储存。 ›复制联系人 将 SIM 或 USIM 卡上的联系人复制到设备 1 在应用程序列表中,选择联系人 → 联系人。 2 按下选项键,然后选择导入/导出 → 从SIM卡导 入。 3 选择存储位置。 4 选择要复制的联系人,然后选择完成。 从设备向 SIM 卡或 USIM 卡复制联系人 1 在应用程序列表中,选择联系人 → 联系人。 2 按下选项键,然后选择导入/导出 → 导出到SIM 卡。 3 选择欲复制的联系人,然后选择完成 → 确定。95 个人信息 ›导入或导出联系人 您可以将文件 (以 vcf 格式) 导入到设备的 USB 存储 器或存储卡,或者从中导出联系人文件。 导入联系人文件 1 在应用程序列表中,选择联系人 → 联系人。 2 按下选项键,然后选择导入/导出 → 从SD卡导入或 从 USB 存储导入。 3 选择存储位置。 4 从选项中选择导入一个联系人文件、多个联系人文 件或者所有联系人文件,然后选择确定。 5 选择欲导入的联系人文件,然后选择确定。 导出联系人 1 在应用程序列表中,选择联系人 → 联系人。 2 按下选项键,然后选择导入/导出 → 导出到SD卡或 导出至 USB 存储。 3 选择确定以继续。 S日历 您的设备包括一个功能强大的计划程序,可帮助您更 加便捷有效地管理您的日程。了解如何创建和管理事 件和任务,以及如何设定闹钟来提醒重大事件和任 务。96 个人信息 ›创建事件或任务 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 S日历。 2 选择 。 3 在屏幕上选择一种事件类型。 4 输入事件的详细信息,然后选择存储。 ›更改检视模式 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 S日历。 2 选择 。 3 选择一种检视模式。 ● 年:显示一年中的所有月份 ● 月:在一个视图中显示整个月份 ● 周:全周按天划分的时间块 ● 日:全天按小时划分的分块 ● 列表:特定时间段内所有事件和任务安排的列表 ● 任务:一个任务的列表 也可以将两个手指放在屏幕上,然后通过分开或 合拢手指来更改检视模式。97 个人信息 ›检视事件或任务 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 S日历。 2 在日历上选择日期。 ● 如欲移动到特定日期,按下选项键,然后选择 转到,并输入日期。 ● 如欲移至今天的日期,选择今天。 3 选择欲查看其详细信息的事件。 可按下选项键,然后选择共享通过,将事件发送 给其他人或共享事件。 ›停止事件或任务闹钟 如果为日历事件或任务设定提醒,闹钟会在指定的时 间响起。 1 点击指示符图标区域并向下拖动以打开通知面板。 2 选择事件通知。 3 选择事件以检视更多信息。 如欲使事件闹钟重响,选择再响。 S 备忘录 借助 S 备忘录,可以通过绘制素描或者添加图片或语 音备忘录来创建内容丰富的备忘录。98 个人信息 ›创建备忘录 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 S 备忘录。 如果在登录三星帐户时首次启动该应用程序,选 择要与备忘录同步的位置。 2 选择 在屏幕上书写或画图,或选择 通过 键盘输入文本。 3 选择输入标题,输入备忘录的标题,然后选择 确定。 4 可使用以下工具输入备忘录文本或绘制素描: 工具 功能 浏览备忘录。 画出素描;更改笔设定 (双击)。 使用键盘输入文本。 擦除文本或素描;更改清除器粗细或 清除输入 (双击)。 撤消上一操作。 重做上一操作。 录制语音或其他声音添加声音片段。 添加新页面到备忘录。99 个人信息 5 选择储存。 如欲将书写转换为文本,按下选项键,然后选择 手写转化为文本。如果备忘录是用多种语言书写 或包含数字和字母,转换为文本将会失败。 ›检视备忘录 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 S 备忘录。 2 选择欲查看其详细信息的备忘录。 查看备忘录时,使用以下选项: ● 如欲检视更多备忘录,向左或向右滚动。 ● 如欲编辑备忘录,点击屏幕或选择 。 ● 如欲删除备忘录,选择 。 ● 如欲将备忘录标记为重要,选择 。 ● 如欲将备忘录发送给其他人或共享备忘录,按下选 项键,然后选择共享通过。 ● 如欲将备忘录导出为 PDF 文件或图像文件,按下选 项键,然后选择导出。导出的文件将储存在我的文 件 → sdcard0 → S 备忘录。 ● 如欲保护备忘录不被意外删除,按下选项键,然后 选择锁定。 ● 如欲将备忘录设置为墙纸或联系人图像,按下选项 键,然后选择设定为。 ● 如欲通过 WLAN 或 USB 打印备忘录,按下选项 键,然后选择打印。设备仅与部分三星打印机兼 容。100 个人信息 ›整理文件夹中的备忘录 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 S 备忘录。 2 按下选项键,然后选择新建文件夹。 3 输入文件夹的名称,然后选择确定。 4 按下选项键,然后选择移动或复制。 5 选择备忘录,然后选择完成。 6 选择新文件夹,然后选择移动到这里或粘贴至此。 录音机 了解如何使用设备的语音录制。 ›录制语音备忘录 1 在应用程序列表中,选择录音机。 2 选择 开始录制。 如欲暂停录制,选择 。 3 对着话筒说话。 4 完成后,选择 。 设备会自动储存备忘录。101 个人信息 ›播放语音备忘录 1 在应用程序列表中,选择录音机。 2 选择 进入语音备忘录列表。 3 选择语音备忘录。 如欲暂停播放,选择 。 4 选择 以停止播放。 可按下选项键,然后选择共享通过,将语音备忘 录发送给其他人或共享备忘录。 ›自定义录音机设定 1 在应用程序列表中,选择录音机。 2 按下选项键,然后选择设定。 3 更改以下选项: 选项 功能 存储器 选择用于储存语音备忘录的存储 位置。 默认名称 输入为语音备忘录命名的前缀。 录音质量 选择语音备忘录的质量级别。 彩信限制 设定可附加至多媒体简讯的最大 录音长度限制。基于网络和 GPS 的服务 102 基于网络和 GPS 的服务 如果访问互联网或下载媒体文件,可能会产生其 他费用。有关详细信息,请联系服务提供商。 互联网 了解如何访问常用网页以及如何将其添加到书签。 ● 视所在的地区或服务提供商而定,此功能使用 的标签可能不同。 ● 可用的图标可能随所在地区或服务提供商而 异。 ›浏览网页 1 在应用程序列表中,选择互联网。 2 如欲访问特定网页,选择 URL 字段,输入网址, 然后选择转到。 3 使用下列按键浏览网页: 数字 功能 1 向前或向后移动至历史记录中的网 页。 2 输入网址或关键字。基于网络和 GPS 的服务 103 数字 功能 3 重新加载当前网页。设备在加载网页 时,该图标将变为 。 4 查看书签、储存的页面和最近的网络 历史记录。 5 检视活动浏览器窗口的缩略图。 浏览网页时,可访问以下选项: ● 如欲放大或缩小,将两个手指放在屏幕上并慢慢分 开或合拢。如欲返回原始大小,双击屏幕。此功能 在某些网页上可能不可用。 ● 如欲打开新窗口,按下选项键,然后选择新窗口。 ● 如欲为当前网页添加书签,按下选项键,然后选择 添加书签。 ● 如欲将当前网页的快捷方式添加到主屏,按下选项 键,然后选择添加快捷方式到主屏幕。 ● 如欲将网址发送给其他人或共享网址,按下选项 键,然后选择共享页面。 ● 如欲搜索网页上的文本,按下选项键,然后选择 在页面上查找。 ● 如欲切换至桌面视图,按下选项键,然后选择桌面 视图。基于网络和 GPS 的服务 104 ● 如欲储存当前网页以便脱机阅读,按下选项键,然 后选择保存以备离线阅读。选择 → 已保存页面可 检视已储存的页面。 ● 如欲更改亮度设定,按下选项键,然后选择亮度。 ● 如欲检视下载历史记录,按下选项键,然后选择 下载列表。 ● 如欲通过 WLAN 或 USB 打印网页,按下选项键, 然后选择打印。设备仅与部分三星打印机兼容。 ● 如欲更改浏览器设定,按下选项键,然后选择 设定。 ›通过语音搜索信息 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区或 服务提供商。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择互联网。 2 选择 URL 字段。 3 选择 并对着设备话筒说出关键字。 设备将搜索与关键字相关的网页。 4 选择搜索结果。 ›将喜好的网页收藏为书签 1 在应用程序列表中,选择互联网。 2 输入网址或导航至网页。 3 按下选项键,然后选择添加书签。 4 输入书签的名称,然后选择储存。基于网络和 GPS 的服务 105 如欲检视书签,选择 → 书签。从书签列表中,点住 书签,然后访问以下选项: ● 如欲在当前窗口打开网页,选择打开。 ● 如欲打开新窗口,选择在新窗口中打开。 ● 如欲编辑书签详细信息,选择编辑书签。 ● 如欲添加书签快捷方式到主屏幕,选择添加快捷方 式到主屏幕。 ● 如欲将当前网页的地址发送给其他人,选择共享链 接。 ● 如欲复制当前网页的地址,选择复制链接网址。 ● 如欲删除书签,选择删除书签。 ● 如欲使用网页作为浏览器主页,选择设置为首页。 ›从互联网下载文件 从互联网下载文件或应用程序时,设备会将其储存到 内存中。 从互联网下载的文件可能包含会损坏设备的病 毒。为了降低此风险,请只从信任的来源下载文 件。 某些媒体文件包含用于保护版权的“数字权利管 理”。此保护措施会阻止设备下载、复制、修改 或传输某些文件。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择互联网。 2 搜索文件或应用程序,然后将其下载到设备中。基于网络和 GPS 的服务 106 ›检视当前历史记录 1 在应用程序列表中,选择互联网 → → 历史记 录。 2 选择欲访问的网页。 Flipboard 了解如何访问个性化新闻杂志。 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区或 服务提供商。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Flipboard。 2 选择立即开始。 如果登录您的 Flipboard 帐户,则可从您的社交 网络获得新闻。 3 选择新闻主题,然后选择完成。 4 翻阅新闻报道 Game Hub 了解如何访问游戏。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Game Hub。 2 选择一种游戏服务。 3 搜索和访问游戏。 可用的游戏可能会因所在地区或服务提供商而 异。基于网络和 GPS 的服务 107 谷歌纵横 了解如何通过 Google Latitude™定位服务与朋友分享 您的位置和检视朋友的位置。 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区或 服务提供商。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择谷歌纵横。 设备会自动加入谷歌纵横。 2 选择 → 选项。 3 选择一位朋友,或输入电子邮件地址,然后选择 添加好友。 4 选择是。 您的朋友接受邀请后,便可共享位置。 5 选择地图视图。 您的朋友在地图上的位置将会与其照片一起显示。 地图 了解如何使用 Google Maps™地图服务以查找您的位 置,搜索本地商家以及获取路线。 ● 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区 或服务提供商。 ● 必须启动定位服务以查找所处位置并搜索地 图。► 第 129 页基于网络和 GPS 的服务 108 ›搜索位置 1 在应用程序列表中,选择地图。 地图将显示当前位置。 2 选择 。 3 输入位置的关键字并选择 。 如欲通过语音搜索位置,选择 。 4 选择欲检视其详细信息的位置。 检视地图时,使用以下选项: ● 如欲放大或缩小,将两个手指放在屏幕上并慢慢分 开或合拢。 ● 如欲检视所有搜索结果,选择结果列表。 ● 如欲检视自己的位置,选择 。如欲切换至可在您 移动设备时更改地图方向的罗盘视图,选择 。 ● 如欲在位置上添加星标,选择带位置名称的气球 → 。 ● 如欲添加附加信息的图层到地图或更改检视模式, 按下选项键,然后选择图层。 ›获得到达特定目的地的路线 1 在应用程序列表中,选择地图。 2 选择 。 3 输入起点和目的地的地址。 如欲输入联系人列表中的地址或加星标的地点,或 选择地图上的点,选择 → 选项。基于网络和 GPS 的服务 109 4 选择出行方式,然后选择获取路线。 路线显示在地图中。取决于选择的出行方式,您可 能会看到多条路线。 5 完成后,按下选项键,然后选择清空结果。 更多服务 访问更多服务以便为设备下载并安装额外的应用程 序。在应用程序列表中,选择 More Services。 导航 了解如何获取到达您的目的地的语音指示。 ● 导航地图、您的当前位置及其他导航数据可能 因实际位置信息而有所不同。您应始终注意路 况、交通及任何其他可能影响您驾驶的因素, 并遵守所有在驾驶时应注意的安全警告和规章 制度。 ● 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区 或服务提供商。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择导航。 2 通过以下方法输入目的地: ● 通过语音输入目的地。 ● 用虚拟键盘输入目标位置。 ● 从联系人地址中选择目的地。 ● 从加星标的地点选择目的地。 3 安装所需的软件,然后使用导航功能。基于网络和 GPS 的服务 110 本地 了解如何搜索商业场所和旅游景点。 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区或 服务提供商。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择本地。 2 如果要搜索特定位置附近的商业场所或旅游景点, 选择您的位置 → 输入地址。 3 选择类别。 设备将搜索附近与该类别相关的地点。 4 选择欲查看其详细信息的地点名称。 如欲添加更多类别,可按下选项键,然后选择 添加搜索捷径。 Play 商店 设备的功能可通过安装附加应用程序而得到扩充。 Play 商店 为您提供了一种方便快捷的方式,让您轻松 购买移动应用程序。 ● 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区 或服务提供商。 ● 设备会将已下载应用程序中的用户文件保存在 内部存储器中。基于网络和 GPS 的服务 111 ›下载应用程序 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Play 商店。 2 搜索应用程序并将其下载到设备中。 下载完成时,设备将自动安装应用程序。 ›卸载应用程序 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Play 商店。 2 按下选项键,然后选择我的应用。 3 选择项目。 4 选择卸载 → 确定。 Samsung Apps 通过 Samsung Apps,您可以轻松下载各种适用于您 设备的应用程序和更新。借助 Samsung Apps 方便好 用的应用程序,您的设备将变得更加智能。了解上面 提供的有用应用程序并增强您的移动体验。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Samsung Apps。 2 搜索并下载应用程序到设备。 ● 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区 或服务提供商。 ● 有关详细信息,请访问 www.samsungapps.com,或者参阅 Samsung Apps 手册。基于网络和 GPS 的服务 112 应用精品 查找并下载三星推荐的最新应用程序。在应用程序列 表中,选择 S Suggest。 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区或 服务提供商。 YouTube 了解如何通过 YouTube™视频分享服务观看和上传视 频。 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区或 服务提供商。 ›播放视频 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 YouTube。 2 选择视频。 3 逆时针旋转设备进入横屏模式。 4 使用下列按键控制播放过程:基于网络和 GPS 的服务 113 数字 功能 1 拖动该栏可在文件中快进或快退。 2 更改显示的质量。 3 检视视频质量。此功能对于某些视频 可能不可用。 4 暂停或继续播放。 5 发送 URL 给其他人。 6 搜索视频。 7 旋转屏幕进入竖屏模式。 ›上传视频 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 YouTube。 2 如果链接至 YouTube,选择您的 Google 帐户。 3 选择 → 视频。 如果首次上载视频,选择要上载视频的网络类 型。 4 输入上载视频的详细信息并选择上传。基于网络和 GPS 的服务 114 语音搜索 了解如何通过语音搜索互联网。 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区或 服务提供商。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择语音搜索。 2 对着设备话筒说出关键字。 设备将搜索与关键字相关的网页。 3 选择搜索结果。连接能力 115 连接能力 USB 连接 了解如何使用 USB 数据线将设备连接到电脑。 设备正在传输或访问数据时,请勿断开 USB 数 据线与电脑的连接。否则可能会导致数据丢失或 损坏设备。 为获得最佳效果,将 USB 数据线直接连接至电 脑上的 USB 端口。使用 USB 集线器时,数据传 输可能会失败。 ›通过 Samsung Kies 连接 确保在电脑上安装了 Samsung Kies。可以从三星网 站下载该程序。 Samsung Kies 同时适用于 Windows 和 Macintosh 电脑。 1 使用 USB 数据线将设备连接到电脑。 Samsung Kies 在电脑上自动启动。如果 Samsung Kies 未能启动,双击电脑上的 Samsung Kies 图 标。 2 在设备和电脑之间传输文件。 有关详细信息,请参阅 Samsung Kies 帮助。连接能力 116 ›与 Windows Media Player 连接 确保在电脑上安装了 Windows Media Player。 1 使用 USB 数据线将设备连接到电脑。 2 打开 Windows Media Player 并同步音乐文件。 ›作为媒体设备连接 可以将设备连接至电脑并访问设备上储存的媒体文 件。 1 使用 USB 数据线将设备连接到电脑。 2 点击指示符图标区域并向下拖动以打开通知面板。 3 选择已连接为媒体设备 → 媒体设备 ( MTP )。 4 在设备和电脑之间传输文件。 ›连接作为照相设备 可以将设备作为照相机连接至电脑并访问设备中的文 件。 当电脑不支持媒体传输协议 (MTP) 或并未安装适 用于该设备的 USB 驱动程序时,可使用此 USB 连接模式。 1 使用 USB 数据线将设备连接到电脑。 2 点击指示符图标区域并向下拖动以打开通知面板。 3 选择已连接为媒体设备 → 摄像头 ( PTP )。 4 在设备和电脑之间传输文件。连接能力 117 Wi-Fi 了解如何使用设备的无线网络功能,以启动和连接任 何符合 IEEE 802.11 标准的无线局域网 (WLAN)。 可以连接到互联网,或者接入点或无线热点可用的其 他网络设备。 您的设备使用非统一的频率,目的是在所有欧洲 国家中使用。在欧盟,用户在室内使用 WLAN 时不受任何限制,但不允许在室外环境使用 WLAN。 ›开启 Wi-Fi 功能 在应用程序列表中,选择设定,然后向右拖动 Wi-Fi 开关。 WLAN 功能会在后台运行并将消耗电池电量。如 欲节省电池电量,请仅在需要时启动该功能。 ›寻找并连接 Wi-Fi 接入点 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → Wi-Fi。 设备将自动搜索可用的 Wi-Fi 接入点。 2 选择接入点。 3 输入接入点的密码 (如有必要)。 4 选择连接。连接能力 118 ›手动添加 Wi-Fi 接入点 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → Wi-Fi → 添加 Wi-Fi 网络。 2 输入接入点的 SSID,然后选择一种安全类型。 3 根据选择的安全类型设置安全设置,然后选择 储存。 ›通过保护设置连接 Wi-Fi 接入点 通过 WPS 按钮或 WPS PIN 连接至安全接入点。如 欲使用此方法,无线接入点必须具有 WPS 按钮。 通过 WPS 按钮连接 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → Wi-Fi。 2 按下选项键,然后选择 WPS推送按钮。 3 在 2 分钟内按下接入点上的 WPS 按钮。 通过 WPS PIN 连接 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → Wi-Fi。 2 按下选项键,然后选择 WPS PIN 条目。 3 在接入点上,输入设备的 PIN 码。 ›设定静态 IP 设定 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → Wi-Fi。 2 选择一个接入点 → 显示高级选项。 3 选择 IP 设定下拉菜单。 4 选择静止。连接能力 119 5 更改 IP 设定。 6 选择连接。 ›自定义 WLAN 设定 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → Wi-Fi。 2 按下选项键,然后选择高级设定。 3 更改以下选项: 选项 功能 网络通知 WLAN 接入点可用时进行通知。 睡眠期间保持 Wi-Fi 开启 设定在休眠模式下是否保持 WLAN 开启。 检查互联网 服务 使用当前的接入点时,检查是否 可以访问互联网服务。 Wi-Fi 定时器 设定打开或关闭 WLAN 功能的时 间。 MAC 地址 查看 MAC 地址。 IP地址 查看 IP 地址。 Wi-Fi直连 了解如何使用直接 WLAN 功能在无需接入点的情况 下,通过 WLAN 连接两台设备。连接能力 120 ›将设备直连到另一台设备 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → Wi-Fi → Wi-Fi直 连。 2 选择扫描。 3 选择一个设备。 其他设备的所有者接受连接,设备就会连接。 通过选择多连接,可将您的设备连接多个设备并 发送数据。 ›通过 Wi-Fi 发送数据 1 从适当的应用程序选择文件或项目。 2 选择一个选项以通过 Wi-Fi 发送数据。 选择选项的方式可能因数据类型而异。 3 搜索并选择另一个设备。 ›通过 Wi-Fi 接收数据 接收数据时,数据将自动储存至设备。接收的数据被 储存至 ShareViaWiFi 文件夹。连接能力 121 AllShare Cast 了解如何使用 AllShare Cast 加密狗连接至您的设 备,然后共享内容。 ● 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区 或服务提供商。 ● 有些文件在播放时可能需要缓冲,具体取决于 网络连接情况。 ● 为了节能,请在不用时取消 AllShare Cast 功 能。 ● 如果指定 Wi-Fi 频带,可能无法找到或连接 AllShare Cast 加密狗。 ● 如果在电视上播放视频或玩游戏,选择适当的 电视模式以获得最佳的 AllShare Cast 体验。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 更多设置 → AllShare Cast。 如果将 AllShare Cast 桌面工具添加到主屏幕, 您将可方便地访问此功能。 2 向右拖动 AllShare Cast 开关。 3 选择一个设备。 设备连接后,可在其他设备的显示屏上看到您的设 备显示。 4 打开或播放文件。 5 通过控制设备上的键来控制显示屏。连接能力 122 AllShare Play 了解如何使用 AllShare Play 服务来通过互联网播放储 存在各种设备上的内容。可以通过 AllShare Play 播放 并将任意设备上的文件发送到另一设备或网络存储服 务器。 如欲使用 AllShare Play 设备,必须先登录 Google 和三星帐户,并将两个或更多设备注册为文件服务 器。注册方法因设备类型而异。如欲获得有关使用 AllShare Play 的详细信息,按下选项键,然后选择 常见问题。 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区或 服务提供商。 ›发送文件 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 AllShare Play。 2 选择包含媒体文件的设备或网络存储器。 3 选择媒体类别并选择文件上的复选框。 4 选择 。 5 选择用于储存文件的设备或网络存储器。 ›共享文件 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 AllShare Play。 2 选择包含媒体文件的设备或网络存储器。 3 选择媒体类别并选择文件上的复选框。 4 选择 ,然后选择社交网络站点。连接能力 123 ›在远程设备上播放文件 ● 支持的文件格式可能会不同,具体取决于连接 作为媒体播放器的设备。 ● 有些文件在播放时可能需要缓冲,具体取决于 网络连接情况。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 AllShare Play。 2 选择包含媒体文件的设备或网络存储器。 3 选择媒体类别并选择文件上的复选框。 4 选择 。 5 选择要用作媒体播放器的设备。 6 通过设备上的按键来控制播放。 ›使用 Group Cast 功能 可以与连接至同一 WLAN AP 的多个其他设备共享屏 幕。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 AllShare Play。 2 选择媒体类别并选择文件上的复选框。 3 选择 → 群组广播。 4 输入 PIN 码并选择完成。 5 选择确定以启动 Group Cast。 6 在另一设备上,通过输入 PIN 码来加入 Group Cast。连接能力 124 ›管理网络存储服务器上的内容 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 AllShare Play。 2 选择网络存储服务器。 3 检视和管理您的文件。 ›自定义 AllShare Play 设定 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 AllShare Play。 2 按下选项键,然后选择设置。 3 更改以下选项: 选项 功能 注册的存储器 检视已添加至 AllShare Play 的网 络存储服务器。 注册的设备 检视或编辑已添加至 AllShare Play 的设备。 设置 web 服 务 登录社交网站以上传文件。 自动上传照片 设定为登录时自动上传照片到网 络存储器。 视频质量设置 设定为在播放电脑上储存的视频 时优化设备的视频质量。 锁定 AllShare Play 用三星帐户的密码锁定 AllShare Play。 语言 选择显示语言。 关于 查看 AllShare Play 资讯。连接能力 125 移动网络共享 了解如何与其他设备共享本设备的移动网络连接。 ›通过 WLAN 共享设备的移动网络 了解如何将本设备用作其他设备的无线接入点。 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区或 服务提供商。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 更多设置 → 网络 分享和便携式热点 → 便携式Wi-Fi热点。 2 向右拖动便携式Wi-Fi热点开关,启动通过 WLAN 进行的移动网络共享。 3 选择配置配置网络设定,以将设备用作接入点: 选项 功能 网络 SSID 编辑将向其他设备显示的设备名 称。 隐藏我的设备 设定即可阻止其他设备定位您的 设备。 安全 选择安全设定类型。 密码 输入密码,以避免未经授权访问 您的移动网络。此选项仅在设置 安全设定选项时可用。连接能力 126 选项 功能 显示密码 设定即可在输入密码时显示输入 内容。 显示高级选项 选择广播渠道。 4 选择储存。 5 在其他设备上找到设备的名称并连接至移动网络。 可以将移动网络共享限制为指定设备。选择已允 许设备,创建一个设备列表,然后选择您的设备 名称以将共享模式更改为仅限允许的设备。 ›通过 USB 共享设备的移动网络 了解如何通过与电脑建立 USB 连接来将本设备用作 无线调制解调器。 1 使用 USB 数据线将设备连接到电脑。 2 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 更多设置 → 网络 分享和便携式热点。 3 选择 USB网络分享,启动通过 USB 进行的移动网 络共享。 如欲停止共享网络连接,清除 USB网络分享旁边 的复选框。 电脑操作系统不同,共享方式可能不同。连接能力 127 ›通过蓝牙共享设备的移动网络 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 更多设置 → 网络 分享和便携式热点。 2 选择蓝牙网络分享,启动通过蓝牙进行的移动网络 共享。 3 在其他设备上,查找并与您的设备配对。 确保您已启用蓝牙功能和可视设定。 蓝牙 了解如何通过蓝牙与其他设备交换数据或媒体文件。 ● 对于通过蓝牙功能收发数据时的数据丢失、拦 截或误用,三星概不负责。 ● 分享和接收数据时,请务必确保相应设备采取 了适当的安全措施,并且是可信任的设备。如 果设备之间存在障碍,有效距离可能会缩短。 ● 某些设备,尤其是未经测试或未经 Bluetooth SIG 审批的设备,可能与本设备不兼容。 ● 不得将蓝牙功能用于非法目的 (例如出于商业目 的剽窃商业机密或非法窃听通讯)。对于因非法 使用蓝牙功能所造成的后果,三星概不负责。连接能力 128 ›启动蓝牙功能 在应用程序列表中,选择设定,然后向右拖动蓝牙开 关。 ›查找并与其他设备配对 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 蓝牙 → 扫描。 2 选择一个设备。 3 选择确定以匹配两个设备之间的蓝牙 PIN 码。或 者,输入蓝牙 PIN 码,然后选择确定。 当其他设备的所有者接受连接或输入相同的 PIN 码 时,配对即可完成。如果配对成功,设备将自动搜 索可用服务。 某些设备,尤其是耳机或车载套件,可能有固定 的蓝牙 PIN 码 (如 0000)。如果要配对的设备具 有 PIN 码,则必须输入相应的 PIN 码。 ›通过蓝牙发送数据 1 从适当的应用程序选择文件或项目。 2 选择一个选项以通过蓝牙功能发送数据。 选择选项的方式可能因数据类型而异。 3 搜索蓝牙设备并与之配对。连接能力 129 ›通过蓝牙接收数据 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 蓝牙,然后选择 设备旁边的复选框。 如欲选择设备的可见时长,按下选项键并选择 可见超时。 2 出现提示时,选择确定以匹配蓝牙 PIN 码或输入蓝 牙 PIN 码并选择确定 (如有必要)。 3 选择接受来确认两个设备之间的连接。 收到的数据将保存至 Bluetooth 文件夹。如果接收到 联系人,则会自动储存到联系人中。 GPS 本设备配有全球定位系统 (GPS) 接收器。了解如何启 动位置服务并使用其他 GPS 功能。 为了更好地接收 GPS 信号,避免在以下情况下使用 设备: ● 建筑物之间、隧道或地下通道中,或在建筑物内 ● 恶劣的天气条件 ● 周围为高压或电磁场 ● 在使用防晒膜的车辆中 使用 GPS 功能时请勿用手或其他物体触碰或挡 住天线周围的区域。 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区或 服务提供商。连接能力 130 ›启动定位服务 必须启动定位服务以接收位置信息或搜索地图。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 定位服务。 2 更改以下选项: 选项 功能 使用无线网络 设定为使用 WLAN 和/或移动 网络查找所处位置。 使用移动网络可能会产生 额外费用。 使用GPS卫星 设置为使用 GPS 卫星查找所 处位置。 位置和 Google 搜索 设定手机以将您的当前位置用 于 Google 搜索和其他 Google 服务。 VPN 连接 了解如何创建虚拟专用网 (VPN) 以及如何通过互联网 安全连接 VPN。 ● 设备需配置互联网接入设定。如果无法访问互 联网,必须对连接进行编辑。如果不确定应输 入什么信息,请咨询 VPN 管理员。 ● 如欲使用该功能,必须启动屏幕锁定功能。连接能力 131 ›设定 VPN 配置 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 更多设置 → VPN → 添加 VPN 网络。 2 更改以下选项: 选项 功能 名称 输入 VPN 服务器的名称。 类型 选择 VPN 类型。 服务器地址 输入 VPN 服务器的地址。 L2TP密钥 输入 L2TP 特权密码。 IPSec 识别符 输入用户名。 IPsec预共享 密钥 输入预共享安全密钥。 IPSec 用户证 书 选择 VPN 服务器将用以标识您 身份的用户证书。可以从 VPN 服务器导入证书或从互联网下载 证书。 IPSec CA 证 书 选择 VPN 服务器将用以标识您 身份的认证授权 (CA) 证书。可 以从 VPN 服务器导入证书或从 互联网下载证书。 IPSec服务器 证书 选择 VPN 服务器用以标识您身 份的服务器证书。可以从 VPN 服务器导入证书或从互联网下载 证书。连接能力 132 选项 功能 PPP 加密 ( MPPE ) 设定即可在将数据发送至 VPN 服务器之前进行加密。 显示高级选项 设定即可更改高级网络设定。 可用选项因 VPN 类型而异。 3 完成后,选择储存。 ›连接到个人网络 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 更多设置 → VPN。 2 选择专用网络。 3 输入用户名和密码,然后选择连接。133 工具 工具 计算器 了解如何使用设备执行运算。 ›执行计算 1 在应用程序列表中,选择计算器。 2 使用屏幕上的按键执行基本运算。 旋转设备进入横屏模式以使用科学计算机。如果 已阻止使显示屏在旋转设备时自动旋转,按下选 项键,然后选择科学计算器。 ›检视计算历史记录 1 在应用程序列表中,选择计算器。 2 执行计算。 3 选择 隐藏计算机键盘。 出现计算历史记录。 时钟 了解如何设置和控制闹钟和世界时钟。也可使用秒 表、倒数计时器和台钟。134 工具 ›设定闹钟 1 在应用程序列表中,选择时钟 → 闹钟。 2 选择创建闹钟。 3 设定闹钟的详细信息。 向右拖动智能闹钟开关启动模拟的自然声音,且使 其在主闹钟之前响起。 4 完成后,选择储存。 如欲取消闹钟,选择闹钟旁边的时钟图标。如欲 删除闹钟,按下选项键,然后选择删除。 ›停止闹钟 闹钟响起时: ● 如欲停止闹钟,选择 ,然后将手指拖到大圆外 面。 ● 如欲使闹钟在多睡的时间内静音,选择 ,然后将 手指拖到大圆外面。 ›创建世界时钟 1 在应用程序列表中,选择时钟 → 世界时间 → 添加 城市。 2 输入城市名称或从城市列表中选择。 ● 如欲选择当前城市,选择 。 ● 如欲在世界地图检视中选择城市,选择 。 如欲为时钟应用夏时制,点住时钟,然后选择 夏时制设置。135 工具 ›使用秒表 1 在应用程序列表中,选择时钟 → 秒表。 2 选择开始启动秒表。 3 选择计时记录单圈用时。 4 完成后,选择停止。 ›使用倒数计时器 1 在应用程序列表中,选择时钟 → 计时器。 2 设定倒计时的时间长度。 3 选择开始以开始倒计时。 4 计时器时间结束后,选择 ,然后将手指拖到大圆 外面以停止闹钟。 ›使用台钟 台钟显示当前时间、日期和天气。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择时钟 → 桌面时钟。 2 选择 以全屏检视台钟。 3 按下选项键,然后选择设定。 4 更改以下选项: 选项 功能 隐藏状态栏 设定为隐藏或显示状态栏。 墙纸 选择桌面时钟的背景图像。 日历 设定为显示日历。136 工具 选项 功能 天气预报 设定为显示您当前所在位置的天 气。也可选择温度单位并将台钟 设定为自动更新天气资讯。 亮度 调整显示屏的亮度。 底座设置 更改将台式电脑的底座与设备一 起使用的设定。 下载列表 了解如何管理从网络或电邮中下载文件的日志。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择下载列表。 2 选择下载类别。 3 如欲打开下载的文件,选择该日志。 如欲删除日志,选择复选框,然后选择 。 Dropbox 了解如何使用 Dropbox 云存储服务以储存并与他人共 享您的文件。将文件储存到 Dropbox 文件夹时,设备 将自动与网络服务器及其他已安装 Dropbox 的电脑同 步。137 工具 ›启动 Dropbox 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Dropbox → Start。 2 选择 I'm already a Dropbox user。 如果是新用户,选择 I'm new to Dropbox 以创建 一个帐户。 3 输入电邮地址和密码,然后选择 Log in。 4 选择 Next。 5 选择 Turn on 以自动上传使用设备上的照相机拍摄 的照片和视频。 ›上传文件到 Dropbox 文件夹 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Dropbox。 2 选择 → Photos or videos 或 Other files。 3 选择文件。 4 选择 Dropbox → 文件夹。 5 选择 Upload。 文件夹中的文件将添加到网络服务器及您的家用电 脑中。 ›检视文件 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Dropbox → 。 2 选择文件。138 工具 帮助 访问帮助信息以了解如何使用设备和应用程序,或配 置重要设置。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择帮助。 2 选择项目以查看提示。 如果已隐藏帮助弹出窗口,如欲重置,选择显示帮助 提示弹出窗口,然后选择项目。 我的文件 了解如何访问设备中储存的各种类型的文件。 ›支持的文件格式 本设备支持以下文件格式: 类型 格式 图像 bmp、gif、jpg、png 录像 3gp、mp4、avi、wmv、flv、mkv 音乐 mp3、3ga、aac、m4a、wma 声音 wav、mmf、xmf、imy、midi、amr 其他 doc、docx、pdf、ppt、pptx、txt、 xls、xlsx、htm、html、vbm、vcf、 vcs、vnt、jad、jar、crt、der ● 不支持某些文件格式,具体取决于设备的软 件。 ● 如果文件大小超出可用内存,在尝试打开文件 时会出现错误。139 工具 ›检视文件 1 在应用程序列表中,选择我的文件。 2 选择文件夹。 ● 如欲移动到文件目录的上一级,选择 。 ● 如欲返回主目录,选择 。 3 选择文件。 从文件夹列表中,按下选项键以访问以下选项: ● 如欲创建用于管理文件的文件夹,选择新建文件 夹。 ● 如欲删除文件或文件夹,选择删除。 ● 如欲搜索储存在设备中的文件,选择搜索。 ● 如欲更改检视模式,选择查看方式。 ● 如欲排序文件或文件夹,选择排序通过。 ● 如欲将文件发送给其他人或共享文件,选择共享通 过。 ● 如欲将文件或文件夹移动或复制到其他文件夹,选 择移动或复制。 ● 如欲更改文件或文件夹的名称,选择重命名。 ● 如欲更改文件管理器设定,选择设定。 NFC 设备允许您读取包含有关产品信息的近距离无线通讯 (NFC) 标签。在下载所需的应用程序之后,也可使用 此功能来付款或购买车票。 电池包含内置 NFC 天线。小心处置电池,以免 损坏 NFC 天线。 如果屏幕锁定,设备将无法读取 NFC 标签或接 收数据。140 工具 ›启动 NFC 功能 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 更多设置 → NFC, 然后向右拖动 NFC 开关。 ›读取 NFC 标签信息 一旦启动 NFC 功能,设备即会在您将设备靠近 NFC 标签时读取产品信息。标签上的信息将出现在显示屏 上。 ›通过 NFC 功能购物 使用 NFC 功能进行购物之前,必须先注册手机支付 服务。如欲注册或了解有关该服务的详细信息,请联 系您的服务提供商。 1 将设备的背面贴近 NFC 卡阅读器。 2 出现提示时,输入 PIN 码并再次将设备贴近 NFC 卡阅读器 (如有必要)。 ›通过 Android 传送发送数据 借助 Android 传送功能,可以将网页和联系人等数据 发送至已启用 NFC 的设备。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 更多设置 → NFC。 2 向右拖动 Android 传送开关。 3 打开网页或从相应的应用程序中选择一个项目。 4 将您设备的背面与其他设备的背面靠到一块。 5 点击设备的屏幕。 您设备上的数据将发送并显示在其他设备的屏幕 上。141 工具 ›通过 S 传送发送数据 借助 S 传送功能,可以发送音乐、视频、图像和文档 等数据。 请勿使用 S 传送发送受版权保护的数据。该行为 违反版权法。对于任何因用户非法使用受版权保 护的数据而导致的法律问题,三星概不负责。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定 → 更多设置 → S 传送。 2 向右拖动 S 传送开关。 3 启动使用音乐、视频、图像或文档的应用程序。 4 打开或播放文件。 5 将您设备的背面与其他设备的背面靠到一块。 6 点击设备的屏幕。 您设备上的数据将发送并显示在其他设备的屏幕 上。 如果两个设备尝试同时发送数据,文件传输将会 失败。142 工具 Google 了解如何搜索设备中的数据或互联网上的信息。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 Google。 2 输入关键字并选择 。 如欲通过语音搜索数据,选择 ,然后对着设备的 话筒说出一个关键字。 3 选择搜索结果。 SIM 工具包 使用服务提供商提供的各种附加服务。视使用的 SIM 卡或 USIM 卡而定,此应用程序使用的标签可能不 同。在应用程序列表中,选择 SIM Toolkit。 S Voice 了解如何使用 S Voice 提供的声控指令功能。只需对 着设备说话,即可拨号、发送信息、编写备忘录或完 成其他任务。 ● 此功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区 或服务提供商。 ● 如果发音不清楚、在噪杂的地方讲话时或以粗 话或俚语以及方言口音说话时,设备将无法识 别您的命令或可能执行不必要的命令。 1 在应用程序列表中,选择 S Voice。 2 对着设备话筒说出命令。 如欲说出新命令,选择 。 可选择 取消语音提示。设定 143 设定 访问设定选项 1 在应用程序列表中,选择设定。 2 选择设定类别,然后选择选项。 Wi-Fi 启动 Wi-Fi 功能以连接至 Wi-Fi AP 并访问互联网或其 他网络设备。 如欲使用选项,按下选项键。 ● 高级设定:自定义 Wi-Fi 设定。 ● WPS推送按钮:通过 WPS 按钮连接至安全 Wi-Fi AP。 ● WPS PIN 条目:通过 WPS PIN 连接至安全 Wi-Fi AP。 蓝牙 启动蓝牙功能以在近距离内交换信息。 数据使用 记录数据使用量及自定义限制设定。设定 144 ● 移动数据:设定为使用任何移动网络上的数据连 接。 ● 设置移动数据限制:设定使用移动数据的限制。 ● 数据使用周期:输入按月重置日期以监控数据使用 情况。 如欲使用更多选项,按下选项键。 ● 数据漫游:设定为在漫游时使用数据连接。 ● 限制背景数据:设定为在使用移动网络时关闭背景 中的同步功能。 ● 自动同步数据:设定设备自动同步联系人、日历、 电邮、和社交网络图像数据。 ● 显示Wi-Fi使用量:设定为显示通过 Wi-Fi 的数据使 用情况。 ● 移动热点:搜索和使用另一设备的移动网络。 更多设置 更改设定以控制与其他设备或网络的连接。 ›飞行模式 启动飞行模式以禁用设备上的所有无线功能。仅能使 用非网络功能。 ›移动网络 ● 移动数据:设定为使用任何移动网络上的数据连 接。 ● 数据漫游:设定为在漫游时使用数据连接。设定 145 ● 接入点名称:为移动网络选择接入点名称 (APN)。可 以添加或编辑 APN。如欲将 APN 设定重置为出厂默 认设定,按下选项键,然后选择重置为默认值。 ● 网络模式:选择网络类型。 ● 网络运营商: - 搜索网络:搜索并选择网络。 - 请自动选择:设定设备以选择第一个可用网络。 ›网络分享和便携式热点 ● 便携式Wi-Fi热点:设定为将本设备用作其他设备的 无线接入点。 ● USB网络分享:设定为通过与电脑建立 USB 连接来 将本设备用作无线调制解调器。 ● 蓝牙网络分享:启动蓝牙共享功能以通过蓝牙共享移 动网络。 ● 帮助:查看有关使用网络分享功能的信息。 ›VPN 设定和管理虚拟专用网络 (VPN)。 › NFC 启动 NFC 功能以读取或写入包含信息的 NFC 标签。 ›S 传送 启动 S 传送功能以将音乐、视频、图像和文档等数据 发送至支持 NFC 和直接 Wi-Fi 的设备。设定 146 ›附近的设备 ● 文件共享:启动媒体共享以允许其他 DLNA 认证设 备访问本设备上的媒体。 ● 共享内容:设定为与其他设备共享您的内容。 ● 设备名称:输入设备的媒体服务器名称。 ● 已允许的设备列表:查看允许访问您设备的设备列 表。 ● 不允许的设备列表:查看阻止访问您设备的设备列 表。 ● 下载到:选择用于存储已下载媒体文件的内存位 置。 ● 从其它设备上传:设定为接受从其它设备上传。 › AllShare Cast 启动 AllShare Cast 功能并与他人共享显示屏。 › KIES 通过Wi-Fi 通过 Wi-Fi 将设备连接至 Samsung Kies。 主屏模式 选择主屏模式 (基本或简易)。设定 147 阻止模式 选择将要阻止的通知或设定为允许在阻止模式下为来 自指定联系人的来电发出通知。 声音 更改设备的各种声音设定。 ● 音量:调整设备各种声音的音量。 ● 振动强度:调整振动强度。 ● 设备铃声:选择来电提示铃声。 ● 设备振动:添加或选择振动模式。 ● 默认通知:选择事件提示铃声,如收到新讯息和未 接来电。 ● 声音和振动:设定设备在来电时振动并播放铃声。 ● 按键声音:设定设备以在拨号屏幕上输入号码时发 出声音。 ● 触摸声音:设定设备在选择应用程序或选项时发出 声音。 ● 屏幕锁定声音:设定设备在锁定或解锁触摸屏时发 出声音。 ● 触觉反馈:设定设备以在按下选项键或返回键,或 紧按住电源开关键或主页键时振动。 ● 自动触觉:设定设备在已下载的应用程序发出声音 时振动。设定 148 显示 更改设定以控制设备上的显示和背景灯。 ● 墙纸 - 主屏:为主屏幕选择一张背景图片。 - 锁定屏幕:为锁定屏幕选择一张背景图片。 - 主屏幕与锁定屏幕:为主屏和锁定屏幕选择一张背 景图片。 ● LED 指示灯 - 充电:设定为在为电池充电时打开服务灯。 - 电量低:设定为在电池电量低时打开服务灯。 - 通知:设定为在有未接来电、新讯息或通知时打开 服务灯。 - 语音录制:设定为在录制语音备忘录时打开服务 灯。 ● 屏幕模式:选择显示模式。 - 动态:使用此模式以使显示色调更鲜艳。 - 标准:使用此模式呈现普通环境。 - 天然:使用此模式以使显示色调类似于电视。 - 电影:使用此模式以处理昏错的环境,例如在黑暗 的房间内。 ● 亮度:调整显示屏的亮度。设定 149 ● 自动旋转屏幕:设定界面在您旋转设备时自动旋 转。 ● 屏幕自动关闭:选择关闭显示屏背景灯前设备等待 的时间长度。 ● Smart stay:设定为避免在您看显示屏时关闭显示 屏背景灯。 ● 字体风格:更改显示文本的字体类型。 ● 字体大小:更改用于在应用程序中创建或显示项目 的字体大小。 ● 点击按键灯持续时间:选择关闭按键背景灯前设备 等待的时间长度。 ● 显示电池电量百分比:设定为查看剩余的电池寿 命。 ● 自动调节屏幕色调:设定以通过调节显示屏的亮度 来节约能源。 存储 查看设备和存储卡的存储信息。也可格式化存储卡。 格式化存储卡会永久删除存储位置中的所有数 据。 由于操作系统和默认应用程序占用部分内存,因 此实际的可用内存容量会少于指定的容量。设定 150 省电模式 启动省电模式并更改省电模式的设定。 ● CPU 节电:设定设备限制某些系统资源使用。 ● 屏幕节电:设定设备降低显示屏的亮度。 ● 背景颜色:设定设备降低电邮和互联网背景颜色的 亮度。 ● 关闭触觉反馈:设定为避免设备在按下选项键或返 回键,或紧按住电源开关键或主页键时振动。 ● 了解省电:查看电池省电信息。 电池 查看设备所消耗的电池电量。 应用程序管理器 查看和管理设备上的应用程序。 定位服务 更改定位服务的设定。 ● 使用无线网络:设定为使用 Wi-Fi 和/或移动网络查 找所处位置。 ● 使用GPS卫星:设定为使用 GPS 卫星查找所处位 置。 ● 位置和 Google 搜索:设定设备以将您的当前位置 用于 Google 搜索和其他 Google 服务。设定 151 锁定屏幕 更改用于确保设备安全的设定。 ● 屏幕锁定:启动屏幕锁定功能。 ● 锁屏选项: 这些设定仅在设定滑锁选项时适用。 - 快捷键:设定为在锁定屏幕上显示和编辑应用程序 快捷键。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此功能可能无 法使用。 - 信息标签:设定为在锁定屏幕上显示新闻和股票资 讯。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此功能可能无 法使用。 - 时钟:设定为在锁定屏幕上显示时钟。 - 双时钟:设定为在锁定屏幕上显示双时钟。 - 天气:设定为显示天气资讯并更改天气显示的设 定。 - 涟漪效果:设定为在锁定屏幕上显示涟漪效果。 - 帮助文本:设定为在锁定屏幕上显示帮助文本。 - 摄像头快速访问:设定设备在屏幕锁定时通过点住 屏幕并旋转设备来启动照相机。设定 152 - 在锁屏唤醒:设定设备在屏幕锁定时识别唤醒命 令。 - 设置唤醒命令:设定唤醒命令以启动 S Voice 应用 程序或执行指定的功能。 ● 所有者信息:输入在锁定屏幕上显示的信息。 安全 ● 加密设备:设定密码以加密储存在设备上的数据。 每次开机时都必须输入密码。 启用此设定之前,应先为电池充电,因为加密数 据可能需要超过一个小时。 ● 加密外置 SD 卡: - 加密:设定为在将文件储存至存储卡时加密文件。 - 全卡加密:设定为加密存储卡上的所有文件。 - 不包括多媒体文件:设定为加密存储卡上除媒体文 件外的所有文件。 如果在将设备重置为出厂默认值之前启用了此设 定,设备将无法读取加密的文件。重置设备前禁 用此设定。设定 153 ● 远程控制:设定为允许通过互联网远程控制遗失或 被盗的设备。如欲使用此功能,必须登录您的三星 和 Google 帐户。 - 账户注册:添加或查看您的三星和 Google 帐户。 - 使用无线网络:设定为允许收集位置数据,并允 许通过 Wi-Fi 和移动网络确定遗失或被盗设备的位 置。 ● SIM卡更换警告:启动查找我的设备功能。 ● 查找我的手机网页:访问 SamsungDive 网站 (www.samsungdive.com)。可以在 SamsungDive 网站上跟踪和控制遗失或被盗的设备。 ● 设置 SIM 卡锁: - 锁定SIM卡:设定为锁定 SIM 或 USIM 卡。如欲 在设备上使用 SIM 或 USIM 卡,必须输入 PIN 码。 - 更改 SIM 卡的 PIN 码:更改 SIM 或 USIM 卡随附 的 PIN 码。 ● 使密码可见:设定为在输入密码时显示输入内容。 ● 设备管理器:查看设备认可的管理员。可允许设备 管理员为设备应用新策略。 ● 未知来源:设定设备以安装从任何来源下载的应用 程序。如果不选择此选项,则设备仅能安装从 Play 商店下载的应用程序。 ● 信任的证书:设定为使用证书和凭证以确保安全使 用应用程序。设定 154 ● 从设备存储空间安装:安装储存在 USB 存储设备上 的加密证书。 ● 清除证书:从设备删除凭证并重置密码。 语言和输入 更改语言和文本输入的设定。 ›语言 选择显示语言。 ›默认 选择文本输入法。 › Google 语音输入 启动 Google 语音输入功能以通过语音输入文本。如 欲更改语音输入设定,选择 。 ● 选择输入语言:选择 Google 语音识别的输入语言。 ● 屏蔽不文明的字词:设定为阻止设备识别语音输入 中的冒犯性用语。 ● 下载离线语音识别包:下载和安装语言数据以供离 线语音输入使用。 ›三星键盘 如欲更改三星键盘设定,选择 。 ● 纵向键盘类型:选择键盘类型。 ● 输入语言:选择键盘所用的输入语言。设定 155 ● 预测文本:启动 XT9 模式以根据您的输入预测单词 并显示单词建议。也可自定义单词预测设定。 ● 连续输入:设定为在键盘上滑动输入文本。 ● 键盘滑动:设定为通过在键盘上左右滑动手指来切 换文本输入模式。 ● 手写:启动手写模式。也可更改手写模式的设定, 例如识别时间、笔粗细或笔颜色。 ● 语音输入:启动语音输入功能以通过语音输入文 本。 ● 自动大写:设定为自动将句子的首个字母大写。 ● 自动添加标点:设定为在需要时自动插入标点符 号。 ● 字符预览:设定设备为点击的每个字母显示预览 图。 ● 按键振动:设定设备在点击按键时进行振动。 ● 按键声音:设定设备在点击按键时发出声音。 ● 指南:查看有关使用三星键盘的教程。 ● 重置设置:将三星键盘设定重置为出厂默认值。 ›语音识别器 选择语音识别引擎。设定 156 ›语音搜索 以下选项适用于 Google 语音识别: ● 语言:选择用于 Google 语音识别的语言。 ● 语音输出:设定设备提供语音反馈以提示当前操 作。 ● 屏蔽不文明的字词:设定为隐藏语音搜索结果中的 冒犯性用语。 ● 下载离线语音识别包:下载和安装语言数据以供离 线语音输入使用。 以下选项适用于三星语音识别: ● 语言:选择用于语音识别的语言。 ● 通过主页键打开:设定为按下主页键两次启动 S Voice 应用程序。 ● 使用位置:设定为将位置信息用于语音搜索结果。 ● 隐藏粗话脏话:设定为隐藏从语音搜索结果识别出 的不文明字词。 ● 帮助:查看有关使用 S Voice 应用程序的信息。 ● 关于:查看版本信息。 ● 应用程序的语音命令:设定设备识别用于控制设备 的语音命令。可以选择该功能以通过语音命令进行 控制。 ● 自动启动免提:设定为在通过 S Voice 应用程序拨 打电话时自动打开扬声器。 ● 显示信息正文:设定为显示在驾驶模式下收到的新 讯息的正文。设定 157 ● 唤醒命令:设定为在使用 S Voice 应用程序时,通 过说出唤醒命令来启动语音识别。 ● 在锁屏唤醒:设定设备在屏幕锁定时识别唤醒命 令。 ● 设置唤醒命令:设定唤醒命令以启动 S Voice 应用 程序或执行指定的功能。 ● 查看错过的事件:设定为在按下耳机按钮启动 S Voice 应用程序时,显示未接来电、未读讯息或错 过的事件。 ● 本地地址:输入您的家庭地址以在 S Voice 应用程 序中使用您的位置信息。 ● 登录到 Facebook:输入您的 Facebook 帐户信 息。 ● 登录到 Twitter:输入您的 Twitter 帐户信息。 ›文字转语音输出 ● 首选 TTS 引擎:选择语音合成引擎。如欲更改语音 合成引擎的设定,选择 。 ● 语速:选择 TTS 功能的速度。 ● 收听实例:收听作为示例的语音文字。 ● 驾驶模式:启动驾驶模式以便为来电、讯息或事件 详情提供音频通知。 ›指针速度 调整连接至设备的鼠标或触控板的指针速度。设定 158 备份并重置 更改用于管理设定和数据的设定。 ● 备份我的数据:设定以将设定和应用程序数据备份 到 Google 服务器。 ● 备份账户:设定或编辑 Google 备份帐户。 ● 自动恢复:设定为在您需要重新安装应用程序时恢 复设定的应用程序数据。 ● 恢复出厂设定:将设定重置为出厂默认值,并删除 所有数据。 添加账户 添加电邮或社交网络服务帐户。 动作 启动动作功能并更改设备控制动作识别功能的设定。 ● 体感拨号:设定为在查看通话、讯息或联系人详细 信息时,通过拿起并将设备靠近耳朵来拨打语音通 话。 ● 智能提示:设定设备在您拿起设备时提示有未接来 电或新讯息。 ● 双击转至顶部:设定为在双击设备时移至联系人列 表或电子邮件的顶部。 ● 倾斜以缩放:设定为使用倾斜动作以在查看图像或 浏览网页时进行放大或缩小。设定 159 ● 摇动以移动图标:设定设备在点住项目,然后将设 备滑向左侧或右侧时将项目移至另一页。 ● 平移设备以浏览图片:设定为在图像放大时,朝任 意方向滑动设备以滚动查看图像。 ● 晃动以更新:设定为晃动设备以搜索蓝牙或 Kies air 设备。 ● 翻转以静音/暂停:设定为在翻转设备时关闭铃声、 暂停媒体播放或关闭 FM 收音机声音。 ● 灵敏度设置:调整各个动作的反应速度。 ● 了解动作:查看控制动作的教程。 ● 手掌滑动以捕捉:设定为用手在屏幕上向左或向右 擦动时捕捉屏幕图像。 ● 手掌触摸以静音/暂停:设定为在用手掌触摸屏幕时 暂停媒体播放或关闭 FM 收音机声音。 ● 了解手部动作:查看控制手部动作的教程。 配件 更改配件设定。 ● 底座声音:设定设备以在设备连接至或从台式底座 移除时播放声音。 ● 音频输出模式:设定为当设备连接至台式底座时, 可使用底座扬声器。设定 160 ● 桌面主屏幕显示:设定设备在设备连接至台式底座 时显示台钟。 ● 音频输出:选择要在设备连接至 HDMI 设备时使用 的声音输出格式。 有些设备可能不支持环绕声设定。 ● 音频应用程序:设定设备在将耳机连接至设备时显 示可用的应用程序。 日期和时间 更改设定以控制时间和日期在设备上显示的方式。 如果电池电量完全耗尽或已从设备中取下,时间 和日期将会重置。 ● 自动日期和时间:设定设备从网络接收时间信息并 自动更新时间和日期。 ● 设置日期:手动设置当前日期。 ● 设置时间:手动设置当前时间。 ● 自动时区:设定为在跨时区旅行时从网络接收时区 信息。 ● 选择时区:选择时区。 ● 使用24小时制:设定为以 24 小时格式或 12 小时格 式显示时间。 ● 选择日期格式:选择日期格式。设定 161 辅助功能 辅助工具服务是专门为那些具有身体障碍的人士定制 的特殊功能。更改设定以改善对设备界面和功能的可 访问性。 ● 自动旋转屏幕:设定界面在您旋转设备时自动旋 转。 ● 屏幕自动关闭:选择关闭显示屏背景灯前设备等待 的时间长度。 ● 说出密码:设定设备大声读出通过 TalkBack 输入的 密码。 ● 呼叫应答/结束: - 应答键:设定为按下主页键接听来电。 - 电源键结束通话:设定为按下电源开关键时结束通 话。 ● 辅助功能快捷方式:向辅助功能设定添加快捷方 式,该快捷方式在紧按住电源开关键时会出现。 ● TalkBack:启动 TalkBack 以提供语音反馈。 ● 字体大小:更改用于在应用程序中创建或显示项目 的字体大小。 ● 负色:反转显示颜色以提高可见度。 ● 改进网络辅助设置:设定应用程序并安装网络脚本 以使其网络内容更易于访问。 ● 单声道音频:使用一只耳塞收听音频时,启用单声 道声音。 ● 关闭所有声音:关闭所有设备声音。 ● 按住延迟:设定点住屏幕的识别时间。设定 162 开发者选项 启动和更改应用程序开发的设定。 ● 桌面备份密码:设定密码以保护备份数据。 ● 保持唤醒:设定屏幕在为电池充电时保持开启。 ● 保护 SD 卡:设定为从存储卡读取数据时请求确 认。 ● USB调试:启动 USB 调试模式以通过 USB 数据线 将设备连接至电脑。 ● 允许模拟位置:允许将模拟位置和服务资讯发送至 位置管理服务以进行测试。 ● 选择待调试的应用程序:选择应用程序进行调试并 避免暂停调试时发生错误。 ● 等待调试程序:设定为阻止在调试程序就绪前加载 选定的应用程序。 ● 显示触摸位置:设定在您触摸屏幕时显示指针。 ● 显示指针位置:设定在您触摸屏幕时显示指针的座 标和轨迹。 ● 显示布局边界:设定为显示边界。 ● 显示 GPU 视图更新:设定为通过 GPU 更新屏幕区 域时闪现更新区域。 ● 显示屏幕更新:设定在屏幕区域有更新时闪现更新 区域。 ● 窗口动画比例:选择打开和关闭弹出窗口的速度。设定 163 ● 过渡动画比例:选择屏幕切换的速度。 ● 动画影像时间伸缩效果:选择弹出窗口显示的时间 长度。 ● 禁用硬件叠加:设定为隐藏硬件叠加。 ● 强制 GPU 渲染:设定为使用 2D 硬件加速以增强图 形性能。 ● 严格模式:设定设备以在应用程序长时间运行时使 屏幕闪光。 ● 显示 CPU 使用情况:设定为列出所有活动进程。 ● GPU 显示配置文件:设定为检查 GPU 渲染时间。 ● 启用轨迹:设定为捕捉应用程序和系统性能的轨 迹。 ● 不保留活动:设定设备在启动新应用程序时结束运 行中的应用程序。 ● 限制后台进程:设定设备限制后台运行的进程数。 ● 显示全部 ANR:设定设备在有后台运行的应用程序 没有响应时提醒您。 关于设备 查看有关设备的信息,例如型号和版本。 可通过空中固件升级 (FOTA) 服务下载并安装固 件更新。如欲检查固件更新,选择系统更新 → 更新。故障排除 164 故障排除 开启或使用设备时,设备提示您输入以下代码之 一: 代码 尝试使用此方法解决问题: 密码 如果启动了设备锁定功能,则必须输入为设 备设置的密码。 PIN 首次使用设备或启用要求提供 PIN 码时, 必须输入随 SIM 或 USIM 卡提供的 PIN 码。使用锁定SIM卡可禁用该功能。 PUK 如果 SIM 或 USIM 卡被锁,通常是因为 PIN 码多次输错所致。如欲解锁,必须输入 服务提供商提供的 PUK 码。 PIN2 当访问要求输入 PIN2 码的功能表时,必须 输入随 SIM 或 USIM 卡提供的 PIN2 码。 有关详细资讯,请联络服务提供商。 设备显示网络或服务错误 ● 位于信号较弱或接收不良的地方时,设备可能无法 接收讯号。请移至其他地方后再试。 ● 如果未开通服务,某些选项无法使用。请联络服务 提供商以了解更多详细资料。故障排除 165 触摸屏反应缓慢或无法正常反应 如果设备具有触摸屏并且触摸屏无法正常反应,请尝 试以下操作: ● 取下触摸屏的任何保护性外盖。保护性外盖可能会 阻止设备识别输入,我们不推荐触摸屏设备使用保 护性外盖。 ● 点击触摸屏时请确保手掌干燥且干净。 ● 重新启动设备以清除任何暂时性软件错误。 ● 确保设备的软件已升级到最新版本。 ● 如果触摸屏受到刮擦或损坏,请将设备交给三星客 服中心。 您的设备冻结或有严重的问题 如果您的设备冻结或当机,您或许需要关闭部分功能 或许重置设备以重新获得功能。如果设备仍然没有响 应且某一应用程序停止不动,请通过任务管理器关闭 该应用程序。如果设备死机和没有响应,紧按住电源 开关键 8-10 秒。 如果此问题仍然存在,请执行恢复出厂设定。在应用 程序列表中,选择设定 → 备份并重置 → 恢复出厂设 定 → 重置设备 → 全部删除。 通话掉线 位于信号较弱或接收不良的地方时,网络连接可能会 断开。请移至其他地方后再试。故障排除 166 拨出呼叫无法接通 ● 确保已按下拨号键。 ● 确保已进入正确的蜂窝网络。 ● 确保未对拨打的电话号码设置呼叫限制。 呼入电话无法接通 ● 确保设备已开机。 ● 确保已进入正确的蜂窝网络。 ● 确保未对该呼入电话号码设置呼叫限制。 通话时对方无法听到您的声音 ● 确保未遮住内置话筒。 ● 确保话筒靠近您的嘴部。 ● 如果使用耳机,请确保耳机连接正确。 声音质量差 ● 确保未挡住设备的内置天线。 ● 位于信号较弱或接收不良的地方时,设备可能无法 接收讯号。请移至其他地方后再试。 从通讯录拨打电话时,无法接通 ● 确保存储在联络人列表中的号码正确。 ● 如有必要,请重新输入并保存该号码。 ● 确保未对该联络人电话号码设置呼叫限制。故障排除 167 设备发出提示音且电池图标呈空白显示 电池电量不足。为电池充电或更换电池后才能继续使 用设备。 电池充电异常或设备关机 ● 可能是电池电极脏污所致。请先用干净的软布擦拭 两个金色的触点,然后再尝试为电池充电。 ● 如果电池的电量再也无法充足,请妥善处理旧电池 并用新电池进行更换 (请参考当地法规,了解有关妥 善处理设备的说明)。 设备摸上去感觉很热 当使用耗电量大的应用程序或在设备上长时间使用应 用程序时,设备就会感觉很热。这属于正常情况,不 会影响设备的使用寿命或性能。 启动相机时出现错误信息 本设备必须拥有足够的可用存储空间和电池电量,才 能支持相机应用。如果启动相机时收到错误信息,请 尝试以下操作: ● 为电池充电或换上充满电的电池。 ● 将文件传送到电脑或删除设备中的文件,以释放存 储空间。 ● 重新启动设备。如果尝试这些操作后,依然无法正 常使用相机,请联系三星客服中心。故障排除 168 启动 FM 收音机时出现错误信息 本设备上的 FM 收音机使用耳机线作为天线。未连接 耳机时,FM 收音机将无法接收电台。如欲使用 FM 收音机,请首先确保已正确连接耳机。然后,扫描并 保存可用电台。 如果执行这些步骤后依然无法使用 FM 收音机,请尝 试使用其他无线电接收器收听需要的电台。如果使用 其他接收器时可以收听电台,可能是设备需要进行维 修。请联系三星客服中心。 打开音乐文件时出现错误信息 本设备可能会因为若干种原因而无法播放某些音乐文 件。如果在设备上打开音乐文件时收到错误信息,请 尝试以下操作: ● 将文件传送到电脑或删除设备中的文件,以释放存 储空间。 ● 确保音乐文件未受到数字权利管理 (DRM) 保护。如 果文件受到 DRM 保护,请确保拥有播放该文件所 需的合适许可证或密钥。 ● 确保设备支持该文件类型。 无法找到其他蓝牙设备 ● 确保本机已启动蓝牙无线功能。 ● 确保要连接的设备已启动蓝牙无线功能 (如有必要)。 ● 确保本机和另一个蓝牙设备的距离在最大蓝牙范围 (10 米) 之内。 如果以上方法无法解决您的问题,请联系三星客服中 心。故障排除 169 将设备连接到电脑时未建立连接 ● 确保所用的 USB 数据线与设备兼容。 ● 确保电脑上安装了合适的驱动程序,并且驱动程序 已更新。 ● 如果您是 Windows XP 用户,确保电脑上安装了 Windows XP Service Pack 3 或更高版本。 ● 确保您的电脑上安装了 Samsung Kies 2.0 或 Windows Media Player 10 或更高版本。安全预防措施 170 安全预防措施 为了防止自己和他人受伤或设备受损,在使用设备前请阅读以下所 有说明。 警告:防止电击、火灾和爆炸 请勿使用损坏的电源线、插头或松动的电源插座 请勿用湿手触摸电源线,或拉动电源线来断开充电器的连接 请勿弯曲或损坏电源线 请勿在设备充电时使用设备,或者用湿手触摸设备 请勿将充电器或电池短接 请勿让充电器或电池坠落或受到撞击 请勿使用未经制造商许可的充电器给电池充电 请勿在雷雨天使用设备 设备可能发生故障,进而增加电击的危险。 请勿操作受损或漏电的锂离子电池 有关安全弃置锂离子电池的信息,请联络最靠近的授权客服中心。 请谨慎操作和弃置电池及充电器 • 请仅使用经三星许可并专为本设备设计的电池和充电器。不兼容 的电池和充电器可能导致严重的人身伤害或设备严重受损。 • 切勿将电池或设备弃置于火中。请遵照当地法规弃置旧电池或设 备。 • 切勿将电池或设备置于加热设备 (例如微波炉、炉灶或暖气片) 的 上面或内部。电池过热时可能会爆炸。 • 切勿碾压或刺穿电池。避免使电池遭受外部强压,否则可能导致 内部短路和过热。 保护设备、电池和充电器免受损坏 • 避免使设备和电池处于过冷或过热的环境中。 • 极高或极低的温度会损坏设备并降低设备和电池的充电能力与使 用寿命。安全预防措施 171 • 防止电池接触金属物体,因为这样会在电池的正负极之间建立连 接,导致临时或永久性的电池损坏。 • 切勿使用损坏的充电器或电池。 小心:在受限制的区域使用设备时,请遵守所有 安全警告和规定 请勿在其他电子设备附近使用设备 大多数电子设备使用射频信号。设备可能会干扰其他电子设备。 请勿在心脏起搏器附近使用设备 • 请尽可能避免在距离心脏起搏器 15 厘米的范围内使用设备,因 为设备可能会干扰心脏起搏器。 • 为了将对心脏起搏器的干扰降至最低,请仅在离心脏起搏器较远 的身体一侧使用设备。 请勿在会受到射频干扰的医院或医疗设备附近使用设备 如果使用医疗设备,在使用设备前请咨询设备制造商,以确保设备不 会受到射频影响。 如果使用助听器,请向制造商查询有关射频干扰的资讯 设备发射的射频可能会对部分助听器造成影响。使用设备前,请咨 询制造商,以确定助听器会否受到设备发射的射频影响。 处于存在爆炸风险的环境中时,请关闭设备 • 处于存在爆炸风险的环境中时,请关闭设备,而不是取下电池。 • 处于存在爆炸风险的环境中时,务必遵守相关规定、说明和标 志。 • 请勿在加油站、靠近燃料或化学品、及爆破区域使用您的设备。 • 请勿在放有设备、设备零件或配件的容器中存放或搬运易燃液 体、气体或易爆材料。 乘坐飞机时请关机 设备可能会干扰飞机的电子导航仪器。 设备可能会干扰汽车设备 汽车上的电子设备可能因设备的射频而发生故障。有关详细资讯, 请联络制造商。安全预防措施 172 驾驶车辆时,请遵守有关使用移动设备的所有安 全警告和规定 驾驶时,安全第一。如果法律禁止,切勿在驾驶时使用移动设备。 为了自己和他人的安全,请按常识行事并记住以下提示: • 了解设备及其便利功能,例如快速拨号和重拨。这些功能有助于 减少拨打或接听电话的时间。 • 请将设备置于方便取用的位置。确保可在视线不离开路面的情 况下取用设备。如果在不方便时收到来电,可让语音信箱代您回 复。 • 在交通拥挤或天气恶劣的情况下请暂停通话。雨、雨夹雪、雪、 冰雹以及拥挤的交通都可能造成危险。 • 请勿在此时作记录或查找电话号码。记录“待办事项”或翻查通 讯录,可能会使您分神,而忘记安全驾驶的首要责任。 • 审慎拨号的同时,请注意交通状况。在停车或未驶入车流中时拨 打电话。尽量安排在汽车停下时通话。 • 请勿进行紧张或情绪激动的对话,以免分神。请让通话对象知道 您正在驾驶,并暂停可能会转移自己对路况注意力的对话。 • 使用设备求助。在发生火灾、交通意外或紧急医疗事故时,请拨 打本地紧急号码。 • 使用设备帮助处于紧急情况中的其他人。如果看到车祸、犯罪或 危及生命的严重紧急情况,请拨打本地紧急号码。 • 必要时,请拨打道路救援或特殊的非紧急援助号码。如果看到有 车抛锚但并无重大危险、交通信号灯损坏、无人受伤的轻微交通 事故或发现有车辆被盗,可拨打专为报告这些情形而设的专门号 码。 请妥善保养和使用移动设备 请保持设备干燥 • 湿汽和液体会损坏设备内的零件或电路。 • 请勿在设备潮湿时开机。如果设备已开机,请立即关机并取下电 池 (如果设备无法关机或取下电池,请维持现状)。然后,用毛巾 擦干设备并将其送往服务中心。 • 液体会改变标签的颜色,表明水损坏了设备内部。因进水造成的 设备受损会让制造商的质保失效。安全预防措施 173 请勿在灰尘或漂浮物过多的区域使用或存放本设备 灰尘或异物可能导致本设备发生故障或引起火灾或电击。 仅在平整的表面存放设备 如果设备坠落,可能会受损。 请勿在过热或过冷的地方存放设备。请勿在过热或过冷的地方 存放设备。建议在 5℃ 至 35℃ 之间的温度使用您的设备 • 如果将设备置于密闭的车辆中,设备可能会爆炸,因为车内温度 可能会高达 80℃。 • 请勿将设备长时间直接暴露在阳光下 (例如置于汽车的仪表盘 上)。 • 请在 0℃ 至 45℃ 的温度范围内存放电池。 请勿将设备与诸如硬币、钥匙和项链之类的金属物体一起存放 • 设备可能会被刮花或发生故障。 • 如果电池端子接触金属物体,可能会导致火灾。 请勿在磁场附近存放设备 • 如果接触到磁场,设备可能会出现故障,或者电池可能会放电。 • 磁场可能会损坏磁条卡 (包括信用卡、电话卡、银行存折和登机 卡)。 • 请勿使用带磁性搭扣的携带包或饰品,或让设备长时间接触磁 场。 请勿将设备存放在加热器、微波炉、炙热烹饪设备或高压容器 中或附近 • 电池可能会漏电。 • 设备可能会过热并导致火灾。 请勿让设备坠落或受到撞击 • 设备屏幕可能会损坏。 • 如果设备弯曲或变形,设备可能会受损,或者部件会发生故障。 如果设备过热,请停止使用设备或应用程序一段时间 皮肤长时间接触过热的设备可能会导致低温烫伤的症状,如红点和 色素沉着。 如果您的设备有照相机闪光灯或灯光,不宜将其接近人或宠物 的眼睛 靠近眼睛使用闪光灯可能导致暂时性失明或视力受损。安全预防措施 174 在闪烁的光线下,请小心使用 • 使用设备时,室内应开一些灯,并且屏幕不应距离眼睛太近。 • 在闪烁的光线下长时间观看视频或玩 Flash 游戏,可能会发生痉 挛或晕厥。如果感到有任何不适,请立即停止使用设备。 减少重复性动作损伤的危险 反复执行按键、用手指在触屏上写字或玩游戏等重复性动作时,您 的手部、颈部、肩部或身体的其他部位可能会偶有不适。使用设备 一段时间后,应松弛一下握持设备的手,轻轻地按下按键,并适时 地休息一下。如果即使是这样,在使用时或使用后仍然感到不适, 请停止使用设备并去咨询医生。 确保电池和充电器的最长使用寿命 • 避免对电池充电超过一周的时间,过度充电可能缩短电池寿命。 • 未使用的电池在一段时间后会放电,因此在使用前必须重新充 电。 • 不使用充电器时,请断开充电器与电源的连接。 • 电池只能用于既定的用途。 请使用制造商许可的电池、充电器、配件和耗材 • 使用普通电池或充电器可能会缩短设备寿命,或导致设备故障。 • 如果用户使用未经三星许可的配件或耗材,三星将不会对用户的 安全承担任何责任。 请勿啃咬或吮吸设备或电池 • 这样会损坏设备或导致爆炸。 • 儿童使用设备时,请确保他们正确使用。 请勿将设备或随附的配件戳向眼睛、耳朵或嘴巴 否则会造成窒息或严重受伤。 用设备进行通话时: • 竖直握住设备 (与使用传统电话类似)。 • 直接对着麦克风说话。 • 请勿触碰设备的内部天线。否则会造成通话质量下降或导致设备 发出难以预料的无线射频 (RF) 能量。安全预防措施 175 使用耳机时请保护听力和耳朵 • 长时间聆听高音量的声音有损听力。 • 在驾驶时聆听高音量声音可能使人分神,甚至导致 意外发生。 • 应时刻先调低音量再将耳机插入音讯源,并仅使用 通话或听音乐所需的最小音量设定。 • 在干燥的环境下,耳机内可能会积聚静电。请避免 在干燥的环境下使用耳机;或在将耳机连接到设备 之前接触金属物体,以释放静电。 步行或移动中使用设备时请小心 • 时刻注意周围的情况,避免伤到自己或他人。 • 确保耳机线不会缠绕手臂或附件的物体。 请勿将设备置于后面的口袋或腰部 否则摔倒时,会使自己受伤,或损坏设备。 请勿拆卸、改造或修理设备 • 对设备进行任何改造都会让制造商的质保失效。如果设备需要维 修,请将设备送往三星服务中心。 • 请勿拆卸或刺穿电池,否则可能会导致爆炸或火灾。 请勿给设备上油漆或黏贴纸 油漆和贴纸可能妨碍移动部件并阻碍正常操作。如果对设备的油漆 或金属配件过敏,可能会导致皮肤瘙痒、湿疹或皮肤红肿。当上述 情况发生时,请停止使用设备并咨询您的医生。 清洁设备时: • 使用毛巾或橡皮擦拭设备或充电器。 • 使用棉球或毛巾清洁电池的两端。 • 请勿使用化学品或清洁剂。 如果屏幕破裂或损坏,请勿继续使用设备 破损的玻璃或丙烯酸可能会导致手部和面部受伤。请将设备送至三 星客服中心进行维修。 请勿将设备用于既定用途以外的任何目的 在公共场合使用设备时,请避免干扰他人安全预防措施 176 请勿让儿童使用设备 本设备并非玩具。请勿让儿童玩耍设备,否则可能会伤到儿童自己 和他人,损坏设备或误拨电话增加您的话费。 请小心安装移动设备和相关装置 • 确保车辆中安装的所有设备或相关装置均安装牢固。 • 避免将设备和配件置于安全气囊张开区域附近或之内。气囊快速 膨胀时,如果无线设备安装不当,可能导致严重的人身伤害。 只让合格人员维修设备 让不合格人员维修设备可能导致设备损坏,并使制造商的质保失 效。 请小心操作 SIM 卡或存储卡 • 请勿在设备传送或存取信息时取卡,否则可能造成数据丢失及/ 或设备或卡损坏。 • 防止卡受到猛烈撞击、静电以及来自其他设备的电气噪声。 • 请勿用手指或金属物体触碰金色的触点或端子。如果有脏污,可 使用软布擦拭卡。 确保可联系应急服务 在某些区域或环境中,可能无法用设备拨打紧急电话。在前往偏远 或未开发的区域之前,请计划好联系应急服务人员的备用方法。 确保个人和重要数据安全 • 使用设备时,务必备份重要数据。三星对于任何数据丢失概不负 责。 • 弃置设备时,务必备份所有数据,然后重置您的设备,以免个人 资料被滥用。 • 下载应用程序时,请仔细阅读使用权限。对于可访问多种功能或 大量个人信息的应用程序,应特别小心谨慎。 • 定期检查您的帐户以避免设备用于未经许可或可疑的目的。如果 发现有任何个人信息被滥用的迹象,请联系您的服务提供商以删 除或更改帐户信息。 • 如果设备丢失或被盗,请更改帐户的密码以保护您的个人信息。 • 避免使用未知来源的应用程序,并通过图案、密码或 PIN 码锁 定设备。 请勿散布受版权保护的材料 请勿向他人散布未经版权所有人许可的受版权保护的材料。该行为 违反版权法。制造商对用户非法使用受版权保护之材料而导致的任 何法律问题概不负责。安全预防措施 177 本产品的正确弃置方式 (电子电气设备废弃指令) (适用于具有单独收集系统的国家/地区) 在产品、附件或说明书上出现这个标志,表示当本产品 及其电子配件 (例如充电器、耳机、USB 线) 不应与其 它家庭垃圾一起丢弃。 为避免因未妥善控制废弃物而对环境或人体健康造成危 害,请将这些装置与其它类型的废弃物分开处置并妥善 回收,以促进资源充分回收再利用。 有关这些装置的环保安全回收地点和方式,家庭用户应联络产品经 销商或地方政府机关。 商业用户应联络他们的供应商,并查阅购买合约的条款及条件。请 勿将本产品及其电子配件与其它商业废弃物一起丢弃。 本产品中电池的正确弃置方式 (适用于具有单独收集系统的国家/地区) 在电池、产品手册或包装上出现这个标志,表示当本 产品内的电池已达使用寿命期限时,不应与其它家庭 垃圾一起丢弃。标志上的化学符号 Hg、Cd 或 Pb 代 表该电池的汞、镉或铅含量超出 EC 2006/66 指令的 参考限值。如果未妥善弃置电池,这些物质可能会对人类健康或环 境造成危害。 为保护自然资源并促进资源回收再利用,请将电池与其它类型的废 弃物分开处置,并利用您当地的免费电池回收系统正确回收。安全预防措施 178 免责声明 通过本设备取得的部分内容及服务归第三方所有,且受版权、专利 权、商标权及/ 或其它知识产权法令之保护。前述内容及服务仅供 您作个人及非商业目的之使用。您不得以未经内容拥有者或服务提 供者授权的方式使用任何内容或服务。在不限制前述条文的前提 下,除非获得适用之内容拥有者或服务提供者的明确授权,否则您 不得利用任何方式或媒介修改、拷贝、转载、上载、发布、传送、 翻译、销售、制作衍生著作、使用或散布任何通过此设备显示的任 何内容或服务。 “第三方内容及服务系按‘现状’提供。三星公司不对前述所提供 的内容或服务出于任何目的给予任何明示或暗示的保证。三星公 司明确表示不对任何隐含保证负责,包括但不限于对适销性或特定 用途之适当性的保证责任。三星公司不担保通过此设备所取得的任 何内容或服务的准确性、有效性、及时性、合法性或完整性;对于 任何直接、间接、附带、特殊或相应产生的损害、律师费、开支, 或任何所含信息所导致或相关或由于您或任何第三方使用任何内容 或服务而产生的其它任何损害,即使已被告知发生前述损害之可能 性,三星公司在任何情况下 (包括疏忽) 均不承担任何合约或侵权 责任。” 第三方服务随时可能终止或中断,三星公司不担保或保证任何内容 或服务可在任何期间维持其可用性。第三方系通过三星公司控制范 围以外的网络及传输工具传送内容及服务。在不限制此免责声明之 一般原则的前提下,三星公司明确表示不对任何通过此设备提供的 任何内容或服务之中断或暂停承担任何责任或赔偿。对于前述内容 及服务相关的客户服务,三星公司概不负责。若对前述内容或服务 的相关服务有任何疑问或要求,请直接洽询各自的内容及服务提供 者。视您的设备或服务供应商所使用的软件而定,本手册中 的部份内容可能与您设备上的情形有所不同。 www.samsung.com Chinese. 11/2012. Rev. 1.1 安装 Samsung Kies (电脑同步) 1. 从三星网站 (www.samsung.com/kies) 下载 最新版 Samsung Kies 并将其安装在电脑上。 2. 使用 USB 数据线将设备连接到电脑。 有关详细信息,请参阅 Samsung Kies 帮助。 ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﺗﺨﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻤﻴﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ Samsung. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻻ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ً www.samsung.com/global/register اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ذو اﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺮ اﻟﺤﺮآﺔ RSA1N*** RSA1D*** RSA1U*** RSA1S*** RSA1Z*** RSA1Z*** RSA1S*** RSA1U*** RSA1D*** RSA1J*** RSA1N***٢ _ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻥ ﺛﻼﺟﺘﻚ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ Samsung ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺘﻜﺮﺓ ﻭﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﻣﻔﺼﻼﺕ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻠﺴﺎء ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﺎﻗﺔ. (ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ) CoolSelect Duo • ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ CoolSelect Duo ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ. ﻓﻔﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻮﻡ، ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺤﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﻋﺼﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ً ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻃﺎﺯﺟﺔ. ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ، ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻮﺍﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ، ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻃﺎﺯﺟﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ. ﻟﺬﺍ، ﻓﺎﻵﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻃﻌﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ً ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻫﺸﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ . ً ﺣﺎﻟﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺯﺟﺔ ﺩﻭﻣﺎ • ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﻹﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ. ﺒﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻬﻞ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ً ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ. ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ # _________ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ # ____ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ • ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ً • ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ/ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻪ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻋﻪ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺏ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ. ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺧﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ. ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ. ًﻼ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒ ﻟﻠﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ. ً • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ • ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ. • ﻭﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺪ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ. • ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ R600a ﺃﻭ R134a ﻛﻐﺎﺯ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻏﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺜﻼﺟﺔ. • ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ R600a، ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ، ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻀﺎ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ. ً ﻟﻼﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺃ • ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻌﻞ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ، ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ. ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ _ ٣٤ _ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ • ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻠﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ، ﻓﺈﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻒ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻚ، ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ١ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻜﻞ ٨ ﺟﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ R600a ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. • ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. • ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ. - ﻭﺇﻻ، ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻃﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء. - ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺊ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺗﺎﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. • ﺃﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ. - ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ً • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺩﻭﻣﺎ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. - ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ. • ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺩ ًﻭﻣﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ. - ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺜﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ. - ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻼء ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺸﻂ ﺑﻄﻮﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﻪ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ، ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ. • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ، ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻟﻒ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻪ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻳﺪﻱ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ. • ﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ. • ﺃﺯﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. - ﻭﺇﻻ، ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ، ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. - ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. - ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺤﻨﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻛﺄﺭﺿﻲ. - ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ. - ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﺗﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺑﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﻢ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ، ﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ Samsung. • ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺎﺕ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ. • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ/ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ، ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ. ﻲ ﺣ • ﺇ ﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ (ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ) ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻘﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻘﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺒﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ، ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺋﻬﻢ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻬﻢ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺚ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. • ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﺏ. ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ. • ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺑﺄﻳﺪﻱ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ. - ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻠﺞ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ، ﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. - ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. - ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ. ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ • ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. • ﻭﻗﺪ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ. • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ. - ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺷﻲء ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ. • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺯﺟﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ. - ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. - ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. - ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. - ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﺍﺕ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻘﻀﺎء ﻋﻄﻠﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. . ً • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. - ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﻋﺎء ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. - ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻜﺒﻪ، ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ _ ٥ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. - ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ. - ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. - ﻭﺇﻻ، ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ / ﻣﻮﺍﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﻻﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ. • ﺃﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺭﻓﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻖ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ. • ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ R600a ﺃﻭ R134a ﻛﻐﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻏﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ (ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ R600a)، ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. • ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻜﻠﻮﺑﻨﺘﺎﻥ ﻛﻐﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ. ﻟﺬﺍ، ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ً ﺧﺎﺻﺔ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺎ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ. ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻛﺴﺮ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ، ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ. ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. ﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ٢٤ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ، ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﺪﺓ. ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻌ ًﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ٦ _ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻥﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ • ﺃﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ. • ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ، - ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ً ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻕ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ. - ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ. ً - ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ • ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﺪﺓ. • ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﻴًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ. ﻟﻜﻦ، ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺐ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ. ﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﺷﻄﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻔﻔﻬﺎ. • ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺛﻨﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. ﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ٢٤ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ، ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﺪﺓ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﻴًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ. • ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ (ﻧ ًﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺫﻭﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ًﺟﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﺪﺓ) ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ. • ﻻ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺴﺪ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ؛ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺦ. • ﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ. ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً • ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﻠﺞ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻹﺫﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. • ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺰﻭ ISO. ﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺫﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﺪﺓ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﺜﻞ، ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻒ. • ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ. ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ _ ٧ تلميحاا لتوفير الطاقة - قم بوضع اجلهاز في غرفة جافة معتدلة البرودة بها تهوية كافية. ً وتأكد من عدم تعرضه لضوء الشمس املباشر وال قم بوضعه مطلقا بالقرب من أي مصدر للحرارة )مثل املدفأة(. ً - ال تقم بسد أي من فتحات سحب الهواء أو شبكات اجلهاز مطلقا. - اترك الطعام ليبرد قبل وضعه داخل اجلهاز. - ً ضع األطعمة اجملمدة في الثالجة لتصبح أكثر دفئا. حينئذ ميكنك استخدام درجات احلرارة املنخفضة للمنتجات اجملمدة لتبريد األطعمة املوجودة في الثالجة. - َ ال تترك باب اجلهاز مفتوحا ملدة طويلة عند وضع األطعمة أو إخراجها من الثالجة. كلما كانت مدة فتح باب الثالجة قصيرة، قل حجم الثلج املتكون في اجملمد. ِّ قم بتنظيف اجلزء اخللفي للثالجة بانتظام. تعمل األتربة على زيادة استهالك الطاقة. - ال تقم بضبط درجة احلرارة مبعدل أبرد من الالزم. - تأكد من وجود مخرج هواء كاف بني قاعدة الثالجة واجلدار اخللفي للثالجة. - ال تقم بتغطية فتحات التهوية. - يجب وجود مساحة مناسبة إلى اليمني واليسار واخللف وأعلى عند التركيب، فهذا يساعد على خفض استهالك الطاقة مما يعمل على خفض تكلفة فواتير الطاقة.ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻼﺟﺘﻚ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ٩ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ١٠ ﻓﻚ ﺃﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ١٣ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ١٦ ٩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻼﺟﺘﻚ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ١٧ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ١٨ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء (ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ) ١٩ ١٧ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺟﺔ SAMSUNG ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ٢٢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ٢٣ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ٢٤ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ٢٥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ٢٦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ ٢٧ ﺍﻷﺭﻓﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺭﺍﺝ ٢٨ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ (ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ) CoolSelect Duo ٣٠ ٣١ ﻓﻚ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ٣٢ ﻓﻚ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ٣٣ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ٣٤ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ٣٥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ٢٢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ٨ _ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ٣٤ ٣٥ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻼﺟﺘﻚ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺗﻬﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻴﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻠﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ Samsung. ﻭﻧﺄﻣﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ. ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ. ً • ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ. ً • ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ). ً ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ (ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ً • ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ ﺫﺍ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺃﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ. ً • ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ . ِ • ﺃﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ - ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. - ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ٢٥ ﻣﻢ ٥٠ ﻣﻢ ٥٠ ﻣﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ٥٠ ﻣﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ١٣٠° ١٥٤٦ ﻣﻢ ١١٦٣ ﻣﻢ • ﺃﺗﺮﻙ ﺧﻠﻮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ. ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ 50 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ (10 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ). • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻚ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ «ﻓﺼﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ» ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ _ ٩ ٠١ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻓﻚ ﺃﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ. ١. ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ، ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ً ﺃ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ. ﻓﺼﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ 2 ً ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ. ﻭﺷﺪ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ 1 ١. ﻓﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ 1 2 ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻘﻄﻊ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ. ﺃﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ. ١٠ _ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻼﺟﺘﻚ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ٢. ﻓﻚ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ًﻻ. ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﺬﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺛﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺴﺮﻫﺎ. • ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ. • ﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺧﺮﺑﺸﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ، ﺛﻢ ﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺪﻫﺎ 1 ١. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ، ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ . 2 ً ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ 2 1 . 5 ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺃﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ 4 ﻭﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ 3 ٢. ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﻜﻪ 3 4 5 . 7 ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ 6 ٣. ﺛﻢ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ 7 6 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ _ ١١ ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ. ٠١ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ١٢ _ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻚ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ. 1 ١. ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ، ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ 1 4 2 3 . ﺗﻮﺥ 4 ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ 3 ﻭﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ 2 ٢. ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﻜﻪ. . 6 ﺑﺮﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ 5 ٣. ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ 10 9 4 5 6 7 8 3 ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻼﺟﺘﻚ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺧﺼﺼﺘﻪ ﻟﻬﺎ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ 3 ١. ﺭﻛﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ . ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ 4 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ ٦ 5 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ 6 ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ. ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ 8 7 ٢. ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ. ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ. 10 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ 9 ٣. ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ _ ١٣ ٠١ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 3 ١. ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ . 4 ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ 5 ٢. ﺭﻛﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ . ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ 6 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ 7 ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ 9 . ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ 8 ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ 10 ﻭﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ. 11 ٣. ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ 12 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ. ١٤ _ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ 6 3 4 12 11ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء، ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻡ ﻻ. ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ _ ١٥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ٠١ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ تام في منتصف الوصلة الشفافة لمنع تسرب الماء من الموزع. ٍ ماسورة الماء“ بشكل ِّ 2. يجب إدخال “ 3.قم بإدخال المشبك في حزمة التركيب وتأكد من تثبيته بإحكام في الخط. •منتصف الوصلة الشفافة •مشبك أ )¼ بوصة( مم 6.35 ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻼﺟﺘﻚ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء . 2 ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ 1 ١. ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ 2 1ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ِ ﻭﺍﻵﻥ، ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ، ﺳﺘﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ . ً ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ. ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍء ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ، ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ . ً ﺇﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺫﻭ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ، ﺃﺩﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ً ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺫﻭ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ، ﺃﺩﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ً ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ. ١٦ _ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﻚ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻔﻚﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻼﺟﺘﻚ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ . ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ً ﺗﺬﻛﺮ، ﺇﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺃﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ. ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻻﺝ ٢. 1 ١. ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﻮﻟﺔ 3 2 1 ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ 2 ﻟﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻻﺝ 3 ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻟﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ 1 ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ. 1 ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﻮﻟﺔ ٢. ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻻﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ . 3 2 ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ، ﺳﻴﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ _ ١٧ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺰﻻﺝ ﺻﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺰﻻﺝ ٠١ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ١٨ _ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻻﺝ، ﺛﻢ 1 ٣. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ، ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﻮﻟﺔ . 1 ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ 3 ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻻﺝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ 3 2 1 ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻻﺝ. ﻓﺤﺺ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء (ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ) ﻳﻌﺪ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻼﺟﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ Samsung ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ، ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ Samsung ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء. ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻘﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ. ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ. ﻭﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ ٨٦٢ ~ ١٣٨ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻞء ﻓﻨﺠﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺳﻌﺔ ١٧٠ ﺳﻢ٣ ﻓﻲ ١٠ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ (ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ١٣٨ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ)، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻀﺨﺔ ﻣﻌﺰﺯﺓ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺧﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ. ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻃﻘﻢ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ. ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ. ١. ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ. ٢. ﻭﺻﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ “A” ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺰﻻﺝ ﺻﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ. ﺃﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ، ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﺍﺷﺘﺮﻱ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺄﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ. ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ “A” ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻼﺟﺘﻚ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ. (ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ) - ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﺬﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ، ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ. - ﺃﻗﻄﻊ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ. ﺃﺯﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ. (ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ) - ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ. - ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ، ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺃﻡ ﻻ. - ﺃﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ. ﺭﻛﺐ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ. - ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ (ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ) ﻭﺛﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺈﺟﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ. ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ. - ﺛﺒﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ _ ١٩ ٠١ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﺩﺍﺗﻲ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺗﻲ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ٩٠ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ٢٠ _ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. - ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻏﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. - ﻭﺻﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ. - ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ، ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ، ﻛﺮﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ. - ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻏﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﺭﺑﻂ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ. - ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺒﻚ ”A”، ﺛﺒﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ (ﺑﻤﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ). - ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺛﻨﻲ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﻘﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ. ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺻﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺿﺎﻏﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺒﻚ A ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻼﺟﺘﻚ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ. ١. ﺷﻐﻞ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ. .( ً ٢. ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ (١ ﻟﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ. ٣. ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺯﻝ. ٤. ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء. ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ً ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء. ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻭﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ. ﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ. (ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ) ١. ﺃﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﻟﻮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ. ٢. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ «ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ» ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ١٫٥ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻞء ﻭﻋﺎء ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ). ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ، ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ. ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. 1 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ _ ٢١ ٠١ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺱ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ٢٢ _ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ SAMSUNG ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺛﻼﺟﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ، ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ. ﻭﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻗﺴﻢ ً ﻭﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ، ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺃ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ.ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Samsung ﻟﻺﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ. ١. ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻠﻮﺹ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ. ٢. ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ. ٣. ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺗﻌﺶ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﺲ. ٤. ﻋﻘﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ، ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ. ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ. ِ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻑﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ 5 6 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍ ﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺻﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺴﺪ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ (ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ). 1 ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ 14- ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ (8 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ) ﻭ25- ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ (14- ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ). 2 ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ 3 ﺯﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﺮﻭﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ. 4 ﺯﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 3 ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ. ﻳﻌﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻨﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﻌﺎﻡ ﻃﺎﺯﺝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ، ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ (ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ) 5 ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ «ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ» ﻭﺯﺭ «ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ» ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 3 ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ، ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﻀﺎ. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ. ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺃ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ٣ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺿﺪ 6 ﻋﺒﺚ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ 1 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻭ7 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ (34 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻭ45 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ). 7 ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ _ ٢٣ ٠٢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ RSA1J/D/U/Z RSA1N/Sﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ SAMSUNG ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ “88” ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ “88” ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ «ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ». ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ «ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ» ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ «ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ» ﻭﺳﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ. ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ «ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ». ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ، ﺳﻴﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ٢٤ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ. ٢٤ _ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ RSA1J/D/U/Z RSA1N/Sﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ. ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ٦ ﺷﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 18 ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ)، ﺃﻋﺪ . ً ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 3 ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ 6 ﺷﻬﻮﺭ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ «ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ» ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ، ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻔﺎء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ. ﻗﻔﻞ ﺿﺪ ﻋﺒﺚ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ «ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺿﺪ ﻋﺒﺚ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ» ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ «ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ» ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ٣ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ٣ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ. ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻠﺞ ﻣﺠﺮﻭﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ. ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﻭﺵ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺜﻠﺞ، ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. . ً ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ (ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺛﻠﺞ) ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ 14- ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ (8 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ) ﻭ25- ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ (14- ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ) ﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ. ﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻳﺲ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺬﻭﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺩﺟﺔ 16- ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ (4 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ). ﺳﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ 14- ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ (8 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ) ﻭ25- ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ (- 14 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ). ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ -١٤ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ (٨ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ)، ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ -٢٥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ (14- ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ). ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻀﻲ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ، ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ 7 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ (45 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ) ﻭ1 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ (34 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ) ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ، ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ . ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ. ً ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺘﻴﻦ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ. ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ، ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ. ً ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ، ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ «ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ» ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﺟﺮﺏ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ، ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 10 ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺛﻢ ﻭﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ _ ٢٥ ٠٢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻣﺠﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ یﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺰر وﻇﻴﻔﺔ أﺧﺮى آﺬﻟﻚ. ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ هﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻟﻤﺪة 3 ﺛﻮاﻧﻲ (ﺗﺘﻢ إﺿﺎءة ﻣﺼﺒﺎح ﻣﺆﺵﺮ اﻟﻘﻔﻞ)، یﺘﻢ إیﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺨﺎن اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﺮات اﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎل ﻇﻬﻮر ﻗﻄﺮات اﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺣﻮل وﻋﺎء اﻟﻐﻄﺎء أو ﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﺨﺰیﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوﺏﺎت ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام هﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺏﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ﻟﻤﺪة 3 ﺛﻮاﻧﻲ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى. ﺏﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ، ﺳﻮف یﻨﻄﻔﺊ اﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎح وﺗﻌﻤﻞ .وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﺮات اﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ. وﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪةﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ SAMSUNG ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ «ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ» ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ «ﻣﺠﺮﻭﺵ»، ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺑﺴﺤﻖ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻠﺞ ﻣﺠﺮﻭﺵ. ﺇﻧﺰﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺏ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺏ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ. • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ. - ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ. • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﺎء. - ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ / ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ. • ﻭﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻮ 862 ~ 138 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻄﻠﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ، ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺻﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء. - ﻭﺇﻻ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ. • ﺃﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺃﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ. - ﻭﺇﻻ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﺏ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ٢٦ _ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺛﻠﺞ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻣﺠﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﺿﻐﻂﺍﻷﺭﻓﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ _ ٢٧ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ (ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ) ﺩﻟﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ (ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ) ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺭﻓﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺭﺍﺝ (ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ) ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻲ ﺃﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﻛﻪ (ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ) (ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ) CoolSelect Duo ٠٢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ SAMSUNG ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺛﻼﺟﺔ Samsung ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ. ﻭﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﻃﺎﺯﺟﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ. ﺗﺬﻛﺮ، ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺜﻠﺞ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺪ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ. ٢٨ _ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 1 2 3 4 5 11 9 10 8 7 (ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮدﻳﻼت RSA1S***، و RSA1N***، وRSA1W***) ﻟﻜﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﺤﺮارﻳﺔ واﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ أآﺒﺮ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إزاﻟﺔ درج (أدراج) ﺣﺠﺮة اﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻋﺪا درج ﺣﺠﺮة اﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ وﺻﻮاﻧﻲ اﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب ﺣﺠﻢ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﺼﺮح ﺑﻪ ﺑﺤﺠﻴﺮة ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﺪة ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎت ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ إزاﻟﺔ. للحصول على أفضل مستويات كفاءة استخدام الطاقة من هذا املنتج، الرجاء ترك كل األرفف واألدراج والسالل في أماكنها األصلية كما هو موضح بالرسم التوضيحي أعاله.ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ. 1 ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺍﻷﺭﻓﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺃﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﺪﺓ. 2 ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺒﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﺪﺓ. 3 ً ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻔﻔﺔ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﻣﻨﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻋﻴﺔ. ﺍﻷﺩﺭﺍﺝ 4 ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻏﺬﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺸﺮﻭﺑﺎﺕ. ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺐ. ﺍﻷﺭﻓﻒ 5 ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺾ. ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ. 7 ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺬﺍﻕ، ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻃﺰﺍﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ. ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺟﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ. COOLSELECT 8 DUO (ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ) ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻃﺎﺯﺟﺔ. ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ. ً ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﻛﻪ 9 ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺑﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺟﺒﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﻤﺔ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﺎﻥ 10 ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻨﺎﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻏﺎﻟﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ. ﺻﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ 11 ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﺴﻔﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. ﺃﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺃﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ. ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ، ﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. - ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ _ ٢٩ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ٠٢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ SAMSUNG ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ CoolSelect Duo (ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ) ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ CoolSelect Duo ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ. ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻮﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻮﻡ، ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ CoolSelect Duo ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺨﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻨﺰﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ. ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺨﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻨﺰﻳﺮ ﻃﺎﺯﺟﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ. ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ، ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ CoolSelect Duo ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﻛﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻟﺔ. ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﻛﻪ ﻃﺎﺯﺟﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ، ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺻﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ. ٣٠ _ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ. ١. ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ. ﺛﻢ ﺃﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺟﻪ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻃﻴﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻟﻸﺭﻓﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ. ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ٢. ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﻜﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ. ﺑﺸﺪﻩ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺮﻓﻌﻪ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ. ٣. ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ً ٤. ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺩﻟﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺑﺮﻓﻌﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺷﺪﻩ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ. ٥. ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺃﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ. ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ، ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء. ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ، ﺿﻌﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء. ﻭﺇﻻ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ _ ٣١ ٠٢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﺧﻄﺎﻑﺛﻼﺟﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﻓﻚ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ١. ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ. ﺛﻢ ﺃﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻃﻴﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻟﻸﺭﻓﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ. ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ٢. ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﻭﺍﺕ/ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺟﻪ ﺑﺴﺤﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ. ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻴﻼ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ً ﻭﺃﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻠ ٣. ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺟﺎﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺑﻜﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ. ٣٢ _ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﺧﻄﺎﻑ ﻟﻘﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻃﻌﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻫﺎ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ، ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ.ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ _ ٣٣ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ SAMSUNG ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺗﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ Samsung ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺮﺍﺛﻴﻢ. ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻓﻒ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺠﻔﻴﻔﻬﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﻢ. ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ. ﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺷﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ً ﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑ ﻟﻠﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ِ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ. ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﻩ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﻌﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻮﺭﻛﺲ™ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﻣﻮﺍﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ. ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺒﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ ﻭﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺐ. ﺛﻢ ﺟﻔﻔﻪ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ. ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء، ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ً ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. ٠٢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ Home Bar تنظيف استخدم قطعة قماش نظيفة لتنظيف وعاء الثلج واملاء.ثم قم بالتجفيف بواسطة قطعة قماش نظيفة وناعمة.ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ SAMSUNG ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ٣٤ _ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ وﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻔﺮﻳﻖ اﻹﺹﻼح اﻟﻤﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﺮورة LED ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪال ﻣﺼﺒﺎح .اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ هﻮ ﻥﻔﺲ اﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎح اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ LED واﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ﻣﺼﺒﺎح .ﻻ ﺗﻜﺴﺮ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎح ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻭﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ. ً ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻈﻞ ً ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻭﺭﺍء ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ، «ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ» ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻭﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ً ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ، ﺳﻴﻐﻠﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.٣٥_ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻞ • ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. • ﻫﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ؟ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ. ً • ﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ؟ • ﻫﻞ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ًﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ؟ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ. • ﻫﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ؟ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻓﺄ. ً • ﻫﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ؟ • ﻫﻞ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻃﻌﺎﻡ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎء ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺑﺮﺩ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ؟ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ CoolSelect Duo™. ً ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻨﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺑ ﺗﺠﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. • ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ. • ﻫﻞ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ًﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ؟ • ﻫﻞ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻭﺭﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ؟ • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ «ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ» ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻃﺒﻴ ًﻌﻴﺎ ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺇﻧﻜﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ. • ﻳﻌﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻧ ًﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻴﻒ. • ﻫﻞ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺟﺰ ًﺋﻴﺎ؟ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ. ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﻒ. • ﻫﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 12 ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ؟ • ﻫﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﺻﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ؟ ؟ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ً • ﻫﻞ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ «ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ» ﺃﻭ «ﻣﺠﺮﻭﺵ». • ﻫﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺛﻠﺞ ﻋﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ؟ • ﻫﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ًﺟﺪﺍ؟ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ. ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺛﻠﺞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ • ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻃﺒﻴ ًﻌﻴﺎ. ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ. • ﻫﻞ ﻓﺴﺪ ﺻﻨﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ؟ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ (ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ، ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻚ) ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء. • ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﻓﺎﺳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻮﻙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻛﺮﻳﻬﺔ. • ﻫﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ؟ ﺃﺯﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﺭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ. • ﺃﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻟﻴﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ. • ﻫﻞ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﺭ. • ﻫﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﺻﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ؟ • ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﻃﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ؟ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺣﺮ ﻭﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻮﻗﺎﺕ. ً • ﻫﻞ ﺗﺠﻤﺪ ﺧﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ؟ ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻓﺄ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺎء. ,ﺍﻛ(1Cﻑ,ﺍﻷﻋﻄ1ﻝ,ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬ1ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ؟ COUNTRY CALL OR VISIT US ONLINE AT AUSTRIA 0810 - SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com COLOMBIA 01-8000112112 www.samsung.com EIRE 0818 717100 www.samsung.com HONG KONG (852) 3698 4698 www.samsung.com/hk (Chinese) www.samsung.com/hk_en (English) INDIA 1800 1100 11 3030 8282 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 www.samsung.com MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) www.samsung.com PANAMA 800-7267 www.samsung.com/latin (Spanish) www.samsung.com/latin_en (English) PHILIPPINES 1-800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for PLDT 1-800-3-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Digitel 1-800-8-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Globe 02-5805777 www.samsung.com SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com SOUTH AFRICA 0860-SAMSUNG(726-7864 ) www.samsung.com U.K 0330 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com GERMANY 0180 5 SAMSUNG bzw.0180 5 7267864* (*0,14 €/Min. aus dem dt. Festnetz, aus dem Mobilfunk max. 0,42 €/Min.) www.samsung.com FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com KUWAIT 183-2255 www.samsung.com/ae (English) www.samsung.com/ae_ar (Arabic) Morocco 080 100 2255 www.samsung.com NIGERIA 0800-726-7864 www.samsung.com Saudi Arabia 9200-21230 www.samsung.com/ae (English) www.samsung.com/ae_ar (Arabic) CYPRUS 8009 4000 only from landline (+30) 210 6897691 from mobile and land line www.samsung.com ▶ English ❑ Using the INFO button (Now & Next guide) The display identifies the current channel and the status of certain audio-video settings. The Now & Next guide shows daily TV programme information for each channel according to the broadcasting time. N When you press the a (Information) button, you can see the details of the programme. ● Scroll ◄, ► to view information for a desired programme while watching the current channel. ● Scroll ▲, ▼ to view information for other channels. If you want to move to the currently selected channel, press the ENTERE button. Channel Setting◀ ▶ ❑ Using Channel menu O MENUm → Support → Contents Home → ENTERE Press the CONTENT button to select the desired menu. Each screen will be displayed. ■ Channel List You can view channel information, All, TV, Radio, Data/Other, Analogue or Favourites 1-5. N When you press the CH LIST button on the remote control, Channel List screen will be displayed at once. Channel List Guide AllShare Play Schedule Manager Explore 3D Contents Home R Return * The displayed image may differ depending on the model. English◀ ▶ ● All: Shows all currently available channels. ● TV: Shows all currently available TV channels. ● Radio: Shows all currently radio channels. ● Data/Other: Shows all currently available MHP or other channels. ● Analogue: Shows all currently available analogue channels. ● Favourites 1-5: Shows all favourite channels. N If you want to view favourite channels you added, press the CH LIST button and use L (Ch. Mode) button to move Favourites 1-5. English◀ ▶ N Using the control buttons with the Channel List. ● T (Tools): Displays the option menu. ● L (Ch. Mode / Channel): Move to the All, TV, Radio, Data/Other, Analogue or Favourites 1-5. N When you select the Programme View in T (Tools) menu, you can move to other channels using L (Channel) button. ● E (Watch / Information): Watches the channel you selected. / Displays details of the selected programme. ● k (Page): Move to next or previous page. ● R (Return): Move to the previous step. English◀ ▶ How to use Schedule Viewing in Channel List (digital channels only) When you set the Schedule Viewing in Channel List, you can only set the programme in Programme View. 1. Press the CH LIST button, then select a desired digital channel. 2. Press TOOLS button, and then select the Programme View. The programme list for that channel appears. 3. Press the ▲ / ▼ buttons to select the desired programme, then press the ENTERE (Information) or INFO button. 4. Select Schedule Viewing, then press the ENTERE button when done. N If you want to cancel Schedule Viewing, follow steps 1 through 3. Select Cancel schedule. English◀ ▶ Set each channel using the Using Option Menu tChannel List menu options (Programme View, Edit Favourites, Lock/Unlock, Edit Channel Name, Edit Channel Number, Delete, Information, Sort, Change Aerial, Edit Mode). Option menu items may differ depending on the channel status. 1. Select a channel and press the TOOLS button. 2. Select a function and change its settings. English◀ ▶ ● Programme View: Displays the programme when digital channel is selected. ● Edit Favourites: Set channels you watch frequently as favourites. Add or delete the selected channel in Favourites 1-5. 1. Select the Edit Favourites, then press the ENTERE button. 2. Press the ENTERE button to select Favourites 1-5, then press the OK button. N One favourite channel can be added in several of favourites among Favourites 1-5. English◀ ▶ ● Lock/Unlock: Lock a channel so that the channel cannot be selected and viewed. N This function is available only when the Channel Lock is set to On. N The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4-digit PIN. Change the PIN using the Change PIN option. ● Edit Channel Name (analogue channels only): Assign your own channel name. English◀ ▶ ● Edit Channel Number: Edit the number by pressing the number buttons desired. N Some area may not be able to support Edit Channel Name and Edit Channel Number function. ● Delete: You can delete a channel to display the channels you want. ● Information: Displays details of the selected programme. ● Sort (digital channels only): Changes the list ordered by channel number or channel name. ● Change Aerial: Switches to Air or Cable. English◀ ▶ ● Edit Mode: You can select desired channels and edit it. Using Option Menu t Set each channel using the menu options (Edit Favourites, Lock/Unlock, Delete, Information, Deselect, Select All). 1. Press the TOOLS button in Channel List screen, then select the Edit Mode. A check box appears to the left of the channel. 2. Press the ▲/▼ buttons to select the desired channel, then press the ENTERE button. The (c) mark indicates the channel you’ve selected. N You can select more than one channel. N Press the ENTERE again to deselect the channel. 3. Press the TOOLS button, then select a function and change its settings. English◀ ▶ ● Edit Favourites: Set the selected channels you watch frequently as favourites. N The Edit Favourites screen has five groups (Favourites 1, Favourites 2, etc.). You can add a favourite channel to any one of the groups. Press the ▲/▼ buttons to select a group. ● Lock/Unlock: Lock a channel so that the channel cannot be selected and viewed. N This function is available only when the Channel Lock is set to On. N The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4-digit PIN. Change the PIN using the Change PIN option. ● Delete: You can delete a channel to display the channels you want. ● Information: Displays details of the selected programme. ● Deselect: Deselect the selected channels. ● Select All: Select all the channels in the channel list. English◀ ▶ ■ Guide The EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) information is provided by broadcasters. Using programme schedules provided by broadcasters, you can specify programmes you want to watch in advance so that the channel automatically changes to the selected programme channel at the specified time. Programme entries may appear blank or out of date depending on a channel status. Die Musik-Show DTV Air 825 NDR FERNSEHEN 19:15 - 20:40 Dani is devastated when scot makes clear his views ... 825 NDR FERNSEHEN 18:15 Sat 1 May Channel View - All Today ▲ 821 Kanal 5 822 M6 823 MDR FERNSEHEN 824 Mediashopping 825 NDR FERNSEHEN ▼ 826 NT1 20:00 20:30 21:00 21:30 No Information No Information No Information Musik fur Sie MD... Ein Schloss am ... No Information a Sche. Mgr b -24 Hours { +24 Hours } Ch. Mode `Information k Page E Schedule 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Guide Die Musik-Show Die NDR Quizshow Sportclub live * The displayed image may differ depending on the model. English◀ ▶ 1 a Red (Sche. Mgr): Moves to the reserved programmes in Sche. Mgr. 2 b Green (-24 Hours): Viewing the list of programmes to be broadcasted before 24 hours. 3 { Yellow (+24 Hours): Viewing the list of programmes to be broadcasted after 24 hours. 4 } Blue (Ch. Mode): Select the type of channels you want to display on the Channel List window. (All, TV, Radio, Data/Other, Favourites 1-5) English◀ ▶ 5 `(Information): Displays details of the selected programme. 6 k (Page): Move to previous or next page. 7 E (Watch / Schedule) ● When selecting the current programme, you can watch the selected programme. ● When selecting the future programme, you can reserve to watch the selected programme. To cancel the schedule, press the ENTERE button again and select Cancel schedule. English◀ ▶ ■ Schedule Manager You can set a desired channel to be displayed automatically at the intended time. In addition, you can view, modify or delete a channel you have reserved to watch. Set the current time first to use this function. Set each channel using the menu options ( Using Option Menu t Cancel schedule, Edit Schedule, Schedule manually, View Guide). 1. Press the TOOLS button to select the Schedule manually. N You can press the a (Schedule manually) directly on the Schedule Manager screen. 2. Press the ◄/►/▲/▼ or number buttons to set the Aerial, Channel, Repeat, Date, Start Time. ● Aerial: Select the desired broadcasting signal. ● Channel: Select the desired channel. English◀ ▶ ● Repeat: Select Once, Manual, Sat~Sun, Mon~Fri or Everyday to set at your convenience. If you select Manual, you can set the day you want. N The (c) mark indicates the day you’ve selected. ● Date: You can set the desired date. N It is available when you select Once in Repeat. ● Start Time: You can set the start time you want. N If you want to edit or cancel the schedule, select the reserved schedule on the Reserved Programmes. Press the TOOLS button, then select the Edit Schedule or Cancel schedule. N If you select the View Guide, you can see the Guide screen. English◀ ▶ ❑ Retuning Channels ■ O Aerial (Air / Cable) MENUm → Channel t→ Aerial → ENTERE Before your television can begin memorising the available channels, you must specify the type of signal source that is connected to the TV (i.e. an Air or Cable system). English◀ ▶ ■ Country (depending on the country) O MENUm → Channel → Country → ENTERE The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. ● Digital Channel: Change the country for digital channels. ● Analogue Channel: Change the country for analogue channels. English◀ ▶ ■ Auto Tuning (depending on the country) O MENUm → Channel → Auto Tuning → ENTERE Scans for a channel automatically and stores in the TV. N Automatically allocated programme numbers may not correspond to actual or desired programme numbers. If a channel is locked, the PIN input window appears. ● Auto Tuning Air / Cable: Select the aerial source to memorise. Digital & Analogue / Digital / Analogue: Select the channel source to memorise. English◀ ▶ When Aerial Source is set to Air or Cable: When selecting Cable → Digital & Analogue or Digital: Provide a value to scan for cable channels. – Operator Selection (depending on the country): Selects a provider of cable services. – Search Mode (Full / Network / Quick): Scans for all channels with active broadcast stations and stores them in the TV. N If you select Quick, you can set up the Network, Network ID, Frequency, Modulation and Symbol Rate manually by pressing the button on the remote control. – Network (Auto / Manual): Selects the Network ID setting mode among Auto or Manual. – Network ID: When Network is Manual, you can set up Network ID using the numeric buttons. English◀ ▶ – Frequency: Displays the frequency for the channel. (differs in each country) – Modulation: Displays available modulation values. – Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates. ● Cable Search Option (depending on the country & cable channels only) Sets additional search options such as the frequency and symbol rate for a cable network search. Start Frequency / Stop Frequency: Set the start or stop frequency (differs in each country). Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates. Modulation: Displays available modulation values. English◀ ▶ ■ Manual Tuning O MENUm → Channel → Manual Tuning → ENTERE Scans for a channel manually and stores in the TV. N If a channel is locked, the PIN input window appears. N According to the channel source, Manual Tuning may be supported. When Aerial Source is set to Air or Cable: ● Digital Channel Tuning: Scans for a digital channel manually and stores in the TV. Press the New button to search the digital channels. When scanning has finished, a channel is updated in the channel list. – When selecting Aerial → Air: Channel, Frequency, Bandwidth – When selecting Aerial → Cable: Frequency, Modulation, Symbol Rate English◀ ▶ ● Analogue Channel Tuning: Scans for an analogue channel. Press the New button to search the channels by adjusting the Programme, Colour System, Sound System, Channel, Search. N Channel mode – P (programme mode): When tuning is complete, the broadcasting stations in your area have been assigned to the position numbers from P0 to P99. You can select a channel by entering the position number in this mode. – C (aerial channel mode) / S (cable channel mode): These two modes allow you to select a channel by entering the assigned number for each aerial broadcasting station or cable channel. English◀ ▶ ■ Transfer Channel List (depending on the country) O MENUm → Channel → Transfer Channel List → ENTERE Imports or exports the channel map. You should connect a USB storage to use this function. N The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number. N The file system supports NTFS (Read Only), FAT16 and FAT32. ● Import from USB: Import channel list from USB. ● Export to USB: Export channel list to USB. English◀ ▶ ■ Fine Tune (analogue channels only) O MENUm → Channel → Fine Tune → ENTERE If the signal is weak or distorted, fine tune the channel manually. N Fine tuned channels are marked with an asterisk “*”. N To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset. English◀ ▶ ■ Edit Channel Number (Disable / Enable) (depending on the country) O MENUm → Channel → Edit Channel Number → ENTERE Use this to change channel number. When channel number is changed, channel information is not updated automatically. English◀ ▶ ❑ Changing the Preset Picture Mode O MENUm → Picture → Picture Mode → ENTERE ■ Select your preferred picture type. Picture Mode t N When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to the Entertain and Standard. ● Dynamic: Suitable for a bright room. ● Standard: Suitable for a normal environment. ● Natural for LED 6 series : Suitable for reducing eye strain. ● Movie: Suitable for watching movies in a dark room. ● Entertain: Suitable for watching movies and games. N It is only available when connecting a PC. Basic Features English◀ ▶ ❑ Adjusting Picture Settings ■ Samsung MagicAngle for LED 4 series 22" O MENUm → Picture → Samsung MagicAngle → ENTERE Adjust screen viewing Angle to optimize screen quality according to your viewing position. ● Samsung MagicAngle: When viewing the screen at an angle from below or above by setting the appropriate mode for each position, you can obtain a similar picture quality as viewing the screen directly from the front. Off: Select when viewing from the front position. Lean Back Mode: Select when viewing from a slightly lower position. Standing Mode: Select when viewing from the upper position. ● Mode: Adjust screen viewing angle. N When Samsung MagicAngle is set to Lean Back Mode or Standing Mode, Gamma is not available. English◀ ▶ ■ Backlight / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R) Your television has several setting options for picture quality control. N NOTE ● In analogue TV, Ext., AV modes of the PAL system, the Tint (G/R) function is not available. LED 4 series do not support AV, Component mode ● When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to Backlight, Contrast, Brightness and Sharpness. ● Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to the TV. ● Lowering picture brightness reduces power consumption. English◀ ▶ ■ Screen Adjustment O MENUm → Picture → Screen Adjustment → ENTERE Set the various picture options such as picture size and aspect ratio. ● Picture Size: Your cable box/satellite receiver may have its own set of screen sizes as well. However, we highly recommend you use 16:9 mode most of the time. Auto Wide: Automatically adjusts the picture size to the 16:9 aspect ratio. 16:9: Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode. Wide Zoom: Magnifies the picture size more than 4:3. N Adjusts the Position by using ▲, ▼ buttons. English◀ ▶ Zoom: Magnifies the 16:9 wide pictures vertically to fit the screen size. N Adjusts the Zoom or Position by using ▲, ▼ button. 4:3: Sets the picture to basic (4:3) mode. N Do not watch in 4:3 format for a long time. Traces of borders displayed on the left, right and centre of the screen may cause image retention (screen burn) which are not covered by the warranty. Screen Fit: Displays the full image without any cut-off when HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) or Component (1080i / 1080p) signals are inputted. LED 4 series do not support AV, Component mode English◀ ▶ Smart View 1 for LED 6 series : Reduces original screen by 50%. Smart View 2 for LED 6 series : Reduces original screen by 25%. N NOTE ● Smart View 1 is enabled only in HDMI mode. ● Smart View 2 is enabled only in DTV and HDMI modes. ● The picture size can vary depending on the input resolution when content is played using Videos under AllShare Play. ● Position: Adjust the picture position. It is only available in Screen Fit or Wide Zoom. English◀ ▶ ● Zoom/Position: Adjust the picture size and position. It is only available in Zoom. N NOTE ● After selecting Screen Fit in HDMI (1080i / 1080p) or Component (1080i / 1080p) mode, you may need to centre the picture LED 4 series do not support AV, Component mode : 1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Position. 2. Press the ENTERE button. 3. Press the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button to move the picture. ● Depending on the input source, the picture size options may vary. ● If you want to reset the position you adjusted, select Reset in the Position screen. The picture will be set to its default position. English◀ ▶ ● The available items may differ depending on the selected mode. ● When connecting a PC, only 16:9 and 4:3 modes can be adjusted. ● Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to an input on the TV. ● If you use the Screen Fit function with HDMI 720p input, 1 line will be cut at the top, bottom, left and right as in the overscan function. ● 4:3 Screen Size (16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3): Available only when picture size is set to Auto Wide. You can determine the desired picture size at the 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) size or the original size. Each European country requires different picture size. English◀ ▶ ❑ Changing the Picture Options ■ Advanced Settings O MENUm → Picture → Advanced Settings → ENTERE (available in Standard / Movie mode) You can adjust the detailed setting for the screen including colour and contrast. N When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to Gamma and White Balance. English◀ ▶ ● Dynamic Contrast (Off / Low / Medium / High): Adjust the screen contrast. ● Black Tone (Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest): Select the black level to adjust the screen depth. ● Flesh Tone: Adjust the flesh tone colour. Advanced Settings Dynamic Contrast Medium Black Tone Off Flesh Tone 0 RGB Only Mode Off Colour Space Native White Balance Gamma 0 ● RGB Only Mode (Off / Red / Green / Blue): Displays the Red, Green and Blue colour for making fine adjustments to the hue and saturation. ● Colour Space (Auto / Native): Adjust the range of colours available to create the image. English◀ ▶ ● White Balance: Adjust the colour temperature for a more natural picture. R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset: Adjust each colour’s (red, green, blue) darkness. R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Adjust each colour’s (red, green, blue) brightness. Reset: Resets the White Balance to its default settings. ● Gamma: Adjust the primary colour intensity. ● Motion Lighting (Off / On): Reduce power consumption by brightness control adapted motion. N This function is not supported in 3D mode. for LED 6 series N Only available in Standard mode. N When changing a setting value of Backlight, Brightness or Contrast, Motion Lighting will be set to Off. English◀ ▶ ■ Picture Options O MENUm → Picture → Picture Options → ENTERE N When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to the Colour Tone. ● Colour Tone (Cool / Standard / Warm1 / Warm2) N Warm1 or Warm2 will be deactivated when the picture mode is Dynamic. N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device connected to an input on the TV. English◀ ▶ ● Digital Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto / Auto Visualisation): If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak, you can activate the Digital Noise Filter feature to reduce any static and ghosting that may appear on the screen. N When the signal is weak, try other options until the best picture is displayed. Auto Visualisation: When changing analogue channels, displays signal strength. N Only available for analogue channels. N When the INFO button is pressed, the signal strength bar is displayed. N When bar is green, you are receiving the best possible signal. ● MPEG Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto): Reduces MPEG noise to provide improved picture quality. English◀ ▶ ● HDMI Black Level (Low / Normal): Selects the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth. N Available only in HDMI mode (RGB signals). ● Film Mode (Off / Auto1 / Auto2): Sets the TV to automatically sense and process film signals from all sources and adjust the picture for optimum quality. N Available in TV mode, AV, Component (480i / 1080i) and HDMI (1080i). LED 4 series do not support AV, Component mode N If the screen does not seem natural, change its option to Off / Auto1 / Auto2 in Film Mode. English◀ ▶ ● Motion Plus (Off / Clear / Standard / Smooth / Custom / Demo) for LED 6 series : Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clearer picture. N The Info screen on your TV displays the resolution and frequency of the incoming signal (60Hz), but not the frequency the TV is generating for the image it is displaying by using Motion Plus function. N If noise occurs on the screen, please set up the Motion Plus to Off. If Motion Plus is Custom, you can set up the Blur Reduction, Judder Reduction or Reset manually. N If Motion Plus is Demo, you can compare the difference of on and off modes. English◀ ▶ Blur Reduction: Adjusts the blur reduction level from video sources. Judder Reduction: Adjusts the judder reduction level from video sources when playing films. Reset: Reset the custom settings. ● LED Motion Plus (Off / On) for LED 6 series : Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clear picture. N It will be deactivated when the picture mode is set to Natural. N The screen may become slightly darker when you play LED Motion Plus. English◀ ▶ ■ Reset Picture (Yes / No) O MENUm → Picture → Reset Picture → ENTERE Resets your current picture mode to its default settings. English◀ ▶ ❑ Changing the Preset Sound Mode ■ O Sound Mode MENUm → Sound t→ Sound Mode → ENTERE ● Standard: Selects the normal sound mode. ● Music: Emphasizes music over voices. ● Movie: Provides the best sound for movies. ● Clear Voice: Emphasizes voices over other sounds. ● Amplify: Increase the intensity of high-frequency sound to allow a better listening experience for the hearing impaired. N If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, Sound Mode is disabled. for LED 6 series English◀ ▶ ❑ Adjusting Sound Settings ■ Sound Effect O MENUm → Sound → Sound Effect → ENTERE Use the up and down arrow keys to select an option, and then press ENTERE. ● (standard sound mode only) SRS TruSurround HD (Off / On) t This function provides a virtual 5.1 channel surround sound experience through a pair of speakers using HRTF (Head Related Transfer Function) technology. English◀ ▶ ● SRS TruDialog (Off / On) (standard sound mode only) This function allows you to increase the intensity of a voice over background music or sound effects so that dialogue can be heard more clearly. ● Equaliser (standard sound mode only) Use Equaliser to customize sound setting for each speaker. Balance: Adjusts the balance between the right and left speaker. 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (Bandwidth Adjustment): Adjusts the level of specific bandwidth frequencies. Reset: Resets the equaliser to its default settings. N If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, Sound Effect is disabled. for LED 6 series English◀ ▶ ■ Broadcast Audio Options O MENUm → Sound → Broadcast Audio Options → ENTERE ● (digital channels only) Audio Language t Change the default value for audio languages. N The available language may differ depending on the broadcast. ● Audio Format (digital channels only) When sound is emitted from both the main speaker and the audio receiver, a sound echo may occur due to the decoding speed difference between the main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, use the TV Speaker function. N Audio Format option may differ depending on the broadcast. 5.1ch Dolby digital sound is only available when connecting an external speaker through an optical cable. LED 4 series do not support English◀ ▶ ● Audio Description (not available in all locations) (digital channels only) This function handles the Audio Stream for the AD (Audio Description) which is sent along with the Main audio from the broadcaster. Audio Description (Off / On): Turn the audio description function on or off. Volume: Adjust the audio description volume. English◀ ▶ ■ Additional Settings O MENUm → Sound → Additional Settings → ENTERE ● DTV Audio Level (MPEG / HE-AAC) (digital channels only): This function allows you to reduce the disparity of a voice signal (which is one of the signals received during a digital TV broadcast) to a desired level. N According to the type of broadcast signal, MPEG / HE-AAC can be adjusted between -10dB and 0dB. N To increase or decrease the volume, adjust between the range 0 and -10 respectively. English◀ ▶ ● SPDIF Output for LED 6 series : SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital InterFace) is used to provide digital sound, reducing interference going to speakers and various digital devices such as a DVD player. Audio Format: You can select the Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format. The available Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format may differ depending on the input source. N By connecting to 5.1ch speakers in a Dolby Digital setup, maximize your interactive 3D sound experience. Audio Delay: Correct audio-video sync problems, when watching TV or video, and when listening to digital audio output using an external device such as an AV receiver (0ms ~ 250ms). English◀ ▶ ● Dolby Digital Comp (Line / RF): This function minimizes signal disparity between a dolby digital signal and a voice signal (i.e. MPEG Audio, HE-AAC, ATV Sound). N Select Line to obtain dynamic sound, and RF to reduce the difference between loud and soft sounds at night time. Line: Set the output level for signals greater or less than -31dB (reference) to either -20dB or -31dB. RF: Set the output level for signals greater or less than -20dB (reference) to either -10dB or -20dB. English◀ ▶ ■ Speaker Settings O MENUm → Sound → Speaker Settings → ENTERE ● Speaker Select (External Speaker / TV Speaker) for LED 6 series A sound echo may occur due to a difference in decoding speed between the main speaker and the audio receiver. In this case, set the TV to External Speaker. N When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the volume and MUTE buttons will not operate and the sound settings will be limited. N When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker. ● TV Speaker: Off, External Speaker: On N When Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker. ● TV Speaker: On, External Speaker: On N If there is no video signal, both speakers will be mute. English◀ ▶ ● Auto Volume (Off / Normal / Night) To equalize the volume level on each channel, set to Normal. Night: This mode provides an improved sound experience compared to Normal mode, making almost no noise. It is useful at night. N To use the volume control on the source device connected to the TV, set Auto Volume to Off on the TV. Otherwise, a change to the volume control of the source device may not be applied. English◀ ▶ ■ Reset Sound (Yes / No) O MENUm → Sound → Reset Sound → ENTERE Reset all sound settings to the factory defaults. English◀ ▶ ❑ Selecting the Sound Mode When you set to Dual I-II, the current sound mode is displayed on the screen. t Audio Type Dual I-II Default A2 Stereo Mono Mono Automatic change Stereo Stereo ↔ Mono Dual Dual I ↔ Dual II Dual I NICAM Stereo Mono Mono Automatic change Stereo Mono ↔ Stereo Dual Mono → Dual I  Dual II  Dual I N If the stereo signal is weak and an automatic switching, occurs, then switch to the mono. N Only activated in stereo sound signal. N Only available when the Source is set to TV. English◀ ▶ Preference Features ❑ Connecting to the Network for LED 6 series ■ Wired Network Connection You can attach your TV to your LAN using cable in three ways: English◀ ▶ ● You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV to an external modem using a LAN cable. See the diagram below. * It may differ depending on the model. The Modem Port on the Wall External Modem (ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV) TV Rear Panel Modem Cable LAN Cable English◀ ▶ ● You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV to a IP Sharer which is connected to an external modem. Use LAN cable for the connection. See the diagram below. * It may differ depending on the model. The Modem Port on the Wall External Modem (ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV) IP Sharer (having DHCP server) TV Rear Panel Modem Cable LAN Cable LAN Cable English◀ ▶ ● Depending on how your network is configured, you may be able to attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV directly to a network wall outlet using a LAN cable. See the diagram below. Note that the wall outlet is attached to a modem or router elsewhere in your house. * It may differ depending on the The LAN Port on the Wall model. TV Rear Panel LAN Cable ● If your network requires a Dynamic IP address, you should use an ADSL modem or router that supports Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). English◀ ▶ Modems and routers that support DHCP automatically provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values your TV needs to access the Internet so you do not have to enter them manually. Most home networks use a Dynamic IP address. Some networks require a Static IP address. If your network requires a Static IP address, you must enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values manually on your TV’s Cable Setup Screen when you set up the network connection. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). If you have a Windows computer, you can also get these values through your computer. N You can use ADSL modems that support DHCP if your network requires a Static IP address. ADSL modems that support DHCP also let you use Static IP addresses. N It is not supported when the network speed is below or equal to 10Mbps. English◀ ▶ ■ Wireless Network Connection To connect your TV to your network wireless, you need a wireless router or modem and a Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter (WIS12ABGNX, WIS09ABGNX), which you connect to your TV’s back or side panel USB port. See the illustration below. LAN Cable Wireless IP sharer (Wireless router having DHCP Server) Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter TV Side Panel The LAN Port on the Wall English◀ ▶ Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter is sold separately and is offered by select retailers and Ecommerce sites. Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter supports the IEEE 802.11a/b/g and n communication protocols. Samsung recommends using IEEE 802.11n. When you play video over a network connection, the video may not be played smoothly. N NOTE ● You must use the “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter” (WIS12ABGNX, WIS09ABGNX) to use a wireless network. ● Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter and the USB extension Cable are sold separately and are offered by select retailers and Ecommerce sites. English◀ ▶ ● To use a wireless network, your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer (either a router or a modem). If the wireless IP sharer supports DHCP, your TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network. ● Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer is currently being used by another device nearby, this will result in interference and communication failure. ● If you apply a security system other than the systems listed below, it will not work with the TV. English◀ ▶ ● If HIGH PURE THROUGHPUT (Greenfield) 802.11n mode is selected and the Encryption type is set to WEP or TKIP for your wireless router, Samsung TVs will not support a connection in compliance with new Wi-Fi certification specifications. ● If your wireless router supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can connect to the network via PBC (Push Button Configuration) or PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either mode. ● If your router, modem, or device is not certified, it may not connect to the TV via the “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter”. ● Ensure the TV is turned off before you connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. English◀ ▶ ● Connection Methods: You can setup the wireless network connection like below. – Auto Setup (Using the Auto Network Search function) – Manual Setup – WPS(PBC) ● The Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter may not be recognized when using a connection via a USB hub or via a USB extension cable other than the cable supplied. English◀ ▶ Notice The picture may appear corrupted or have static for some channels when the TV is connected to the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. In such a case, establish a connection using one of the following methods or connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter using a USB cable in a place that is not affected by radio interference. Method 1 Connect using the USB right angle adapter. To connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter using the USB right angle adapter, follow these steps: 1. Connect the USB right angle adapter to the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. 2. Connect the other end of the right angle adapter to the USB port. * The position of port may differ depending on the model. English◀ ▶ Method 2 Connect via an extension cable To reconnect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter using the extension cable, follow these steps: 1. Connect the extension cable to the USB port. 2. Connect the extension cable and Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. 3. Attach the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter to the back of the TV near the top, using doublesided adhesive tape. N The Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter should be installed in an interference-free area in order to avoid interference between the adapter and tuner. or * The position of port may differ depending on the model. English◀ ▶ ■ Network Settings O MENUm → Network → Network Settings → ENTERE You can set the wired or wireless network connection. N For detailed settings for wired network, refer to the "Setting the Wired Network", and for detailed settings for wireless network, refer to the "Setting the Wireless Network" in this manual. English◀ ▶ ■ Network Status O MENUm → Network → Network Status → ENTERE You can check the current network and Internet status. English◀ ▶ ❑ Setting the Wired Network for LED 6 series ■ Wired Network Setup (Auto) N When connecting the LAN Cable, the screen pop-up appears directly to set wired network. Use the Automatic Network Setup when connecting your TV to a network that supports DHCP. To set up your TV’s cable network connection automatically, follow these steps: English◀ ▶ How to set up automatically 1. Go to Network Settings screen. 2. Select Start. 3. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done. Network Settings Network cable connected. Press Start to configure your wired network settings. If you want to connect to your wireless network, plug in a Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. Start Cancel N If it fails to set automatically, check the connection of LAN port. N If you cannot find network connection values or if you want to set connection manually, set it to Manual. Refer to following “How to set up manually”. English◀ ▶ ■ Wired Network Setup (Manual) Use the Manual Network Setup when connecting your TV to a network that requires a Static IP address. Getting the Network Connection Values To get the Network connection values on most Windows computers, follow these steps: 1. Right click the Network icon on the bottom right of the screen. 2. In the pop-up menu that appears, click Status. 3. On the dialogue that appears, click the Support tab. 4. On the Support Tab, click the Details button. The Network connection values are displayed. English◀ ▶ How to set up manually To set up your TV’s cable network connection manually, follow these steps: 1. Follow Steps 1 through 2 in the “How to set up automatically” procedure. 2. Select the IP Settings on network connection screen. 3. Set IP setting to Enter manually. 4. Press the ▼ button to go to the first entry field. IP Settings R Return OK IP setting Enter manually IP Address 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Subnet Mask 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Gateway 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 DNS setting Enter manually DNS Server 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 5. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server values. Use the number buttons to enter numbers and the arrow buttons to move from one entry field to another. 6. When done, select the OK. 7. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done. English◀ ▶ The check list for wired network connection failure When wired network connection failed, try to apply the following information to each issue. Issues Solutions and Explanations No network cable found. • Check that your network cable is plugged in. • If it is connected, make sure that the router is turned on; if it is on, try turning it off and on again. IP auto setting failed. Try the following to set your IP address automatically or set your IP address manually by selecting IP Settings. • Ensure DHCP server is enabled on router and unplug and re-plug-in the router. • Contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations Unable to connect to the network. • Check if your IP address is set correctly in IP Settings. • Contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. Connected to your local network, but cannot connect to the Internet. • Check your Internet LAN cable is connected correctly to LAN port of router. • Check the DNS settings in IP Settings. • If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider to access the Internet. Network setup complete, but cannot connect to the Internet. • Confirm that your router is connected to the Internet. • If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider to access the Internet. English◀ ▶ ❑ Setting the Wireless Network for LED 6 series ■ Wireless Network Setup (Auto) Most wireless networks have an optional security system that requires devices that access the network to transmit an encrypted security code called an Access or Security Key. The Security Key is based on a Pass Phrase, typically a word or a series of letters and numbers of a specified length you were asked to enter when you set up wireless security for your wireless network. If you use this method of setting up the network connection, and have a Security Key for your wireless network, you will have to enter the Pass Phrase during the setup process. N When connecting Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter, the screen pop-up appears directly to set wireless network. English◀ ▶ How to set up automatically 1. Go to Network Settings screen. 2. Select Start. 3. The Network function searches for available wireless networks. When done, it displays a list of the available networks. Network Settings Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter connected. Press Start to configure your wireless network settings. If you want to connect to your wired network, plug in a network cable. Start Cancel 4. In the list of networks, press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a network, and then press ENTERE button. N If the wireless router is set to Hidden (Invisible), you have to select Add Network and enter the correct network name and Security key to establish the connection. English◀ ▶ 5. If the Security screen pop-up appears, go to step 6. If you select the wireless router which does not have wireless security, go to step 7. 6. To set wireless security for the router, enter the Security key(Security or PIN). N When you enter the Security key (Security or PIN), use ▲/▼/◄ /► buttons to select number/characters. Press ENTERE to enter the characters. N You should be able to find the Pass Phrase on one of the set up screens you used to set up your router or modem. 7. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done. N If it fails to set Security key (Security or PIN), select Retry or IP Settings. N If you want to set connection manually, select the IP Settings. Refer to following “How to set up manually”. English◀ ▶ ■ Wireless Network Setup (Manual) Use the Manual Network Setup when connecting your TV to a network that requires a Static IP address. Getting the Network Connection Values To get the Network connection values on most Windows computers, follow these steps: 1. Right click the Network icon on the bottom right of the screen. 2. In the pop-up menu that appears, click Status. 3. On the dialogue that appears, click the Support tab. 4. On the Support Tab, click the Details button. The Network connection values are displayed. English◀ ▶ How to set up manually To set up your TV’s cable network connection manually, follow these steps: 1. Follow Steps 1 through 7 in the “How to set up automatically” procedure. 2. Select the IP Settings on network connection screen. 3. Set IP setting to Enter manually. 4. Press the ▼ button to go to the first entry field. 5. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server values. Use the number buttons to enter numbers and the arrow buttons to move from one entry field to another. 6. When done, select the OK. 7. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done. English◀ ▶ ■ Wireless Network Setup (WPS(PBC)) If your router has a WPS(PBC) button, follow these steps: 1. Go to Network Settings screen. 2. Select Start. 3. The Network function searches for available wireless networks. When done, it displays a list of the available networks. 4. Select the WPS(PBC). 5. Press the WPS(PBC) button on your router within 2 minutes. Your TV automatically acquires all the network setting values it needs and connects to your network. 6. The network connection screen appears, and network setting is done. English◀ ▶ The check list for wireless network connection failure When wireless network connection failed, try to apply the following information to each issue. Issues Solutions and Explanations Wireless network connection failed. • No wireless router selected. Go to Network Settings to select your router. • Samsung Wireless LAN adapter is required to use a wireless network. • Make sure the TV is connected to a wireless IP sharer (Router). IP auto setting failed. • Try the following to set your IP address automatically or set your IP address manually by selecting IP Settings. • Ensure DHCP server is enabled on router and unplug and re-plug-in the router. • Check if you need to enter a security key to use the router. • Contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations Unable to connect to wireless router. • Check that the router is turned on, and if it is on, try turning it off and on again. • Check if you need to enter a security key to use the router. Unable to connect to the network. • Check if your IP address is set correctly in IP Settings. • Check if you need to enter a security key to use the router. • Contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. Connected to your local network, but cannot connect to the Internet. • Check your Internet LAN cable is connected correctly to LAN port of router. • Check the DNS settings in IP Settings. • If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider to access the Internet. Network setup complete, but cannot connect to the Internet. • Confirm that your router is connected to the Internet. • If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider to access the Internet. English◀ ▶ If Your TV Fails to Connect to the Internet Your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet because your ISP has permanently registered the MAC address (a unique identifying number) of your PC or modem, which it then authenticates each time you connect to the Internet as a way of preventing unauthorized access. As your TV has a different MAC address, your ISP can not authenticate its MAC address, and your TV can not connect. To resolve this problem, ask your ISP about the procedures required to connect devices other than a PC (such as your TV) to the Internet. If your Internet service provider requires an ID or password to connect to the Internet, your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet. If this is the case, you must enter your ID or password when connecting to the Internet. The internet connection may fail because of a firewall problem. If this is the case, contact your Internet service provider. If you cannot connect to the Internet even after you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider, please contact Samsung Electronics. English◀ ▶ ❑ Managing the Network Connected Devices for LED 6 series ■ AllShare Settings O MENUm → Network → AllShare Settings → ENTERE Set whether to allow a network connected device like a smartphone or tablet to share content or control TV using an application downloaded on your mobile device. For details on set up options, refer to the "Using the DLNA Functions". English◀ ▶ ■ Device Name O MENUm → Network → Device Name → ENTERE Change the TV’s name by keying in a name manually. N A keyboard appears on the screen and you can key in a name for your TV manually using your remote control. For example, if you want to change the name to Samsung TV, press each character using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons, and then select Done. English◀ ▶ ❑ Executing initial setup ■ Setup O MENUm → System → Setup → ENTERE Configure the channels and the time when setting up the TV for the first time or when resetting the unit. N For the detailed information about setting Setup, refer to “Initial Setup” in User Manual. English◀ ▶ ❑ Setting the Time ■ Time O MENUm → System → Time → ENTERE The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button. ● Clock: Setting the clock is for using various timer features of the TV. N If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again. Clock Mode: Set up the current time manually or automatically. – Auto: Set the current time automatically using the time from a digital channel. N The aerial must be connected in order to set the time automatically. English◀ ▶ – Manual: Set the current time manually. N Depending on the broadcast station and signal, the auto time set up may not be correct. In this case, set the time manually. Clock Set: Set the Date and Time. N Available only when Clock Mode is set to Manual. N You can set the Date and Time directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. Time Zone (depending on the country): Select your time zone. N This function is only available when the Clock Mode is set to Auto. N When selecting Manual in Time Zone, GMT and DST will be activated. English◀ ▶ ❑ Using the Sleep Timer O MENUm → System → Time → Sleep Timer → ENTERE ● Sleep Timert: Automatically shuts off the TV after a preset period of time. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes). N To cancel Sleep Timer, select Off. English◀ ▶ ❑ Setting the On / Off Timer O MENUm → System → Time → On Timer Off Timer → ENTERE ● On Timer 1 / On Timer 2 / On Timer 3: Three different on timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first. – Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual to set at your convenience. If you select Manual, you can set up the day you want to activate the timer. N The c mark indicates the day you’ve selected. – Time: Set the hour and minute. – Volume: Set the desired volume level. English◀ ▶ – Source: To select the source of the content that will play when the TV turns on. You can: ● Select TV and have the TV display a specific air or cable channel. ● Select USB and have the TV play back photo or audio files from a USB device. ● Select a source on your TV that you have connected a set-top box to, and have the TV display a channel from the set-top box. N The USB device must be connected to your TV before you can select USB. English◀ ▶ N If you select a source other than TV or USB, you must: ● Have a cable or satellite set-top box attached to that source ● Set the set-top box to the channel you want to watch when the TV goes on ● Leave the set-top box turned on. N When you select a source other than TV or USB, the Aerial and Channel options will disappear. – Aerial (when the Source is set to TV): Select ATV or DTV. – Channel (when the Source is set to TV): Select the desired channel. English◀ ▶ – Music / Photo (when the Source is set to USB): Select a folder in the USB device containing music or photo files to be played when the TV is turned on automatically. N NOTE ● If there is no music file on the USB device or the folder containing a music file is not selected, the timer function does not operate correctly. ● When there is only one photo file in the USB device, the slide show will not play. ● If a folder name is too long, the folder cannot be selected. English◀ ▶ ● Each USB you use is assigned its own folder. When using more than one of the same type of USB, make sure the folders assigned to each USB have different names. ● It is recommended that you use a USB memory stick and a multi card reader when using On Timer. ● The On Timer function may not work with USB devices with a built-in battery, MP3 players, or PMPs made by some manufacturers because these devices take a long time to be recognized. English◀ ▶ ● Off Timer 1 / Off Timer 2 / Off Timer 3: Three different off timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first. Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual to set at your convenience. If you select Manual, you can set up the day you want to activate the timer. N The c mark indicates the day you’ve selected. Time: Set the hour and minute. English◀ ▶ ❑ Locking Programme ■ Security O MENUm → System → Security → ENTERE N The PIN input screen appears before the setup screen. N Enter your 4-digit PIN. Change the PIN using the Change PIN option. ● Channel Lock (Off / On): Lock channels in Channel menu to prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme. N Available only when the Source is set to TV. English◀ ▶ ● Programme Rating Lock (depending on the country): Prevent unauthorized users, such as children, from watching unsuitable programme with a userdefined 4-digit PIN code. If the selected channel is locked, the “\” symbol will be displayed. N The items of Programme Rating Lock differs depending on the country. ● Change PIN: Change your password required to set up the TV. English◀ ▶ ❑ Economical Solutions ■ Eco Solution O MENUm → System → Eco Solution → ENTERE ● Energy Saving (Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off)t: This adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to reduce power consumption. If you select Picture Off, the screen is turned off, but the sound remains on. Press any button except volume button to turn on the screen. English◀ ▶ ● Eco Sensor (Off / On) for LED 6 series : To enhance your power savings; the picture settings will automatically adapt to the light in the room. N If you adjust the Backlight, the Eco Sensor will be set to Off. Min. Backlight: When Eco Sensor is On, the minimum screen brightness can be adjusted manually. N If Eco Sensor is On, the display brightness may change (become slightly darker or brighter) depending on the surrounding light intensity. ● No Signal Power Off (Off / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min): To avoid unnecessary energy consumption, set how long you want the TV to remain on if it’s not receiving a signal. N Disabled when the PC is in power saving mode. ● Auto Power Off (Off / On): The TV will be automatically turned off when no user operation is received for 4 hours. N If the Auto Power Off option is set to Off, the TV will stay on even if no operations are performed on the TV. English◀ ▶ ❑ Other Features ■ Language O MENUm → System → Language → ENTERE ● Menu Language: Set the menu language. ● Teletext Language (depending on the country): Set a desired language for teletext. N English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast. ● Preferred Language (Primary Audio / Secondary Audio / Primary Subtitle / Secondary Subtitle / Primary Teletext / Secondary Teletext): Select a language, which will be the default language when a channel is selected. N Primary Teletext and Secondary Teletext may not be supported in some locations. English◀ ▶ ■ Subtitle O MENUm → System → Subtitle → ENTERE Use this menu to set the Subtitle mode. ● Subtitle (Off / On): Switches subtitles on or off. ● Subtitle Mode (Normal / Hearing Impaired): Sets the subtitle mode. ● Subtitle Language: Sets the subtitle language. N If the programme you are watching does not support the Hearing Impaired function, Normal automatically activates even if the Hearing Impaired mode is selected. N English is the default in cases where the selected language is unavailable in the broadcast. English◀ ▶ ■ Digital Text (Disable / Enable) (UK only) O MENUm → System → Digital Text → ENTERE If the programme broadcasts with digital text, this feature is enabled. N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group) An International standard for data encoding systems used in multimedia and hypermedia. This is at a higher level than the MPEG system which includesdata-linking hypermedia such as still images, character service, animation, graphic and video files as well as multimedia data. MHEG is user runtime interaction technology and is being applied to various fields including VOD (Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC (Electronic Commerce), teleeducation, tele-conferencing, digital libraries and network games. English◀ ▶ ■ Auto Protection Time O MENUm → System → Auto Protection Time → ENTERE ● Auto Protection Time (Off / 2 hours / 4 hours / 8 hours / 10 hours): If the screen remains idle with a still image for a certain period of time defined by the user, the screen saver is activated to prevent the formation of ghost images on the screen. English◀ ▶ ■ General O MENUm → System → General → ENTERE ● Game Mode (Off / On): When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation™ or Xbox™, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by selecting game mode. N NOTE ● Precautions and limitations for game mode – To disconnect the game console and connect another external device, set Game Mode to Off in the setup menu. – If you display the TV menu in Game Mode, the screen shakes slightly. English◀ ▶ ● Game Mode is not available in TV mode. ● After connecting the game console, set Game Mode to On. Unfortunately, you may notice reduced picture quality. ● If Game Mode is On: – Picture Mode is set to Standard and Sound Mode is set to Movie. ● Panel Lock (Off / On): Lock or unlock all the keys on the panel. ● Boot Logo (Off / On): Display Samsung logo when the TV is turned on. English◀ ▶ ■ DivX® Video On Demand O MENUm → System → DivX® Video On Demand → ENTERE Shows the registration code authorized for the TV. If you connect to the DivX web site and register with 10-digit registration code, you can download the VOD activation file. Once you play it using Videos, the registration is completed. N For more information on DivX® VOD, visit http://vod.divx.com. English◀ ▶ ■ Common Interface O MENUm → System → Common Interface → ENTERE ● CI Menu: This enables the user to select from the CAM-provided menu. Select the CI Menu based on the menu PC Card. ● CAM video transcoding: You can configure the setting to transcode the video codec from the CAM automatically. Turn it Off if you do not want to use it. N You must use a CAM that supports transcoding the video codec. English◀ ▶ ● Application Info: View information on the CAM inserted into the CI slot and on the “CI or CI+ CARD” which is inserted into the CAM. You can install the CAM anytime whether the TV is on or off. 1. Purchase a CI CAM module at your nearest dealer or by phone. 2. Firmly insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the CAM in the direction of the arrow. 3. Insert the CAM with the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the common interface slot, in the direction of the arrow so that it aligns parallel with the slot. 4. Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal channel. English◀ ▶ ❑ Support Menu ■ e-Manual O MENUm → Support → e-Manual → ENTERE You can read the introduction and instructions about the TV features stored in your TV. N For the detailed information about e-Manual Screen, refer to “How to use the e-Manual” in User Manual. English◀ ▶ ■ Self Diagnosis O MENUm → Support → Self Diagnosis → ENTERE N Self Diagnosis might take few seconds, this is part of the normal operation of the TV. ● Picture Test (Yes / No): Use to check for picture problems. ● Sound Test (Yes / No): Use the built-in melody sound to check for sound problems. N If you hear no sound from the TV’s speakers, before performing the sound test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker in the Sound menu. for LED 6 series N The melody will be heard during the test even if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing the MUTE button. for LED 6 series English◀ ▶ ● Signal Information (digital channels only): HDTV channel’s reception quality is either perfect or the channels are unavailable. Adjust your aerial to increase signal strength. ● Reset: Reset all settings to the factory defaults except network settings. N The PIN input screen appears before the setup screen. N Enter your 4-digit PIN. Change the PIN using the Change PIN option. ● Troubleshooting: If the TV seems to have a problem, refer to this description. N If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, contact the Samsung customer service centre. English◀ ▶ ■ Software Update O MENUm → Support → Software Update → ENTERE Software Update can be performed by downloading the latest firmware from “www.samsung.com” to a USB memory device. Current Version-the software already installed in the TV. Installing the Latest Version ● By USB: Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade file, downloaded from “www.samsung.com” into the TV. Please be careful not to disconnect the power or remove the USB drive until upgrades are complete. The TV will be turned off and on automatically after completing the firmware upgrade. When software is upgraded, video and audio settings you have made will return to their default settings. We advise you to write down your settings so that you can easily reset them after the upgrade. English◀ ▶ ● Online for LED 6 series : Upgrade the software using the Internet. N First, configure your network. For detailed procedures on using the Network Setup, refer to the “Network Settings” instructions. N If the internet connection doesn’t operate properly, the connection may be broken. Please retry downloading. If the problem persists, download by USB and upgrade. English◀ ▶ ● By Channel: Upgrade the software using the broadcasting signal. N If the function is selected during the software transmission period, software will be automatically searched and downloaded. N The time required to download the software is determined by the signal status. ● Alternative Software: Replace the current software with the alternative. ● Standby Mode Upgrade (Off / 1 hour later / 2 hours later / 00:00 / 02:00 / 12:00 / 14:00): A manual upgrade will be automatically performed at selected time. Since the power of the unit is turned on internally, the screen may be turned on slightly for the product. This phenomenon may continue for more than 1 hour until the software upgrade is complete. English◀ ▶ ■ Contact Samsung O MENUm → Support → Contact Samsung → ENTERE View this information when your TV does not work properly or when you want to upgrade the software. You can find information regarding our call centres, and how to download products and software. English◀ ▶ ■ Contents Home O MENUm → Support → Contents Home → ENTERE You can enjoy useful and various contents. English◀ ▶ Advanced Features ❑ Using the 3D function for LED 6 series ■ 3D O MENUm → Picture → 3D → ENTERE This exciting new feature enables you to view 3D content. N "Full HD 3D Glasses™" Logo indicates compatibility between display products and 3D Glasses which are compliant with the "Full HD 3D Glasses™" format, and does not indicate picture quality of display products. English◀ ▶ Viewing TV using the 3D function IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR 3D PICTURES. Read and understand the following safety information before using the TV’s 3D function. [WARNING ● Some viewers may experience discomfort while viewing 3D TV such as dizziness, nausea and headaches. If you experience any such symptom, stop viewing 3D TV, remove 3D Active Glasses and rest. ● Watching 3D images for an extended period of time may cause eye strain. If you feel eye strain, stop viewing 3D TV, remove your 3D Active Glasses and rest. English◀ ▶ ● A responsible adult should frequently check on children who are using the 3D function. If there are any reports of tired eyes, headaches, dizziness, or nausea, have the child stop viewing 3D TV and rest. ● Do not use the 3D Active Glasses for other purposes (such as general eyeglasses, sunglasses, protective goggles, etc.) ● Do not use the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses while walking or moving around. Using the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses while moving around may result in injuries due to running into objects, tripping, and/or falling. English◀ ▶ ● 3D Mode: Select the 3D input format. N If you want to feel the 3D effect fully, please wear the 3D Active Glasses first, and then select 3D Mode from the list below that provides the best 3D viewing experience. N When watching 3D images, turn on 3D Active Glasses. 3D Mode Operation Off Turns the 3D function off. 2D → 3D Changes a 2D image to 3D. Side by Side Displays two images next to each other. Top & Bottom Displays one image above another. English◀ ▶ N Some file format may not be supported the "2D → 3D". N When you watch 3D images under flickering lighting such as a fluorescent lamp (50Hz ~ 60Hz ) or a 3 wavelength lamp, you may notice some screen flickering. If this occurs, dim or turn off the light. ● 3D Perspective (-5 ~ +5): Adjust overall 3D perspective of on-screen image. ● Depth (1~10): Adjust overall depth. ● L/R Change (L/R Image / R/L Image): Swap the left and right pictures. ● 3D → 2D (Off / On): Displays the image for the left eye only. N This function is deactivated when 3D Mode set to “ ” or “ ”. ● 3D Optimisation (-1 ~ +1): Automatically adjusts the picture overall to provide an optimal 3D effect. English◀ ▶ Support resolution (16:9 only) ● HDMI Source Resolution Frequency (Hz) / 1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 25 / 29.97 / 30 / 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz Frame Packing 1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 25 / 29.97 / 30 Hz English◀ ▶ ● Components & DTV Source Resolution Frequency (Hz) Components 1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 25 / 29.97 / 30 / 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz DTV 1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 25 Hz ● Videos / Photos (In AllShare Play) Refer to "Supported Subtitle and AllShare Play file formats" in the Other Information section. English◀ ▶ How to watch the 3D image ● Method 1 N Some 3D modes may not be available depending on the format of the image source. N To watch in 3D, wear 3D Active Glasses and press the power button on the glasses. 1. Press the MENU button, use the ▲ or ▼ button to select Picture, and then press the ENTERE button. 2. Use the ▲ or ▼ button to select 3D, and then press the ENTERE button. English◀ ▶ 3. Use the ▲ or ▼ button to select 3D Mode, and then press the ENTERE button. 4. Using the ◄ or ► buttons, select the 3D Mode of the image you want to view. ● Method 2 1. Press the W button. And then you can view the 3D image. 2. If you want to change 3D options (such as 3D Perspective), press the MENU button, and then select Picture. 3. Go to Step 3 in the “Method 1”, and follow the directions from that point on. N To exit the 3D mode, press the W button again. English◀ ▶ Before using 3D function... N NOTE ● 3D Mode is set to Off automatically when you access AllShare Play or e-Manual functions. ● 3D Mode is set to memorised configuration value automatically, when changing the input source. ● Some Picture functions are disabled in 3D mode. ● 3D Active Glasses from Samsung’s previous product (IR type) or other manufacturers not be supported. ● When the TV is initially powered on, may take some time until the 3D display is optimized. English◀ ▶ ● The 3D Active Glasses may not work properly if there is any other 3D product or electronic devices turned on near the glasses or TV. If there is a problem, keep other electronic devices as far away as possible from the 3D Active Glasses. ● Be sure to stay within the viewing angle and optimum TV viewing distance when watching 3D pictures. Otherwise, you may not be able to enjoy proper 3D effects. ● The ideal viewing distance should be three times or more the height of the screen. We recommend sitting with viewer’s eyes on a level with the screen. English◀ ▶ ❑ Using the Explore 3D for LED 6 series O MENUm → Support → Contents Home → ENTERE Press the CONTENT button to select Explore 3D. You can enjoy the diverse 3D contents through Explore 3D. N First, configure your network. For detailed procedures on using the Network Setup, refer to the “Network Settings” instructions. N Explore 3D may not be available in all regions. English◀ ▶ ❑ Using the Media Contents Enjoy photos, music and movie files saved on a USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) device. 1. Press the CONTENT button to select Media Play / AllShare Play for LED 6 series . 2. Press ▲/▼ button to select desired menu (Videos, Photos, Music), then press the ENTERE button. 3. Press ▲/▼ button to select desired device, then press the ENTERE button again. English◀ ▶ ❑ Connecting a USB Device 1. Turn on your TV. 2. Connect a USB device containing photo, music and movie files to the USB port on the side of the TV. 3. When USB is connected to the TV, popup window appears. You can select the Videos, Photos or Music directly. N It might not work properly with unlicenced multimedia files. N Need-to-Know List before using Media Contents ● MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported. ● The file system supports NTFS (Read Only), FAT16 and FAT32. ● Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV. English◀ ▶ ● Media Contents only supports USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) devices. MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers (USB HUB are not supported). Devices should be connected directly to the TV’s USB port. ● Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss. ● The HDD (Hard Disk Drive) connected to USB is not supported. ● Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading. ● The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen. ● The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360 x 8640 pixels. English◀ ▶ ● For unsupported or corrupted files, the “Not Supported File Format” message is displayed. ● MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played. Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a technology that supports the creation, distribution and management of the content in an integrated and comprehensive way, including the protection of the rights and interests of the content providers, the prevention of the illegal copying of contents, as well as managing billings and settlements. ● A USB device that requires high power (more than 500mA or 5V) may not be supported. ● If the TV has been no input during time set in Auto Protection Time, the Screensaver will run. ● The power-saving mode of some external hard disk drives may be released automatically when connected to the TV. English◀ ▶ ● If a USB extension cable is used, the USB device may not be recognized or the files on the device may not be read. ● If a USB device connected to the TV is not recognized, the list of files on the device is corrupted or a file in the list is not played, connect the USB device to the PC, format the device and check the connection. ● If a file deleted from the PC is still found when Media Contents is run, use the “Empty the Recycle Bin” function on the PC to permanently delete the file. ● Media Contents only supports sequential jpeg format. ● The scene search and thumbnail functions are not supported in the Videos. ● If the number of files and folders saved on a USB storage device is approximately over 4000, the files and folders may not appear and some folders may not be opened. English◀ ▶ Disconnecting a USB Device ● Method 1: Using the SOURCE button. 1. Press the SOURCE button. 2. Select a desired USB device, and then press the TOOLS button. The Tools menu appears. 3. Select Safely Remove USB Device, and then wait until the selected USB device is disconnected. You can remove a USB device from the TV. English◀ ▶ ● Method 2: Using the Media Play / AllShare Play for LED 6 series home screen. 1. Go to Media Play / AllShare Play for LED 6 series home screen. 2. Select any category, and then press the ENTERE button. 3. Select a desired USB device, and then press the TOOLS button. The Tools menu appears. 4. Select Safely Remove USB Device, and then wait until the selected USB device is disconnected. You can remove a USB device from the TV. N To remove a USB device from the TV, we recommend use Safely Remove USB Device function. English◀ ▶ ❑ Connecting to the PC through network for LED 6 series You can play pictures, music and videos saved on your PC through a network connection in the AllShare Play mode over your TV. N Web storage and out of home network connectivity are not available. N If you want to use AllShare Play to play files saved on your PC over your TV, you should download “AllShare PC Software” and users manual from “www. samsung.com”. 1. For more information on how to configure your network, refer to ‘Network Connection’. – You are recommended to locate both TV and PC in same subnet. The first 3 parts of the IP address of the TV and PC should be the same and only the last part (the host address) should be changed. (e.g. IP Address: 123.456.789.**) English◀ ▶ 2. Using a LAN cable, connect between the external modem and the PC onto which the AllShare PC Software programme will be installed. – You can connect the TV to the PC directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router). N Functions that are not supported when connecting to a PC through a network: ● The Background Music On and Background Music Setting functions. ● The � (REW) or µ (FF) button while a movie is playing. N The DivX DRM, Multi-audio, embedded caption does not supported. N AllShare PC Software should be permitted by the firewall programme on your PC. English◀ ▶ N When you use AllShare Play mode through a network connection, according to functions of the provided server: ● The sorting method may vary. ● The � (REW), µ (FF) or � (Pause) buttons may not work depending on the content information. N If you experience any file stuttering issue while playing a video over a wireless network, we recommend using a wired network. English◀ ▶ ❑ Screen Display Move to the desired file using the ◄/►/▲/▼ buttons and then press the ENTERE or � (Play) button. The screen may differ depending on the way to enter the screen. πµ Page Move E Play T Tools R Return Information: AllShare Play / Videos / SUM / 500 Days of... .avi 1/15 You can ascertain the selected device name, contents mode, folder/file name, page. Information: You can ascertain the name, size and created date of the selected file. Operation Buttons: - EPlay: Plays the selected file. - T Tools: Displays the option menu. - R Return: Move to the previous step. - �µ/b{ Page Move: Move to up or down page. File List Section: You can confirm the files and groups that are sorted by category. * The displayed image may differ depending on the model. English◀ ▶ ■ Videos Playing Video 1. Press the ◄/►/▲/▼ button to select the desired video in the file list. 2. Press the ENTERE button or � (Play) button. – The selected file name is displayed on the top with its playing time. – If video time information is unknown, play time and progress bar are not displayed. – During video playback, you can search using ◄ and ► button. – You can use (�) (REW) and (µ) (FF) buttons during playback. N In this mode, you can enjoy movie clips contained on a Game, but you cannot play the Game itself. English◀ ▶ ● Supported Subtitle Formats – External Name File extension MPEG-4 timed text .ttxt SAMI .smi SubRip .srt SubViewer .sub Micro DVD .sub or .txt SubStation Alpha .ssa Advanced SubStation Alpha .ass Powerdivx .psb – Internal Name Container Format Xsub AVI Picture Format SubStation Alpha MKV Text Format Advanced SubStation Alpha MKV Text Format SubRip MKV Text Format MPEG-4 Timed text MP4 Text Format English◀ ▶ ● Supported Video Formats File Extension Container Video Codec Resolution Frame rate (fps) Bit rate (Mbps) Audio Codec *.avi *.mkv *.asf *.wmv *.mp4 *.3gp *.vro *.mpg *.mpeg *.ts *.tp *.trp *.mov *.flv *.vob *.svi *.divx AVI MKV ASF MP4 3GP VRO VOB PS TS DivX 3.11/4.x/5.x/6.x 1920 x 1080 6~30 30 AC3 LPCM ADPCM (IMA, MS) AAC HE-AAC WMA DD+ MPEG (MP3) DTS Core G.711(A-Law, μ-Law) MPEG4 SP/ASP H.264 BP/MP/HP Motion JPEG 640 x 480 8 Window Media Video v9 1920 x 1080 30 MPEG2 MPEG1 English◀ ▶ Other Restrictions ● Video content will not play, or not play correctly, if there is an error in the content or the container. ● Sound or video may not work if the contents have a standard bit rate/frame rate above the compatible Frame/sec listed in the table. ● If the Index Table is in error, the Seek (Jump) function is not supported. ● When playing the video through network, it may not work depending on the network status. When you play video over a network connection, the video may not be played smoothly. for LED 6 series ● Some USB/digital camera devices may not be compatible with the player. ● The menu can be displayed late if the video is over 10Mbps(bit rate). English◀ ▶ Video decoder Audio decoder ● Supports up to H.264, Level 4.1 ● H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4 and AVCHD are not supported. ● GMC is not supported. ● WMA 10 Pro supports up to 5.1 channel. ● WMA lossless audio is not supported. English◀ ▶ ■ Photos Viewing a Photo (or Slide Show) 1. Press the ◄/►/▲/▼ button to select the desired photo in the file list. 2. Press the ENTERE button. N During the slide show, all files in the file list will be displayed in order. N When you press the � (Play) button in the file list, slide show will be started immediately. N During the slide show, you can adjust the slide show speed using � (REW) or µ (FF) button. N You can move to other file using ◄ or ► button. N Music files can be automatically played during the slide show if the Background Music On is set. English◀ ▶ ● Supported Photo Formats File Extension Type Resolution *.jpg JPEG 15360 X 8640 *.bmp BMP 1920 X 1080 *.mpo MPO 15360 X 8640 English◀ ▶ ■ Music Playing Music 1. Press the ◄/►/▲/▼ button to select the desired Music in the file list. 2. Press the ENTERE button or � (Play) button. – You can use � (REW) and µ (FF) buttons during playback. N Only displays the files with supported music file extension. Other file extensions are not displayed, even if they are saved on the same USB device. N If the sound is abnormal when playing music files, adjust the Equaliser in the Sound menu. (An over-modulated music file may cause a sound problem.) English◀ ▶ N Using the playback menu – Press the ◄/► button to select the desired menu. ● Play / Pause: You can start or stop a music. Alternatively, the � or � button on the remote. ● Repeat Mode (Off / One Song / All): You can play music files repeatedly. ● Shuffle Mode (Off / On): You can play the music randomly. ● Sound Mode (Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Amplify): You can adjust the sound setting. English◀ ▶ ● Supported Music Formats File Extension Type Codec Remark *.mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 *.m4a *.mpa *.aac *.3ga MPEG4 AAC *.flac FLAC FLAC • Seek is not supported. Supports up to 2ch. *.ogg OGG Vorbis • Supports up to 2ch. *.wma WMA WMA • WMA 10 Pro supports up to 5.1 channel. English◀ ▶ ❑ Media Contents - Additional Functions Playing the selected Videos/Music/Photos files 1. Press the TOOLS button at each main screen and select Play selection. 2. Select the desired files. N The check box appears to the left of the selected files. 3. Press the ► button to select Play. N You can select or deselect all files pressing the Select All / Deselect All. Setting the Encoding language in Music Set the encoding language if the text is not supported. 1. Press the TOOLS button at Music main screen and select Encoding. 2. Select the desired encoding language. English◀ ▶ Videos/Music/Photos Play Option menu During playing a file, press the TOOLS button. Category Operation Videos Photos Music Go to Videos List / Go to Photos List You can move to the file list screen. c c Play from the beginning You can restart a video file from the beginning. c Title Search You can move the other file directly. c Time Search You can search the video using ◄ and ► button at one minute interval or entering the number directly. N It may not be supported depending on the input source. c Repeat Mode You can play movie files repeatedly. c English◀ ▶ Category Operation Videos Photos Music Picture Size You can adjust the picture size to your preference. c Picture Mode You can adjust the picture setting. c c Sound Mode You can adjust the sound setting. c c Audio Language You can change the audio language if the video has more than one language. c Subtitle You can set subtitles on/off. c Subtitle Settings You can play the video with subtitles. This function only works if the subtitles are the same file name as the video. c English◀ ▶ Category Operation Videos Photos Music Start Slide Show / Stop Slide Show You can start or stop a slide show. c Slide Show Speed You can select the slide show speed during the slide show. c Slide Show Effect You can change the slide show effect during the slide show. c Background Music On / Background Music Off You can set on/off background music when watching a slide show. c Background Music Setting You can select background music when watching a slide show. c English◀ ▶ Category Operation Videos Photos Music Zoom You can zoom into images in full screen mode. c Rotate You can rotate images in full screen mode. c Edit playlist You can edit the playlist when playing the desired music. c Play selection Select and play multiple files. c Information You can see detailed information about the played file. c c c English◀ ▶ ❑ Using the DLNA Functions for LED 6 series You can play media contents including videos, photos and music saved on your mobile phones or the other devices (such as your PC) by controlling them on the TV via the network. N Web storage and out of home network connectivity are not available. N First, configure your network. For detailed procedures on using the Network Setup, refer to the “Network Settings” instructions. N For more information, visit “www.samsung.com” or contact the Samsung call centre. Mobile devices may need additional software installation. For details, refer to each device’s user’s guide. N If your Samsung TV connects to a non-Samsung DLNA server, a compatibility issue may occur during video playback. English◀ ▶ N By connecting your Samsung TV to a network via AllShare™, you can use Samsung’s original functions as follows: – Playback of various video formats (DivX, MP4, 3GPP, AVI, ASF, MKV, etc.) – Video thumbnail feature – Bookmark function (to resume video playback) – Auto-chaptering (scene navigation) – Digital content management – Compatibility with various subtitle formats (SRT, SMI, SUB, TXT, TTXT) – And many others N To use the original DLNA functions of Samsung fully, it is recommended that you use the AllShare™ software provided with your TV. English◀ ▶ Playing the media contents saved on the devices 1. Connect the mobile phone or other devices which support AllShare Play function, and then play the media contents of each device. The popup screen appears on the bottom of your TV. 2. Select the Allow to accept the connected devices. The media contents of the devices can be playing on your TV. N You can find the allowed devices on the AllShare Settings. English◀ ▶ Using the AllShare Play function, play the media contents of the devices connected to DLNA function. 1. Press the CONTENT button to select AllShare Play. 2. Press ▲/▼ button to select desired menu (Videos, Photos, Music), then press the ENTERE button. 3. When the DLNA device is selected, press the ENTERE button again. 4. Press the ◄/►/▲/▼ button to select the desired file. 5. Press the ENTERE button. English◀ ▶ N NOTE ● Contents may not be played on your TV depending on their resolution and format. ● The ENTERE and ◄/► buttons may not work depending on the type of media content. ● Using the mobile device, you can control the media playing. For details, refer to each mobile’s user’s guide. English◀ ▶ Using the AllShare Settings function O MENUm → Network → AllShare Settings → ENTERE Shows a list of mobile phones or connected devices which have been set up with this TV for using the AllShare Settings function. N The AllShare Settings function is available in all devices which support DLNA DMC. ● Allow / Deny: Allows/Blocks the devices. ● Delete: Deletes the devices from the list. N This function only deletes the name of the devices from the list. If the deleted device is turned on or tries to connect to the TV, it may appear on the list again. English◀ ▶ ❑ Teletext Feature The index page of the Teletext service gives you information on how to use the service. For Teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some pages may not be displayed. You can change Teletext pages by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control. ● 0 (mode): Selects the Teletext mode (LIST/FLOF). If pressed during LIST mode, switches the mode to List save mode. In List save mode, you can save a Teletext page into a list using the 8(store) button. ● / (Teletext on/mix/off): Activates the Teletext mode for the current channel. Press the button twice to overlap the Teletext mode with the current broadcasting screen. Press it one more time to exit teletext. Other Information English◀ ▶ ● 1 (sub-page): Displays the available sub-page. ● 8 (store): Stores the Teletext pages. ● 6 (index): Displays the index (contents) page at any time while you are viewing Teletext. ● 4 (size): Displays the teletext on the upper half of the screen in double-size. To move the text to the lower half of the screen, press it again. For normal display, press it once again. ● 9 (hold): Holds the display at the current page, in the case that there are several secondary pages that follow automatically. To undo, press it again. ● 2 (page up): Displays the next Teletext page. ● 3 (page down): Displays the previous Teletext page. English◀ ▶ ● 5 (reveal): Displays the hidden text (answers to quiz games, for example). To display the normal screen, press it again. ● 7 (cancel): Shrinks the Teletext display to overlap with the current broadcast. ● Colour buttons (red, green, yellow, blue): If the FASTEXT system is used by the broadcasting company, the different topics on a Teletext page are colourcoded and can be selected by pressing the coloured buttons. Press the colour corresponding to the topic of your choice. A new colour coded page is displayed. Items can be selected in the same way. To display the previous or next page, press the corresponding coloured button. English◀ ▶ The Teletext pages are organized according to six categories: Part Contents A Selected page number. B Broadcasting channel identity. C Current page number or search indications. D Date and time. E Text. F Status information. FASTEXT information. A E F B C D English◀ ▶ ❑ Anti-theft Kensington Lock The Kensington Lock is not supplied by Samsung. It is a device used to physically fix the system when using it in a public place. The appearance and locking method may differ from the illustration depending on the manufacturer. Refer to the manual provided with the Kensington Lock for additional information on proper use. N Please find a “K” icon on the rear of the TV. A kensington slot is beside the “K” icon. N The position and colour may differ depending on the model. To lock the product, follow these steps: 1. Wrap the Kensington lock cable around a large, stationary object such as desk or chair. TV Rear Optional English◀ ▶ 2. Slide the end of the cable with the lock attached through the looped end of the Kensington lock cable. 3. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the product. 4. Lock the lock. N These are general instructions. For exact instructions, see the User manual supplied with the locking device. N The locking device has to be purchased separately. English◀ ▶ ❑ Connections Common Interface Slot To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+ CARD” must be inserted. ● If you do not insert the “CI or CI+ CARD”, some channels will display the message “Scrambled Signal”. ● The pairing information containing a telephone number, the “CI or CI+ CARD” ID, the Host ID and other information will be displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error message is displayed, please contact your service provider. ● When the configuration of channel information has finished, the message “Updating Completed” is displayed, indicating the channel list is updated. * The image may differ depending on the model. English◀ ▶ N NOTE ● You must obtain a “CI or CI+ CARD” from a local cable service provider. ● When removing the “CI or CI+ CARD”, carefully pull it out with your hands since dropping the “CI or CI+ CARD” may cause damage to it. ● Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” in the direction marked on the card. ● The location of the COMMON INTERFACE slot may be different depending on the model. ● “CI or CI+ CARD” is not supported in some countries and regions; check with your authorized dealer. ● If you have any problems, please contact a service provider. ● Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” that supports the current aerial settings. The screen will be distorted or will not be seen. English◀ ▶ ❑ Troubleshooting If you have any questions about the TV, first refer to this list. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, please visit “www.samsung.com”, then click on Support. Issues Solutions and Explanations Picture Quality First of all, please perform the Picture Test and confirm that your TV is properly displaying test image. (go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Picture Test) If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture may caused by the source or signal. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations The TV image does not look as good as it did in the store. ● If you have an analogue cable/set top box, upgrade to a digital set top box. Use HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD (high definition) picture quality. LED 4 series do not support AV, Component mode ● Cable/Satellite subscribers: Try HD stations from the channel line up. ● Aerial connection: Try HD stations after performing Auto tuning. ● Many HD channels are up scaled from SD (Standard Definition) contents. ● Adjust the Cable/Set top box video output resolution to 1080i or 720p. ● Make sure you are watching the TV at the minimum recommended distance based on the size and definition of the signal. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations The picture is distorted: macroblock error, small block, dots, pixelization ● Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially in fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. ● Low signal level or bad quality can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue. ● Mobile phones used close to the TV (cca up to 1m) may cause noise in picture on analogue and digital TV. Colour is wrong or missing. ● If you’re using a component connection, make sure the component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause colour problems or a blank screen. LED 4 series do not support AV, Component mode English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations There is poor colour or brightness. ● Adjust the Picture options in the TV menu. (go to Picture Mode / Colour / Brightness / Sharpness) ● Adjust Energy Saving option in the TV menu. (go to MENU - System - Eco Solution - Energy Saving) ● Try resetting the picture to view the default picture settings. (go to MENU - Picture - Reset Picture) There is a dotted line on the edge of the screen. ● If the picture size is set to Screen Fit, change it to 16:9. ● Change cable/satellite box resolution. The picture is black and white. ● If you are using an AV composite input, connect the video cable (yellow) to the Green jack of component input 1 on the TV. LED 4 series do not support AV, Component mode English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations When changing channels, the picture freezes or is distorted or delayed. ● If connected with a cable box, please try to reset the cable box. Reconnect the AC cord and wait until the cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes. ● Set the output resolution of the cable box to 1080i or 720p. Sound Quality First of all, please perform the Sound Test to confirm that your TV audio is properly operating. (go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound Test) If the audio is ok, the sound problem may be caused by the source or signal. There is no sound or the sound is too low at maximum volume. ● Please check the volume of the device (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) connected to your TV. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations The picture is good but there is no sound. ● Set the Speaker Select option to TV Speaker in the sound menu. for LED 6 series ● If you are using an external device, make sure the audio cables are connected to the correct audio input jacks on the TV. ● If you are using an external device, check the device’s audio output option (ex. you may need to change your cable box’s audio option to HDMI when you have a HDMI connected to your TV). ● If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required. ● Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable. ● If your TV has a headphone jack, make sure there is nothing plugged into it. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations The speakers are making an inappropriate noise. ● Check the cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to an audio input. ● For aerial or cable connections, check the signal strength. Low signal level may cause sound distortion. No Picture, No Video The TV will not turn on. ● Make sure the AC power cord is securely plugged in to the wall outlet and the TV. ● Make sure the wall outlet is working. ● Try pressing the POWER button on the TV to make sure the problem is not the remote. If the TV turns on, refer to “The remote control does not work” below. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations The TV turns off automatically. ● Ensure the Sleep Timer is set to Off in the Time menu. ● If your PC is connected to the TV, check your PC power settings. ● Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the TV. ● When watching TV from an aerial or cable connection, the TV will turn off after 10 ~ 15 minutes if there is no signal. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations There is no picture/ video. ● Check cable connections (remove and reconnect all cables connected to the TV and external devices). ● Set your external device’s (Cable/Set top Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video outputs to match the connections to the TV input. For example, if an external device’s output is HDMI, it should be connected to an HDMI input on the TV. ● Make sure your connected devices are powered on. ● Be sure to select the TV’s correct source by pressing the SOURCE button on the remote control. ● Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations Aerial (Air/Cable) Connection The TV is not receiving all channels. ● Make sure the Aerial cable is connected securely. ● Please try Setup (Initial setup) to add available channels to the channel list. Go to MENU - System - Setup (Initial setup) and wait for all available channels to be stored. ● Verify the Aerial is positioned correctly. The picture is distorted: macro block error small block, dots, pixelization ● Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion, especially on fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. ● A low signal can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations Network Connection for LED 6 series Software Upgrade over the network fails. ● Try Network Settings in Network menu. ● If you have latest SW version, SW upgrade will not proceed. Others The picture will not display in full screen. ● HD channels will have black bars on either side of the screen when displaying up scaled SD (4:3) contents. ● Black bars on the top and bottom will appear during movies that have aspect ratios different from your TV. ● Adjust the picture size options on your external device or TV to full screen. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations The remote control does not work. ● Replace the remote control batteries with the poles (+/–) in the right direction. ● Clean the sensor’s transmission window on the remote. ● Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 5~6 feet away. The Cable/Set top box remote control doesn’t turn the TV on or off, or adjust the volume. ● Programme the Cable/Set top box remote control to operate the TV. Refer to the Cable/Set top box user manual for the SAMSUNG TV code. A “Mode Not Supported” message appears. ● Check the supported resolution of the TV, and adjust the external device’s output resolution accordingly. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations There is a plastic smell from the TV. ● This smell is normal and will dissipate over time. The TV Signal Information is unavailable in the Self Diagnosis Test menu. ● This function is only available with digital channels from an Aerial / RF / Coax connection. TV is tilted to the right or left side. ● Remove the stand base from the TV and reassemble it. There are difficulties assembling the stand base. ● Make sure the TV is placed on a flat surface. If you can not remove the screws from the TV, please use a magnetized screw driver. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations The Channel menu is grey out (unavailable). ● The Channel menu is only available when the TV source is selected. Your settings are lost after 30 minutes or every time the TV is turned off. ● If the TV is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30 minutes. Change the settings from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode in the Setup (Initial setup) procedure. Press the SOURCE button to select TV mode, and go to MENU → System → Setup (Initial setup) → ENTERE. You have intermittent loss of audio or video. ● Check the cable connections and reconnect them. ● Loss of audio or video can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If mounting the TV to the wall, we recommend using cables with 90 degree connectors. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations You see small particles when you look closely at the edge of the frame of the TV. ● This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect. You turned the TV off 45 minutes ago, and it turned on again. ● It is normal. The TV operates the OTA (Over The Aerial) function itself to upgrade firmware downloaded whilst your watching TV. The message “Scrambled Signal” or “Weak or No Signal” appears. ● If you are using a CAM CARD (CI/CI+), check that it is installed into the common interface slot. ● If there is still a problem, pull the CAM CARD out of the TV and insert it into the slot again. English◀ ▶ Issues Solutions and Explanations There are recurrent picture/sound issues. ● Check and change the signal/source. A reaction may occur between the rubber cushion pads on the base stand and the top finish of some furniture. ● To prevent this, use felt pads on any surface of the TV that comes in direct contact with furniture. The message “This file may not be playable properly.” appears. ● This may appear because of high bit rate of content. Content generally will play but could experience some playability issue. English◀ ▶ ❑ Licence for LED 6 series TheaterSound HD, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TheaterSound HD technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS TheaterSound HD™ provides the most immersive surround sound experience from the TVs built-in speakers, while maintaining steady volume and delivering rich bass and clear dialog. for LED 4 series TheaterSound, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TheaterSound technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS TheaterSound™ provides the most immersive surround sound experience from the TVs built-in speakers, while maintaining steady volume and delivering rich bass and clear dialog. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. English◀ ▶ for LED 6 series Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0+Digital Out is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. for LED 4 series Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. English◀ DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274 DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license. Open Source Licence Notice In the case of using open source software, Open Source Licences are available on the product menu. Open Source Licence Notice is written only English. English E-MANUAL Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register Model __________ Serial No.____________Contenu Réglage des canaux • Utilisation du bouton INFO (Guide Maintenant et Après) 1 • Utilisation du menu Canal 2 • Nouvelle recherche des chaînes 17 Fonctions de base • Changement du mode Image prédéfini 27 • Réglages des paramètres de l’image 28 • Modification des options d’image 35 • Changement du mode Son prédéfini 44 • Réglage des paramètres sonores 45 • Sélection du mode son 55 Fonctions de préférence • Connexion au réseau 56 • Configuration du réseau câblé 70 • Configuration du réseau sans fil 76 • Gestion des périphériques connectés au réseau 85 • Exécution de la configuration initiale 87 • Réglage de l’heure 88 • Utilisation de la veille 90 • Réglage de la minuterie de mise en marche / arrêt 91 • Verrouillage des programmes 97 • Solutions économiques 99 • Autres fonctionnalités 101 • Menu Assistance 110 Fonctions avancées • Utilisation de la fonction 3D 118 • Utilisation d'Explore 3D 129 • Utilisation du contenu multimedia 130 • Connexion d'un périphérique USB 131 • Connexion à l'ordinateur par le biais du réseau 137 • Affichage 140 • Contenu multimedia - Fonctions supplémentaires 151 • Utilisation des fonctions DLNA 156 Informations supplémentaires • Fonction Télétexte 162 • Verrou antivol Kensington 166 • Emplacement pour interface commune pour les connexions 168 • Résolution des problèmes 170 • License 186▶ Français ❑ Utilisation du bouton INFO (Guide Maintenant et Après) L'affichage identifie la chaîne en cours et l'état de certains paramètres audio et vidéo. Le Guide Maintenant et Après affiche des informations quotidiennes sur les programmes de télévision pour chaque chaîne en fonction de l'heure de diffusion. N Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton a (Information), les détails du programme sont affichés. ● Faites défiler à l'aide des boutons ◄ et ► pour afficher des informations sur le programme de votre choix, tout en regardant la chaîne actuelle. ● Faites défiler à l'aide des boutons ▲ et ▼ pour afficher des informations sur d'autres chaînes. Pour accéder à la chaîne actuellement sélectionnée, appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Réglage des canaux◀ ▶ ❑ Utilisation du menu Canal O MENUm → Assistance → Accueil contenu → ENTERE Appuyez sur le bouton CONTENT pour sélectionner le menu de votre choix. L'écran correspondant s'affiche alors. ■ Liste des chaînes Vous pouvez afficher les informations sur les chaînes : Tous, TV, Radio, Données/autres, Analogique ou Favoris 1-5. N Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche CH LIST de la télécommande, l'écran Liste des chaînes s'affiche. Liste des chaînes Guide AllShare Play Gestionnaire prog. Explore 3D Accueil contenu R Retour * L'image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle. Français◀ ▶ ● Tous: affiche toutes les chaînes actuellement disponibles. ● TV: affiche toutes les chaînes de télévision actuellement disponibles. ● Radio: affiche toutes les stations de radio actuellement disponibles. ● Données/autres: affiche toutes les chaînes MHP ou autres actuellement disponibles. ● Analogique: affiche toutes les chaînes analogiques actuellement disponibles. ● Favoris 1-5: affiche toutes les chaînes favorites. N Pour visualiser les chaînes favorites que vous avez ajoutées, appuyez sur le bouton CH LIST et utilisez le bouton L (Mode CH) pour accéder à l'option Favoris 1-5. Français◀ ▶ N Utilisation des touches de commande avec la Liste des chaînes. ● T (Outils): affiche le menu d'options. ● L (Mode CH / Canal): permet d'accéder aux options Tous, TV, Radio, Données/autres, Analogique ou Favoris 1-5. N Lorsque vous sélectionnez Vue progr. dans le menu T (Outils), vous pouvez accéder à d'autres chaînes à l'aide du bouton L (Canal). ● E (Regarder / Information): vous permet de regarder la chaîne que vous avez sélectionnée. / affiche des détails sur le programme sélectionné. ● k (Page): permet de passer à la page suivante ou précédente. ● R (Retour): permet de revenir à l'étape précédente. Français◀ ▶ Comment utiliser l'affichage des programmes dans la liste des chaînes (chaînes numériques uniquement) Lorsque vous configurez la fonction Programmer visionnage dans Liste des chaînes, vous pouvez uniquement définir le programme dans Vue progr.. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton CH LIST, puis sélectionnez la chaîne numérique souhaitée. 2. Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS, puis sélectionnez l'option Vue progr.. La liste des programmes de cette chaîne s'affiche alors. 3. Appuyez sur les boutons ▲ / ▼ pour sélectionner le programme souhaité, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE (Information) ou INFO. 4. Sélectionnez Programmer visionnage, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE lorsque vous avez terminé. N Si vous souhaitez désactiver la fonction Programmer visionnage, suivez les étapes 1 à 3. Sélectionnez Annuler programmation. Français◀ ▶ Définissez chaque chaîne à l'aide des options du menu Utilisation du menu Option t Liste des chaînes (Vue progr., Modif. favoris, Verrouil./Déverr., Modifi. nom de chaîne, Modif. num. chaîne, Supprimer, Information, Trier, Changer antenne, Mode édit.). Les options de menu peuvent varier selon l'état de la chaîne. 1. Sélectionnez une chaîne et appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. 2. Sélectionnez une fonction et modifiez ses réglages. Français◀ ▶ ● Vue progr.: affiche le programme lorsqu'une chaîne numérique est sélectionnée. ● Modif. favoris: permet de définir comme favorites les chaînes que vous regardez souvent. Vous pouvez ajouter ou retirer les chaînes sélectionnées de Favoris 1-5. 1. Sélectionnez Modif. favoris, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE pour sélectionner l'option Favoris 1-5, puis appuyez sur le bouton OK. N Vous pouvez affecter une chaîne favorite qui sera incluse dans la liste Favoris 1-5. Français◀ ▶ ● Verrouil./Déverr.: vous pouvez verrouiller une chaîne afin qu'elle ne puisse être ni sélectionnée, ni visualisée. N Cette fonction n'est disponible que si l'option Verr. chaîne est définie sur Activé. N L’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. Modifiez le code PIN à l’aide de l’option Modifier PIN. ● Modifi. nom de chaîne (chaînes analogiques uniquement): attribuez le nom de votre choix à la chaîne. Français◀ ▶ ● Modif. num. chaîne: modifiez le numéro en appuyant sur les boutons numériques appropriés. N Il se peut que les fonctions Modifi. nom de chaîne et Modif. num. chaîne ne soient pas prises en charge dans certaines régions. ● Supprimer: vous pouvez supprimer une chaîne afin d'afficher celles de votre choix. ● Information: affiche des détails sur le programme sélectionné. ● Trier (chaînes numériques uniquement) : permet de changer l'ordre des chaînes classées par numéro ou par nom. ● Changer antenne: permet de basculer entre Hertzien et Câble. Français◀ ▶ ● Mode édit.: vous pouvez sélectionner les chaînes de votre choix et les modifier. Utilisation du menu Option t Définissez chaque chaîne à l'aide des options du menu (Modif. favoris, Verrouil./Déverr., Supprimer, Information, Désélectionner, Sélectionner tout). 1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS dans l'écran Liste des chaînes, puis sélectionnez Mode édit.. Une coche apparaît à gauche de la chaîne. 2. Appuyez sur les boutons ▲/▼ pour sélectionner la chaîne de votre choix, puis sur ENTERE. Le symbole (c) indique la chaîne que vous avez sélectionnée. N Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs chaînes. N Appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton ENTERE pour annuler la sélection de la chaîne. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS, puis sélectionnez une fonction et modifiez ses paramètres. Français◀ ▶ ● Modif. favoris: permet de définir comme favorites les chaînes sélectionnées que vous regardez souvent. N L'écran Modif. favoris comprend cinq groupes (Favoris 1, Favoris 2, etc.). Vous pouvez ajouter une chaîne favorite à n'importe lequel de ces groupes. Appuyez sur les boutons ▲/▼ pour sélectionner un groupe. ● Verrouil./Déverr.: vous pouvez verrouiller une chaîne afin qu'elle ne puisse être ni sélectionnée, ni visualisée. N Cette fonction n'est disponible que si l'option Verr. chaîne est définie sur Activé. N L’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. Modifiez le code PIN à l’aide de l’option Modifier PIN. ● Supprimer: vous pouvez supprimer une chaîne afin d'afficher celles de votre choix. ● Information: affiche des détails sur le programme sélectionné. ● Désélectionner: permet de désélectionner les chaînes sélectionnées. ● Sélectionner tout: permet de sélectionner toutes les chaînes de la liste des chaînes. Français◀ ▶ ■ Guide Les informations du Guide électronique des programmes (EPG) sont fournies par les diffuseurs. Les programmes planifiés fournis par les diffuseurs vous permettent de planifier les émissions que vous souhaitez regarder, de telle sorte que le téléviseur change automatiquement de chaîne à l'heure indiquée. Des entrées de programmes peuvent être vides ou ne pas être à jour en raison de l'état d'une chaîne. Die Musik-Show DTV Air 825 NDR FERNSEHEN 19:15 - 20:40 Dani est effondrée lorsque Scot lui fait part de son opinion ... 825 NDR FERNSEHEN 18:15 Sam 1er mai Vue chaînes - Tous Aujourd'hui ▲ 821 Kanal 5 822 M6 823 MDR FERNSEHEN 824 Mediashopping 825 NDR FERNSEHEN ▼ 826 NT1 20:00 20:30 21:00 21:30 Aucune information Aucune information Aucune information Musik fur Sie MD... Ein Schloss am ... Aucune information a Gest. prog b -24 heures { +24 heures } Mode CH `Information k Page E Programmer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Guide Die Musik-Show Die NDR Quizshow Sportclub live * L'image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle. Français◀ ▶ 1 a Rouge (Gest. prog): permet d'accéder aux programmes réservés dans Gest. prog. 2 b Vert (-24 heures): affiche la liste des programmes qui seront diffusés dans les 24 heures. 3 { Jaune (+24 heures): affiche la liste des programmes qui seront diffusés dans plus de 24 heures. 4 } Bleu (Mode CH): permet de sélectionner le type des chaînes à afficher dans la fenêtre Liste des chaînes. (Tous, TV, Radio, Donn/autre, Favoris 1-5) Français◀ ▶ 5 `(Information): affiche des détails sur le programme sélectionné. 6 k (Page): permet de passer à la page suivante ou précédente. 7 E (Regarder / Programmer) ● si vous sélectionnez le programme en cours, vous pouvez le regarder. ● Si vous sélectionnez un programme à venir, vous pouvez le réserver. Pour annuler la programmation, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton ENTERE et sélectionnez Annuler progr.. Français◀ ▶ ■ Gestionnaire prog. Vous pouvez programmer l'affichage automatique d'une chaîne de votre choix à l'heure prévue. De plus, vous pouvez voir, modifier ou supprimer une chaîne que vous avez réservée. Avant d'utiliser cette fonction, vous devez régler l'heure. Définissez chaque chaîne à l'aide des options du menu ( Utilisation du menu Option t Annuler programmation, Modifier le programme, Programmer manuellement, Afficher le guide). 1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS pour sélectionner Programmer manuellement. N Vous pouvez appuyer sur le a (Programmer manuellement) directement sur l'écran Gestionnaire prog.. 2. Appuyez sur ◄/►/▲/▼ ou sur les touches numériques pour définir les options Antenne, Canal, Répétition, Date, Heure de début. ● Antenne: permet de sélectionner le signal de diffusion souhaité. ● Canal: permet de sélectionner la chaîne souhaitée. Français◀ ▶ ● Répétition: sélectionnez Une fois, Manuel, Sam~Dim, Lun~Ven ou Quotid. suivant vos besoins. Si vous sélectionnez Manuel, vous pouvez définir le jour de votre choix. N Le symbole (c) indique le jour sélectionné. ● Date: permet de définir la date de votre choix. N Cette option est disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez Une fois sous Répétition. ● Heure de début: permet de définir l'heure de début de votre choix. N Pour modifier ou annuler la programmation, sélectionnez le programme réservé sous Listes des prog.. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS, puis sélectionnez Modifier programmation ou Annuler programmation. N Si vous sélectionnez Afficher le guide, l'écran Guide s'affiche. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Nouvelle recherche des chaînes ■ O Antenne (Hertzien / Câble) MENUm → Canal → Antenne t → ENTERE Avant que votre téléviseur ne puisse commencer à mémoriser les chaînes disponibles, vous devez spécifier le type de source du signal connecté au téléviseur (c'est-à-dire un système Hertzien ou Câble). Français◀ ▶ ■ Pays (en fonction du pays) O MENUm → Canal → Pays → ENTERE L’écran de saisie du code PIN apparaît. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. ● Chaîne numérique: modifiez le pays pour obtenir les chaînes numériques qui y sont diffusées. ● Chaîne analogique: modifiez le pays pour obtenir les chaînes analogiques qui y sont diffusées. Français◀ ▶ ■ Recherche automatique (en fonction du pays) O MENUm → Canal → Recherche automatique → ENTERE Recherche automatiquement une chaîne et l'enregistre dans le téléviseur. N Il est possible que les numéros de programme attribués automatiquement ne correspondent pas aux numéros de programme souhaités ou réels. Si une chaîne est verrouillée, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s'affiche. ● Recherche automatique Hertzien / Câble: permet de sélectionner la source d'antenne à mémoriser. Numér. et Anal. / Numérique / Analogique: permet de sélectionner la source de chaîne à mémoriser. Français◀ ▶ Lorsque la source d'antenne est réglée sur Hertzien ou Câble : Lors de la sélection de Câble → Numér. et Anal. ou Numérique: indiquer une valeur pour la recherche des chaînes câblées. – Sélection opérateur (en fonction du pays): sélecionne un fournisseur de diffusion par câble. – Mode de rech. (Complet / Réseau / Quick): permet de rechercher toutes les chaînes dont les stations émettent et les mémorise. N Si vous sélectionnez Quick, vous pouvez définir Réseau, ID réseau, Fréquence, Modulation et Taux de symbole manuellement en appuyant sur les boutons numériques de la télécommande. – Réseau (Auto. / Manuel): permet de sélectionner le mode de réglage ID réseau Auto ou Manuel. – ID réseau: si Réseau est défini sur Manuel, vous pouvez configurer un ID réseau à l'aide des touches numériques. Français◀ ▶ – Fréquence: affiche la fréquence correspondant à la chaîne. (Varie d'un pays à l'autre.) – Modulation: affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles. – Taux de symbole: affiche les taux de symboles disponibles. ● Option de rech. de câble (Varie d'un pays à l'autre et pour les chaînes câblées uniquement.) Définit des options de recherche supplémentaires, telles que la fréquence et le taux de symboles pour la recherche de réseaux câblés. Fréq. de départ / Fréquence de fin.: définit la fréquence de départ ou de fin (différente dans chaque pays). Taux de symbole: affiche les taux de symboles disponibles. Modulation: affiche les valeurs de modulation disponibles. Français◀ ▶ ■ Recherche manuelle O MENUm → Canal → Recherche manuelle → ENTERE Recherche manuellement une chaîne et la mémorise dans le téléviseur. N Si une chaîne est verrouillée, la fenêtre de saisie du code PIN s'affiche. N En fonction de la source des chaînes, il se peut que la fonction Recherche manuelle soit prise en charge. Lorsque la source d'antenne est réglée sur Hertzien ou Câble : ● Réglage des chaînes numériques: recherche manuellement une chaîne numérique et la mémorise dans le téléviseur. Appuyez sur le bouton Nouveau pour lancer la recherche des chaînes numériques. Au terme de la recherche, les chaînes de la liste sont mises à jour. – Lorsque vous sélectionnez Antenne → Hertzien: Canal, Fréquence, Bande passante – Lorsque vous sélectionnez Antenne → Câble: Fréquence, Modulation, Taux de symbole Français◀ ▶ ● Réglage des chaînes analogiques: recherche une chaîne analogique. Appuyez sur le bouton Nouveau pour démarrer la recherche des chaînes en réglant les valeurs Programme, Système de Couleur, Système Sonore, Canal, Rech.. N Mode Canal – P (mode de programme) A la fin du réglage, des numéros de position compris entre P0 et P99 sont attribués aux stations de radiodiffusion de votre région. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez sélectionner une chaîne en saisissant son numéro de position. – C (mode de canal Hertzien) / S (mode de canal Câble) ces deux modes vous permettent de sélectionner une chaîne en entrant le numéro attribué à chaque chaîne câblée ou station de radiodiffusion hertzienne. Français◀ ▶ ■ Transf. liste chaînes (en fonction du pays) O MENUm → Canal → Transf. liste chaînes → ENTERE Importe ou exporte la carte des chaînes. Vous devez connecter un périphérique de stockage USB pour utiliser cette fonction. N L'écran de saisie du code PIN s'affiche. Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. N Le système de fichiers prend en charge les formats NTFS (lecture seule), FAT16 et FAT32. ● Importer depuis le périphérique USB: importer la liste des chaînes depuis le périphérique USB. ● Exporter vers le périphérique USB: exporter la liste des chaînes vers le périphérique USB. Français◀ ▶ ■ Réglage fin (chaînes analogiques uniquement) O MENUm → Canal → Réglage fin → ENTERE Si le signal est faible ou déformé, vous devez effectuer manuellement un réglage fin de la chaîne. N Les chaînes qui ont fait l'objet d'un réglage fin sont indiquées par un astérisque "*". N Pour réinitialiser le réglage fin, sélectionnez Réinit.. Français◀ ▶ ■ Modif. num. chaîne (Désactiver / Activer) (en fonction du pays) O MENUm → Canal → Modif. num. chaîne → ENTERE Utilisez cette option pour modifier le numéro des chaînes. Lorsque vous modifiez des numéros, les informations des chaînes ne sont pas mises à jour automatiquement. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Changement du mode Image prédéfini O MENUm → Image → Mode Image → ENTERE ■ Sélectionnez le type d’image que vous préférez. Mode Image t N Si vous connectez un PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que Loisirs et Standard. ● Dynamique: adapté à un environnement lumineux. ● Standard: adapté à un environnement normal. ● Naturel pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 : permet de réduire la fatigue oculaire. ● Cinéma: convient au visionnage de films dans une pièce sombre. ● Loisirs: adapté au visionnage de films et de jeux vidéo. N Cette option n’est disponible que si vous connectez un PC. Fonctions de base Français◀ ▶ ❑ Réglages des paramètres de l’image ■ Samsung MagicAngle pour les téléviseurs LED 22 pouces de la série 4 O MENUm → Image → Samsung MagicAngle → ENTERE Ajustez l’angle de visualisation afin d’optimiser la qualité d’image en fonction de votre angle de vue. ● Samsung MagicAngle: lorsque vous visionnez l'écran d'un point de vueinférieur ou supérieur à celui-ci, vous pouvez obtenir une qualité d'image similaire à celle que vous auriez en face de l'écran, et ce en le réglant sur le mode approprié à chaque position. Arrêt: sélectionnez cette option pour la vue de face. Mode Penché: sélectionnez ce bouton lorsque vous vous situez d’un point de vue légèrement inférieur à l’écran. Mode Debout: sélectionnez cette option pour une vue supérieure. ● Mode: règle l'angle de visualisation de l'écran. N Lorsque l'option Samsung MagicAngle est définie sur Mode Penché ou Mode Debout, la fonction Gamma n'est pas disponible. Français◀ ▶ ■ Rétroéclairage / Contraste / Luminosité / Netteté / Couleur / Teinte (V/R) Votre téléviseur dispose de plusieurs options de réglage pour le contrôle de la qualité d’image. N REMARQUE ● La fonction Teinte (V/R) n’est pas disponible dans les modes TV, Ext., AV analogiques du système PAL. Les téléviseurs LED de la série 4 ne prennent pas en charge le mode AV, Composant ● Lors de la connexion à un ordinateur, vous pouvez uniquement apporter des modifications aux options Rétroéclairage, Contraste, Luminosité et Netteté. ● Les paramètres peuvent être réglés et mémorisés pour chaque dispositif externe connecté au téléviseur. ● La réduction de la luminosité de l’image se traduit par une consommation d’énergie moindre. Français◀ ▶ ■ Réglage de l’écran O MENUm → Image → Réglage de l’écran → ENTERE Définissez les différentes options d'image (par exemple, le format de l'image et le rapport de format). ● Format de l'image: il se peut que votre décodeur câble / récepteur satellite dispose de son propre jeu de tailles d’écran. Il est toutefois vivement conseillé d’utiliser le mode 16:9. 16:9 Auto: règle automatiquement la taille de l'image sur le format 16:9. 16:9: règle l'image en mode large, c'est-à-dire en 16:9. Zoom large: agrandit l’image à une taille supérieure à 4:3. N Réglez la Position à l’aide des boutons ▲, ▼. Français◀ ▶ Zoom: agrandit l’image en 16:9 (dans le sens vertical) pour l’adapter à la taille de l’écran. N Réglez la Zoom ou la Position à l’aide des boutons ▲, ▼. 4:3: règle l'image en mode normal, c'est-à-dire en 4:3. N Ne regardez pas un film au format 4:3 pendant une période prolongée. Les traces de bordures situées sur la gauche, sur la droite et au centre de l’écran peuvent donner lieu au phénomène de rémanence (brûlure d’écran) non couvert par la garantie. Adapter à l’écran: affiche l’intégralité de l’image sans coupure lors de l’entrée de signaux HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) ou Composant (1080i / 1080p). Les téléviseurs LED de la série 4 ne prennent pas en charge le mode AV, Composant Français◀ ▶ Vue intell. 1 pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 : permet de réduire la taille de l'écran de 50%. Vue intell. 2 pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 : permet de réduire la taille de l'écran de 25%. N REMARQUE ● L'option Vue intell. 1 est uniquement activée en mode HDMI. ● L'option Vue intell. 2 est uniquement activée avec les modes DTV et HDMI. ● Le format de l'image peut varier en fonction de la résolution d'entrée en cas de lecture du contenu à l'aide de l'option Vidéos sous AllShare Play. ● Position: permet de régler la position de l'image. Cette option est uniquement disponible avec la fonction Adapter à l’écran ou Zoom large. Français◀ ▶ ● Zoom/Position: permet de régler la taille et la position de l'image. Cette option est uniquement disponible avec la fonction Zoom. N REMARQUE ● Après avoir sélectionné Adapter à l’écran en mode HDMI (1080i / 1080p) ou Composant (1080i / 1080p), il se peut que vous deviez centrer l’image Les téléviseurs LED de la série 4 ne prennent pas en charge le mode AV, Composant : 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Position. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲, ▼, ◄ ou ► pour déplacer l’image. ● Les options de taille de l’image peuvent varier en fonction de la source d’entrée. ● Si vous souhaitez réinitialiser la position que vous avez réglée, sélectionnez l'option Réinit. de l'écran Position. L'image est alors définie sur sa position par défaut. Français◀ ▶ ● Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode sélectionné. ● En mode PC, seuls les modes 16:9 et 4:3 peuvent être définis. ● Les paramètres peuvent être réglés et mémorisés pour chaque dispositif externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur. ● Si vous utilisez la fonction Adapter à l’écran avec l’entrée HDMI 720p, une ligne sera coupée en haut, en bas, à gauche et à droite, comme c’est le cas avec la fonction Overscan. ● Taille d'écran 4:3 (16:9 / Zoom large / Zoom / 4:3): disponible uniquement lorsque la taille d’image est définie sur 16:9 Auto. Vous pouvez déterminer la taille d’image souhaitée sur 4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) ou sur la taille d’origine. Chaque pays européen impose une taille d’image différente. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Modification des options d’image ■ Paramètres avancés O MENUm → Image → Paramètres avancés → ENTERE (Disponible en mode Standard / Cinéma) Vous pouvez régler les paramètres avancés de votre écran, notamment la couleur et le contraste. N Lors de la connexion à un ordinateur, vous pouvez uniquement apporter des modifications aux options Gamma et Balance blancs. Français◀ ▶ ● Contraste Dyn. (Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé): permet de régler le contraste de l’écran. ● Nuance de noir (Arrêt / Sombre / Plus sombre / Le plus sombre): sélectionnez le niveau de noir afin de régler la profondeur d’écran. ● Carnation: permet de régler la couleur de carnation. Paramètres avancés Contraste Dyn. Moyen Nuance de noir Arrêt Carnation 0 RVB uniquement Arrêt Espace de couleur Natif Balance blancs Gamma 0 ● RVB uniquement (Arrêt / Rouge / Vert / Bleu): affiche les couleurs Rouge, Vert et Bleu afin de permettre un réglage précis de la teinte et de la saturation. ● Espace de couleur (Auto. / Natif): permet de régler la gamme des couleurs disponibles pour créer l'image. Français◀ ▶ ● Balance blancs: permet de régler la température des couleurs afin d’obtenir une image plus naturelle. Aj. Rouge / Aj. Vert / Aj. Bleu: permet de régler la profondeur de chaque couleur (rouge, vert, bleu). Régl. Rouge / Régl. vert / Régl. bleu: permet de régler la profondeur de chaque couleur (rouge, vert, bleu). Réinit.: rétablit les paramètres par défaut de l’option Balance blancs. ● Gamma: permet de régler l’intensité des couleurs primaires. ● Lumin./Mouvement (Arrêt / Activé): permet de réduire la consommation d'énergie en contrôlant la luminosité par rapport au mouvement. N Cette fonction n'est pas prise en charge en mode 3D. pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 N Disponible uniquement en mode Standard. N Lors du changement d'un paramètre pour l'option Rétroéclairage, Luminosité ou Contraste, l'option Lumin./Mouvement sera définie sur Arrêt. Français◀ ▶ ■ Options d'image O MENUm → Image → Options d'image → ENTERE N Si vous connectez un PC, vous ne pouvez modifier que Nuance Coul.. ● Nuance Coul. (Froide / Standard / Chaude 1 / Chaude 2) N Les options Chaude 1 ou Chaude 2 sont désactivées lorsque le mode d’image est Dynamique. N Les paramètres peuvent être réglés et mémorisés pour chaque dispositif externe connecté à une entrée du téléviseur. Français◀ ▶ ● Filtre Bruit num. (Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Auto. / Visualisation auto): Si le signal de radiodiffusion reçu par votre téléviseur est faible, vous pouvez activer la fonction Filtre Bruit num. pour faciliter la réduction d'imagesfantômes ou statiques qui peuvent apparaître à l'écran. N Lorsque le signal est faible, sélectionnez une autre option jusqu'à obtention de la meilleure image possible. Visualisation auto: Lors du changement des chaînes analogiques, il affiche l'intensité du signal. N Disponible uniquement pour les chaînes analogiques. N Une pression sur le bouton INFO affiche la barre de puissance du signal. N Lorsque la barre est verte, vous recevez le meilleur signal possible. ● Filtre Bruit MPEG (Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Auto.): réduit le bruit MPEG afin d’offrir une meilleure qualité d’image. Français◀ ▶ ● Niv. noir HDMI (Bas / Normal): permet de choisir le niveau de noir pour régler la profondeur de l’écran. N Disponible uniquement en mode HDMI (signaux RVB). ● Mode Film (Arrêt / Auto.1 / Auto.2): règle le téléviseur de sorte qu’il détecte et traite automatiquement les signaux de cinéma en provenance de toutes les sources et adapte l’image afin d’obtenir une qualité optimale. N Disponible en modes TV, AV, COMPOSANT (480i / 1080i) et HDMI (1080i). Les téléviseurs LED de la série 4 ne prennent pas en charge le mode AV, Composant N Si l’image à l’écran ne semble pas naturelle, définissez sa configuration sur Arrêt / Auto.1 / Auto.2 dans Mode Film. Français◀ ▶ ● Motion Plus (Arrêt / Précis / Standard / Fluide / Personnalisé / Demo) pour les téléviseur LED de la série 6  : permet de supprimer les traînées des scènes rapides avec beaucoup de mouvements, ce qui rend l'image plus nette. N L'écran Infos de votre téléviseur affiche la résolution et la fréquence du signal entrant (60 Hz), et non la fréquence générée par le téléviseur pour l'image affichée à l'aide de la fonction Motion Plus. N Si des parasites apparaissent sur l'écran, configurez la fonction Motion Plus sur Arrêt. Si la fonction Motion Plus est définie sur Personnalisé, vous pouvez configurer manuellement l'option Réduction de flou, Réduc. vibrations ou Réinit.. N Si la fonction Motion Plus est définie sur Démo, vous pouvez comparer la différence entre les modes Arrêt et Marche. Français◀ ▶ Réduction de flou : règle le niveau de réduction du flou à partir des sources vidéo. Réduc. vibrations : règle le niveau de réduction des vibrations à partir des sources vidéo lors de la lecture de films. Réinit. : restaure les paramètres par défaut. ● Motion Plus LED (Arrêt / Activé) pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 : supprime les traînées des scènes rapides avec beaucoup de mouvements, ce qui rend l’image plus claire. N Il est désactivé lorsque le mode d’image est défini sur Naturel. N L'écran est susceptible de légèrement s'assombrir lors de l'utilisation de la fonction Motion Plus LED. Français◀ ▶ ■ Réinit. param. img (Oui / Non) O MENUm → Image → Réinit. param. img → ENTERE Rétablit les paramètres par défaut du mode d’image actuel. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Changement du mode Son prédéfini ■ O Mode Son MENUm t→ Son → Mode Son → ENTERE ● Standard: sélectionne le mode son normal. ● Musique: accentue la musique par rapport aux voix. ● Cinéma: offre le meilleur son pour les films. ● Voix claire: accentue les voix par rapport aux autres sons. ● Amplifier: augmente l’intensité du son aigu pour garantir une meilleure écoute aux personnes malentendantes. N Si l’option Sélection Haut-parleur est définie sur Haut-parleur ext, Mode Son est désactivé. pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 Français◀ ▶ ❑ Réglage des paramètres sonores ■ Effet sonore O MENUm → Son → Effet sonore → ENTERE Utilisez les touches fléchées vers le haut et le bas pour sélectionner une option, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. ● (mode de son standard uniquement) SRS TruSurround HD (Arrêt / Activé) t Cette fonction garantit un son surround virtuel 5.1 canaux par le biais de deux haut-parleurs grâce à la technologie HRTF (Head Related Transfer Function - Fonction de transfert asservie aux mouvements de la tête). Français◀ ▶ ● SRS TruDialog (Arrêt / Activé) (mode de son standard uniquement) Cette fonction permet d’accentuer l’intensité d’une voix par rapport au fond musical ou aux effets sonores, de manière à rendre les dialogues plus clairs lorsque vous regardez une émission. ● Egaliseur (mode de son standard uniquement) Utilisez l’égaliseur pour personnaliser les paramètres de son de chaque hautparleur. Balance: règle la balance entre les haut-parleurs droit et gauche. 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (Réglage de la bande passante): règle le niveau des fréquences de bande passante spécifiques. Réinit.: rétablit les paramètres par défaut de l’égaliseur. N Si l’option Sélection Haut-parleur est définie sur Haut-parleur ext, Effet sonore est désactivé. pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 Français◀ ▶ ■ Options diffusion du son O MENUm → Son → Options diffusion du son → ENTERE ● (chaînes numériques uniquement) Langue audio t Permet de modifier la valeur par défaut des langues audio. N La langue disponible peut varier en fonction de l’émission. ● Format Audio (chaînes numériques uniquement) Lorsque le son est émis à la fois par le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio, un effet d’écho peut se produire en raison de la différence de vitesse de décodage entre le hautparleur principal et le récepteur audio. Dans ce cas, utilisez la fonction Haut-parleur TV. N L’option Format Audio peut varier en fonction de l’émission. Le son Dolby Digital 5.1 est disponible uniquement en cas de connexion d’un haut parleur externe au moyen d’un câble optique. Le modèle LED de la série 4 n'est pas pris en charge Français◀ ▶ ● Description audio (non disponible dans toutes les régions) (chaînes numériques uniquement) Cette fonction traite le flux audio relatif à la description audio (AD) lorsqu’il est envoyé avec le son principal par le radiodiffuseur. Description audio (Arrêt / Activé): active ou désactive la fonction de description audio. Volume: permet de régler le volume de description audio. Français◀ ▶ ■ Paramètres supplém. O MENUm → Son → Paramètres supplém. → ENTERE ● Niveau Audio DTV (MPEG / HE-AAC) (chaînes numériques uniquement): cette fonction vous permet de réduire la disparité d’un signal vocal (à savoir l’un des signaux reçus lors d’une émission de télévision numérique) sur le niveau souhaité. N En fonction du type de signal de radiodiffusion, les options MPEG / HEAAC peuvent être réglées sur une valeur comprise entre -10 dB et 0 dB. N Pour augmenter ou diminuer le volume, réglez ces valeurs entre 0 et -10, respectivement. Français◀ ▶ ● Sortie SPDIF pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 : le format SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital InterFace) est utilisé pour fournir du son numérique, en réduisant les interférences vers les haut-parleurs et divers dispositifs numériques, tels qu’un lecteur DVD. Format Audio: vous pouvez sélectionner le format de sortie audio numérique (SPDIF). Le format SPDIF disponible peut varier en fonction de la source d'entrée. N La connexion de haut-parleurs 5.1 canaux dans un environnement Dolby Digital vous permet d’optimiser votre environnement sonore 3D interactif. Retard Audio: cette option permet de corriger le décalage audio/vidéo lorsque vous regardez la télévision ou une vidéo et diffusez la sortie audio numérique sur un dispositif externe tel qu’un récepteur AV (0ms ~ 250ms). Français◀ ▶ ● Comp Dolby Digital (Line / RF): cette fonction réduit la disparité entre un signal Dolby Digital et un signal vocal (à savoir, Audio MPEG, HE-AAC, Son ATV). N Sélectionnez Line pour obtenir un son dynamique et RF pour réduire la différence entre les sons forts et faibles pendant la nuit. Line: permet de définir le niveau de sortie des signaux supérieurs ou inférieurs à -31 dB (référence) sur -20 dB ou -31 dB. RF: permet de définir le niveau de sortie des signaux supérieurs ou inférieurs à -20 dB (référence) sur -10 dB ou -20 dB. Français◀ ▶ ■ Paramètres haut-parleur O MENUm → Son → Paramètres haut-parleur → ENTERE ● Sélection Haut-parleur (Haut-parleur ext / Haut-parleur TV) pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 Un effet d’écho peut se produire en raison de la différence de vitesse de décodageentre le haut-parleur principal et le récepteur audio. Dans ce cas, réglez le téléviseur sur Haut-parleur ext. N Lorsque l'option Sélection Haut-parleur est définie sur Haut-parleur ext, les boutons de volume et MUTE ne sont pas opérationnels et les paramètres sonores sont limités. N Lorsque l'option Sélection Haut-parleur est définie sur Haut-parleur ext. ● Haut-parleur TV: Arrêt, Haut-parleur ext: Marche N Lorsque l'option Sélection Haut-parleur est définie sur Haut-parleur TV. ● Haut-parleur TV: Marche, Haut-parleur ext: Marche N En l’absence de signal vidéo, les deux haut-parleurs sont coupés. Français◀ ▶ ● Volume auto (Arrêt / Normal / Nuit) Pour équilibrer le niveau de volume sur chaque canal, définissez cette option sur Normal. Nuit: ce mode garantit un environnement sonore de meilleure qualité que le mode Normal, avec une absence pratiquement totale de parasites. Il s’avère particulièrement utile pendant la nuit. N Pour contrôler le niveau de volume sur le périphérique source connecté au téléviseur, définissez l’option Volume auto sur Arrêt sur le téléviseur. Sinon, il se peut que les réglages du volume du périphérique source ne soient pas appliqués. Français◀ ▶ ■ Réinit. son (Oui / Non) O MENUm → Son → Réinit. son → ENTERE Rétablit les paramètres sonores par défaut définis en usine. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Sélection du mode Son Lorsque vous définissez cette option sur tDual I-II, le mode son actuel est affiché à l’écran. Type d'audio Dual I-II Par défaut Stéréo A2 Mono Mono Changement automatique Stéréo Stéréo ↔ Mono Dual Dual I ↔ Dual II Dual I NICAM Stéréo Mono Mono Changement automatique Stéréo Mono ↔ Stéréo Dual Mono → Dual I  Dual II  Dual I N Si le signal stéréo est faible et qu’une commutation automatique se produit, passez en Mono. N Cette fonction n’est activée qu’avec un signal sonore stéréo. N Accessible uniquement lorsque la Source est définie sur TV. Français◀ ▶ Fonctions de préférence ❑ Connexion au réseau pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 ■ Connexion réseau câblée Vous pouvez connecter votre téléviseur au réseau local avec un câble de trois manières différentes : Français◀ ▶ ● En connectant le port LAN situé à l'arrière du téléviseur à un modem externe à l'aide d'un câble LAN. Reportez-vous au schéma ci-dessous. * Susceptible de varier en fonction du modèle. Connecteur Modem mural Modem externe (ADSL / VDSL / TV par câble) Panneau arrière du téléviseur Câble Modem Câble LAN Français◀ ▶ ● En connectant le port LAN situé à l'arrière du téléviseur à un routeur IP connecté, à son tour, à un modem externe. Pour cela, utilisez le câble LAN. Reportez-vous au schéma ci-dessous. * Susceptible de varier en fonction du modèle. Connecteur Modem mural Modem externe (ADSL / VDSL / TV par câble) Routeur IP (avec serveur DHCP) Panneau arrière du téléviseur Câble Modem Câble LAN Câble LAN Français◀ ▶ ● En fonction de la configuration de votre réseau, il se peut que vous puissiez connecter directement le port LAN situé à l'arrière du téléviseur à une prise réseau murale à l'aide d'un câble LAN. Reportez-vous au schéma ci-dessous. Notez que la prise murale est reliée à un modem ou un routeur installé quelque part chez vous. * Susceptible de varier en fonction du Port LAN mural modèle. Panneau arrière du téléviseur Câble LAN ● Si votre réseau requiert une adresse IP dynamique, vous devez utiliser un routeur ou un modem ADSL prenant en charge le protocole DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Français◀ ▶ Les modems de ce type fournissent automatiquement l'adresse IP, le masque de sous-réseau, la passerelle et les valeurs DNS dont votre téléviseur a besoin pour accéder à Internet. Aucune saisie manuelle n'est donc requise. La plupart des réseaux domestiques utilisent une adresse IP dynamique. Certains réseaux nécessitent une adresse IP statique. Si tel est votre cas, vous devez saisir manuellement l'adresse IP, le masque de sous-réseau, la passerelle et les valeurs DNS dans l'écran de configuration câblée de votre téléviseur lors de la configuration de la connexion réseau. Pour obtenir l'adresse IP, le masque de sous-réseau, la passerelle et les valeurs DNS, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. Si vous possédez un ordinateur Windows, vous pouvez également obtenir ces valeurs par le biais de ce dernier. N Si votre réseau nécessite une adresse IP statique, vous pouvez utiliser un modem ADSL prenant en charge le protocole DHCP. Les modems ADSL prenant en charge le protocole vous permettent également d'utiliser des adresses IP statiques. N Elle n'est pas prise en charge lorsque la vitesse du réseau est égale ou inférieure à 10 Mbit/s. Français◀ ▶ ■ Connexion réseau sans fil Pour établir une connexion sans fil entre le téléviseur et le réseau, vous avez besoin d'un routeur ou d'un modem sans fil et d'un adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung (WIS12ABGNX,WIS09ABGNX), que vous connectez au port USB situé sur le panneau latéral ou arrière du téléviseur. Reportez-vous à l'illustration cidessous. Câble LAN Routeur IP sans fil (routeur sans fil avec serveur DHCP) Adaptateur sans fil SamsungAdaptateur LAN Panneau latéral du téléviseur Port LAN mural Français◀ ▶ L’adaptateur LAN sans fil de Samsung est vendu séparément, et est disponible auprès de certains revendeurs et sur les sites de commerce électronique. Cet adaptateur prend en charge les protocoles de communication IEEE 802.11a/b/ g et n. Samsung vous conseille d'utiliser le protocole IEEE 802.11n. Si vous lisez une vidéo sur une connexion réseau, des saccades risquent d’apparaître. N REMARQUE ● Vous devez employer l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung (WIS12ABGNX, WIS09ABGNX) pour utiliser un réseau sans fil. ● L’adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung et le câble d’extension USB sont vendus séparément, et sont disponibles auprès de certains revendeurs et sur les sites de commerce électronique. Français◀ ▶ ● Pour utiliser un réseau sans fil, vous devez connecter le téléviseur à un routeur IP sans fil (un routeur ou un modem). Si ce routeur prend en charge le protocole DHCP, le téléviseur peut utiliser DHCP ou une adresse IP statique pour se connecter au réseau sans fil. ● Sélectionnez un canal inutilisé pour le routeur IP sans fil. Si le canal affecté au routeur IP sans fil est actuellement utilisé par un autre périphérique dans le voisinage, il y aura des interférences et la communication peut échouer ● Si vous utilisez des paramètres de sécurité différents de ceux indiqués cidessous, le routeur ne fonctionnera pas avec le téléviseur. Français◀ ▶ ● Si le mode HIGH PURE THROUGHPUT (Greenfield) 802.11N est sélectionné et que le type de cryptage est défini sur WEP ou TKIP pour votre routeur sans fil, les téléviseurs Samsung ne prendront pas en charge la connexion, conformément aux nouvelles spécifications de certification Wi-Fi. ● Si votre routeur sans fil prend en charge le WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), vous pouvez vous connecter au réseau via PBC (Push Button Configuration) ou à l'aide d'un code PIN (Personal Indentification Number). La fonction WPS configurera automatiquement le SSID et la clé WPA dans ces deux modes. ● Si votre routeur, modem ou appareil n'est pas certifié, il risque de ne pas pouvoir se connecter au téléviseur via l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung. ● Veillez à ce que le téléviseur soit éteint avant de connecter l’adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung. Français◀ ▶ ● Méthodes de connexion: Vous pouvez configurer la connexion réseau sans fil de la manière indiquée ci-dessous. – Auto. (Utilisation de la fonction Auto Network Search) – Manuel – WPS(PBC) ● L'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung peut ne pas être reconnu si vous utilisez une connexion par hub USB ou par câble d'extension USB autre que le câble fourni. Français◀ ▶ Avis L'image peut apparaître altérée ou statique pour certaines chaînes lorsque le téléviseur est connecté à l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung. Le cas échéant, établissez une connexion à l'aide de l'une des méthodes suivantes ou branchez l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung avec un câble USB à un emplacement préservé de toute interférence radio. Méthode 1 Connexion à l'aide de l'adaptateur USB à angle droit. Pour brancher l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung avec l'adaptateur USB à angle droit, procédez comme suit : 1. Connectez l'adaptateur USB à angle droit à l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung. 2. Connectez l'autre partie de l'adaptateur USB à angle droit au port USB. * L'emplacement du port peut varier en fonction du modèle. Français◀ ▶ Méthode 2 Connexion via un câble d'extension Pour rebrancher l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung avec le câble d'extension, procédez comme suit : 1. Connectez le câble d'extension au port USB. 2. Connectez le câble d'extension à l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung. 3. Attachez l'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung à l'arrière du téléviseur vers le haut avec du ruban adhésif double face. N L’adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung doit être installé dans une zone préservée de toute interférence afin d’éviter toute interférence entre l’adaptateur et le syntoniseur. ou * L'emplacement du port peut varier en fonction du modèle. Français◀ ▶ ■ Paramètres réseau O MENUm → Réseau → Paramètres réseau → ENTERE Vous pouvez configurer la connexion réseau sans fil ou câblée. N Pour consulter des paramètres détaillés sur le réseau câblé ou sans fil, consultez, respectivement, la section "Configuration du réseau câblé" ou "Configuration du réseau sans fil" de ce manuel. Français◀ ▶ ■ État du réseau O MENUm → Réseau → État du réseau → ENTERE Vérifiez l'état Internet et du réseau. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Configuration du réseau câblé pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 ■ Configuration du réseau câblé (Auto) N Lors de la connexion du câble réseau (LAN), la fenêtre contextuelle s'affiche automatiquement pour vous permettre de définir le réseau câblé. Utilisez l'option de configuration automatique du réseau lors de la connexion du téléviseur à un réseau prenant en charge le protocole DHCP. Pour configurer automatiquement la connexion réseau par câble de votre téléviseur, procédez comme suit : Français◀ ▶ Procédure de configuration automatique 1. Accédez à l'écran Paramètres réseau. 2. Sélectionnez Démarrer. 3. L'écran de connexion réseau s'affiche et la configuration du réseau est effectuée. Paramètres réseau Câble réseau connecté. Appuyez sur Démarrer pour configurer vos paramètres de réseau câblé. Pour vous connecter à votre réseau sans fil, branchez un Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. Démarrer Annuler N Si la configuration automatique échoue, vérifiez la connexion du port LAN. N Si les valeurs de connexion réseau sont introuvables ou si vous souhaitez définir la connexion manuellement, définissez cette option sur Manuel. Reportez-vous à la section "Procédure de configuration manuelle" ci-après. Français◀ ▶ ■ Configuration du réseau câblé (Manuel) Utilisez l'option de configuration manuelle du réseau lors de la connexion du téléviseur à un réseau qui nécessite une adresse IP statique. Obtention des valeurs de connexion au réseau Pour obtenir les valeurs de connexion au réseau sur la plupart des ordinateurs Windows, procédez comme suit : 1. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône Réseau située dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. 2. Cliquez sur Etat dans le menu contextuel. 3. Cliquez sur l'onglet Assistance dans la boîte de dialogue affichée. 4. Cliquez sur le bouton Détails de l'onglet Assistance. Les valeurs de connexion au réseau sont affichées. Français◀ ▶ Procédure de configuration manuelle Pour configurer automatiquement la connexion réseau par câble de votre téléviseur, procédez comme suit : 1. Suivez les étapes 1 et 2 de la "Procédure de configuration automatique". 2. Sélectionnez Param. IP dans l'écran de test du réseau. 3. Définissez l'option Param. IP sur Entrer manuellement. 4. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour accéder au premier champ de saisie. Param. IP R Retour OK Param. IP Entrer manuellement Adresse IP 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Masque ss-réseau 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Passerelle 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Param. DNS Entrer manuellement Serveur DNS 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 5. Entrez les valeurs Adresse IP, Masque ss-réseau, Passerelle, et Serveur DNS. Utilisez les touches numériques pour saisir des chiffres et les touches fléchées pour passer d'un champ de saisie à un autre. 6. Lorsque vous avez terminé, sélectionnez OK. 7. L'écran de connexion réseau s'affiche et la configuration du réseau est effectuée. Français◀ ▶ Liste de contrôle relative à l'échec de la connexion réseau câblée Lorsque la connexion réseau câblée échoue, essayez d'appliquer les informations suivantes à chaque problème. Problèmes Solutions et explications Aucun câble détecté. • Vérifiez que votre câble réseau est branché. • Si tel est le cas, assurez-vous que le routeur est sous tension ; le cas échéant, essayez de l'éteindre, puis de le rallumer. Echec de la définition automatique de l'adresse IP. Tentez l'opération suivante pour définir automatiquement votre adresse IP ou définissez-la manuellement en sélectionnant Param. IP. • Assurez-vous que le serveur DHCP est activé sur le routeur, puis débranchez et rebranchez le routeur. • Contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour plus d'informations. Français◀ ▶ Problèmes Solutions et explications Connexion au réseau impossible. • Vérifiez si votre adresse IP est définie correctement dans Param. IP. • Contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour plus d'informations. Connexion à votre réseau local établie, mais connexion à Internet impossible. • Vérifiez que votre câble LAN est connecté correctement au port LAN du routeur. • Vérifiez les paramètres DNS dans Param. IP. • Si le problème persiste, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour pouvoir accéder à Internet. Configuration du réseau terminée, mais connexion à Internet impossible. • Vérifiez que votre routeur est connecté à Internet. • Si le problème persiste, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour pouvoir accéder à Internet. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Configuration du réseau sans fil pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 ■ Configuration du réseau sans fil (Auto) La plupart des réseaux sans fil disposent d'un système de sécurité en option nécessitant l'accès de périphériques au réseau pour transmettre un code de sécurité crypté appelé clé d'accès ou de sécurité. Le code de sécurité repose sur une phrase secrète, qui correspond généralement à un mot ou une série de lettres et de chiffres d'une longueur définie, que vous devez saisir lors de la configuration de la sécurité sans fil au niveau de votre réseau sans fil. Si vous optez pour cette méthode de configuration pour la connexion réseau et que vous disposez d'un code de sécurité pour votre réseau sans fil, vous devrez entrer la phrase secrète lors de la procédure de configuration. N Lors de la connexion d'un adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung, la fenêtre contextuelle s'affiche automatiquement pour vous permettre de configurer le réseau sans fil. Français◀ ▶ Procédure de configuration automatique 1. Accédez à l'écran Paramètres réseau. 2. Sélectionnez Démarrer. 3. La fonction Réseau recherche les réseaux sans fil disponibles. Lorsque vous avez terminé, la liste des réseaux disponibles s'affiche. Paramètres réseau Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter connecté. Appuyez sur Démarrer pour configurer vos paramètres de réseau sans fil. Pour vous connecter à votre réseau câblé, branchez un câble réseau. Démarrer Annuler 4. Dans la liste des réseaux, appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner un réseau, puis sur le bouton ENTERE. N Si le routeur sans fil est caché (Invisible), vous devez sélectionner l'option Ajouter réseau, et entrer le nom de réseau et le code de sécurité corrects pour établir la connexion. Français◀ ▶ 5. Si la fenêtre contextuelle Sécurité s'affiche, passez à l'étape 6. Si vous sélectionnez le routeur sans fil non sécurisé, passez à l'étape 7. 6. Si le routeur sans fil est sécurisé, entrez le code de sécurité (Sécurité ou code PIN). N Lors de la saisie du code de sécurité (Sécurité ou PIN), utilisez les boutons ▲/▼/◄ /► pour sélectionner des chiffres/caractères. Appuyez sur ENTERE pour saisir les caractères. N Vous devriez retrouver la phrase secrète dans l'un des écrans de configuration utilisés pour la configuration de votre routeur ou modem. 7. L'écran de connexion réseau s'affiche et la configuration du réseau est effectuée. N Si la définition du code de sécurité (Sécurité ou PIN) échoue, sélectionnez Réessayer ou Param. IP. N Si vous souhaitez définir manuellement la connexion, sélectionnez l'option Param. IP. Reportez-vous à la section "Procédure de configuration manuelle" ci-après. Français◀ ▶ ■ Configuration du réseau sans fil (Manuel) Utilisez l'option de configuration manuelle du réseau lors de la connexion du téléviseur à un réseau qui nécessite une adresse IP statique. Obtention des valeurs de connexion au réseau Pour obtenir les valeurs de connexion au réseau sur la plupart des ordinateurs Windows, procédez comme suit : 1. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône Réseau située dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. 2. Cliquez sur Etat dans le menu contextuel. 3. Cliquez sur l'onglet Assistance dans la boîte de dialogue affichée. 4. Cliquez sur le bouton Détails de l'onglet Assistance. Les valeurs de connexion au réseau sont affichées. Français◀ ▶ Procédure de configuration manuelle Pour configurer automatiquement la connexion réseau par câble de votre téléviseur, procédez comme suit : 1. Suivez les étapes 1 et 7 de la "Procédure de configuration automatique". 2. Sélectionnez Param. IP dans l'écran de test du réseau. 3. Définissez l'option Param. IP sur Entrer manuellement. 4. Appuyez sur le bouton ▼ pour accéder au premier champ de saisie. 5. Entrez les valeurs Adresse IP, Masque ss-réseau, Passerelle, et Serveur DNS. Utilisez les touches numériques pour saisir des chiffres et les touches fléchées pour passer d'un champ de saisie à un autre. 6. Lorsque vous avez terminé, sélectionnez OK. 7. L'écran de connexion réseau s'affiche et la configuration du réseau est effectuée. Français◀ ▶ ■ Configuration du réseau sans fil (WPS(PBC)) Si votre routeur est pourvu d'un bouton PBC(WPS), procédez comme suit : 1. Accédez à l'écran Paramètres réseau. 2. Sélectionnez Démarrer. 3. La fonction Réseau recherche les réseaux sans fil disponibles. Lorsque vous avez terminé, la liste des réseaux disponibles s'affiche. 4. Sélectionnez l'option WPS(PBC). 5. Appuyez sur le bouton WPS(PBC) de votre routeur dans les deux minutes. Votre téléviseur récupère automatiquement tous les paramètres réseau dont il a besoin et se connecte à votre réseau. 6. L'écran de connexion réseau s'affiche et la configuration du réseau est effectuée. Français◀ ▶ Echec au niveau de la liste de contrôle pour la connexion réseau sans fil Lorsque la connexion réseau sans fil échoue, essayez d'appliquer les informations suivantes à chaque problème. Problèmes Solutions et explications La connexion au réseau sans fil a échoué. • Aucun routeur sans fil sélectionné. Allez dans Paramètres réseau pour sélectionner votre routeur. • L'adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung est nécessaire pour utiliser un réseau sans fil. • Assurez-vous que le téléviseur est connecté à un routeur IP sans fil. Echec de la définition automatique de l'adresse IP. • Tentez l'opération suivante pour définir automatiquement votre adresse IP ou définissez-la manuellement en sélectionnant Param. IP. • Assurez-vous que le serveur DHCP est activé sur le routeur, puis débranchez et rebranchez le routeur. • Vérifiez si vous devez entrer un code de sécurité pour utiliser le routeur. • Contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour plus d'informations. Français◀ ▶ Problèmes Solutions et explications Connexion au routeur sans fil impossible. • Vérifiez que le routeur est sous tension ; le cas échéant, essayez de l'éteindre, puis de le rallumer. • Vérifiez si vous devez entrer un code de sécurité pour utiliser le routeur. Connexion au réseau impossible. • Vérifiez si votre adresse IP est définie correctement dans Param. IP. • Vérifiez si vous devez entrer un code de sécurité pour utiliser le routeur. • Contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour plus d'informations. Connexion à votre réseau local établie, mais connexion à Internet impossible. • Vérifiez que votre câble LAN est connecté correctement au port LAN du routeur. • Vérifiez les paramètres DNS dans Param. IP. • Si le problème persiste, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour pouvoir accéder à Internet. Configuration du réseau terminée, mais connexion à Internet impossible. • Vérifiez que votre routeur est connecté à Internet. • Si le problème persiste, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour pouvoir accéder à Internet. Français◀ ▶ Si le téléviseur ne parvient pas à se connecter à Internet Il se peut que votre téléviseur ne parvienne pas à se connecter à Internet du fait que votre fournisseur d'accès a enregistré de manière permanente l'adresse MAC (numéro d'identification unique) de votre PC ou modem, qui est authentifiée à chaque connexion à Internet afin d'éviter tout accès non autorisé. Dans la mesure où votre téléviseur possède une adresse MAC différente, votre fournisseur d'accès Internet ne peut pas l'authentifier, ce qui rend impossible toute connexion. Pour remédier à ce problème, demandez à votre fournisseur d’accès la procédure à suivre pour connecter des appareils autres que votre PC (votre téléviseur, par exemple) à Internet. Si votre fournisseur d'accès exige un identifiant (ID) ou un mot de passe pour la connexion à Internet, votre téléviseur ne pourra peut-être pas se connecter à Internet. Si tel est le cas, vous devez entrer l'identifiant ou le mot de passe lors de la connexion à Internet. La connexion à Internet peut échouer à cause d’un problème de pare-feu. Dans ce cas, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. Si vous ne parvenez toujours pas à vous connecter à Internet après avoir suivi les procédures indiquées par votre fournisseur d'accès, contactez Samsung Electronics. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Gestion des périphériques connectés au réseau pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 ■ Paramètres AllShare O MENUm → Réseau → Paramètres AllShare → ENTERE Indique si un périphérique connecté au réseau, tel qu'un smartphone ou une tablette, doit être autorisé ou non à partager du contenu ou à commander le téléviseur à l'aide d'une application téléchargée. Pour plus d'informations sur les options de configuration, reportez-vous à la section "Utilisation des fonctions DLNA". Français◀ ▶ ■ Nom du périph. O MENUm → Réseau → Nom du périph. → ENTERE Permet de modifier manuellement le nom du téléviseur. N Un clavier s'affiche à l'écran, vous donnant ainsi la possibilité de saisir manuellement un nom à l'aide de la télécommande. Si vous définissez, par exemple, le nom sur TV Samsung, appuyez sur chaque caractère à l'aide des boutons ▲/▼/◄/►, puis sélectionnez Terminé. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Exécution de la configuration initiale ■ Configuration O MENUm → Système → Configuration → ENTERE Réglez les chaînes et l'heure si vous configurez le téléviseur pour la première fois ou après une réinitialisation. N Pour des informations détaillées à propos du menu Configuration, reportezvous à la seciton "Configuration initiale" du Manuel de l'utilisateur. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Réglage de l’heure ■ Heure O MENUm → Système → Heure → ENTERE L’heure actuelle s’affiche à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton INFO. ● Horloge: le réglage de l’heure est nécessaire pour utiliser différentes fonctions de minuterie du téléviseur. N Si vous débranchez le cordon d’alimentation, vous devez régler de nouveau l’horloge. Mode Horloge: permet de définir l'heure manuellement ou automatiquement. – Auto.: règle automatiquement l'heure en fonction des signaux diffusés par une chaîne numérique. N L’antenne doit être connectée pour permettre le réglage automatique de l’heure. Français◀ ▶ – Manuel: permet de régler l'heure manuellement. N En fonction du signal et de la station de diffusion, il se peut que la configuration automatique de l’heure soit incorrecte. Dans ce cas, réglez l’heure manuellement. Réglage Horloge: permet de régler la Date et l'Heure. N Disponible uniquement lorsque l’option Mode Horloge est définie sur Manuel. N Vous pouvez régler directement la Date et l'Heure en appuyant sur les touches numériques de la télécommande. Fuseau Horaire (en fonction du pays): sélectionnez votre fuseau horaire. N Cette fonction est uniquement disponible lorsque Mode Horloge est défini sur Auto.. N Si vous sélectionnez l’option Manuel dans Fuseau Horaire, GMT et Heure d'été sont activés. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Utilisation de la veille O MENUm → Système → Heure → Veille → ENTERE ● Veillet: éteint automatiquement le téléviseur après une période déterminée. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 ou 180 minutes). N Pour annuler la fonction Veille, sélectionnez Arrêt. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Réglage de la minuterie de mise en marche / arrêt O MENUm → Système → Heure → Progr. activ. Progr. désact. → ENTERE ● Progr. activ. 1 / Progr. activ. 2 / Progr. activ. 3: Vous pouvez définir trois réglages de mise en marche différents. Vous devez d'abord régler l'horloge. – Configuration: Sélectionnez Une fois, Quotid., Lun~Ven, Lun~Sam, Sam~Dim ou Manuel pour définir l'option suivant vos besoins. Si vous sélectionnez Manuel, vous pouvez choisir le jour d'activation de la minuterie. N Le symbole c indique le jour sélectionné. – Heure: permet de régler les heures et les minutes. – Volume: sélectionnez le niveau de volume désiré. Français◀ ▶ – Source : permet de sélectionner la source du contenu lu au démarrage du téléviseur. Vous pouvez : ● Sélectionner TV et faire en sorte que le téléviseur affiche une chaîne hertzienne ou câblée spécifique. ● Sélectionner USB et faire en sorte que le téléviseur lise des fichiers photo ou audio à partir d'un périphérique USB. ● Sélectionner une source sur le téléviseur auquel vous avez connecté un boîtier décodeur et faire en sorte que le téléviseur affiche une chaîne à partir du décodeur. N Le périphérique USB doit être connecté à votre téléviseur pour que vous puissiez sélectionner USB. Français◀ ▶ N Si vous sélectionnez une source autre que TV ou USB, vous devez : ● Disposer d'un câble ou d'un décodeur satellite connecté à cette source. ● Définir sur le décodeur la chaîne que vous souhaitez regarder au démarrage du téléviseur. ● Laisser le boîtier décodeur sous tension. N Lorsque vous sélectionnez une source autre que TV ou USB, les options Antenna (Antenne) et Channel (Chaîne) disparaissent. – Antenne (lorsque Source est réglé sur TV): sélectionnez ATV ou DTV. – Canal (lorsque Source est réglé sur TV): permet de sélectionner la chaîne souhaitée. Français◀ ▶ – Musique / Photo (lorsque Source est réglé sur USB): sélectionnez un dossier de la clé USB contenant les fichiers de musique ou les photos qui doivent être lus lors de la mise sous tension automatique du téléviseur. N REMARQUE ● Si le périphérique USB ne contient aucun fichier audio ou si le dossier contenant un fichier audio n'est pas sélectionné, la fonction de veille ne fonctionne pas correctement. ● Si le périphérique USB ne contient qu'un seul fichier photo, la fonction de diaporama ne démarre pas. ● Les dossiers dont le nom est trop long ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés. Français◀ ▶ ● Chaque périphérique USB utilisé se voit attribuer son propre dossier. Si vous utilisez plusieurs périphériques USB du même type, assurez-vous que les dossiers affectés à chacun d’eux portent des noms différents. ● Il est conseillé d'utiliser une clé USB et un lecteur de cartes multiformat lors de l'utilisation de la fonction Progr. activ.. ● Il se peut que l'option Progr. activ. ne fonctionne pas avec certains périphériques USB équipés d'une batterie intégrée, ainsi que des lecteurs MP3 et lecteurs multimédias portables de certains fabricants, car leur reconnaissance prend trop de temps. Français◀ ▶ ● Progr. désact. 1 / Progr. désact. 2 / Progr. désact. 3: Vous pouvez définir trois réglages de mise à l'arrêt différents. Vous devez d'abord régler l'horloge. Configuration: Sélectionnez Une fois, Quotid., Lun~Ven, Lun~Sam, Sam~Dim ou Manuel pour définir l'option suivant vos besoins. Si vous sélectionnez Manuel, vous pouvez choisir le jour d'activation de la minuterie. N Le symbole c indique le jour sélectionné. Heure: permet de régler les heures et les minutes. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Verrouillage des programmes ■ Sécurité O MENUm → Système → Sécurité → ENTERE N L’écran de saisie du code PIN s’affiche après l’écran de configuration. N Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. Modifiez le code PIN à l’aide de l’option Modifier PIN. ● Verr. chaîne (Arrêt / Activé): vous pouvez verrouiller des chaînes dans le menu Canal afin d'empêcher certains utilisateurs, tels que des enfants, de regarder des émissions qui ne leur sont pas destinées. N Disponible uniquement lorsque la Source est définie sur TV. Français◀ ▶ ● Contrôle Parental (en fonction du pays): cette fonction permet d'empêcher certains utilisateurs, tels que des enfants, de regarder des émissions qui ne leur sont pas destinées, à l'aide d'un code PIN à 4 chiffres défini par l'utilisateur. Si la chaîne sélectionnée est verrouillée, le symbole “\” apparaît. N Les options de Contrôle Parental diffèrent selon le pays. ● Modifier PIN: Une modification de votre mot de passe est requise pour pouvoir configurer le téléviseur. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Solutions économiques ■ Solution Eco O MENUm → Système → Solution Eco → ENTERE ● Mode éco. (Arrêt / Bas / Moyen / Elevé / Image désactivée)t: permet de régler la luminosité du téléviseur afin de réduire la consommation d’énergie. Si vous sélectionnez Image désactivée, l’écran est éteint, mais le son reste actif. Appuyez sur n'importe quel bouton, excepté celui du volume, pour allumer l'écran. Français◀ ▶ ● Capteur Eco (Arrêt / Activé) pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 : cette fonction permet d’optimiser vos économies d’énergie ; les réglages de l’image s’adaptent automatiquement en fonction de la luminosité de la pièce. N Lors du réglage de la fonction Rétroéclairage, le Capteur Eco passe sur Arrêt. Rétro-écl. min lorsque Capteur Eco est défini sur Activé, la luminosité d’écran minimale peut être réglée manuellement. N Si Capteur Eco est Activé, la luminosité de l'écran peut changer (ildevient plus ou moins lumineux) en fonction de l'intensité de la lumière environnante. ● Veille si aucun signal (Arrêt / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min): pour éviter toute consommation d'énergie inutile, définissez la durée d'activation du téléviseur lorsqu'il ne reçoit pas de signal. N Il est désactivé lorsque le PC est en mode d’économie d’énergie. ● Hors ten. auto (Arrêt / Activé): le téléviseur s'éteint automatiquement si aucune activité n'est détectée pendant 4 heures. N Si l'option Hors ten. auto est définie sur Arrêt, le téléviseur restera allumé même si aucune opération n'y est effectuée. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Autres fonctionnalités ■ Langue O MENUm → Système → Langue → ENTERE ● Langue des menus: définissez la langue des menus. ● Langue du télétexte (selon le pays): sélectionnez la langue de votre choix pour le télétexte. N L’anglais est utilisé par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n’est pas diffusée. ● Langue favorite (Audio principal / Audio secondaire / Sous-titre principal / Sous-titre secondaire / Télétexte principal / Télétexte secondaire): sélectionnez la langue qui sera utilisée par défaut lors de la sélection d'une chaîne. N Il se peut que les options Télétexte principal et Télétexte secondaire ne soient pas prises en charge dans tous les pays. Français◀ ▶ ■ Sous-titres O MENUm → Système → Sous-titres→ ENTERE Utilisez ce menu pour définir le mode Sous-titres. ● Sous-titres (Arrêt / Activé): active ou désactive les sous-titres. ● Mode sous-titre (Normal / Malentendant): configure le mode des soustitres. ● Langue des sous-titres: définit la langue des sous-titres. N Si le programme visionné ne prend pas en charge la fonction Malentendant, le mode Normal est automatiquement activé, même si le mode Malentendant est sélectionné. N L’anglais est utilisé par défaut si la langue sélectionnée n’est pas diffusée. Français◀ ▶ ■ Texte numérique (Désactiver / Activer) (Royaume-Uni uniquement) O MENUm → Système → Texte numérique → ENTERE Si le programme diffuse du texte numérique, cette fonction est activée. N MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding Experts Group) Norme internationale pour les systèmes de codage des données utilisés avec le multimédia et l'hypermédia. Niveau supérieur à celui du système MPEG, qui inclut de l'hypermédia à liaison de données tel que des images fixes, le service de caractères, l'animation, les fichiers graphiques et vidéo et les données multimédia. MHEG est une technologie d'interaction de l'utilisateur en cours d'utilisation appliquée à divers domaines, dont la vidéo à la demande (VOD), la télévision interactive (ITV), le commerce électronique, la téléformation, la téléconférence, les bibliothèques numériques et les jeux en réseau. Français◀ ▶ ■ Temps protection auto O MENUm → Système → Temps protection auto → ENTERE ● Temps protection auto (Arrêt / 2 heures / 4 heures / 8 heures / 10 heures): Si l’écran est inutilisé et affiche une image fixe pendant une durée définie par l’utilisateur, l’économiseur d’écran est activé de manière à prévenir la formation d’images parasites sur l’écran. Français◀ ▶ ■ Général O MENUm → Système → Général → ENTERE ● Mode Jeu (Arrêt / Activé): lorsque vous connectez une console de jeux, telle qu’une PlayStation™ ou Xbox™, vous pouvez bénéficier d’une expérience ludique encore plus réaliste en sélectionnant le mode Jeu. N REMARQUE ● Précautions et restrictions du mode Jeu – Pour déconnecter la console de jeux et connecter un autre périphérique externe, définissez Mode Jeu sur Arrêt dans le menu de configuration. – Si vous affichez le menu du téléviseur en Mode Jeu, l’écran tremble légèrement. Français◀ ▶ ● Le Mode Jeu n'est pas disponible en mode TV. ● Après avoir connecté la console de jeux, définissez le Mode Jeu sur Activé. Malheureusement, il se peut que la qualité d'image soit moins bonne. ● Si Mode Jeu est défini sur Activé: – Le Mode Image est défini sur Standard et le Mode Son sur Cinéma. ● Verr. Touches (Arrêt / Activé): permet de verrouiller ou déverrouiller toutes les touches du panneau. ● Affich. logo (Arrêt / Activé): affichez le logo Samsung au démarrage de la TV. Français◀ ▶ ■ DivX® Vidéo à la demande O MENUm → Système → DivX® Vidéo à la demande → ENTERE affiche le code d’enregistrement autorisé pour le téléviseur. Connectez-vous au site Web DivX et enregistrez-vous à l’aide du code d’enregistrement à 10 chiffres pour pouvoir télécharger le fichier d’activation VOD. Une fois que vous exécutez ce dernier à l’aide de Vidéos, l’enregistrement est terminé. N Pour plus d'informations sur DivX® VOD, rendez-vous sur le site Web http:// vod.divx.com. Français◀ ▶ ■ Interface commune O MENUm → Système → Interface commune → ENTERE ● CI Menu: permet à l’utilisateur d’opérer une sélection dans le menu du module CAM. Sélectionnez le menu CI en fonction du menu PC Card. ● Transcodage vidéo CAM: Ce paramètre peut être configuré pour transcoder automatiquement le codec vidéo depuis la CAM. Définissez-le sur Arrêt si vous ne souhaitez pas l'utiliser. N vous devez utiliser une CAM prenant en charge le transcodage du codec vidéo. Français◀ ▶ ● Infos sur l’application: affiche des informations sur le module CAM inséré dans l’emplacement CI et sur la "CARTE CI ou CI+" insérée dans le module CAM. Vous pouvez installer le module CAM, que le téléviseur soit allumé ou éteint. 1. Vous pouvez acheter un module CI CAM chez le revendeur le plus proche ou le commander par téléphone. 2. Insérez fermement la "CARTE CI ou CI+" dans le module CAM en suivant le sens de la flèche. 3. Insérez le module CAM avec la "CARTE CI ou CI+" dans la fente de l’interface commune (dans le sens de la flèche), de telle sorte qu’il soit aligné parallèlement à la fente. 4. Vérifiez si une image est visible sur une chaîne à signal brouillé. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Menu Assistance ■ e-Manual O MENUm → Assistance → e-Manual → ENTERE Vous pouvez lire l'introduction et les instructions relatives aux fonctions de votre TV. N Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran du Manuel électronique, reportez-vous à la section "Consultation du manuel électronique" du Manuel de l'utilisateur. Français◀ ▶ ■ Diagnost. auto. O MENUm → Assistance → Diagnost. auto. → ENTERE N Le Diagnost. auto. peut prendre quelques secondes ; ce phénomène est normal. ● Test de l’image (Oui / Non): Utilisez cette option pour rechercher d'éventuels problèmes d'image. ● Test du son (Oui / Non): utilisez la mélodie intégrée pour rechercher d’éventuels problèmes sonores. N Si les haut-parleurs du téléviseur restent muets, avant d’effectuer le test du son, vérifiez que l’option Sélection Haut-parleur est réglée sur Hautparleur TV dans le menu Son. pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 N La mélodie est diffusée pendant le test, même si l’option Sélection Hautparleur est réglée sur Haut-parleur ext ou si le son a été désactivé en appuyant sur le bouton MUTE. pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 Français◀ ▶ ● Informations de signal (chaînes numériques uniquement): soit la qualité de réception des chaînes HDTV est parfaite, soit les chaînes ne sont pas disponibles. Réglez votre antenne afin d’augmenter l’intensité du signal. ● Réinit.: rétablit tous les paramètres par défaut, à l'exception des paramètres réseau. N L’écran de saisie du code PIN s’affiche après l’écran de configuration. N Entrez votre code PIN à quatre chiffres. Modifiez le code PIN à l’aide de l’option Modifier PIN. ● Résolution des problèmes: consultez cette description s’il vous semble que le téléviseur rencontre un problème. N Si aucun des conseils de dépannage ne s’applique au problème rencontré, contactez le service clientèle de Samsung. Français◀ ▶ ■ Mise à jour du logiciel O MENUm → Assistance → Mise à jour du logiciel → ENTERE La Mise à jour du logiciel peut être effectuée en téléchargeant le dernier micrologiciel depuis le site "www.samsung.com" vers une unité de stockage USB. Version actuelle-indique que le logiciel est déjà installé sur votre téléviseur. Installation de la version la plus récente ● USB: insérez la clé USB contenant le fichier de mise à niveau du microprogramme téléchargé sur www.samsung.com dans le téléviseur. Veillez à ne pas couper l’alimentation, ni retirer la clé USB tant que les mises à niveau ne sont pas terminées. Une fois la mise à niveau du microprogramme terminée, le téléviseur se met automatiquement hors tension, puis se rallume. Lorsque la mise à niveau du logiciel est terminée, les paramètres vidéo et audio par défaut sont réinitialisés. Il est conseillé de prendre note des paramètres afin de pouvoir les rétablir facilement après la mise à niveau. Français◀ ▶ ● En ligne pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 : permet de mettre à niveau le logiciel par Internet. N Commencez par configurer votre réseau. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de la fonction Config. du réseau, reportez-vous à la section "Paramètres réseau". N Si la connexion Internet ne fonctionne pas correctement, il se peut que la connexion soit interrompue. Réessayez le téléchargement. Si le problème persiste, effectuez la procédure de téléchargement USB et procédez à la mise à niveau. Français◀ ▶ ● Canal: met à niveau le logiciel en utilisant le signal de télédiffusion. N Si la fonction est sélectionnée pendant la période de transmission du logiciel, ce dernier est automatiquement recherché et téléchargé. N Le temps nécessaire au téléchargement du logiciel dépend de l’état du signal. ● Autre logiciel: remplace le logiciel actuel par la version de sauvegarde du logiciel. ● Mise à niveau en mode veille (Arrêt /1 h. plus tard / 2 h. plus tard / 00:00 / 02:00 / 12:00 / 14:00): Une mise à niveau manuelle sera automatiquement effectuée au moment que vous avez choisi. Etant donné que le courant est activé de façon interne, l'écran peut s'allumer brièvement pour le produit. Ce phénomène peut se produire pendant plus d'une heure, jusqu'à ce que la mise à jour logiciel soit terminée. Français◀ ▶ ■ Contacter Samsung O MENUm → Assistance → Contacter Samsung → ENTERE Consultez ces informations si le téléviseur ne fonctionne pas correctement ou si vous voulez mettre à niveau le logiciel. Vous y trouverez des informations concernant nos centres d’appel, ainsi que le téléchargement de nos produits et logiciels. Français◀ ▶ ■ Accueil contenu O MENUm → Assistance → Accueil contenu → ENTERE Vous bénéficiez de contenu utile et varié. Français◀ ▶ Fonctions avancées ❑ Utilisation de la fonction 3D pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 ■ 3D O MENUm → Image → 3D → ENTERE Cette nouvelle fonctionnalité vous permet de regarder du contenu 3D. N Le logo "Full HD 3D Glasses™" indique une compatibilité entre les produits d'affichage et les lunettes 3D conformes au format "Full HD 3D Glasses™". Cela n'indique pas la qualité d'image des produits d'affichage. Français◀ ▶ Regarder la télévision à l'aide de la fonction 3D INFORMATIONS IMPORTANTES SUR LA SECURITE ET LA PROTECTION DE LA SANTE CONCERNANT LES IMAGES EN 3D. Il est important de lire attentivement et de bien comprendre les informations de sécurité suivantes avant d'utiliser la fonction 3D de votre téléviseur. [AVERTISSEMENT ● Certaines personnes peuvent être victimes de vertiges, nausées et maux de tête lorsqu'elles regardent la télévision en 3D. Si vous présentez des symptômes de ce type, arrêtez de regarder la télévision en 3D, retirez les lunettes actives 3D et reposez-vous. ● Le fait de regarder des images 3D pendant une période prolongée peut causer une fatigue oculaire. Si vous présentez ce type de symptôme, arrêtez de regarder le téléviseur 3D, retirez les lunettes actives 3D et reposez-vous. Français◀ ▶ ● Des adultes doivent régulièrement vérifier que tout se passe bien pour les enfants qui utilisent la fonction 3D. Si un enfant se plaint de fatigue oculaire, de maux de tête, de vertiges ou de nausées, demandez-lui d'arrêter de regarder la télévision en 3D et de se reposer. ● N'utilisez pas les lunettes actives 3D à d'autres fins (par exemple, comme lunettes de vue, de soleil ou de protection). ● N'utilisez pas la fonction 3D ou les lunettes actives 3D lorsque vous marchez ou vous vous déplacez. Si vous utilisez la fonction 3D ou les lunettes actives 3D en vous déplaçant, vous pouvez vous blesser en trébuchant, en chutant et/ou en percutant des objets. Français◀ ▶ ● Mode 3D: permet de sélectionner le format d'entrée 3D. N Pour profiter pleinement de l'effet 3D, mettez les lunettes actives 3D, puis sélectionnez l'un des modes 3D décrits dans la liste ci-dessous pour obtenir une qualité 3D optimale. N Lorsque vous regardez des images 3D, allumez les lunettes actives 3D. Mode 3D Opération Arrêt Désactive la fonction 3D. 2D → 3D Change une image 2D en 3D. Côte à côte Affiche deux images côte à côte. Haut & Bas Affiche les images l'une au-dessus de l'autre. Français◀ ▶ N Certains formats de fichier ne sont pas pris en charge par le mode "2D → 3D". N Lorsque vous regardez des images 3D sous une lumière tremblotante comme une lampe fluorescente (50 Hz ~ 60 Hz) ou une lampe à 3 longueurs d'onde, il se peut que l'écran scintille légèrement. Si tel est le cas, atténuez l'intensité de l'éclairage ou éteignez la lumière. ● Perspective 3D (-5 ~ +5): permet de régler la perspective 3D globale de l'image à l'écran. ● Profondeur (1~10): permet de régler la profondeur globale. ● Modification G/D (Image G/D / Image D/G): intervertit les images gauche et droite. ● 3D→ 2D (désactivé / activé) : permet d'afficher uniquement l'image pour l'œil gauche. N Cette fonction est désactivée lorsque le mode 3D est défini sur " " ou sur " ". ● Optimisation 3D (-1 ~ +1) : ajuste automatiquement l'image pour offrir un effet 3D optimal. Français◀ ▶ Résolution prise en charge (16:9 uniquement) ● HDMI Source Résolution Fréquence (Hz) / 1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 25 / 29.97 / 30 / 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz Frame Packing 1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 25 / 29.97 / 30 Hz Français◀ ▶ ● Composant & DTV Source Résolution Fréquence (Hz) Composant 1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 25 / 29.97 / 30 / 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz DTV 1280 x 720p 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 50 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 25 Hz ● Vidéos / Photos (dans AllShare Play) Reportez-vous à "Formats de sous-titres et de fichiers AllShare Play pris en charge" dans la section Autres informations. Français◀ ▶ Visionnage d'une image 3D ● Méthode 1 N Selon le format de l'image source, certains modes 3D peuvent ne pas être disponibles. N Pour regarder la TV en 3D, mettez lunettes 3D, puis appuyez sur bouton mise en marche. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton MENU, utilisez le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Image, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. 2. Utilisez le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner 3D, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. Français◀ ▶ 3. Utilisez le bouton ▲ ou ▼ pour sélectionner Mode 3D, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. 4. A l'aide des boutons ◄ ou ►, sélectionnez le Mode 3D de l'image à visualiser. ● Méthode 2 1. Appuyez sur le bouton W. Vous pouvez alors visionner l'image en 3D. 2. Pour modifier les options 3D (telles que Perspective 3D), appuyez sur le bouton MENU, puis sélectionnez Image. 3. Accédez à l'étape 3 de la "Méthode 1" et suivez les instructions à partir de ce point. N Pour quitter le mode 3D, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton W. Français◀ ▶ Avant d'utiliser la fonction 3D... N REMARQUE ● Le 3D Mode est automatiquement défini sur Arrêt lors de l'accès aux fonctions AllShare Play ou e-Manual. ● Le 3D Mode est défini automatiquement sur la valeur de configuration mémorisée en cas de changement de la source d'entrée. ● Certaines fonctions Image sont désactivées en mode 3D. ● Il se peut que les lunettes actives 3D d'un modèle antérieur de Samsung (de type IR) ou d'autres fabricants ne soient pas prises en charge. ● Lors de la mise en marche initiale du téléviseur, l'optimisation de l'écran 3D peut prendre quelques instants. Français◀ ▶ ● En cas de proximité avec un autre appareil 3D ou électronique, il est possible que les lunettes actives 3D ne fonctionnent pas correctement. En cas de problème, placez les autres appareils électroniques le plus loin possible des lunettes actives 3D. ● Veillez à rester dans l'angle de visualisation et à une distance de visualisation du téléviseur optimale lorsque vous regardez des images 3D. Sinon, vous risquez de ne pas pouvoir profiter des effets 3D attendus. ● La distance de visualisation idéale doit correspondre à au moins trois fois la hauteur de l'écran. Nous recommandons à l'utilisateur de s'asseoir de sorte que ses yeux soient au même niveau que l'écran. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Utilisation d'Explore 3D pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 O MENUm → Assistance → Accueil contenu → ENTERE Appuyez sur le bouton CONTENT pour sélectionner Explore 3D. Vous pouvez regarder les contenus 3D via Explore 3D. N Commencez par configurer votre réseau. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de la fonction Config. du réseau, reportez-vous à la section "Paramètres réseau". N La fonction Explore 3D est susceptible de ne pas être disponible dans toutes les régions. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Utilisation du contenu multimedia Profitez des photos, des fichiers musicaux et des films enregistrés sur un périphérique de stockage de masse USB de la classe MSC. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton CONTENT pour sélectionner Media Play / AllShare Play pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 . 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲/▼ afin de sélectionner le menu de votre choix (Vidéos, Photos, Musique), puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲/▼ pour sélectionner le périphérique de votre choix et appuyez ensuite sur ENTERE. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Connexion d'un périphérique USB 1. Allumez votre téléviseur. 2. Connectez un périphérique USB contenant des photos ou des fichiers musicaux au port USB sur le côté du téléviseur. 3. Lorsqu'un périphérique USB est connecté au téléviseur, une fenêtre contextuelle s'ouvre. Vous pouvez sélectionner directement Vidéos, Photos ou Musique. N Il se peut que le fonctionnement ne soit pas correct avec des fichiers multimédia sans licence. N Liste des choses à savoir avant d'utiliser le contenu multimedia ● Le protocole MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) n'est pas pris en charge. ● Le système de fichiers prend en charge les formats NTFS (lecture seule), FAT16 et FAT32. ● Il est possible que certains types d'appareils photo numériques et de périphériques audio USB ne soient pas compatibles avec ce téléviseur. Français◀ ▶ ● Media Contents ne prend en charge que les périphériques de stockage de masse USB. Ceux-ci sont dédiés aux périphériques de transport de masse uniquement. Il s'agit notamment des clés USB et lecteurs de cartes Flash (les concentrateurs USB ne sont pas pris en charge). Les périphériques doivent être connectés directement au port USB du téléviseur. ● Avant de connecter l'appareil au téléviseur, sauvegardez vos fichiers afin d'éviter qu'ils ne soient endommagés ou que des données ne soient perdues. SAMSUNG ne saurait, en aucun cas, être tenu responsable de la perte de données ou de l'endommagement d'un fichier de données. ● Le disque dur connecté au port USB n'est pas pris en charge. ● Ne déconnectez pas le périphérique USB en cours de chargement. ● Plus la résolution de l'image est élevée, plus le temps d'affichage à l'écran sera long. ● La résolution JPEG maximale prise en charge est de 15360 x 8640 pixels. Français◀ ▶ ● Pour les fichiers non pris en charge ou endommagés, le message "Not Supported File Format" s'affiche. ● Les fichiers MP3 avec gestion des droits numériques (DRM) téléchargés à partir d'un site payant ne peuvent pas être lus. La technologie DRM (Gestion des droits numériques) prend en charge la création de contenu, la distribution et la gestion intégrales du contenu (par exemple, la protection des droits et des intérêts des fournisseurs de contenu, la prévention de la copie illégale du contenu), ainsi que la gestion de la facturation et des règlements. ● Un périphérique USB nécessitant beaucoup de puissance (plus de 500 mA ou 5 V) ne sera peut-être pas pris en charge. ● Si le téléviseur ne reçoit aucun signal d'entrée pendant la période configurée sous l'option Temps protection auto, l'économiseur d'écran s'active. ● Le mode d'économie d'énergie de certains disques durs externes peut être désactivé automatiquement lors d'une connexion au téléviseur. Français◀ ▶ ● Si un câble d'extension USB est utilisé, il se peut que le périphérique USB ne soit pas reconnu ou que les fichiers qui y sont stockés ne soient pas lus. ● Si un périphérique USB connecté au téléviseur n'est pas reconnu, si la liste des fichiers qui y sont stockés est altérée ou si un fichier de la liste est illisible, connectez le périphérique en question à l'ordinateur, formatez le périphérique et vérifiez la connexion. ● Si un fichier supprimé depuis le PC apparaît encore lors de l'utilisation du contenu multimedia, utilisez la fonction "Vider la Corbeille" de l'ordinateur pour supprimer définitivement ce fichier. ● Le contenu multimedia prend uniquement en charge le format JPEG séquentiel. ● Les fonctions de recherche de scène et de miniature ne sont pas prises en charge dans l'option Vidéos. ● Si le nombre de fichiers et dossiers enregistrés sur un périphérique de stockage USB est supérieur à environ 4 000, certains peuvent ne pas apparaître et certains dossiers sont susceptibles de ne pas pouvoir être ouverts. Français◀ ▶ Déconnexion d'un périphérique USB ● Méthode 1 : à l'aide du bouton SOURCE. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton SOURCE. 2. Sélectionnez le périphérique USB souhaité, puis appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Le menu Outils apparaît. 3. Sélectionnez Retirer le périphérique USB en toute sécurité, puis attendez jusqu'à ce que le périphérique USB sélectionné soit déconnecté. Vous pouvez retirer le périphérique USB du téléviseur. Français◀ ▶ ● Méthode 2 : à l'aide de l'écran d'accueil Media Play / AllShare Play pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 . 1. Accédez à l'écran d'accueil Media Play / AllShare Play pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 . 2. Sélectionnez une catégorie, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. 3. Sélectionnez le périphérique USB souhaité, puis appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Le menu Outils apparaît. 4. Sélectionnez Retirer le périphérique USB en toute sécurité, puis attendez jusqu'à ce que le périphérique USB sélectionné soit déconnecté. Vous pouvez retirer le périphérique USB du téléviseur. N Pour retirer un périphérique USB du téléviseur, nous recommandons d'utiliser la fonction Retirer le périphérique USB en toute sécurité. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Connexion à l'ordinateur par le biais du réseau pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 Vous pouvez lire les images, la musique et les vidéos enregistrées sur votre ordinateur à l'aide d'une connexion réseau en mode AllShare Play sur votre téléviseur. N Le stockage Web et la connectivité réseau à distance ne sont pas disponibles. N Si vous souhaitez utiliser la fonction AllShare Play pour lire sur votre téléviseur des fichiers enregistrés sur votre PC, vous devez télécharger "AllShare PC Software" et le manuel utilisateur sur le site Web "www. samsung.com". 1. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de votre réseau, reportez-vous à la section "Connexion réseau". – Nous recommandons de placer le téléviseur et l'ordinateur sur le même sous-réseau. Les 3 premières parties de l’adresse IP du téléviseur et de l’ordinateur doivent être les mêmes. Seule la dernière partie (adresse de l’hôte) doit être modifiée. (par exemple, Adresse IP : 123.456.789.**) Français◀ ▶ 2. A l'aide d'un câble réseau, connectez le modem externe et l'ordinateur sur lequel le programme AllShare PC Software sera installé. – Vous pouvez connecter directement le téléviseur à un ordinateur sans passer par un routeur. N Fonctions non prises en charge lors de la connexion à un ordinateur via un réseau : ● Fonctions Musique de fond activ. et Paramètres de musique de fond. ● Le bouton �(Retour arrière) ou µ (Avance rapide) pendant la lecture d'un film. N Les sous-titres intégrés multi-audio DivX DRM ne sont pas pris en charge. N AllShare PC Software doit être autorisé par le pare-feu de l'ordinateur. Français◀ ▶ N Lors de l'utilisation du mode AllShare Play sur une connexion réseau, selon les fonctions du serveur fourni : ● La méthode de tri peut varier. ● Il se peut que le bouton � (Retour arrière), µ (Avance rapide) ou � (Pause) ne fonctionne pas suivant les informations de contenu. N Si la vidéo est saccadée lors de la lecture sur un réseau sans fil, nous vous recommandons d’utiliser un réseau câblé. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Affichage Accédez au fichier souhaité à l'aide des boutons ◄/►/▲/▼, puis appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE ou �(Lecture). L'écran peut changer en fonction du mode d'accès. �µ Autre page E Lecture T Outils R Retour Information: AllShare Play / Vidéos / SUM / 500 Days of... .avi 1/15 Vous pouvez vérifier le nom du périphérique, le mode de contenu, le nom du dossier/fichier et la page. Information: Vous pouvez vérifier le nom, la taille et la date de création du fichier sélectionné. Boutons d'opération: - ELecture: lit le fichier sélectionné. - T Outils: affiche le menu d'options. - R Retour: permet de revenir à l'étape précédente. - �µ/b{ Autre page: permet d'accéder à la page précédente ou suivante. Section Liste des fichiers: vous pouvez vérifier les fichiers et groupes classés par catégorie. * L'image affichée peut varier en fonction du modèle. Français◀ ▶ ■ Vidéos Lecture d'une vidéo 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄/►/▲/▼ afin de sélectionner la vidéo de votre choix dans la liste des fichiers. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE ou �(Lecture). – Le nom du fichier sélectionné s'affiche en haut de l'écran avec le temps de lecture. – Si les informations sur la durée de la vidéo sont inconnues, la durée de lecture et la barre de progression ne s'affichent pas. – Pendant la lecture d'une vidéo, vous pouvez effectuer une recherche à l'aide des boutons ◄ et ►. – Vous pouvez utiliser les boutons (�) (Retour rapide) et (µ) (Avancerapide) lors de la lecture. N Ce mode vous permet de profiter des séquences vidéo d'un jeu vidéo, mais pas de jouer au jeu proprement dit. Français◀ ▶ ● Formats de sous-titres pris en charge – Externe Nom Extension de fichier MPEG-4 timed text .ttxt SAMI .smi SubRip .srt SubViewer .sub Micro DVD .sub ou .txt SubStation Alpha .ssa Advanced SubStation Alpha .ass Powerdivx .psb – Interne Nom Conteneur Format Xsub AVI Format image SubStation Alpha MKV Format texte Advanced SubStation Alpha MKV Format texte SubRip MKV Format texte MPEG-4 Timed text MP4 Format texte Français◀ ▶ ● Formats vidéo pris en charge Extension de fichier Conteneur Codec vidéo Résolution Fréquence d'images (i/s) Débit binaire (Mbit/s) Codec audio *.avi *.mkv *.asf *.wmv *.mp4 *.3gp *.vro *.mpg *.mpeg *.ts *.tp *.trp *.mov *.flv *.vob *.svi *.divx AVI MKV ASF MP4 3GP VRO VOB PS TS DivX 3.11/4.x/5.x/6.x 1920 x 1080 6~30 30 AC3 LPCM ADPCM (IMA, MS) AAC HE-AAC WMA DD+ MPEG (MP3) DTS Core G.711(A-Law, μ-Law) MPEG4 SP/ASP H.264 BP/MP/HP Motion JPEG 640 x 480 8 Window Media Video v9 1920 x 1080 30 MPEG2 MPEG1 Français◀ ▶ Autres restrictions ● Le contenu vidéo ne sera pas lu, ou ne sera pas lu correctement, si une erreur est présente dans le contenu ou sur le suport. ● Il se peut que le son ou la vidéo ne fonctionne pas si le contenu présente un débit binaire/une fréquence d'images standard supérieur au taux d'images par seconde repris dans le tableau ci-dessus. ● Si une erreur survient dans la table d'index, la fonction de recherche (saut) n'est pas prise en charge. ● Lors de la lecture de la vidéo via le réseau, il se peut que celle-ci échoue en fonction de l'état du réseau. Si vous lisez une vidéo sur une connexion réseau, des saccades risquent d'apparaître. pour les téléviseurs LED de la série 6 ● Certains périphériques USB/caméra numériques peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec le lecteur. Français◀ ▶ Décodeur vidéo Décodeur audio ● Prise en charge jusqu'à H.264 niveau 4.1 ● Les normes H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4 et AVCHD ne sont pas prises en charge. ● GMC n'est pas pris en charge. ● Le format WMA 10 Pro prend en charge jusqu'à 5.1 canaux. ● WMA Lossless audio n'est pas pris en charge. Français◀ ▶ ■ Photos Visualisation d'une photo (ou d'un diaporama) 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄/►/▲/▼ afin de sélectionner la photo souhaitée dans la liste des fichiers. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE. N Pendant le diaporama, tous les fichiers de la liste sont affichés dans l'ordre. N Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton � (Lecture) dans la liste des fichiers, le diaporama démarre immédiatement. N Pendant le diaporama, vous pouvez régler la vitesse de défilement à l'aide du bouton � (REW) ou µ (FF). N Le bouton ◄ ou ► vous permet d'accéder à un autre fichier. N Des fichiers musicaux peuvent être lus automatiquement pendant le diaporama si l'option Musique de fond activ. est définie. Français◀ ▶ ● Formats de photo pris en charge Extension de fichier Type Résolution *.jpg JPEG 15360 X 8640 *.bmp BMP 1920 X 1080 *.mpo MPO 15360 X 8640 Français◀ ▶ ■ Musique Lecture d'un fichier musical 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ◄/►/▲/▼ pour sélectionner le fichier musical de votre choix dans la liste des fichiers. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton ENTERE ou �(Lecture). – Vous pouvez utiliser les boutons � (Retour rapide) et µ (Avancerapide) lors de la lecture. N Seuls les fichiers musicaux dont l'extension est prise en charge sont affichés. Les autres extensions de fichier ne sont pas affichées, même si elles sont enregistrées sur le même périphérique USB. N Si le son est déformé lors de la lecture des fichiers musicaux, réglez l'option Egaliseur dans le menu Son. (Un fichier musical surmodulé peut être à l'origine d'un problème sonore.) Français◀ ▶ N Utilisation du menu de lecture – Appuyez sur le bouton ◄/► pour sélectionner le menu de votre choix. ● Lecture / Pause: vous pouvez lancer ou arrêter une musique. Une autre solution consiste à utiliser la touche � ou � de la télécommande. ● Mode Répétition (Arrêt / 1 musique / Tous): vous pouvez lire des fichiers musicaux en boucle. ● Mode aléatoire (Arrêt / Activé): vous pouvez lire la musique de manière aléatoire. ● Mode Son (Standard / Musique / Cinéma / Voix claire / Amplifier): vous pouvez régler les paramètres sonores. Français◀ ▶ ● Formats musicaux pris en charge Extension de fichier Type Codec Remarque *.mp3 MPEG Niveau audio MPEG1 3 *.m4a *.mpa *.aac *.3ga MPEG4 AAC *.flac FLAC FLAC • La fonction de recherche n'est pas prise en charge. Prise en charge jusqu'à 2 canaux. *.ogg OGG Vorbis • Prise en charge jusqu'à 2 canaux. *.wma WMA WMA • Le format WMA 10 Pro prend en charge jusqu'à 5.1 canaux. Français◀ ▶ ❑ Contenu multimedia - Fonctions supplémentaires Lecture des fichiers vidéo/audio/photos sélectionnés 1. Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS dans chaque écran principal et sélectionnez ensuite Lire sélection. 2. Sélectionnez les fichiers de votre choix. N Une marque de sélection s'affiche à gauche des fichiers sélectionnés. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ► pour sélectionner Lecture. N Vous pouvez sélectionner ou désélectionner tous les fichiers en appuyant sur Sélectionner tout / Tout désélectionner. Définition de la langue d'encodage dans Musique Définissez la langue d'encodage si le texte n'est pas pris en charge. 1. Appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS dans l'écran principal Musique et sélectionnez Encodage. 2. Sélectionnez la langue d'encodage souhaitée. Français◀ ▶ Menu d'options pour la lecture de Vidéos/Musique/Photos Pendant la lecture d'un fichier, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Catégorie Opération Vidéos Photos Musique Liste des vidéos / Liste des photos Vous pouvez aller sur l'écran de la liste des fichiers. c c Lire depuis le début Vous pouvez redémarrer un fichier vidéo depuis le début. c Recherche titre Vous pouvez directement déplacer l'autre fichier. c Recher. temps Vous pouvez rechercher la vidéo à l'aide des boutons ◄et ► toutes les minutes ou en entrant directement le numéro correspondant. N Cette fonction peut ne pas être prise en charge, en fonction de la source. c Mode Répétition Vous pouvez lire des fichiers films en boucle. c Français◀ ▶ Catégorie Opération Vidéos Photos Musique Format de l'image Vous pouvez régler le format de l'image selon vos besoins. c Mode Image Vous pouvez régler les paramètres d'image. c c Mode Son Vous pouvez régler les paramètres sonores. c c Langue audio Vous pouvez modifier la langue audio si la vidéo en comporte plusieurs. c Sous-titres Vous pouvez activer/désactiver les sous-titres. c Param. de sous-titre Vous pouvez visionner la vidéo avec des sous-titres. Cette fonction n'est active que lors de la lecture de fichiers de type streaming prenant en charge plusieurs formats audio. c Français◀ ▶ Catégorie Opération Vidéos Photos Musique Lancer le diaporama / Arrêter le diaporama Vous pouvez lancer ou arrêter un diaporama. c Vit. diaporama Vous pouvez sélectionner la vites